G

C
655, 755, 855, 955,

D
756 and 856 Compact
Utility Tractors

TECHNICAL MANUAL
655, 755, 855, 955, 756 and 856
Compact
Utility Tractors
TM1360 (01JUN96) English

0 1 J U N 9 6

John Deere
Lawn & Grounds Care Division
TM1360 (01JUN96)
T M 1 3 6 0

LITHO IN U.S.A.
ENGLISH
I Introduction
FOREWORD

This manual is written for an experienced technician. FOS MANUALS-REFERENCE

Essential tools required in performing certain service
work are identified in this manual and are TECHNICAL MANUALS-MACHINE SERVICE
recommended for use.
COMPONENT MANUALS-COMPONENT SERVICE
LIVE WITH SAFETY: Read the safety messages in
the introduction of this manual and the cautions Fundamentals of Service (FOS) Manuals cover basic
presented throughout the text of the manual. theory of operation, fundamentals of troubleshooting,
general maintenance, and basic type of failures and
A This is the safety-alert symbol. When you see their causes. FOS Manuals are for training new
. . t~is symbol on the machine or in this manual, personnel and for reference by experienced
be alert to the potential for personal injury. technicians.

Technical manuals are divided in two parts: repair Technical Manuals are concise guides for specific
and diagnostics. Repair sections tell how to repair the machines. Technical manuals are on-the-job guides
components. Diagnostic sections help you identify the containing only the vital information needed for
majority of routine failures quickly. diagnosis, analysis, testing, and repair..

Information is organized in groups for the various Component Technical.Manuals are concise service
components requiring service instruction. At the guides for specific components. Component technical
beginning of each group are summary listings of all manuals are written as stand-alone manuals covering
applicable essential tools, service equipment and multiple machine applications.
tools, other materials needed to do the job, service
parts kits, specifications, wear tolerances, and torque NOTE: The 756 and 856 tractors are identical to the
values. 755 and 855 tractors; therefore, all information
pertaining to the 755 also pertains to the 756
Binders, binder labels, and tab sets can be ordered and the same is true for the 855 and the 856
by John Deere dealers direct from the John Deere tractors. The 655, 756 and 856 tractors were
Distribution Service Center. all discontinued before the late model 755
and 855 tractors and the new 955 tractors
This manual is part of a total product support were produced. Therefore, any late model
program. references do not include the 655, 756, and
856 tractors.

MX,TM1360,IFC 19160CT91

191091
 Contents
SECTION 10-GENERAL INFORMATION SECTION aO-MISCELLANEOUS REPAIR
Group 05-Safety Group 15-0perator's Seat
Group 1O-Repair Specifications Group 20-European Roll-Gard
Group 15-Repair Information Group 25-German Rear Hitch
Group 20-Fuels, Lubricants, and Coolants Group 30-3-Point Hitch
Group 25-Serial Number Locations

SECTION 210-MACHINE OPERATIONAL

SECTION 20-DIESEL ENGINE REPAIR CHECKOUT PROCEDURE
Group 05-Yanmar Diesel Engine Repair Group 05-Machine Operational Checkout
Group 10-Remove and Install Oil Cooler Procedure
Group 15-Remove and Install Radiator
Group 20-Remove and Install Diesel Engine
SECTION 220-ENGINE/FUEL OPERATION AND
TESTS
SECTION 30-FUEL AND AIR REPAIR Group 05-Engine Systems Operational Checkout
Group 05-Fuel Transfer Pump Procedure
Group 10-Fuel Tank Group 10-Engine System Diagnosis
Group 15-Fuel Tank Tube and Sender
Group 20-Air Cleaner
SECTION 240-ELECTRICAL OPERATION
AND TESTS
SECTION 40-ALTERNATOR REPAIR Group 05-Electrical System Checkout
Group 05-Alternator Repair Specifications Group 10-Electrical System Diagnosis
Group 10-Alternator Installation Group 15-Theory of Operation

SECTION 50-POWER TRAIN REPAIR SECTION 250-POWER TRAIN OPERATION

Group 05-Hydrostatic Transmission AND TESTS
Group 10-Transaxle Group 05-Power Train System Checkout
Group 15-Final Drives Group 1O-Power Train Tests and Adjustments
Group 20-Mechanical Front Wheel Drive Group 15-Theory of Operation
(MFWD)
Group 25-Power Train Gears and Shafts
Group 30-Speed Control Linkage SECTION 2GO-STEERING AND BRAKE
OPERATION AND TESTS
Group 05-Steering and Brakes System Checkout
SECTION GO-STEERING AND BRAKES REPAIR Group 10-Steering and Brakes Tests and
Group 05-Standard Front Axle Adjustments
Group 1O-Steering Valve Group 15-Theory of Operation
Group 15-Brake Linkage

SECTION 270-HYDRAULIC OPERATION

SECTION 70-HYDRAULICS REPAIR AND TESTS
Group 05-Hydraulic Pump Group 05-Hydraulic System Checkout
Group 10-Flow Divider and Selective Control Group 1O-Hydraulic System Tests and
Valves (SCV's) Adjustments
Group 15-Rockshaft Group 15-Theory of Operation
Group 20-Hydraulic Hoses
INDEX

All information, illustrations and specifications in this manual are based

on the latest information available at the time of publication. The right is
reserved to make changes at any time without notice.
COPYRIGHT1996
TM 1360-19-01Jun 96
DEERE & COMPANY
Moline, Illinois
All rights reserved
A John Deere ILLUSTRUCTION Manual
Previous Editions
Copyrighl 1991, 1990, 1986 Deere & Company
Contents

ii
 Section 10
General Information
Contents
Page Page

Group OS-Safety Group 2S-Serial Number Locations

Safety Items ......................... 10-05-1 Product Serial Number ................ 10-25-1
Engine Serial Number ................. 10-25-1
Group 10-Repair Specifications Transaxle Serial Number .............. 10-25-1
General Tractor Specifications ........... 10-10-1 Mower Deck Serial Number ............ 10-25-1

Group 1S-Repair Information

Metric Fastener Torque Values ........... 10-15-1
Inch Fastener Torque Values ............ 10-15-2
O-Ring Face Seal Fittings .............. 10-15-3
O-Ring Boss Fittings .................. 10-15-4

Group 20-Fuels, Lubricants, and Coolants

Diesel Fuel-North America ............. 10-20-1
Diesel Fuel Lubricity-North America ..... 10-20-1
Diesel Fuel Storage-North America ...... 10-20-1
Diesel Fuel-Europe .................. 10-20-2
Diesel Fuel Lubricity-Europe ........... 10-20-2
Diesel Fuel Storage-Europe ........... 10-20-2
Engine Oil-North America ............. 10-20-3
Engine Oil-Europe ................... 10-20-4
Break-in Engine Oil-North America ...... 10-20-5
Break-in Engine Oil-Europe ............ 10-20-6
Hydrostatic Transmission and
Hydraulic Oil- North America .......... 10-20-7
Hydrostatic Transmission and
Hydraulic Oil- Europe ............... 10-20-8
Gear Case Oil (MFWD)-North America ... 10-20-9
Gear Case Oil (MFWD)-Europe ........ 10-20-10
Grease-North America ............... 10-20-11
Grease-Europe .................... 10-20-12
North America
Alternative Lubricants ................. 10-20-13
Synthetic Lubricants .................. 10-20-13
Lubricant Storage .................... 10-20-13
Mixing of Lubricants .................. 10-20-13
Oil Filters .......................... 10-20-13
Europe
Alternative Lubricants ................. 10-20-14
Synthetic Lubricants .................. 10-20-14
Lubricant Storage .................... 10-20-14
Mixing of Lubricants .................. 10-20-14
Oil Filters .......................... 10-20-14
Diesel Engine Coolant-North America ... 10-20-15
Diesel Engine Coolant-Europe ........ 10-20-16

10-1
Contents

10-2 191091
 Group 05
Safety

HANDLE FLUIDS SAFELY-AVOID FIRES

When you work around fuel, do not smoke or work near

heaters or other fire hazards.

Store flammable fluids away from fire hazards. Do not

incinerate or puncture pressurized containers.

Make sure machine is clean of trash, grease, and debris.

Do not store oily rags; they can ignite and burn

spontaneously.

1904JUN90

PREVENT BATTERY EXPLOSIONS

Keep sparks, lighted matches, and open flame away

from the top of battery. Battery gas can explode.

Never check battery charge by placing a metal object

across the posts. Use a volt-meter or hydrometer.

Do not charge a frozen battery; it may explode. Warm

battery to 16C (60F).
..-
0

'"
en
f-
OX,SPARKS 1904JUN90

PREPARE FOR EMERGENCIES

Be prepared if a fire starts.

Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher handy.

00
00
(D
::::J
Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance ..:
co
service, hospital, and fire department near your '"2:
~
telephone.

c;;
'"
en
f-
OX,FIRE2 -19-04JUN90

10-05-1 191091
 Safety

PREVENT ACID BURNS

Sulfuric acid in battery electrolyte is poisonous. It is

strong enough to burn skin, eat holes in clothing, and
cause blindness if splashed into eyes.

Avoid the hazard by:

1. Filling batteries in a well-ventilated area.
2. Wearing eye protection and rubber gloves.
3. Avoiding breathing fumes when electrolyte is added.
4. Avoiding spilling or dripping electrolyte.
5. Use proper jump start procedure.

If you spill acid on yourself:

1. Flush your skin with water.
2. Apply baking soda or lime to help neutralize the acid.
3. Flush your eyes with water for 10-15 minutes. Get
medical attention immediately.

If acid is swallowed:
1. Drink large amounts of water or milk.
2. Then drink milk of magnesia, beaten eggs, or
vegetable oil.
3. Get medical attention immediately.

-19-04JUN90

10-05-2 191091
 Safety

AVOID HIGH-PRESSURE FLUIDS

Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin

causing serious injury.

Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before

disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all
connections before applying pressure.

Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect

hands and body from high pressure fluids.

If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any

fluid injected into the skin must be surgically removed
within a few hours or gangrene may result. Doctors
unfamiliar with this type of injury should reference a
knowledgeable medical source. Such information is
available from Deere & Company Medical Department in
Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.

PARK MACHINE SAFELY

Before working on the machine:

Lower all equipment to the ground.
Stop the engine and remove the key.
Disconnect the battery ground strap .
Hang a "DO NOT OPERATE" tag in operator station.

DX,PARK 1904JUN90

10-05-3 191091
 Safety

SUPPORT MACHINE PROPERLY

Always lower the attachment or implement to the ground

before you work on the machine. If you must work on a
lifted machine or attachment, securely support the
machine or attachment.

Do not support the machine on cinder blocks, hollow

tiles, or props that may crumble under continuous load.
Do not work under a machine that is supported solely by
a jack. Follow recommended procedures in this manual.

WEAR PROTECTIVE CLOTHING

Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment

appropriate to the job.

Prolonged exposure to loud noise can cause impairment

or loss of hearing.

Wear a suitable hearing protective device such as

earmuffs or earplugs to protect against objectionable or
uncomfortable loud noises.

Operating equipment safely requires the full attention of

the operator. Do not wear radio or music headphones
while operating machine.

DX,WEAR -19-10SEP90

SERVICE MACHINES SAFELY

Tie long hair behind your head. Do not wear a necktie,

scarf, loose clothing, or necklace when you work near
machine tools or moving parts. If these items were to
get caught, severe injury could result.

Remove rings and other jewelry to prevent electrical

shorts and entanglement in moving parts.

DX,LOOSE -19-04JUN90

10-05-4 191091
 Safety

WORK IN VENTILATED AREA

Engine exhaust fumes can cause sickness or death. If it

is necessary to run an engine in an enclosed area,
remove the exhaust fumes from the area with an
exhaust pipe extension.

If you do not have an exhaust pipe extension, open the

doors and get outside air into the area.

ILLUMINATE WORK AREA SAFELY

Illuminate your work area adequately but safely. Use a

portable safety light for working inside or under the
machine. Make sure the bulb is enclosed by a wire cage.
The hot filament of an accidentally broken bulb can
ignite spilled fuel or oil.

OX,LlGHT 1904JUN90

REPLACE SAFETY SIGNS

Replace missing or damaged safety signs. See the

machine operator's manual for correct safety sign
placement.

OX,SIGNS1 19-04JUN90

USE PROPER LIFTING EQUIPMENT

Lifting heavy components incorrectly can cause severe

injury or machine damage.

Follow recommended procedure for removal and

installation of components in the manual.

OX,LlFT -19-04JUN90

10-05-5 191091
 Safety

KEEP ROPS INSTALLED PROPERLY

Make certain all parts are reinstalled correctly if the

roll-over protective structure (ROPS) is loosened or
removed for any reason. Tighten mounting bolts to
proper torque.

The protection offered by ROPS will be impaired if

ROPS is subjected to structural damage, is involved in
an overturn incident, or is in any way altered by welding,
bending, drilling, or cutting. A damaged ROPS should be
replaced, not reused.

SERVICE TIRES SAFELY

Explosive separation of a tire and rim parts can cause

serious injury or death.

Do not attempt to mount a tire unless you have the

proper equipment and experience to perform the job.

Always maintain the correct tire pressure. Do not inflate

the tires above the recommended pressure. Never weld
or heat a wheel and tire assembly. The heat can cause
an increase in air pressure resulting in a tire explosion.
Welding can structurally weaken or deform the wheel.

When inflating tires, use a clip-on chuck and extension

hose long enough to allow you to stand to one side and
NOT in front of or over the tire assembly. Use a safety
cage if available.

Check wheels for low pressure, cuts, bubbles, damaged

rims or missing lug bolts and nuts.

DX,RIM 1924AUG90

10-05-6 191091
 Safety

AVOID HARMFUL ASBESTOS DUST

Avoid breathing dust that may be generated when

handling components containing asbestos fibers. Inhaled
asbestos fibers may cause lung cancer.

Components in products that may contain asbestos

fibers are brake pads, brake band and lining assemblies,
clutch plates, and some gaskets. The asbestos used in
these components is usually found in a resin or sealed
in some way. Normal handling is not hazardous as long
as airborne dust containing asbestos is not generated.

Avoid creating dust. Never use compressed air for

cleaning. Avoid brushing or grinding material containing
asbestos. When servicing, wear an approved respirator.
A special vacuum cleaner is recommended to clean
asbestos. If not available, apply a mist of oil or water on
the material containing asbestos.

Keep bystanders away from the area.

1915MAR91

WORK IN CLEAN AREA

Before starting a job:

Clean work area and machine.
Make sure you have all necessary tools to do your job.
Have the right parts on hand.

Read all instructions thoroughly; do not attempt
shortcuts.

DX,CLEAN 1904JUN90

10-05-7 191091
 Safety

USE PROPER TOOLS

Use tools appropriate to the work. Makeshift tools and

procedures can create safety hazards.

Use power tools only to loosen threaded parts and

fasteners.

For loosening and tightening hardware, use the correct

size tools. DO NOT use U.S. measurement tools on
metric fasteners. Avoid bodily injury caused by slipping
wrenches.

Use only service parts meeting John Deere

specifications.

DISPOSE OF WASTE PROPERLY

Improperly disposing of waste can threaten the

environment and ecology. Potentially harmful waste used
with John Deere equipment include such items as oil,
fuel, coolant, brake fluid, filters, and batteries.

Use leakproof containers when draining fluids. Do not

use food or beverage containers that may mislead
someone into drinking from them.

Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a drain, or

into any water source.

Air conditioning refrigerants escaping into the air can

damage the Earth's atmosphere. Government regulations
may require a certified air conditioning service center to
recover and recycle used air conditioning refrigerants.

Inquire on the proper way to recycle or dispose of waste

from your local environmental or recycling center, or
from your John Deere dealer.

DX,DRAIN 1909AUG91

10-05-8 191091
 Safety

LIVE WITH SAFETY

Before returning machine to customer, make sure

e

machine is functioning properly, especially the safety
systems. Install all guards and shields.

-SAFETY
live with it
, I

10-05-9 191091
 Safety

10-05-10 191091
 Group 10
Repair Specifications
GENERAL TRACTOR SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM 655 755n56 855/856 955

ENGINE:
Engine Model ............ 3TN66UJ 3TNA72UJ 3TN75RJ 3TN84RJ
Engine Horsepower, Net. .. 16 (11.9 kW) 20 (14.9 kW) 24 (17.9 kW) 33 (24.6 kW)
PTO Horsepower . . . . . .. 10.6 (8.1 kW) 15 (11.2 kW) 19 (14.2 kW) 27 (20.1 kW)
Rated Engine Speed ....... 3200 rpm 3200 rpm 3200 rpm 3200 rpm
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel
Operating Range ....... 1400-3425 rpm 1400-3425 rpm 1400-3425 rpm 1400-3425 rpm
Number of Cylinders. . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3
Displacement ........... 40.2 cu. in. 53.6 cu. in. 60.7 cu. in. 87.3 cu. in.
658 cm 3 879 cm 3 995 cm 3 1430 cm 3
Bore and Stroke ......... 2.59x2.53 in. 2.83x2.83 in. 2.95x2.95 in. 3.31x3.39 in.
(66x64.2 mm) (72x72 mm) (75x75 mm) (84x86 mm)
Compression Ratio ......... 22.4:1 22.3:1 17.8:1 18.0:1
Lubrication .............. Pressured Pressured Pressured Pressured
Cooling System .......... Water-pump Water-pump Water-pump Water-pump
Air Cleaner ............ Dry-Type with Dry-Type with Dry-Type with Dry-Type with
Safety Element Safety Element Safety Element Safety Element
Engine Shutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Key Key Key
Engine Torque at
Rated Speed ............. 35 N-m 45 N-m 58 N-m 73 N-m
(26 Ib-ft) (33Ib-ft) (39 Ib-ft) (54 Ib-ft)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM:
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 volt 12 volt 12 volt 12 volt
Battery Size ......... 491 Cold Cranking 491 Cold Cranking 475 Cold Cranking 475 Cold Cranking
Amps @ -18 0 C Amps @ -18 0 C Amps @ -18 0 C Amps @ -18 0 C
Alternator ................ 35 Amp 35 Amp 35 Amp N/A
40 Amp 40 Amp 40 Amp 40 Amp
Starter Size ............ 1.3 hp (1.0 kW) 1.3 hp (1.0 kW) 1.3 hp (1.0 kW) 1.9 hp (1.4 kW)

FUEL SYSTEM:
Type ................ Indirect Injection Indirect Injection Direct Injection Direct Injection
Injection Pump Type ....... In-line with In-line with In-line with In-line with
Electric Shutoff Electric Shutoff Electric Shutoff Electric Shutoff
Gallon/hr at 75% load
(mowing) .............. Not Available 0.86 0.79 1.4

DRIVE TRAIN:
Transmission Type .... Hydrostatic-2-range Hydrostatic-2-range Hydrostatic-2-range Hydrostatic-2-range
Transaxle Speed
Ranges ................. High/Lo High/Lo High/Lo High/Lo
Number of Speeds ......... Infinite Infinite Infinite Infinite
Final Drive ............... Planetary Planetary Planetary Planetary
Brakes .................. Wet Disk Wet Disk Wet Disk Wet Disk
Steering ....... . . . . . . . . . . Power Power Power Power
Drawbar Tonque Weight
Capacity ............. 675 lb. (306 kg) 675 lb. (306 kg) 675 lb. (306 kg) 800 lb. (363 kg)

10-10-1
 Repair Specifications/General Specifications

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS-CONTINUED
ITEM 655 755n56 855/856 955

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM:
Type of System ........ , Open Center Open Center Open Center Open Center
Working Pressure ......... 2050 psi 2050 psi 2050 psi 2500 psi
(14135 kPa) (14135 kPa) (14135 kPa) (17240 kPa)
Pump Type ............ Gerotor Gear Gerotor Gear Gerotor Gear Gerotor Gear
Pump Capacity ............ 4 gpm 5.6 gpm 5.6 gpm 7.2 gpm
(0.25 Us) (0.35 Us) (0.35 Us) (0.45 Us)
3-PT. Hitch Type ....... Cat. 1 (Standard) Cat. 1 (Standard) Cat. 1 Cat. 1
Hitch Lift Capacity
(24 in. behind link arms)
Early Models. . . . . . . . . . . . 785 Ibs. 7851bs. 7851bs. 9571bs.
(357 kg) (357 kg) (357 kg) (434 kg)
Late Models or Retrofit ...... NIA SN 180250- SN 180450- SN 180525-
N/A 10051bs. 10051bs. 1177lbs.
(456 kg) (456 kg) (534 kg)
Lift Control Type . . . . . . . .. Position Position Position Position

PTO:
Type ................. Live Independent Live Independent Live Independent Live Independent
Speed (PTO rpm at 3200
engine rpm-full load):
Mid (1:1 gear ratio) ....... 2100 rpm 2100 rpm 2100 rpm 2100 rpm
Rear (1:3 gear ratio) ...... 540 rpm 540 rpm 540 rpm 540 rpm
Clutch .................. Hydraulic Hydraulic Hydraulic Hydraulic
Multi-Disk Multi-Disk Multi-Disk Multi-Disk
Brake .................. Hydraulically Hydraulically Hydraulically Hydraulically
Controlled Controlled Controlled Controlled

MOWER BLADE TIP SPEED

(at 3200 engine rpm full load):
50 Inch Mower. ........ , 15,371 ftlmin N/A N/A N/A
(4688 m/min)
1:1.04 Gear Ratio ..... Spindle rpm 3389 N/A N/A N/A

60 Inch Mower. ............. N/A 15,471 ftlmin 15,471 ftlmin 15,471 ftlmin
(4719 m/min) (4719 m/min) (4719 m/min)
1:1 Gear Ratio ............. N/A Spindle rpm 2883 Spindle rpm 2883 Spindle rpm 2883

72 Inch Mower. ............. N/A 15,167 ftlmin 15,167 ftlmin 15,167 ftlmin
(4626 m/min) (4626 m/min) (4626 m/min)
1:1 Gear Ratio ............. N/A Spindle rpm 2321 Spindle rpm 2321 Spindle rpm 2321

261 Inch Mower ............. N/A 14,465 ftlmin 14,465 ftlmin 14,465 ftlmin
(4412 m/min) (4412 m/min) (4412 m/min)
1:3 Gear Ratio ............. NIA Spindle rpm 2695 Spindle rpm 2695 Spindle rpm 2695

272 Inch Mower. ............ N/A 14,601 ftlmin 14,601 ftlmin 14,601 ftlmin
(4453 m/min) (4453 m/min) (4453 m/min)
1:3 Gear Ratio ............. N/A Spindle rpm 2234 Spindle rpm 2234 Spindle rpm 2234

10-10-2
 Repair Specifications/General Specifications

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS-CONTINUED
ITEM 655 755n56 855/856 955

FLUID CAPACITIES:
Fuel Tank ........... 3.95 U.S. gal (15 L) 4.4 U.S. gal (16.7 L) 6.6 U.S. gal (25 L) 6.6 U.S. gal (25 L)
Cooling System ........ 4 U.S. qt. (3.8 L) 4 U.S. qt. (3.8 L) 4.8 U.S. qt. (4.5 L) 4.8 U.S. qt. (4.5 L)
Crankcase (w/filter) . .... 2.5 U.S. qt. (2.4 L) 2.86 U.S. qt. (2.7 L) 4.1 U.S. qt. (3.9 L) 4.4 U.S. qt. (4.2 L)
Transmission and
Hydraulic System .... 4.5 U.S. gal. (17 L) 4.5 U.S. gal. (17 L) 4.5 U.S. gal. (17 L) 4.5 U.S. gal. (17 L)
MFWD Gear Case .... 2.25 U.S. qt. (2.13 L) 2.25 U.S. qt. (2.13 L) 2.25 U.S. qt. (2.13 L) 3.5 U.S. qt. (3.3 L)

WEIGHT (includes fuel, oil, coolant and R-1 tires):

2WD ................... 1584 Ibs. 17001bs. 17901bs. N/A
(718 kg) (771 kg) (812 kg)
MFWD .................. 1680 Ibs. 18351bs. 18701bs. 19901bs.
(762 kg) (832 kg) (848 kg) (903 kg)

SERVICE INTERVALS:
Engine
Valve Adjustment ......... 300 Hours 300 Hours 300 Hours 300 Hours
Primary Filter ............ 400 Hours 400 Hours 400 Hours 400 Hours
or every two years

Secondary Filter. . . . . .. Every two years Every two years Every two years Every two years
or when every third primary filter is installed

GROUND SPEEDS (at full engine rpm):

Forward High Range ...... 0-10.0 mph 0-10.6 mph 0-11.0 mph 0-11.4 mph
(0-16.1 Klhr) (0-17.1 Klhr) (0-17.7 Klhr) (0-18.3 Klhr)
Forward Lo Range ....... 0-05.4 mph 0-05.8 mph 0-06.0 mph 0-05.1 mph
(0-08.7 Klhr) (0-09.3 Klhr) (0-09.7 Klhr) (0-08.2 Klhr)
Reverse High And Lo ..... 0-05.0 mph 0-05.3 mph 0-05.5 mph 0-05.7 mph
(0-08.1 Klhr) (0-08.5 Klhr) (0-08.9 Klhr) (0-09.2 Klhr)

ENGINE COOLANT HEATER:

Current Draw Current Draw Current Draw Current Draw
400 Watts 400 Watts 400 Watts 400 Watts
SPARK ARRESTER:
Not Available Available Available Available

10-10-3
Repair Specifications/General Specifications

10-10-4 191091
 Group 15
Repair Information
METRIC FASTENER TORQUE VALUES
4.8 8.8 9.8 10.9 12.9
Property
Class
and
Head
@ 0 0 0 Q Q @
~ ~ ~ CJ CBJ ~
Markings

Property 5 10 10 12

@~@ @~@ @~@ @~@

Class
and
Nut
Markings
TS1163

Class 4.8 Class 8.8 or 9.8 Class 10.9 Class 12.9

Lubricated a '" Drya Lubricated a

~" c>~; : / <' , <.
SIZE Nom'; liNt Nom Ib-ft Nom'lb-ft' Nom Ib-ftN*rh Ib-It Nom Ib-ft N~m Ib,ft Nom Ib-ft

4.5 9 p . 5 .. 11 8.5 13 9.5 17 12 15 11.5 19 14.5

M8 12 8:5 15 11 22 ., . 16,p 28 20 32 24 40 30 37 28 47 35

21 43. ,32 55 40 63 47 .... 80 60 75' 55 95 70

M12 40' 29" 50 37 75 ..55 . . 95 70 110 89 140 105 130" 95 165 120

M14 63 47 80 60 '120 '88 i' 150 110175 130 225 165 205 150 260 109

M16 92 f90> 140' 240 175 275 200 350 225 320 240 400 300

M18 135 i! foo i. 175 125 250 375, 275 475 350 '440 325 560 410

M20 180 ;:1.75" 475 350 400 675 500 625 . 460' 800 580
" i'-

M22 260' 1.90 ,,,. 330 250 475725 549 " 925 675 850 625 1075 800

M24 ~30'ii ~50 '.'ii 425 310 .650.,475;; 825 600 i925 615 1150 850 1075 8QO 1350 1000
i

M27 490'" 360'i 625 1350 1000 1700 1250 Hioo' 1150' 2000 1500

M30 675 490 850 625 )309 .:950;1 1650 1200 1850" 1350 2300 1700 2150 1600. 2700 2000
.; .n.)
M33 ~OO; .675 u 1150 850 1750 1300 2200 1650 2500 1850 3150 2350 2900 2150 3700 2750
'i

M36 1150 ~?O ih 1450 1075 2250 1650 2850 2100 3200 2390i 4050 30003750 2750 4750 3500

DO NOT use these hand torque values if a different When bolt and nut combination fasteners are used,
torque value or tightening procedure is given for a torque values should be applied to the NUT instead of
specific application. Torque values listed are for general the bolt head.
use only and include a 1 0% variance factor. Check
tightness of fasteners periodically. DO NOT use air Tighten toothed or serrated-type lock nuts to the full
powered wrenches. torque value.
a "Lubricated" means coated with a lubricant such as
Shear bolts are designed to fail under predetermined engine oil, or fasteners with phosphate and oil coat-
loads. Always replace shear bolts with identical grade. ings. "Dry" means plain or zinc plated (yellow dichro-
Fasteners should be replaced with the same grade. mate - Specification JDS117) without any lubrication.
Make sure fastener threads are clean and that you
Reference: JDS-G200.
properly start thread engagement. This will prevent
them from failing when tightening.

10-15-1
 Repair Information/Metric Cap Screw Torque Values

INCH FASTENER TORQUE VALUES

5 5.1 5.2 8 8.2

e
1 or 2b
SAE

0 Q)~e
Grade
and Head
Markings

SAE
Grade
and Nut
No Marks

No Marks
@
2

@ ~ @ ~
5 * 8

Markings
TS1162

Grade 1 Grade 2b Grade 5, 5.1 or 5.2 Grade 8 or 8.2

L~brj~at~'da Ii;' , Drya I;,ubribateda . Drya (ubricated~ Drya ~ubripa~,eall /; Drya

.. ,"/ith':
SIZE 'N.ih'"
.,.
I":ft"; Nom
: "' .
Ib-ft ~~ll1e,' .Ib-ft.
>$;
~
Nom Ib-ft Nom Ib-ft, Nom Ib-ft N:m'" !P-ft .. ' Nom Ib-ft

.,
'~Z"

1/4 ]:3.;r'~" 2(S''', 4.7 3.5 ""6""" e

'. :51.
'4;.5' " 7.5 5.5 9.5 ',)"1 7 12 9 1;3.5'11 '~O .,";: 17 12.5
:i<'
..
:~. 5~1O
c,.-:.;:
.
I'"
15' :' ':21 i'?
5/16 7..~ 7 ,12 15 11 20 25 18 35 26
. 27
'~
".9-,;:, 28 ''v ...... ""t"

f4'
',,' ~b "l'. ~2 ',: '16 ,~6
3/8 17 13
,;~IJ :;<
20 95 , 26:. 44 33 gO
;0;,'
63 46
'("'1/
',22{ '.!J
7/16 . ii, y,.
'W
28 20 i~5 Jr' , ,,26,;; , 44 32 55 Ai': 70 52 86'1 5a'
:~}
100 75
.
~2ci' , %90";;
.,"ji- ;
1/2 33 29 h;, 42 31 y53"
\.J;;' . if9'}~.; 67 50 85 ;63 110 80 150 115
'" "',' .j,

:11 .~".'
\0,
',.,
:'7si? .\ "56" ~s 95
'

9/16 48" .'416+* .... :;. 60 45 70 125.. ~O", 155 115 175 ." 130"'h' 225 160
...h, '" -'i'j , "
ew. '>'%3;' ~;;<

5/8 .~7 ,JiOr i~ 85 62 j1Q? <" "lair 135 100 '170: . 1.25 215 160 2'15. J60,~: 300 225
., ',q

3/4 /299 .)!7i1~ ~. 150 110 1.9.0

1140 "
240 175 3m)' 225 375 280 425+ 310'"
:'-;."
550 400
',"' ..
.'360
19P 'r 140'< 240
;'i,
7/8 .1.9Qk 'h1~0 n 240 175 175 49Q 625 450 70Ct ,50(t 875 650

'g9 . r" :J;

0;;' ' .flQ.il 360
.. '
w
,. .. 1d50 .f
270 2~P" ?,10". 360 270 725 ". 540 925 675
f
750 1300 975
.,',

1-1/8 410' ':j

380'' 510
,'~': "c,
375 47Q '300:
i"", '.
;;
510 375 900 ; 675.,. 1150 850 1150 1075,;. 1850 1350
,tV
i. '''-'' +'
1-1/4 570 );;' .425: 725 530 570'" :425
p
.: 725 530 13QP 95Q' 1650 1200 2Q5Q l500
" 'f;'t'
2600 1950
.. .
~'OQ:;: 3400
,

~5Q,;"
"'d "~
f,'
1-3/8 720 .: 950 700 ,..750, ",550 950 700 17QO 1250 2150 1550 270Q 2550
,~ tfl, ;:..' ".
"7,25; ."; 1250 725 ,( 1250
1-1/2 1'0,00 925 99d i'.
<:if,
930 225Q 16qp 2850 2100 3~00il;; 2ti!50;; 4550 3350

DO NOT use these hand torque values if a different When bolt and nut combination fasteners are used,
torque value or tightening procedure is given for a torque values should be applied to the NUT instead of
specific application. Torque values listed are for general the bolt head.
use only and include a 10% variance factor. Check
Tighten toothed or serrated-type lock nuts to the full
tightness of fasteners periodically. DO NOT use air
torque value.
powered wrenches. a "Lubricated" means coated with a lubricant such as
engine oil, or fasteners with phosphate and oil coat-
Shear bolts are designed to fail under predetermined ings. "Dry" means plain or zinc plated (yellow dichro-
loads. Always replace shear bolts with identical grade. mate - Specification JDS117) without any lubrication.
b "Grade 2" applies for hex cap screws (not hex
Fasteners should be replaced with the same grade. bolts) up to 152 mm (6-in.) long. "Grade 1"
Make sure fastener threads are clean and that you applies for hex cap screws over 152 mm (6-in.)
properly start thread engagement. This will prevent long, and for all other types of bolts and screws
them from failing when tightening. of any length.
Reference: JDS-G200.

10-15-2
 Service Recommendations/a-Ring Face Seal Fittings

SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
O-RING FACE SEAL FITTINGS
1. Inspect the fitting sealing surfaces (A). They must be
free of dirt or defects.
2. Inspect the a-ring (8). It must be free of damage or
defects.
3. Lubricate a-rings and install into groove using
petroleum jelly to hold in place.
4. Push a-ring into the groove with plenty of petroleum
jelly so a-ring is not displaced during assembly.
5. Index angle fittings and tighten by hand pressing joint
together to insure a-ring remains in place.
6. Tighten fitting or nut to torque value shown on the
chart per dash size stamped on the fitting. Do not
allow hoses to twist when tightening fittings.

O-RING FACE SEAL FITTING INCH TORQUE

NOMINAL THREAD SWIVEL NUT BULKHEAD

Dash
Tube 0.0. Size Torque Nut Torque
Size
mm in. in. N-m Ib-ft N-m Ib-ft

6.35 0.250 -4 9/16-18 16 12 5.0 3.5

9.52 0.375 -6 11/16-16 24 18 9.0 6.5

12.70 0.500 -8 13/16-16 50 37 17.0 12.5

15.88 0.625 -10 1-14 69 51 17.0 12.5

19.05 0.750 -12 1 3/16-12 102 75 17.0 12.5

22.22 0.875 -14 1 3/16-12 102 75 17.0 12.5

25.40 1.000 -16 1 7/16-12 142 105 17.0 12.5

31.75 1.250 -20 1 11/16-12 190 140 17.0 12.5

38.10 1.500 -24 2-12 217 160 17.0 12.5

NOTE: Torque tolerance is + 15 -20%.

10-15-3
 Service Recommendations/O-Ring Boss Fittings

O-RING BOSS FITTINGS

1. Inspect boss O-ring boss seat. It must be free of dirt STRAIGHT FITTING OR SPECIAL NUT TORQUE
and defects. If repeated leaks occur, inspect for
defects with a magnifying glass. Some raised defects Thread Torque a Number
can be removed with a slip stone.
Size N-m Ib-ft of Flats b
3/8-24 UNF 8 (6) 2

7/16-20 UNF 12 (9) 2

1/2-20 UNF 16 (12) 2

9/16-18 UNF 24 (18) 2

3/4-16 UNF 46 (34) 2

7/8-14 UNF 62 (46) 1-1/2

2. Put hydraulic oil or petroleum jelly on the O-ring (8). 1-1/16-12 UN 102 (75)
Place electrical tape over the threads to protect 0-
ring from nicks. Slide O-ring over the tape and into 1-3/16-12 UN 122 (90)
the groove (A) of fitting. Remove tape.
1-5/16-12 UN 142 (105) 3/4

1-5/8-12 UN 190 (140) 3/4

1-7/8-12 UN 217 (160) 1/2

a. Torque tolerance is 10 percent.

b. To be used if a torque wrench cannot be used.
After tightening fitting by hand, put a mark on nut or
boss; then tighten special nut or straight fitting the
number of flats shown.

3. For angle fittings (C), loosen special nut (E) and push
special washer (0) against threads so O-ring can
be installed into the groove of fitting.
4. Turn fitting into the boss by hand until special washer
or washer face (straight fitting) contacts boss face
and O-ring is squeezed into its seat.
5. To position angle fittings, turn the fitting counter-
clockwise a maximum of one turn.
6. Tighten straight fittings to torque value shown on
chart. For angle fittings, tighten the special nut to
value shown in the chart while holding body of fitting
with a wrench.

10-15-4
 Group 20
Fuels, Lubricants, and Coolants
DIESEL FUEL - NORTH AMERICA -Sulfur Content of 0.05%

In general, diesel fuels are blended to satisfy the low air Diesel fuels for highway use in the United States now
temperature requirements of the geographical area in require sulfur content to be less than 0.05%.
which they are sold.
If diesel fuel being used has a sulfur content greater
In North America, diesel fuel is usually specified to than 0.05%, reduce the service interval for engine
ASTM 0975 and sold as either Grade 1 for cold air oil and filter by 50%.
temperatures or Grade 2 for warm air temperatures.
Consult your local diesel fuel distributor for properties of
If diesel fuels being supplied in your area DO NOT meet the diesel fuel available in your area.
any of the above specifications, use diesel fuels with the
following equivalent properties:
-Cetane Number 40 (minimum) A WARNING
A cetane number greater than 50 is preferred, California Proposition 65 Warning: Diesel engine
especially for ai r temperatu res below -20C (-4F) or exhaust and some of its elements from this
elevations above 1500 m (5000 ft). product are known to the State of California to
-Cold Filter Plugging Point (CFPP) cause cancer, birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
The air temperature at which diesel fuel begins to
cloud or jell- at least 5C (9F) below the expected
low air temperature range.

DIESEL FUEL LUBRICITY

Diesel fuel must have adequate lubricity to ensure
proper operation and durability of fuel injection system
components. Fuel lubricity should pass a minimum of
3300 gram load level as measured by the BOClE
scuffing test.

DIESEL FUEL STORAGE

IMPORTANT: DO NOT USE GALVANIZED IMPORTANT: Keep all dirt, scale, water or other
CONTAINERS-diesel fuel stored in foreign material out of fuel.
galvanized containers reacts with zinc
coating in the container to form zinc Keep fuel in a safe, protected area and in a clean,
flakes. If fuel contains water, a zinc properly marked ("DIESEL FUEL") container. DO NOT
gel will also form. The gel and flakes use deicers to attempt to remove water from fuel. DO
will quickly plug fuel filters and NOT depend on fuel filters to remove water from fuel. It
damage fuel injectors and fuel is recommended that a water separator be installed in
pumps. the storage tank outlet. BE SURE to properly discard
unstable or contaminated diesel fuel and/or their
It is recommended that diesel fuel be stored ONLY in a containers when necessary.
clean, approved POLYETHYLENE PLASTIC container
WITHOUT any metal screen or filter. This will help
prevent any accidental sparks from occurring. Store fuel
in an area that is well ventilated to prevent possible
igniting of fumes by an open flame or spark, this
includes any appliance with a pilot light.

10-20-1
 Fuels, Lubricants, and CoolantslHydraulic/Transmission Oil

DIESEL FUEL - EUROPE Consult your local diesel fuel distributor for properties of
the diesel fuel available in your area.
In general, diesel fuels are blended to satisfy the low air -Cold Filter Plugging Point (CFPP)
temperature requirements of the geographical area in
which they are sold. The air temperature at which diesel fuel begins to
cloud or jell- at least 5C (9F) below the expected
In Europe, diesel fuel is usually specified to EN590 and low air temperature range.
sold in 5 different classes or 6 different grades. -Sulfur Content of 0.05%

If diesel fuels being supplied in your area DO NOT meet Diesel fuel for highway use in the European Union
any of the above specifications, use diesel fuels with the will be required to have a sulfur content of less than
following equivalent properties: 0.05% by 1 October 1996.
-Cetane Number 40 (minimum)
If diesel fuel being used has a sulfur content greater
A cetane number greater than 50 is preferred, than 0.05%, reduce the service interval for engine
especially for air temperatures below -20C (-4F) or oil and filter by 50%.
elevations above 1500 m (5000 ft).
Consult your local diesel fuel distributor for properties of
If diesel fuel being used has a sulfur content greater the diesel fuel available in your area.
than 0.05%, reduce the service interval for engine
oil and filter by 50%.

DIESEL FUEL LUBRICITY

Diesel fuel must have adequate lubricity to ensure
proper operation and durability of fuel injection system
components. Fuel lubricity should pass a minimum of
3300 gram load level as measured by the BOCLE
scuffing test.

DIESEL FUEL STORAGE

IMPORTANT: DO NOT USE GALVANIZED in an area that is well ventilated to prevent possible
CONTAINERS-diesel fuel stored in igniting of fumes by an open flame or spark, this
galvanized containers reacts with zinc includes any appliance with a pilot light.
coating in the container to form zinc
flakes. If fuel contains water, a zinc IMPORTANT: Keep all dirt, scale, water or other
gel will also form. The gel and flakes foreign material out of fuel.
will quickly plug fuel filters and
damage fuel injectors and fuel Keep fuel in a safe, protected area and in a clean,
pumps. properly marked ("DIESEL FUEL") container. DO NOT
use deicers to attempt to remove water from fuel. DO
It is recommended that diesel fuel be stored ONLY in a NOT depend on fuel filters to remove water from fuel. It
clean, approved POLYETHYLENE PLASTIC container is recommended that a water separator be installed in
WITHOUT any metal screen or filter. This will help the storage tank outlet. BE SURE to properly discard
prevent any accidental sparks from occurring. Store fuel unstable or contaminated diesel fuel and/or their
containers when necessary.

10-20-2
 Fuels, Lubricants, and CoolantslHydrauliciTransmission Oil

4-CYCLE DIESEL ENGINE OIL - NORTH

AMERICA
Use appropriate oil viscosity based on the expected air

temperature range during the period between
recommended oil changes. Operating outside of these
recommended oil air temperature ranges may cause 30 0 e
premature engine failure.
20 0 e
The following John Deere oils are PREFERRED: .....
-PLUS-50-SAE 15W-40j w
-TORQ-GARD SUPREME-SAE 5W-30.
cs:
en Q 10 e
~
It)
The following John Deere oils are also recommended, w
based on their specified temperature range:
-TURF-GARD-SAE 10W-30j
~ -1 DOe

-PLUS-4-SAE 10W-30j
-TORQ-GARD SUPREME-SAE 30. -20 e
Other oils may be used if above John Deere oils are not - - -30e
-22 F
available, provided they meet one of the following
specifications:
-40e
-40 F
PREFERRED
-SAE 15W-40 (preferred)-API Service Classifications
CG-4 or CF-4 or higher; AIR TEMPERATURE
-SAE 5W-30 (preferred)-API Service Classification CD I MS827S1
or CC or higher;
-SAE 10W-30-API Service Classification CF-4 or CF John Deere Dealers: You may want to cross-reference
or higher; the following publications to recommend the proper oil
-SAE 30-API Service Classification CF-4 or CF or for your customers:
higher. -Module OX, ENOIL in JDS-G135;
-Section 530, Lubricants & Hydraulics, of the John
IMPORTANT: If diesel fuel with sulfur content Deere Merchandise Sales Guide;
greater than 0.5% is used, reduce the -Lubrication Sales Manual P17032.
service interval for oil and filter by
50%.

10-20-3
 Fuels, Lubricants, and CoolantslHydrau/iciTransmission Oil

4-CYCLE DIESEL ENGINE OIL - EUROPE

Use appropriate oil viscosity based on the expected air
temperature range during the period between
recommended oil changes. Operating outside of these
recommended oil air temperature ranges may cause
premature engine failure.
30C
The following John Deere oils are PREFERRED:
20C
-TORQ-GARD SUPREME-SAE 15W-40j
-UNI-GARDTM-SAE 15W-40j w
10e
eTORQ-GARD SUPREME-SAE 5W-30j U) Q

-UNI-GARDTM-SAE 5W-30.
~
w
DoC
The following John Deere oils are also recommended,
based on their specified temperature range:
U) e
-10
-TORQ-GARD SUPREME-SAE 10W-30j
-UNI-GARDTM-SAE 10W-30; -20 e
-TORQ-GARD SUPREME-SAE 30;
-UNI-GARDTM-SAE 30. - - -3~e
-40e
Other oils may be used if above John Deere oils are not
PREFERRED
available, provided they meet one of the following
specifications:
AIR TEMPERATURE
-CCMC Specification D5 or Mercedes Benz MB228.3 or I M58275I
higher;
-CCMC Specification D4 or Mercedes Benz MB228.1 or John Deere Dealers: You may want to cross-reference
higher. the following publications to recommend the proper oil
for your customers:
IMPORTANT: If diesel fuel with sulfur content -Module DX,ENOIL in JDS-G135;
greater than 0.5% is used, reduce the -Section 530, Lubricants & Hydraulics, of the John
service interval for oil and filter by Deere Merchandise Sales Guide.
50%.

10-20-4
 Fuels, Lubricants, and CoolantslHydrauHciTransmission Oil

BREAK-IN DIESEL ENGINE OIL -

NORTH AMERICA
IMPORTANT: ONLY use this specified break-in oil in 50C 122 F
rebuilt or remanufactured engines for
40C 104F
the first 100 hours maximum. DO NOT
use PLUS-50, SAE 15W40 oil or oils
30C 86F
meeting specifications API CG-4 or
API CF-4, these oils will not allow
20C 68F
rebuilt or remanufactured engines to ...J
break-in properly. (5
z 10 e 50 F
The following John Deere oil is PREFERRED: ~

-BREAK-IN ENGINE OIL. w
r:r:
DoC 32 F
ID

John Deere BREAK-IN ENGINE OIL is formulated -10 e 14 F

with special additives for aluminum and cast iron type
engines to allow the power cylinder components -20e -4 F
(pistons, rings, and liners as well) to "wear-in" while
protecting other engine components, valve train and -3~ e -22 F
gears, from abnormal wear. Engine rebuild instructions
-40e -40 F
should be followed closely to determine if special
requirements are necessary.
AIR TEMPERATURE
John Deere BREAK-IN ENGINE OIL is also I M58275I
recommended for non-John Deere engines, both
aluminum and cast iron types. John Deere Dealers: You may want to cross-reference
the following publications to recommend the proper oil
If this preferred John Deere oil is not available, use a for your customers:
break-in engine oil meeting the following specification -Module DX,ENOIL4 in JDS-G135;
during the first 100 hours of operation: -Section 530, Lubricants & Hydraulics, of the John
-API Service Classification CEo Deere Merchandise Sales Guide;
-Lubrication Sales Manual P17032.
After the break-in period, use the John Deere oil that is
recommended for this engine.

10-20-5
 Fuels, Lubricants, and CoolantslHydrauliciTransmission Oil

BREAK-IN DIESEL ENGINE OIL - EUROPE

IMPORTANT: ONLY use this specified break-in oil in
rebuilt or remanufactured engines for 50C 122 F
the first 100 hours maximum. DO NOT
40C 104F
use SAE 1SW-40 oil or oils meeting
CCMC Specification OS-these oils
will not allow rebuilt or 30 C 86F
remanufactured engines to break-in
20C 68F
properly. -I
(5
The following John Deere oil is PREFERRED: z 10C 50 F
-BREAK-IN ENGINE OIL. ~
<C
w
a:
DoC 32 F
John Deere BREAK-IN ENGINE OIL is formulated III

with special additives for aluminum and cast iron type -10 C 14 F
engines to allow the power cylinder components
(pistons, rings, and liners as well) to "wear-in" while -20C -4 F
protecting other engine components, valve train and
gears, from abnormal wear. Engine rebuild instructions -30 C -22 F
should be followed closely to determine if special
requirements are necessary. 40C 40 F

John Deere BREAK-IN ENGINE OIL is also

AIR TEMPERATURE
recommended for non-John Deere engines, both I M58275I
aluminum and cast iron types.
John Deere Dealers: You may want to cross-reference
If above preferred John Deere oil is not available, use a
the following publications to recommend the proper oil
break-in engine oil meeting the following specification
for your customers:
during the first 100 hours of operation:
-Module DX, ENOIL4 in JDS-G135;
-CCMC Specification D4.
-Section 530, Lubricants & Hydraulics, of the John
Deere Merchandise Sales Guide.
After the break-in period, use the John Deere oil that is
recommended for this engine.

10-20-6
 Fuels, Lubricants, and CoolantslHydrauliclTransmission Oil

HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION AND

HYDRAULIC OIL - NORTH AMERICA
Use the appropriate oil viscosity based on these air
temperature ranges. Operating outside of these
recommended oil air temperature ranges may cause
premature transmission or hydraulic system failures.
50C

40C
122 F

104F
--f
30C 86F 0

IMPORTANT: Mixing of LOW VISCOSITY HY- .,c

C\I

20C 68F :i:

GARD and HY-GARD oils is .,c
permitted. DO NOT mix any other oils c
10 e 50 F
.,c
__ 1
in this transmission. DO NOT use C\I

engine oil or "Type F" (Red) :i:

Automatic Transmission Fluid in this .,c oOe 32 F
transmission. DO NOT use BIO-HY-
GARD in this transmission. -10 e
14F

The following John Deere transmission and hydraulic oil -20 e -4 F

is PREFERRED:
-LOW VISCOSITY HY-GARD-JDM J20D. -30 e -22 F

The following John Deere oil is also recommended if -40 e -40 F

above preferred oil is not available: PREFERRED
-HY-GARD-JDM J20C.
AIR TEMPERATURE I M58275I
Other oils may be used if above recommended John
Deere oils are not available, provided they meet one of John Deere Dealers: You may want to cross-reference
the following specifications: the following publications to recommend the proper oil
-John Deere Standard JDM J20D (preferred); for your customers:
-John Deere Standard JDM J20C. -Module DX,ANTI in JDS-G135;
-Section 530, Lubricants & Hydraulics, of the John
IMPORTANT: When using HY-GARD (JDM J20C), Deere Merchandise Sales Guide;
if the minimum air temperature -Lubrication Sales Manual P17032.
should fall below -7C (-20F) drain
reservoir and switch to LOW NOTE: Disregard the John Deere All Weather
VISCOSITY HY-GARD (JDM J20D). If Hydrostatic Fluid (JDM J21A) listing-it has
minimum air temperature should fall been eliminated from the specifications.
below -40C (-40F), the transmission
oil must be heated to at least five
degrees above the lower limit before
start-up or transmission may be
damaged. For prolonged operation
under heavy load in air temperatures
above 50C (122F) reduce service
interval by 50%.

10-20-7
 Fuels, Lubricants, and CoolantslHydrauliclTransmission Oil

HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION AND

HYDRAULIC OIL - EUROPE
Use the appropriate oil viscosity based on these air
temperature ranges. Operating outside of these
recommended oil air temperature ranges may cause
50C

40C
122 F

104F
--I
premature transmission or hydraulic system failures. 30C BOoF 0
..,CI
('II

IMPORTANT: Mixing of LOW VISCOSITY HY- 20C OBoF ~

GARD and HY-GARD oils is ..,c
permitted. DO NOT mix any other oils cCI

__ 1
10 e 50 F
in this transmission. DO NOT use ..,
('II

engine oil or "Type F" (Red) ~

..,c oOe 32 f
Automatic Transmission Fluid in this
transmission. DO NOT use BIO-HY-
10 e 14 f
GARD in this transmission.

The following John Deere transmission and hydraulic oil 20 e 4 f

is PREFERRED:
30 e 22 f
-LOW VISCOSITY HY-GARD-JDM J20D.
40 e 40 F
The following John Deere oil is also recommended if
above preferred oil is not available: PREFERRED
-HY-GARD-JDM J20C. AIR TEMPERATURE I M58275I

Other oils may be used if above recommended John

Deere oils are not available, provided they meet one of John Deere Dealers: You may want to cross reference
the following specifications: the following publications to recommend the proper oil
-John Deere Standard JDM J20D (preferred); for your customers:
-John Deere Standard JDM J20C. -Module DX, ANTI in JDS-G135;
-Section 530, Lubricants & Hydraulics, of the John
IMPORTANT: When using HY-GARD (JDM J20C), Deere Merchandise Sales Guide.
if the minimum air temperature
should fall below 7C (-20F) drain NOTE: Disregard the John Deere All Weather
reservoir and switch to LOW Hydrostatic Fluid (JDM J21A) listing-it has
VISCOSITY HY-GARD (JDM J20D). If been eliminated from the specifications.
minimum air temperature should fall
below -40C (-40F), the transmission
oil must be heated to at least five
degrees above the lower limit before
start-up or transmission may be
damaged. For prolonged operation
under heavy load in air temperatures
above 50C (122F) reduce service
interval by 50%.

10-20-8
 Fuels, Lubricants, and CoolantslHydraulic/Transmission Oil

GEAR CASE OIL - NORTH AMERICA

MECHANICAL FRONT WHEEL DRIVE
122 F
Use the following oil viscosity based on the air
temperature range. Operating outside of the 104 F
recommended oil air temperature range may cause
premature gear case failure.

IMPORTANT: ONLY use a quality oil in this gear

case. DO NOT mix any other oils in
this gear case. DO NOT use BIO-HY-
50 F
GARD in this gear case.

I

32 F
The following John Deere gear case oil is
PREFERRED: . -10 C
14 F
-GL-S GEAR LUBRICANT-SAE SOW-gO.
__ _20oC
-4 F
Other gear case oils may be used if above
recommended John Deere gear case oil is not available,
-30 C
-22 F
provided they meet the following specification:
-API Service Classification GL-S. -40C -40F

AIR TEMPERATURE I M58275 I

John Deere Dealers: You may want to cross-reference

the following publications to recommend the proper oil
for your customers:
-Module DX, GEOIL in JDS-G135;
-Section 530, Lubricants & Hydraulics, of the John
Deere Merchandise Sales Guide;
-Lubrication Sales Manual P17032.

10-20-9
 Fuels, Lubricants, and CoolantslHydrauliclTransmission Oil

GEAR CASE OIL - EUROPE

MECHANICAL FRONT WHEEL DRIVE 0
122 F
Use the following oil viscosity based on the air 0
temperature range. Operating outside of the 104 F
recommended oil air temperature range may cause
860 F
premature gear case failure.
68F
IMPORTANT: ONLY use a quality oil in this gear
case. DO NOT mix any other oils in
this gear case. DO NOT use BIO-HY-
;
co
w
o
10 C
\;; 0
50 F
GARD in this gear case. <t 0
C/) 32 F
The following John Deere gear case oil is 0
't.
PREFERRED: 14 F
-EXTREME-GARDTM-SAE 80W-90. 0
4 F
Other gear case oils may be used if above
o 0
recommended John Deere gear case oil is not available, 30 C 22 F
provided they meet the following specification: o 0
-API Service Classification GL-S. 40 C 40 F

AIR TEMPERATURE I M58275 I

John Deere Dealers: You may want to cross-reference

the following publications to recommend the proper oil
for your customers:
-Module DX,GEOIL in JDS-G135;
-Section 530, Lubricants & Hydraulics, of the John
Deere Merchandise Sales Guide.

10-20-10
 Fuels, Lubricants, and CoolantslHydrauliclTransmission Oil

GREASE - NORTH AMERICA

(FOR ALL OTHER PRODUCTS AND
COMPONENTSNOTALREADYCOVERE~

Use the following grease based on the air temperature

range. Operating outside of the recommended grease
air temperature range may cause premature failures.
1-- 50C

40C

30C
122 F

104F

86F
N
",,"QI
W"O 20C
IMPORTANT: ONLY use a quality grease in this (')ea
,....
...
68F
application. DO NOT mix any other "'el
:=-
greases in this application. DO NOT eel
..,....1 10 e 50 F
Z

! .
use any BIO-GREASE in this
application.
DoC 32 F

The following John Deere grease is PREFERRED: -10 e 14 F

-NON-CLAY HIGH-TEMPERATURE EP GREASE-
JDM J13E4, NLGI Grade 2. - - _20C -4 F
Other greases may be used if above preferred John -3~ e -22 F
Deere grease is not available, provided they meet the
following specification: -40e -40 F
-John Deere Standard JDM J13E4, NLGI Grade 2.

AIR TEMPERATURE I M58275I

John Deere Dealers: You may want to cross-reference

the following publications to recommend the proper
grease for your customers:
-Module DX,GREA1 in JDS-G135;
-Section 530, Lubricants & Hydraulics, of the John
Deere Merchandise Sales Guide;
-the Lubrication Sales Manual P17032.

10-20-11
 Fuels, Lubricants, and CoolantslHydrauliciTransmission Oil

GREASE-EUROPE
(FOR ALL OTHER PRODUCTS AND
122 F
COMPONENTSNOTALREADYCOVERE~ 'ei

104 F
Use the following grease based on the air temperature
range. Operating outside of the recommended grease
air temperature range may cause premature failures.
3De 86F

68F
IMPORTANT: ONLY use a quality grease in this
application. DO NOT mix any other
e 50 F

1
greases in this application. DO NOT 10
~.
use any BIO-GREASE in this q
DOe j
::;~
32 F
application.

The following John Deere grease is PREFERRED: -1 DOe 14 F

-GREASE-GARDTM-JDM J13E4, NLGI Grade 2.
- - .2ooe -4 F
Other greases may be used if above preferred John
Deere grease is not available, provided they meet the -30e -22 F
following specification:
-John Deere Standard JDM J13E4, NLGI Grade 2. -40e -40 F

AIR TEMPERATURE I M5827S1

John Deere Dealers: You may want to cross-reference

the following publications to recommend the proper
grease for your customers:
-Module DX, GREA1 in JDS-G135;
-Section 530, Lubricants & Hydraulics, of the John
Deere Merchandise Sales Guide.

10-20-12
 Fuels, Lubricants, and CoolantslHydraulic/Transmission Oil

ALTERNATIVE LUBRICANTS- IMPORTANT: Use of alternative lubricants could

NORTH AMERICA cause reduced life of the component.

Conditions in certain geographical areas outside the If alternative lubricants are to be used, it is
United States and Canada may require different recommended that the factory fill be thoroughly
lubricant recommendations than the ones printed in this removed before switching to any alternative lubricant.
technical manual or the operator's manual. Consult with
your John Deere Dealer, or Sales Branch, to obtain the
alternative lubricant recommendations.

SYNTHETIC LUBRICANTS
Synthetic lubricants may be used in John Deere Avoid mixing different brands, grades, or types of oil. Oil
equipment if they meet the applicable performance manufacturers blend additives in their oils to meet
requirements (industry classification and/or military certain specifications and performance requirements.
specification) as shown in this manual. Mixing different oils can interfere with the proper
functioning of these additives and degrade lubricant
The recommended air temperature limits and service or performance.
lubricant change intervals should be maintained as
shown in the operator's manual, unless otherwise stated
on lubricant label.

LUBRICANT STORAGE
All machines operate at top efficiency only when clean Store drums on their sides. Make sure all containers are
lubricants are used. Use clean storage containers to properly marked as to their contents. Dispose of all old,
handle all lubricants. Store them in an area protected used containers and their contents properly.
from dust, moisture, and other contamination.

MIXING OF LUBRICANTS
In general, avoid mixing different brands or types of Mixing different lubricants can interfere with the proper
lubricants. Manufacturers blend additives in their functioning of these additives and lubricant properties
lubricants to meet certain specifications and which will downgrade their intended specified
performance requirements. performance.

OIL FILTERS
IMPORTANT: Filtration of oils is critical to proper Other oil filters may be used if above recommended
lubrication performance. Always John Deere oil filters are not available, provided they
change filters regularly. meet the following specification:
-ASTB Tested In Accordance With SAE J806.
The following John Deere oil filters are PREFERRED:
-AUTOMOTIVE AND LIGHT TRUCK ENGINE OIL John Deere Dealers: You may want to cross-reference
FILTERS. the following publications to recommend the proper oil
filter for your customers:
Most John Deere filters contain pressure relief and anti-
-Module OX, FILT in JDS-G135;
drainback valves for better engine protection.
-Section 540, Lubricants & Hydraulics, of the John
Deere Merchandise Sales Guide;
-Lawn & Grounds Care Tune-Up Guide P1672.

10-20~13
 Fuels, Lubricants, and CoolantslHydrau/iciTransmission Oil

ALTERNATIVE LUBRICANTS- IMPORTANT: Use of alternative lubricants could

EUROPE cause reduced life of the component.

Conditions in certain geographical areas outside the If alternative lubricants are to be used, it is
United States and Canada may require different recommended that the factory fill be thoroughly
lubricant recommendations than the ones printed in this removed before switching to any alternative lubricant.
technical manual or the operator's manual. Consult with
your John Deere Dealer, or Sales Branch, to obtain the
alternative lubricant recommendations.

SYNTHETIC LUBRICANTS
Avoid mixing different brands, grades, or types of oil. Oil
Synthetic lubricants may be used in John Deere manufacturers blend additives in their oils to meet
equipment if they meet the applicable performance certain specifications and performance requirements.
requirements (industry classification and/or military Mixing different oils can interfere with the proper
specification) as shown in this manual. functioning of these additives and degrade lubricant
performance.
The recommended air temperature limits and service or
lubricant change intervals should be maintained as
shown in the operator's manual, unless otherwise stated
on lubricant label.

LUBRICANT STORAGE
Store drums on their sides. Make sure all containers are
All machines operate at top efficiency only when clean properly marked as to their contents. Dispose of all old,
lubricants are used. Use clean storage containers to used containers and their contents properly.
handle all lubricants. Store them in an area protected
from dust, moisture, and other contamination.

MIXING OF LUBRICANTS
Mixing different lubricants can interfere with the proper
In general, avoid mixing different brands or types of functioning of these additives and lubricant properties
lubricants. Manufacturers blend additives in their which will downgrade their intended specified
lubricants to meet certain specifications and performance.
performance requirements.

OIL FILTERS
Other oil filters may be used if above recommended
IMPORTANT: Filtration of oils is critical to proper John Deere oil filters are not available, provided they
lubrication performance. Always meet the following specification:
change filters regularly. -ASTB Tested In Accordance With SAE J806.

The following John Deere oil filters are PREFERRED: John Deere Dealers: You may want to cross-reference
-AUTOMOTIVE AND LIGHT TRUCK ENGINE OIL the following publications to recommend the proper oil
FILTERS. filter for your customers:
-Module DX, FILT in JDS-G135;
Most John Deere filters contain pressure relief and anti-
-Section 540, Lubricants & Hydraulics, of the John
drainback valves for better engine protection.
Deere Merchandise Sales Guide;
-Lawn & Grounds Care Tune-Up Guide P1672.

10-20-14
 Fuels, Lubricants, and CoolantslHydraulic/Transmission Oil

DIESEL ENGINE COOLANT - IMPORTANT: To prevent engine damage, DO NOT

NORTH AMERICA use pure anti-freeze or less than a
50% anti-freeze mixture in the cooling
The engine cooling system when filled with a proper system. DO NOT mix or add any
dilution mixture of anti-freeze and deionized or distilled additives/conditioners to the cooling
water provides year-round protection against corrosion, system in Lawn and Grounds Care/
cylinder or liner pitting, and winter freeze protection Golf and Turf Division equipment.
down to -37C (-34F). Water used to dilute engine coolant
concentrate must be of high qual
The following John Deere coolant is PREFERRED: clean, clear, potable water (low in
-PRE-DILUTED DIESEL ENGINE ANTI-FREEZE/ chloride and hardness-Table 1) is
SUMMER COOLANTTM (TY16036). generally acceptable. DO NOT use
salt water. Deionized or distilled water
This coolant satisfies specifications for "Automobile and is ideal to use. Coolant that is not
Light Duty Engine Service" and is safe for use in John mixed to these specified levels and
Deere Lawn and Grounds Care/Golf and Turf Division water purity can cause excessive
equipment, including aluminum block gasoline engines scale, sludge deposits, and increased
and cooling systems. corrosion potential.

The above preferred pre-diluted anti-freeze provides: Table 1: Water Quality

-adequate heat transfer
-corrosion-resistant chemicals for the cooling Property Requirements
system
Total Solids, Maximum 340 ppm (20 grns/gal)
-compatibility with cooling system hose and seal
material Total Hardness, Max. 170 ppm (10 grns/gal)
-protection during extreme cold and extreme hot Chloride (as CI), Max. 40 ppm (2.5 grns/gal)
weather operations
Sulfate (as S04), Max. 100 ppm (5.B grns/gal)
-chemically pure water for better service life
-compliance with ASTM 04656 (JDM H24C2)
Mix 50 percent anti-freeze concentrate with 50 percent
specifications
distilled or deionized water. This mixture and the pre-
If above preferred pre-diluted coolant is not available, diluted mixture (TY16036) will protect the cooling
the following John Deere concentrate is system down to -3rC(-34F) and up to 10BoC (226F).
recommended:
Certain geographical areas may require lower air
-DIESEL ENGINE ANTI-FREEZE/SUMMER
temperature protection. See the label on your anti-
COOLANT CONCENTRATETM (TY16034).
freeze container or consult your John Deere dealer to
If either of above recommended engine coolants are obtain the latest information and recommendations.
available use any Automobile and Light Duty Engine
Service ethylene glycol base coolant, meeting the
following specification:
-ASTM 03306 (JDM H24C1).

Read container label completely before using and follow

instructions as stated.

DIESEL ENGINE COOLANT DRAIN When using John Deere Concentrate (TY16034)
INTERVAL - NORTH AMERICA Automobile and Light Duty Engine Service coolants,
drain and flush the cooling system and refill with fresh
When using John Deere Pre-Diluted (TY16036) coolant mixture every 24 months or 2,000 hours of
Automobile and Light Duty Engine Service coolants, operation, whichever comes first.
drain and flush the cooling system and refill with fresh
If above John Deere Automobile and Light Duty Engine
coolant mixture every 36 months or 3,000 hours of
Service coolants are not being used; drain, flush, and
operation, whichever comes first.
refill the cooling system according to instructions found
on product container or in equipment operator's manual
or technical manual.

10-20-15
 Fuels, Lubricants, and CoolantslHydrauliciTransmission Oil

DIESEL ENGINE COOLANT - EUROPE IMPORTANT: To prevent engine damage, DO NOT

use pure anti-freeze or less than a
The engine cooling system when filled with a proper 50% anti-freeze mixture in the cooling
dilution mixture of anti-freeze and deionized or distilled system. DO NOT mix or add any
water provides year-round protection against corrosion, additives/conditioners to the cooling
cylinder liner pitting, and winter freeze protection down system in Lawn and Grounds Care/
to -37C (-34F). Golf and Turf Division equipment.
Water used to dilute engine coolant
The following John Deere coolant is PREFERRED: concentrate must be of high qual
-COOL-GARD COOLANT CONCENTRATETM. clean, clear, potable water (low in
chloride and hardness-Table 1) is
If above preferred coolant is not available, use any generally acceptable. DO NOT use
Automobile and Light Duty Engine Service ethylene salt water. Deionized or distilled water
glycol base coolant, meeting the following is best to use. Coolant that is not
specification: mixed to these specified levels and
-ASTM D3306 (JDM H24C1). water purity can cause excessive
scale, sludge deposits, and increased
Read container label completely before using and follow
corrosion potential.
instructions as stated.
Table 1 : Water Quality

Property Requirements
Total Solids, Maximum 340 ppm (20 grns/gal)
Total Hardness, Max. 170 ppm (10 grns/gal)
Chloride (as CI), Max. 40 ppm (2.5 grns/gal)
Sulfate (as S04), Max. 100 ppm (5.8 grns/gal)

Mix 50 percent anti-freeze concentrate with 50 percent

distilled or deionized water. This mixture will protect the
cooling system down to -3rC(-34F) and up to 108C
(226F).

Certain geographical areas may require lower air

temperature protection. See the label on your anti-
freeze container or consult your John Deere dealer to
obtain the latest information and recommendations.

DIESEL ENGINE COOLANT DRAIN When using John Deere Concentrate (TY16034)
INTERVAL - NORTH AMERICA Automobile and Light Duty Engine Service coolants,
drain and flush the cooling system and refill with fresh
When using John Deere Pre-Diluted (TY16036) coolant mixture every 24 months or 2,000 hours of
Automobile and Light Duty Engine Service coolants, operation, whichever comes first.
drain and flush the cooling system and refill with fresh
coolant mixture every 36 months or 3,000 hours of If above John Deere Automobile and Light Duty Engine
operation, whichever comes first. Service coolants are not being used; drain, flush, and
refill the cooling system according to instructions found
on product container or in equipment operator's manual
or technical manual.

10-20-16
 Group 25
Serial Number Locations

PRODUCT SERIAL NUMBER

The tractor's 13-digit product serial number is located

below rear PTO on transmission case.

Product Serial Number _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The tractor's engine serial number (A) is located on

valve cover.

Engine Serial Number _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

MX,HU,1025,2 19160CT91

TRANSAXLE SERIAL NUMBER

The transaxle serial number plate is located on flat

surface (A) below left-hand rockshaft lift arm.

Transaxle Serial Number _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

MX,HU,1025,3 -19160CT91

MOWER DECK SERIAL NUMBER

The mower deck serial number plate is located at

various points on the different mower decks available for
these tractors.

Mower Deck Serial Number _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

MX,HU,1025,4 -19160CT91

10-25-1 191091
Serial Number Locations/Mower Deck Serial Number

10-25-2 191091
 Section 20
Diesel Engine Repair
Contents
Page

Group 05-Yanmar Diesel Engine Repair

John Deere Series 220 Diesel Engines .... 20-05-1

Group 10-Remove and Install Oil Cooler

Remove and Install Oil Cooler ........... 20-10-1

Group 15-Remove and Install Radiator

Service Equipment and Tools ............ 20-15-1
Specifications ........................ 20-15-1
Remove and Install Radiator ............ 20-15-2

Group 20-Remove and Install Diesel Engine

Remove and Install Diesel Engine ........ 20-20-1

20-1
Contents

20-2 191091
 Group 05
Yanmar Diesel Engine Repair
JOHN DEERENANMAR DIESEL ENGINE
REPAIR-JOHN DEERE SERIES 220
DIESEL ENGINES
For complete repair information, the COMPONENT
TECHNICAL MANUAL (CTM) is also required, use
JOHN DEERE SERIES 220 DIESEL ENGINES-CTM3
(1 OAUG93 or later) in conjunction with this machine
manual.

20-05-1
Diesel Engine Repair-CTM3

20-05-2 191091
 Group 10
Remove and Install Oil Cooler
REMOVE AND INSTALL OIL COOLER
NOTE: Late model 755/756 Tractor shown. See
Remove and Install Radiator in Group 15 of this
section for steps required to reach disassembly
point shown. Have a clean oil pan, several shop
cloths, and two oil caps and plugs ready to
catch, trap, and/or clean-up hydraulic oil.

1. Remove two cap screws (A).

2. Disconnect oil cooler lines (8).
3. Lift cooler from base clips (C), one on each side.
4. Drain oil cooler and remove to bench.
5. Remove and discard O-rings.
6. Install new O-rings.
7. Set oil cooler in base clips (C), one on each side.

IMPORTANT: Do not flex oil cooler lines.

Hydrostatic line fittings must align
with oil cooler fittings before lines are
installed onto oil cooler.

8. Loosen clamp that retains hydraulic lines to the

frame.
M42294
9. Move hydraulic line's until hydraulic line and oil cooler
line fitting's align.
10. Connect oil cooler lines (8) and tighten clamp. If at
this time hydraulic oil cooler line's do not align, bend
slightly until they do align.
11. Install and tighten two cap screws (A).
12. See Remove and Install Radiator in this section for
final assembly steps.

20-10-1
Remove and Install Oil Cooler/Remove and Install Oil Cooler

20-10-2 191091
 Group 15
Remove and Install Radiator
SERVICE EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS
NOTE: Order tools from the U.S. SERVICE-GARDTM Catalog or from the European Microfiche Tool Catalog (MTC).
Some tools may be available from a local supplier.

Name Use

Overhead 1/2 Ton Hoist Pull Engine

SPECIFICATIONS

Item Measurement Specification

Fan Blade Radiator Clearance 12mm (1/2 in.)

Engine Side Panel Mounting Tabs Center Distance 655-508 mm (20 in.)

755/756-562 mm (22.1 in.)

855/856/955-567 mm (22.3 in.)

20-15-1
 Remove and Install Radiator/Remove and Install Radiator

REMOVE AND INSTALL RADIATOR

NOTE' On 955 Tractors and 855/856 Tractors (S/N

615001-999,999 and 1990 model SIN
10,001- ) the fuel tank and battery locations
have been switched. Early model tractor used for
illustrations.

1. Remove grille, side shields and hood.

2. Drain radiator.

3. Remove three hoses (A) and oil cooler (8), see

REMOVE AND INSTALL OIL COOLER in Group 10
earlier in this section.

4. Disconnect return fuel line (C) and pump fuel line (D)
from engine. Pull lines forward from radiator support.

5. Disconnect sender harness (E) leads form fuel tank

sender and pull rearward from radiator support.

6. Disconnect radiator/hood support (F) from upper

radiator bracket (G).

7. Remove radiator/hood support (F) lower frame bolts

from both sides.

8. Have a person pull forward on fuel tank while you pull

A-Radiator and Air E-Fuel Sender Harness
up and forward on radiator to clear frame locater pins
Intake Hoses F-RadiatorIHood
and fan. B-Oil Cooler Support
C-Return Fuel Line G-Upper Radiator
D-Pump Fuel Line Bracket

1D -19-160CT91

9. Distance (A) between fan blade and inner face of

shroud must be at least 12 mm (1/2 in.).

10. If less than 12 mm (1/2 in.), make certain two shims

have been inserted under each front engine mount (655).

MX,HU,201S,2 -19-160CT91

20-15-2 191091
 Remove and Install Radiator/Remove and Install Radiator

11. If shims are in place, reposition radiator forward to

obtain at least 12 mm (1/2 in.) clearance. Tighten
mounting bolts (A).

12. Center distance between engine side panel mounting

tabs (8 and C) must be:

508 mm (20 in.) on 655

562 mm (22.1 in.) on 755/756
567 mm (22.3 in.) on 855/856/955

20-15-3 191091
Remove and Install Radiator/Remove and Install Radiator

20-15-4 191091
 Group 20
Remove and Install Diesel Engine

REMOVE AND INSTALL DIESEL ENGINE

NOTE: Early model tractor used for illustrations. On 955

Tractors and 855 Tractors (SIN
615001-999,999 and 1990 model SIN
10,001- ) the fuel tank and battery locations
have been switched.

1. Remove grille, side shields, hood, oil cooler, fuel tank

and radiator.

2. Remove items (A - H), lay firewall panel on top of

dash so you don't have to disconnect the fuse block.

A-Battery E-Battery Tray With

B-Pedestal Side Panels Cables
C-Starting Aid Module F-Muffler Heat Shield
With Base G-Exhaust Pipe
D-Firewall Panel H-Muffler

3. Install lifting eye (A) in upright position.

IMPORTANT: Install plug and cap to keep dirt out of

fuel system.

4. Disconnect items (8 through G).

A-Lifting Eye F-Fuel Shut-Off

B-Fuel Line Connector
C-Throttle Cable G-Glow Plug
Clamps (655/755/756) or Air
D-Fuel Pump Heater
Connector (855/856/955)
E-Oil Pressure Sending Terminal
Unit

MX,HU,2020,2 19160CT91

20-20-1 191091
 Remove and Install Diesel Engine/Remove and Install Diesel Engine

5. Disconnect items (A - F).

A-Drive Shaft Isolator D-Tachometer Cable

B-8tarter Connections E-Temperature Sender
C-Alternator F-Harness Clamp
Connections

6. Remove four engine mounting bolts (A).

7. Remove engine from tractor frame. Keep shims (8), if

equipped, for engine installation (655 Tractors Only).

INSTALLATION:

8. Reverse removal procedures noting the following

items:

-Reinstall same number of shims (8) as removed on

655 Tractor.

-See Section 220, Group 10 for proper adjustment of

throttle cable and fuel shut-off solenoid.

MX.HU.2020.4 -19-160CT91

20-20-2 191091
 Section 30
Fuel and Air Repair
Contents
Page

Group OS-Fuel Transfer Pump

Remove and Install Fuel Transfer Pump, , ,30-05-1

Group 10-Fuel Tank

Remove and Install Fuel Tank, , , , , , , , , , ,30-10-1

Group 1S-Fuel Tank Tube and Sender

Remove and Install Fuel Tank Tube
and Sender , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,30-15-1

Group 20-Air Cleaner

Specifications, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,30-20-1
Remove and Install Air Cleaner, , , , , , , , , ,30-20-2
Remove and Install Air Restriction
Indicator. , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,30-20-4

30-1
Contents

30-2 191091
 Group 05
Fuel Transfer Pump

REMOVE AND INSTALL FUEL TRANSFER

PUMP

1. Lift hood. Remove right-hand engine shield.

2. Disconnect power lead (A).

3. Loosen hose clamps (B). Remove hoses from fuel

pump. Plug hoses to prevent fuel contamination.

4. Remove cap screws (C). Remove fuel pump.

5. Install and fasten new fuel pump to bracket. Be sure

end of pump marked "IN" is to the front of tractor.

6. Connect fuel hoses and power lead.

7. Bleed fuel injection system. (Refer to Section 220.)

All 955 Tractors and late model 855 Tractors (SIN

615001-999,999 and 1990 models SIN
10,001- ) use a mechanical fuel pump.

955 Tractor Shown

MX,HU,3005,2 19160CT91

30-05-1 191091
Fuel Transfer Pump/Remove and Install Fuel Transfer Pump

30-05-2 191091
 Group 10
Fuel Tank

REMOVE AND INSTALL FUEL TANK

NOTE: 7551756 Tractors illustrated only.

1. Remove front grill screen assembly.

2. Remove cap screws (A) on both sides of tractor.

3. Loosen nuts and remove front plate.

MX,HU,3010,2 -19-160CT91

4. Remove hose (A) and cap screws (8).

5. Disconnect lighting wire connector (C).

6. Remove fuel tank cap, spill cup, and drain hose.

7. Remove hood,

MX,HU,3010,3 -19-160CT91

30-10-1 191091
 Fuel Tank/Remove and Install Fuel Tank

8. Remove and plug or cap fuel lines (A and 8).

9. Disconnect wires (C and D).

10. Remove fuel tank.

11. Check fuel tank for cracks, holes or worn spots.

Replace tank if damaged.

IMPORTANT: Replace foam seals or pads whenever

fuel tank is removed and installed.

12. Install fuel tank in reverse order of removal. Make

certain all rubber seals and front pads are in proper
locations and in good condition. A-8upply line O-Black/White Striped
B-Return line Wire
C-Black Wire

30-10-2 191091
 Group 15
Fuel Tank Tube and Sender

REMOVE AND INSTALL FUEL TANK TUBE

AND SENDER

NOTE' 755 Tractor illustrated only.

1. Remove and plug fuel lines (A and B).

2. Disconnect wires (C and D).

3. Remove screws (E).

4. Remove tube and sender from tank.

NOTE' See Remove and Install Fuel Tank for Sender

access. A-Supply line O-Black/White Striped
B-Return line Wire
C-Black Wire E-Screws

1 19160CT91

5. Remove filter screen (A). Clean and inspect screen

and hose for damage. Replace as necessary. Keep
length of hose and pickup same as original.

6. Inspect float (B) for cracks or damage. Replace as

necessary.

7. Inspect gasket (C) for deterioration. Replace as

necessary.

MX,HU,3015,2 19160CT91

8. Install gasket (A) and align holes. Start screws

through gasket.

9. Install tube and sender. Tighten screws securely.

10. Reinstall hoses and wires.

11. Bleed fuel system. See BLEED FUEL INJECTION

SYSTEM in Section 220.

MX,HU,3015,3 19160CT91

30-15-1 191091
Fuel Tank Tube and Sender/Remove and Install Fuel Tank Tube and Sender

30-15-2 191091
 Group 20
Air Cleaner
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Measurement Specification

Primary Air Cleaner Air Restriction 635 mm (25 in.) Vacuum

Secondary Air Cleaner Air Restriction 508 mm (20 in.) Vacuum

Air Restriction Indicator Torque FINGER TIGHT ONLY

30-20-1
 Air Cleaner/Remove and Install Air Cleaner

REMOVE AND INSTALL AIR CLEANER-

655, 755n56 AND EARLY 855/856
TRACTORS
IMPORTANT: DO NOT clean the primary air cleaner
element with water or compressed air.
Replace it only when the air
restriction indicator shows 635 mm
(25 in.) of vacuum or locks into the
red position.
Tapping the filter on a hard surface
Does Not Help to clean it! It may dent
the wire mesh bringing the paper
element in contact with the mesh.
During normal operation the filter will
vibrate and if it's touching the wire
mesh, a hole will develop in the paper.

1. STOP engine, set park brake, and open hood.

2. Remove outside wing nut with washer (A) to remove
cover assembly (8).
3. Remove inside wing nut with washer (C) and primary
element (D).

IMPORTANT: Ensure the washer is used with the

wing nut, this will ensure that only
M62775
filtered air enters the combustion
chamber.
A properly secured air filter can not
be rotated with one hand.
4. Install new element and secure with wing nut and
washer.
5. Install cover and secure with wing nut and washer.
6. Push reset button (A) on air restriction indicator.
Indicator must reset.
7. START engine. and allow to run one minute at
maximum speed.
8. STOP engine and check air restriction indicator. If
indicator shows 508 mm (20 in.) or more vacuum,
replace secondary element.
SECONDARY ELEMENT REPLACEMENT
IMPORTANT: DO NOT clean secondary element,
replace it only when air restriction
indicator shows 508 mm (20 in.)
vacuum and new primary element has
been installed. DO NOT remove
secondary element unless both these
conditions are present.
9. Remove primary element as described above, but do
not discard primary element.
10. Remove innermost wing nut and washer (A),
remove secondary element (8) and discard.

30-20-2
 Air Cleaner/Remove and Install Air Cleaner

11. Install new secondary element and secure with

wing nut and washer.
12. Install primary element and secure with wing nut
and washer.
13. Install cover and secure with wing nut and washer.
14. Push reset button on air restriction indicator.
Indicator must reset.

REMOVE AND INSTALL AIR CLEANER-

LATE 855 AND ALL 955 TRACTORS
IMPORTANT: DO NOT clean the primary air cleaner
element with water or compressed air.
Replace it only when the air
restriction indicator shows 635 mm
(25 in.) of vacuum or locks into the
red position.
Tapping the filter on a hard surface
Does Not Help to clean it! It may dent
the wire mesh bringing the paper
element in contact with the mesh.
During normal operation the filter will
vibrate and if it's touching the wire
mesh, a hole will develop in the paper.

1. STOP engine, set park brake, and remove grille.

2. Loosen two wing nuts (A) and adjacent intake hose
clamp to rotate air cleaner assembly forward for access.
3. Remove outside wing nut with washer (8) to remove
cover assembly.
4. Remove inside wing nut with washer (C) and primary
element (D).

IMPORTANT: Ensure the washer is used with the

wing nut, this will ensure that only
filtered air enters the combustion
chamber.
A properly secured air filter can not M62587

be rotated with one hand.

5. Install new element and secure with wing nut and

washer.
6. Install cover and secure with wing nut and washer.
7. Push reset button (A) on air restriction indicator.
Indicator must reset.
8. START engine and allow to run one minute at
maximum speed.
9. STOP engine and check air restriction indicator. If
indicator shows 508 mm (20 in.) or more vacuum,
replace secondary element.
M62588

30-20-3
 Air Cleaner/Remove and Install Air Cleaner

SECONDARY ELEMENT REPLACEMENT

IMPORTANT: DO NOT clean secondary element,

replace it only when air restriction
indicator shows 508 mm (20 in.)
vacuum and new primary element has
been installed. DO NOT remove
secondary element unless both these
conditions are present.

10. Remove primary element as described above, but

do not discard primary element.
11. Remove innermost wing nut and washer (A),
remove secondary element (8) and discard. M62798

12. Install new secondary element and secure with

wing nut and washer.
13. Install primary element and secure with wing nut
and washer.
14. Install cover and secure with wing nut and washer.
15. Rotate assembly into position, tighten two wing nuts
and hose clamp.
16. Push reset button on air restriction indicator.
Indicator must reset. Install grille.

REMOVE AND INSTALL AIR RESTRICTION

INDICATOR
IMPORTANT: A faulty air restriction indicator, that
goes undetected, may cause a dusted
engine. Make sure all air restriction
indicators are in good condition and
the proper air restriction indicator is
installed (DIESEL INDICATOR ON
DIESEL ENGINE) before any tractor
so equipped is released to the
customer. Always test new indicators.

1. Remove the air restriction indicator (A) with your M62776

fingers-DO NOT use a pliers. Note: Air Restriction Indicator may differ
from depiction.
2. Carefully clean the inlet area of the indicator without
getting dirt inside.
3. Put the inlet in your mouth and suck until the
indicator locks in the red position.
4. Remove the inlet from your mouth and push the reset
button. The indicator should reset to zero. If the
indicator does not lock in the red or will not reset, check
for air leaks in the filtered portion of the intake system. If
remote mounted, check for leaks in the restriction
indicator hose. Replace if necessary.
5. Reinstall the indicator finger tight. Overtightening will
crack the housing.

30-20-4
 Section 40
Alternator Repair
Contents
Page
Group OS-Alternator Repair Specifications
Service Equipment and Tools ........... .40-05-1
Specifications ........................ 40-05-1
Alternator Repair .................... .40-05-1

Group 10-Alternator Installation

Installation Procedures ................ .40-10-1

40-1
Contents

40-2 191091
 Group 05
ecifications
SERVICE EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS
NOTE: Order tools from the U.S. SERVICE-GARDTM Catalog or from the European Microfiche Tool Catalog (MTC).
Some tools may be available from a local supplier.

Name Use

Volt-Ohm-Amp Meter Check continuity

13-Ton Bearing Puller Set Remove rotor shaft bearing

Soldering Gun (120 Watt Capacity) & Solder Disconnect/Connect Wire Terminals
(Only 60-40 Rosin Core)

Sandpaper (No. 00 or 400-Grit Silicon Carbide Paper) Polish Slip Rings

SPECIFICATIONS

Item: Alternator: Specifications:

Minimum Exposed Brush Length Nippon Denso 35 Amp 5.5 mm (0.22 in.)
Nippon Denso 40 Amp 4.5 mm (0.18 in.)

Maximum Exposed New Brush Length Nippon Denso 35 Amp 13.0 mm (0.50 in.)
Nippon Denso 40 Amp 10.5 mm (0.41 in.)

Sheave Nut Torque Nippon Denso 35 Amp 54 N-m (40 Ib-ft.)

Nippon Denso 40 Amp 69 N-m (51 Ib-ft.)

Belt Deflection All Engines 10-15 mm (0.400-0.600 in.) at

98N (221b) Force Between Sheaves.

ALTERNATOR REPAIR
For complete repair information, the COMPONENT
TECHNICAL MANUAL (CTM) is also required. Use
(10Aug93 or later) to repair all alternators.

40-05-1
Alternator Repair Specifications/Specifications

40-05-2 191091
 Group 10
Alternator Installation
INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
IMPORTANT: If replacing original alternator with
service alternator be sure to order
correct mounting hardware. These
installation procedures apply to the
following engine serial numbers 655
(sn 025201 and below), 755 (sIn -
030103 and below), 855 (sIn -009848
and below), and 955 (sIn -009848 and
below). For all other alternators the
procedures differ slightly. Use
exploded view for reference.

NOTE: For 855's only. If alternator belt cannot be

removed (because top mounting tab hits muffler
when pushed in) grind away back edge to
provide clearance. This has already been done
on engines sin CH3033AO 10453 and above.

1. Remove and discard original 8 mm diameter lower

mounting bolt (A).
35-Amp Alternator
2. The rear (engine block) side of the lower engine
alternator mounting boss is threaded to access a 10
mm bolt or stud (B).
3. (655 & 755) Install the appropriate length 10 mm
pivot bolt and tighten to 27 N-m (20 Ib-ft).
4. (855 & 955) Install stud in lower pivot hole on radiator
side. Slide alternator pivot hole over stud and secure
with nut tightened to 48-m (35 Ib-ft).
5. Install belt on alternator pulley.
6. Belt should deflect approximately 10-15 mm (0.400-
0.600 in.) at 98N (22Ib) force between sheaves. Check
belt tension between fan and alternator using belt
tension gauge and a straight edge.
7. To adjust belt, loosen adjusting nut, apply pressure to
front alternator housing only (near the belt) until tension
is correct, then tighten nut.
8. Tighten remaining hardware. See Section 10 Group
15 Repair Information for additional torque values.
9. Install red wire to top stud terminal (positive
terminal).
10. Plug yellow/brown wire connector into connector at
rear of housing (charging system).
11. Install black wire to bottom bolt at rear of housing M85129
(ground terminal).
40-Amp Alternator
NOTE: There is no separate voltage regulator. The
regulator was built into original 35-amp
alternator and is built into new 40-amp
alternator.

40-10-1
Alternator Installation/Installation

40-10-2
 Section 50
Power Train Repair
Contents
Page Page

Group OS-Hydrostatic Transmission Install PTO Clutch Assemblies ......... 50-10-50

Service Equipment and Tools ............ 50-05-1 Repair Differential Drive Shaft Assembly. 50-10-50
Specifications ........................ 50-05-2 Install Differential Drive Shaft Assembly .. 50-10-51
Remove/Install Sheet Metal Panels ....... 50-05-2 Install Mid PTO Shaft Assembly ........ 50-10-52
Remove Drive Shaft ................... 50-05-3 Install Hi/lo Reduction Shaft Assembly .. 50-10-52
Install Drive Shaft ..................... 50-05-4 Install Mid PTO Transfer Gear
Remove/Install MFWD Drive Shaft ....... 50-05-4 Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-10-52
Remove/Install Charge Pump ........... 50-05-5 Install Front Case Cover Assembly ...... 50-10-53
Remove Hydrostatic Transmission ........ 50-05-6 Install MFWD Gear Case Assembly ..... 50-10-55
Cross-Section View Adjust Backlash-Differential Assembly .. 50-10-56
Hydrostatic Transmission ............ 50-05-10 Install Rear PTO Shaft Assembly ....... 50-10-59
Disassemble Transmission ............ 50-05-11 Install Rear Case Cover Assembly ...... 50-10-59
Cross-Section View-Center Section .... 50-05-18 Install PTO Valve Assemblies .......... 50-10-60
Assemble Transmission ............... 50-05-20 Install PTO Inertia Brake Assembly ..... 50-10-61
Install Transmission .................. 50-05-25 Install Oil Supply System ............. 50-10-62
Service Procedure ................... 50-05-28 Install Final Drive Axle Assemblies ...... 50-10-63
Flush Hydraulic System ............... 50-05-28 Install Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-10-65
Bleed Hydraulic System ............... 50-05-28 Install Hydrostatic Transmission ........ 50-10-65
Install Linkage ...................... 50-10-67
Group 10-Transaxle Install ROPS ....................... 50-10-68
Service Equipment and Tools ............ 50-10-1 Install Rear Wheels .................. 50-10-69
Fabricated Tools ...................... 50-10-1 Install Rockshaft Housing Assembly ..... 50-10-69
Other Materials ....................... 50-10-2 Connect Flow Divider and Selective
Specifications ........................ 50-10-3 Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-10-69
Replace Seals ....................... 50-10-5 Fill Hydraulic System Reservoir ........ 50-10-69
Removal Preparations ................. 50-10-5 Bleed Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-10-70
Disconnect Linkage ................... 50-10-6 Adjust Control Linkages .............. 50-10-70
Remove Transaxle .................... 50-10-8
Remove Final Drive Axles .............. 50-10-9 Group 1S-Final Drives
Cross-Section View .................. 50-10-12 Service Equipment And Tools. . . . . . . . . . . 50-15-1
Repair Oil Supply System ............. 50-10-14 Other Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-15-1
Repair PTO Inertia Brake .............. 50-10-15 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-15-2
Repair PTO Valves ................... 50-10-17 Remove Final Drives .................. 50-15-2
Repair Rear PTO Shaft Assembly ....... 50-10-19 Planetary Carrier End Play Specification . . 50-15-4
Repair Differential Assembly ........... 50-10-20 Disassemble Final Drives .............. 50-15-5
Repair MFWD Gear Case Assembly ..... 50-10-23 Repair Planetary Gear Assembly ........ 50-15-6
Remove Front Gear Case Cover ........ 50-10-26 Remove Brake Camshaft Assembly. . . . . 50-15-10
Remove Gear Shaft Assemblies ........ 50-10-27 Remove Axle Shafts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-15-10
Repair PTO Shift Fork Assembly ........ 50-10-29 Remove Oil Seal Wear Sleeve and
Repair PTO Reduction Shaft Assembly ... 50-10-32 Cover ........................... 50-15-11
Repair Main PTO Shaft Assembly ....... 50-10-33 Repair Axle Housing Assembly ......... 50-15-11
Repair Mid PTO Shaft Assembly ........ 50-10-34 Assemble Axle Housing Assembly ...... 50-15-13
Repair Reduction Shaft Assembly ....... 50-10-35 Install Brake Camshaft Assembly ....... 50-15-14
Repair Range Shift Fork Assembly ...... 50-10-42 Install Planetary Gear Assembly ........ 50-15-14
Repair PTO Clutch Assembly .......... 50-10-43
Continued on next page
Cross-Section View-PTO Clutch ....... 50-10-47
Assemble PTO Clutch ................ 50-10-47

50-1
 Contents

Page

Group 15-Final Drives Continued

Install Final Drives .................. 50-15-16
Install ROPS and Final Assembly ....... 50-15-18
Bleed Hydraulic System. . . . . . .. . . . . . . 50-15-19
Adjust Control Linkages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-15-19

Group 2~Mechanical Front Wheel Drive

(MFWD)
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-20-1
Other Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-20-1
Service Equipment and Tools. . . . . . . . . . . 50-20-2
Remove MFWD Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-20-2
Disassemble Final Drive Case. . . . . . . . . . 50-20-4
Disassemble Spindle Gear Case . . . . . .. 50-20-10
Cross-Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-20-16
Assemble Spindle Gear Case . . . . . . . . . 50-20-18
Disassemble Differential Input Housing . . 50-20-23
Disassemble Differential. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-20-24
Assemble Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-20-26
Assemble Axle Housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-20-30
Adjust Front Axle End-Play ............ 50-20-32
Adjust Front Axle Toe-In. . . . . . . . . .. . . . 50-20-32

Group 25-Power Train Gears and Shafts

Exploded View .......... '.' . . . . . . . . . . 50-25-2

Group 3~Speed Control Linkage

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-30-1
Remove Speed Control Linkage ......... 50-30-1
3-Dimensional View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-30-6
Install Speed Control Linkage ........... 50-30-7

50-2
 Group 05
Hydrostatic Transmission
SERVICE EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS
NOTE: Order tools from the U.S. SERVICE-GARDTM or from the European Microfiche Tool Catalog (MTC).
Some tools may be available from a local supplier.

Name Use

Bushing, Bearing, and Seal Driver Set To service bearings and seals.

2-Jaw Slide Hammer Puller To remove bearings.

Knife-Edge Puller To remove bearings.

Hydraulic Press To service bearings.

Snap Ring Pliers Set To remove snap rings.

Overhead Hoist To remove hydrostatic transmission.

Work Bench Fixture To disassemble hydrostatic transmission.

#4-40 x 1 UNC-2B Cap Screw To remove motor bearings retaining pin (Early Models).

#8-32 x 1 UNC-2B Cap Screw To remove motor bearings retaining pin (Late Models).

50-05-1
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Remove/Install Sheet Metal Panels

SPECIFICATIONS
Item Measurement Specification

Charge Pump Cap Screw Torque 37-50 N-m (27-37Ib-ft)

Charge Inlet Fitting Torque 95-230 N-m (70-170 Ib-ft)

Drive Shaft-to-Engine Cap Screw Torque 49 N-m (35 Ib-ft)

Drive Shaft-to-Hydro Cap Screw Torque 60 N-m (45 Ib-ft)

Neutral Return Lever Bushing Inside Diameter 19.088 0.025 mm

(0.7515 0.001 in)
Drive Shaft Coupler to Hydro Input Torque 60 N-m (45 Ib-ft)
Shaft

Swash Plate End Caps Cap Screw Torque 8-9 N-m (72-84 Ib-in)

Transmission Center Cap Screw Torque 44-55 N-m (33-41 Ib-ft)

Section-to-Housing

Gear-to-Output Shaft Cap Screw Torque (Early Models) 54 N-m (40 Ib-ft)
Castle Nut Torque (Late Models) 109 N-m (80 Ib-ft)
Transmission Attaching Cap Screw Torque 142 N-m (105Ib-ft)

Neutral Return Lever Spring Adjusted Coil Length 133 mm (5.25 in)

Plugs:

3/4-16 SAE O-ring Torque 45-95 N-m (33-70 Ib-ft)

1/4-20 SAE O-ring Torque 4-7 N-m (36-60 Ib-in)

REMOVE AND INSTALL SHEET METAL

PANELS
1. Park tractor safely. Lock park brake, remove key.
2. Turn depth control lever (A) clockwise until it stops.
3. Remove four cap screws. To remove panel (B), lift up
on right rear corner of panel first, then lift left side to
clear head of depth control bolt, and move panel out
from the right side of the tractor.

M43634

50-05-2
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Remove Drive Shaft

NOTE 755/756, 855/856, and 955 tractors have two

additional side cap screws under each fender.

4. Remove panel (A).

NOTE Panel need not be removed for driveshaft and

charge pump repair.

5. Install in reverse order. Be sure depth control lever

aligns with bolt head.

655 Shown

MX.HU,5005,7 -19-160CT91

REMOVE DRIVE SHAFT

1. Loosen two bolts (A) of drive shaft coupler.

2. Remove six cap screws (A).

3. Push driveshaft (B) back to remove isolator (C).

4. Remove driveshaft.

MX,HU,5005,9 -19-160CT91

50-05-3 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Remove/Install MFWD Drive Shaft

INSTALL DRIVE SHAFT

1. Put drive shaft (B) on transmission.

2. Install isolator (C). Be sure raised portion of

unthreaded holes are toward engine.

3. Fasten isolator to engine with three longer cap screws

and fasten drive shaft to isolator with three shorter cap
screws (A). Tighten cap screws to 49 N'm (36 Ib-ft).

MX,HU,5005,10 -19-160CT91

4. Tighten two bolts (A) of drive shaft coupler to 60 N'm

(45 Ib-ft).

REMOVE AND INSTALL MFWD DRIVE

SHAFT

1. Loosen clamps_ Slide front and rear covers away from

universal joints.

MX,HU,5005,11A -19-160CT91

50-05-4 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Remove/Install Charge Pump

2. Drive pin out of front universal joint to remove shaft.

3. To install, align pin holes of drive shaft front U-joint

and MFWD input shaft as you slide the shaft into
position.

4. Fasten with spring pin removed earlier.

5. Fasten front cover in place with band clamps.

6. Fasten rear U-joint of drive shaft to transaxle output

shaft.

7. Fasten rear cover in place with band clamps.

MX,HU,5005,12 -19-160CT91

REMOVE AND INSTALL CHARGE PUMP

NOTE- Orientation of charge pump: Flat on charge pump

housing must be on right-hand side_ If turned
180, pump will not function.

1. Remove two cap screws (A) to remove charge pump.

50-05-5 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Remove Hydrostatic Transmission

2. Remove pin (A). Inspect pin for damage or wear.

Replace if necessary.

3. Inspect machined surface of transmission for severe

scoring. If scoring is noted, replace transmission.

4. Clean and dry all parts. Machined surface of

transmission must be clean.

5. Apply clean transmission oil on all internal parts.

6. Install pin (A). Apply petroleum jelly to pin and shaft to

hold pin in place during installation of charge pump.

7. Be sure O-ring is in place on pump.

8. Torque cap screws (Step 1) to specification.

TORQUE SPECIFICATION

Charge Pump Cap Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 37-50 N'm (27-37 Ib-ft)

14 19160CT91

REMOVE HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION

1. Drain transaxle. Oil capacity is approximately 17 L (4.5

gal).

2. Remove the following:

Drawbar
Sheet Metal Panels (see procedures in this group)
Transmission Drive Shaft (see procedures in this
group)
MFWD Drive Shaft (see procedures in this group).

MX,HU,5005,16 19160CT91

50-05-6 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Remove Hydrostatic Transmission

3. Disconnect spring (A) from lever (8).

4. Remove bolt (C) to disconnect linkage from

transmission (D).

A-Spring C-Bolt
B-Transmission Neutral 0-Transmission
Return Lever

IMPORTANT: Close all openings with caps and plugs

to keep dirt out of the hydraulic
system.

5. Disconnect fitting (A). Loosen clamp on other end and

turn tube (8) to permit transmission removal.

6. Disconnect line (C).

7. Disconnect lines (D).

8. Disconnect wiring (E).

A-Fitting O-Oil Cooler Lines (2)

B-Suction Line E-Neutral Start Wire
C-Steering Line

50-05-7 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Remove Hydrostatic Transmission

9. Fasten a lifting eye to the transmission and hold

transmission with an overhead hoist.

10. Remove two cap screws (A).

11. Move transmission forward so that output gear clears

transaxle, then lower transmission to remove it.

19 19160CT91

12. Remove cap screw and speed control lever (A).

13. Remove cap screw and neutral return lever (8).

14. Remove O-rings (C).

15. Remove three fittings (D).

A-Cap Screw/Speed C-Q-ring

Control Lever D-Fittings
B-Cap Screw/Neutral
Return Lever
MX,HU,5005,20 19 160CT91

16. If neutral start switch is being replaced, be sure to

install spacer (A) between switch and speed control
lever.

MX,HU,5005,21 19160CT91

50-05-8 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Remove Hydrostatic Transmission

17. Inspect neutral return lever rollers (8). Replace them

if they DO NOT turn freely.

~
:a :.... \
18. Inspect bronze bushing in neutral return lever (D) for
excessive wear on the inside diameter. If bushing is
~ '.""'.
'if!!':,
.
." . " ... 'Cl::.. :
.'.
". .
"".
.

being replaced, be sure to align hole in bushing with .'. :e. .

'...",' .
:/tg>~

grease fitting hole in lever. Ream bushing to 19.088

0.025 mm (0.7515 0.001 in.) diameter.

A-Lock nut F-Short Cap Screw

B-Roller (2 used) G-Long Cap Screw
C-Washer (2 used) H-Eccentric Pivot
D-Neutral Return Lever I-Seal Cover (2 used)
E-Thin Washer J-Felt Seal (2 used)

MX,HU,5005,22 -19-160CT91

50-05-9 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Cross-Section View Hydrostatic Transmission

CROSS-SECTION VIEW-HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION

M85125

1-Needle Bearing 8-Drain Plug 14-Seal Guide 21-Pin (2 Used)

2-Seal 9-Bearing Retaining Pin 15-Snap Ring 22-Pump Valve Plate
3-Filter 10-Ball Bearing (2 Used) 16-0-Ring 23-Center Section
4-Pin (2 used) 11-Late Model Motor Shaft 17-Ball Bearing 24-0-Ring
5-Needle Bearing (2 Used) (Early Models Are Not 18-Thrust Plate 25-Gerotor Charge
6-Motor Valve Plate Threaded) 19-Variable Swash Plate Pump
7-Motor Cylinder Block 12-Collar 20-Pump Cylinder Block 26-Gerotor Drive Pin
Assembly With Fixed 13-Pump Shaft Assembly (2 Used) 27-Gasket
Thrust Plate

50-05-10
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Remove Hydrostatic Transmission

DISASSEMBLE TRANSMISSION
1. Thoroughly clean outside surface of transmission
using wire brush and solvent.
2. Install transmission on a bench fixture.
3. Remove and inspect charge pump (A). (See
procedures previously in this section.)
4. Remove filter (8).

M43813

5. (Early Models) Rotate fixture 180. Remove cap

screw (A). and washer (8) to remove output shaft drive
gear (C) (19 teeth).

IMPORTANT: Late model Hydrostatic

Transmissions have cotter pin (F) and
castle nut (0) assembly (Hydrostatic
Oriveshaft Kit AM118962 for positive
gear retention) instead of cap screw
(A) assembly.
M43814

5. (Late Models) Rotate fixture 180. Remove cotter pin

~7
(F). castle nut (D). and washer (E) to remove output
shaft drive gear (C) (19 teeth).

@ ~
~

M85124

50-05-11
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Disassemble Transmission

IMPORTANT: Do not allow internal parts to fall when

removing center section.

6. Rotate fixture 180. Loosen six cap screws (DO NOT

remove). Remove transmission from bench fixture.

7. Put transmission on its side on a work bench and

remove six cap screws, center section and gasket (A).

191

IMPORTANT: Do not nick or scratch lapped or

machined surfaces of the center
section, valve plates or cylinder blocks.

Keep pump and motor components

separate, they are not interchangeable.

8. Remove valve plates (A and 8). If it is necessary to

pry valve plates loose from center section, use a
wooden dowel and pry only at dowel pin grooves.

If valve plates DO NOT come off with center section,

remove valve plates from cylinder block assemblies.

It may be necessary to apply diesel fuel between valve

plate and cylinder block to cut oil film.

MX,HU,5005,27 19160CT91

50-05-12 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Disassemble Transmission

9. Inspect valve plates. Valve plates should be flat, free

of all nicks, burrs, scratches, and erosion around the
ports. The bronze metal should show no scoring,
smearing, or be discolored.

NOTE- Scoring is indicated by fine scratches or grooves

cut into the plate.

When these scratches can be detected by feel,

fingernail or lead pencil, the plate should be
replaced.

MX.HU,5005.28 19160CT91

10. Inspect both bearings in center section. Replace if

necessary. Remove bearing using a 2-jaw slide hammer
puller.

11. For disassembly of center section, see Cross-Section

View-Center Section later in this section.

IMPORTANT: Do not nick or scratch lapped surface

of cylinder blocks.

Piston-to-bore relationship need not be

maintained; keep pump and motor
components separate, they are not
interchangeable.

12. Remove motor and pump cylinder blocks.

MX,HU,5005,30 -19-160CT91

13. Inspect cylinder block assemblies.

IMPORTANT: Do not interchange pistons between

motor and pump cylinder blocks.
Pistons and cylinder blocks are
matched.

Lift piston retainer and pistons from cylinder block.

Check for free movement of pistons in cylinder bores,

MX,HU,5005,31 -19-160CT91

50-05-13 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Disassemble Transmission

14. Remove and inspect all pistons.

Check barrel (8) for scoring, discoloration, or any signs

of separation of slippers.

Check slipper (A) for scoring, smearing, rolled edges and

a full 360 free rotation on barrel.
0

Check lubrication hole (C) for blockage. Clean with

compressed air.

If any component of the piston is damaged, the cylinder

block assembly must be replaced.

MX.HU,5005,32 19-160CT91

15. Remove and inspect both piston retainers.

Check retainer for flatness, nicks, burrs, and

discoloration.

Check area around piston slippers (A) for scoring.

If any part of the piston retainer is damaged, the cylinder

block assembly must be replaced.

50-05-14 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Disassemble Transmission

16. Inspect both cylinder blocks.

Check ball guide area (A) for scoring, wear and damage.

Check nine cylinder bores (8) for burrs and scoring.

Check lapped surface (C) for wear and damage.

Check spring assembly (D) for damage and free axle

movement.

If any part of the cylinder block is damaged, the cylinder

block assembly must be replaced.

IMPORTANT: Do not scratch machined surfaces of

thrust plates or swashplates. Initial
production transmission cases were
machined for 1.02 mm (.040 in) larger
motor thrust plates than pump thrust
plates. A running change to
equal-diameter thrust plates for both
the motor and the pump has been
made. Do not try to install the new
(smaller diameter) thrust plates in
earlier model transmission cases with
the wider motor machined bore.

17. Remove pump and motor thrust plates using a brass

O-ring pick.

Inspect thrust plates. Check plates for scoring and

smeared bronze material.

MX.HU.5005,35 -19-160CT91

50-05-15 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Disassemble Transmission

NOTE' Remove pin (B) using a #4-40 x 1 UNC-2B cap

screw (only on tractors through July, 1990) or a
#8-32 x 1 UNC-2B cap screw (only on tractors
after July, 1990).

18. Remove drain plug (A) and bearing retaining pin (B).
(Keys 8 and 9 of Cross Section View shown earlier in
this section.) Use a slide hammer puller on the head of
the cap screw to remove retaining pin (B).

19. Remove motor shaft assembly (C).

MX,HU,5005,36 19160CT91

20. Inspect bearings, replace if necessary.

IMPORTANT: Be sure to hold shaft while removing

bearing.

21. Remove bearings (B) and collar (C) using a 1 in.

driver disk (A), knife-edge puller, and a hydraulic press.

22. Remove snap ring (A), seal guide (B), O-ring (C), and
pump shaft assembly (D).

MX,HU,5005,38 19160CT91

50-05-16 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Disassemble Transmission

23. Inspect bearing, replace if necessary.

IMPORTANT: Be sure to hold shaft while removing

bearing.

24. Remove bearing using a 1 in. driver disk (A),

knife-edge puller, and a hydraulic press.

25. Remove cap screws to remove end caps (A and 8).

Inspect bearings; if bearings are worn or damaged,

replace the end cap. Remove O-ring (C).

Inspect control shaft seal, replace as required.

26. Remove swashplate (D).

19-160CT91

50-05-17 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Cross-Section View-Center Section

CROSS-SECTION VIEW-CENTER SECTION

A-Oil Cooler Bypass Relief F-Main Relief and Inlet J-Charge Relief Valve O-Reverse Flow Check
Valve Check K-Shims (as required) Valve
B-Plugs (4 used) G-Plug (2 used) L-Spring P-Oil Filter Bypass Valve
C-Spring H-Spring (2 used) M-Valve (4 used) Q-Spring
D-To Oil Cooler I-Relief Valve Assembly N-Spring R-Charge Pump Inlet
E-From Oil Cooler

IMPORTANT: Return all shims, springs and valves Apply clean transmission oil on all internal parts when
to their original port. assembling relief valves and check valves. After
assembly and installation, check for correct operation.
Remove charge relief valve (J); remove plug, shims (See Section 250.)
(I) if equipped, spring, and valve. Remove the
remaining valves as required. Inspect valves and
seats for damage. Valves must slide freely in bore.

MX,HU,5005,41A 19160CT91

50-05-18 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Cross-Section View-Center Section

M42208

50-05-19 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Assemble Transmission

ASSEMBLE TRANSMISSION

1. Clean and dry all parts.

2. Use new O-rings, seals, and gaskets when assembling

the transmission.

3. Before assembly, apply clean transmission oil on all

internal parts.

4. Install swashplate (B).

5. Install seal (D) with spring side toward the inside of

transmission.
A-End Cap C-End Cap
IMPORTANT: Do not damage seal when installing B-Swashplate D-Seal
end cap over the control shaft. Replace
end cap (A) when plastic wears through
into the bronze backing.

6. Carefully install end cap (C) over control shaft. Install

cap screws.

7. Install end cap (A) and cap screws. Tighten all cap
screws to 8-9 N'm (72-84 Ib-in).

8. Use a 1 in. driver disk (A), knife-edge puller, and a

press to push pump shaft into bearing until it contacts
the shaft shoulder. It.

~.

MX,HU,5005,43 19160CT91

50-05-20 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Assemble Transmission

9. Install pump shaft assembly (D), O-ring (C), seal guide

(8), and snap ring (A).

A-Snap Ring D-Pump Shaft

B-Seal Guide Assembly
C-Q-Ring

MX,HU.5005,44 19160CT91

10. Use a 1 in. driver disk (A), knife-edge puller, and a

press to push motor shaft into bearings (8) and collar
(C) until they are on the shaft shoulder.

11. Install motor shaft assembly (C), retaining pin (8),

and set screw (A) and tighten.

MX,HU,5005,46 19160CT91

50-05-21 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Assemble Transmission

IMPORTANT: Do not nick or scratch lapped surface

of cylinder blocks. Piston-to-bore
relationship need not be maintained.

Do not scratch machined surfaces of

thrust plates or swash plates. Initial
production transmission cases were
machined for 1.02 mm (.040 in) larger
motor thrust plates than pump thrust
plates. A running change to
equal-diameter thrust plates for both
the motor and the pump has been
made. Do not try to install the new
(smaller diameter) motor thrust plates
in earlier model transmission cases
with the wider motor machined bore.

12. Install pump and motor thrust plates.

13. Install pistons and piston retainer.

Lift piston retainer and piston from cylinder block. Check

for free movement of pistons in cylinder block before
installing in housing.

MX,HU,5005,48 -19-160CT91

14. Install pump and motor cylinder blocks.

'"'"
C!l
:::J

'?
z
=?

o
'"'"~
::;:
MX,HU,5005,49 -19-160CT91

50-05-22 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Assemble Transmission

IMPORTANT: Do not nick or scratch lapped or

machined surfaces of the center
section, valve plates or cylinder block.

Keep pump and motor components

separate. They are not interchangeable.

15. Use a 1-5/16 in. driver disk (A) to install two needle
bearings (8). Drive bearings into housing until they are
approximately 3 mm (7/64 in.) above the surface of the
housing.

16. For assembly of center section, see Cross-Section

View-Center Section shown earlier in this section.

MX,HU,5005,50 19160CT91

17. Put clean hydrostatic oil on valve plates and housing

surface.

IMPORTANT: PUMP VALVE PLATE has TWO slotted

ports (D).

MOTOR VALVE PLATE has FOUR

slotted ports (C).

18. Install pump valve plate (8) and motor valve plate
(A) over the protruding bearings and align slots on back
sides of plates with pins (E) in housing.

A-Motor Valve Plate D-Slotted Ports (Pump)

B-Pump Valve Plate E-Center Section Pins
C-Slotted Ports
(Motor)

-19-160CT91

50-05-23 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Assemble Transmission

IMPORTANT: Use extreme care when assembling the

center section, valve plates and
cylinder block to avoid dropping,
nicking, or scratching lapped surfaces.

19. Install center section and gasket (A) on housing and

install six cap screws. Tighten cap screws evenly in a
crossing pattern until they are snug-DO NOT torque
them at this time.

NOTE: Center section will seem springy, this is because

the springs inside the cylinder blocks are being
compressed.

20. Install transmission upright in bench fixture.

IMPORTANT: Check for proper internal assembly by

slowly rotating pump, motor and
control shaft while tightening cap
screws.

21. Tighten cap screws to 44-55 N'm (33-41 Ib-ft) , also

in a crossing pattern.

22. Install new filter (8).

23. Install charge pump (A). (See Remove and Install

Charge Pump earlier in this section.)

MX,HU,SOOS,S3 19160CT91

50-05-24 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Install Transmission

24. Turn transmission and bench fixture over to install

output drive gear (C) (19 teeth) on output shaft.

NOTE: If Hydrostatic Driveshaft Kit AM118962 (for

positive gear retention) is used go to step 27.

25. (Early Models) Install washer (B) and cap screw

(A). Use John Deere LOCTITE Thread Lock and
Sealer on cap screw threads.
26. Tighten cap screw to 54 N-m (40 Ib-tt).
27. (Late Models) Install washer (E) and castle nut (D).
Tighten castle nut to 109 N-m (80 Ib-tt). If needed, M43814
continue tightening castle nut until slot in castle nut lines
up with hole in shaft.

IMPORTANT: If the cotter pin is installed as

described it will not contact the
transmission case.
T
28. Install cotter pin (F). Seat head of cotter pin down
in slot of castle nut by tapping with hammer.
29. Bend both ends of cotter pin over end of shaft.
30. Tap ends of cotter pin down tight against the end of @
the shaft. (Cotter pin should have minimal movement, it M85124

should be tight in shatt and castle nut).

INSTALL TRANSMISSION
CD
1. Assemble neutral return lever parts (A thru J).

A-LockNut
B-Roller (2 used)
F-Short Cap Screw
G-Long Cap Screw
l' j,
C-Washer (2 used) H-Eccentric Pivot
D-Neutral Return Lever I-Seal Cover (2 used)
E-Thin Washer J-Felt Seal (2 used)

M43679

2. Install neutral return lever. Fasten it with cap screw

(B).
3. Install speed control lever. Fasten it with cap screw
(A).
4. Install new O-rings (C). Apply petroleum jelly to hold
O-rings in place while installing transmission.
5. Install three fittings (D).

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Flow Divider Fitting--34 Nom (25 Ib-ft)

Swivel Elbow Line & Nut-27 Nom (20 Ib-ft) M43678
Union Connectors Flow Divider-47 Nom (35 Ib-ft) A-Speed Control Lever Cap Screw
B-Neutral Return Lever Cap Screw
PTO Valve Fitting-49 Nom (36 Ib-ft)
C-O-Rings
Charge Inlet Line Fitting-95-230 Nom (70-170 Ib-ft) D-Fitting

50-05-25
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Install Transmission

6. Fasten a lifting eye to the transmission and hoist it up

through the frame. Be sure control levers are positioned
as shown.

MX,HU,5005,57 19160CT91

7. Be sure coupler (A) is in place in transaxle.

8. Turn axles or transmission input shaft to align splines

and gears as the transmission is moved into place. Be
careful not to damage the D-ring surfaces.

9. Install two cap screws and thick washers (A). Tighten

cap screws to 142 N'm (105 Ib-ft).

MX,HU,5005,59 19160CT91

50-05-26 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Install Transmission

10. Be sure O-rings are in place on all fittings. Connect

two hydraulic lines (D).

11. Install suction line (B). Tighten fitting (A), then tighten
clamp on other end of tube.

12. Connect line (C).

13. Connect wiring (E). Be sure wire does not interfere

with transmission lock linkage.

A-Fitting D-Oil Cooler Lines (2)

B-Suction Line E-Neutral Start Wire
C-Steering Line

14. Install parts (E thru K) to connect transmission

control linkage (C).

15. Connect spring (A) to neutral return lever (B). Adjust

coil length to 133 mm (5.25 in.).

16. Install the following:

Transmission Drive Shaft (see procedures at the front

of this group)
Sheet Metal Panels (see procedures at the front of this
group)
MFWD driveshaft (see procedures at the front of this
group).

A-Spring G-Long Spacer

B-Neutral Return Lever H-Reverse Control
C-Transmission Link
Control Linkage (E I-Short Spacer co
co
('J
thru K) J-Hydro Swash plate ::J

D-Transmission Bracket '?
E-Cap Screw K-Lock Nut z
~
F-Forward Control
Link

MX,HU,SOOS,61 -19-160CT91

50-05-27 191091
 Hydrostatic Transmission/Service, Flush, and Hydraulic Bleed Procedures

SERVICE PROCEDURE
CAUTION: Transmission control lever
1. Fill hydrostatic transmission with 17 L (4.5 gal) of may be out of neutral adjustment. Lift
LOW VISCOSITY HY-GARD-JDM J20D drive wheels off ground and support
transmission and hydraulic oil. See page 10-20-7. tractor frame on jack stands before you
start the engine.
2. Adjust transmission control linkage.
(See Section 250, Group 10.) Be sure MFWD is in neutral (if equipped.)

FLUSH HYDRAULIC SYSTEM IMPORTANT: Do not stroke hydrostatic pedals or

operate hydraulics.
NOTE: Average capacity of oil in compact tractors is
approximately 5 gallons. Changing oil is less 4. Clean sump screens, wipe debris from bottom of
costly than the labor to disassemble and clean case or use magnet to pick up chips, install new filter
all components which require oil. Also, if one (FILL WITH OIL). Idle unit 20-30 minutes.
major component failure can be avoided, it will 5. Change oil, clean sump screen, install new filter (fill
more than make up for the oil cost. with oil).

After installing a repaired or replacement part, follow 6. Run unit at slow idle for 20-30 minutes to circulate oil
this run-in procedure to assure that debris (mainly from through filter for cleaning.
failure of internal component) is purged from the 7. Run engine at fast idle. Operate all hydraulic
hydraulic system without disassembly of all functions. Drive unit in all speeds forward and reverse
components. whether gear or hydro unit. Also operate PTO (front and
rear if equipped).
1. Replace failed component (fill with clean oil when
installing). Depending on failed component(s) and 8. Change oil, clean sump screen, install new filter
degree of disassembly, flush system by pouring or (FILL WITH OIL).
spraying gears, bearings, etc. with diesel fuel. Do this 9. Run engine at slow idle for 20-30 minutes to trap any
through top or rear covers, as situation requires. Check debris in filter that may have been loosened during
for rough bearings or damaged gear teeth. step 7.

2. Drain and flush all oil from cylinders, hoses, pumps, 10. Run at fast idle, operate unit at all speeds forward
and any place there is oil. and reverse. Also engage front and rear PTO (if
equipped).
CAUTION: Do not start engine with diesel 11. Operate all hydraulic functions as in step 7. Then
fuel in transmission case or hydraulic replace filter only.
reservoir system. 12. Test all hydraulic and hydrostatic functions for
pressure and flow per technical manual specifications.
3. Put 4-5 gallons of diesel fuel in sump area, push Operate unit and check performance of all functions.
tractor forward and backward in neutral to flush debris
13. Have customer operate unit 5-10 hours. Change oil
from gears. DRAIN OUT SEDIMENT AND ALL DIESEL
and filter, clean sump screen.
FUEL.

BLEED HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

After installing a repaired or placement part, follow this 6. Return steering wheel to straight forward. Travel
run-in procedure to assure that air is purged from the vehicle forward about twenty feet then make two hard
hydraulic system. left turns.
1. Start engine and idle it for ten minutes. 7. Then make two hard right turns.
2. Run engine at high idle for one minute. 8. Travel vehicle in reverse for ten feet.
3. Turn steering wheel full left and hold for five seconds. 9. Cycle all hydraulic functions three times.
4. Turn steering wheel to straight forward for ten 10. Shut engine off and inspect hydraulic components
seconds. for leaks.
5. Turn steering wheel full right, hold for five seconds. 11. Fill system as required with specified oil.

50-05-28
 Group 10
Transaxle

SERVICE EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS

NOTE: Order tools from the U.S. SERVICE-GARDTM Catalog or from the European Microfiche Tool Catalog
(MTC). Some tools may be available from a local supplier.

Name Use

8ushing,8earing and Seal Driver Set To service bearings and seal.

Press To service bearings.

Knife-Edge Puller To remove bearings.

Magnet Extraction Tool To remove inside portion of PTO valve.

Snap Ring Pliers Set To remove snap rings.

6mm Cap Screw To remove rear portion of PTO valve.

Bmm Cap Screws To remove inertia brake piston and differential

carrier.

Floor Jack Stands To support tractor frame.

Overhead Hoist To remove rear wheels, hydrostatic

transmission, ROPS and transaxle.

FABRICATED TOOLS

Make clutch piston compression tool from 50 mm (2 in.)

inside diameter pipe approximately 65 mm (2-1/2 in.)
long. Tool is used in a vise to compress the PTO clutch
piston spring so the snap ring can be removed or
installed.

A-40 mm (1-5/8 in.) 8-32 mm (1-1/4 in.)

MX,HU,5010,2 19-160CT91

Pipe (A) is used to compress the spring to remove the

snap ring on the differential lock shaft. The inside pipe
diameter is 25 mm (1 in.). Make a 20 mm (3/4 in.) notch
in the end of the pipe. Pipe length is not important.

Pipe (8) is used to install the snap ring on the ~

"-
w
differential lock shaft. The inside pipe diameter is 20 mm en
<;>
(13/16 in.). Pipe length is not important. z
:::;>

MX,HU,5010,3 -19-160CT91

50-10-1 191091
 TransaxlelOther Materials

Steel plate (A) is used to attach to the transaxle case. A

magnetic base gauge holder is then attached to the
steel plate. Attach steel plate to case with two M12 cap
screws (8). Drill two 13 mm (1/2 in.) holes as shown.
A-Steel Plate
8-M12 Cap Screws (2 used)
C-Two 13 mm (1/2 in.) holes,
213 mm (8-3/8 in.) apart

M43093

OTHER MATERIALS
Number Name Use
T43511 John Deere LOCTITE Clean threads
Clean and Cure Primer

T43512 John Deere LOCTITE Thread Retain differential cap screws

Lock and Sealer (Medium Strength)

LOCTITE is a trademark of
the LOCTITE Corp.

50-10-2
 TransaxlelSpecifications

SPECIFICATIONS

Item Measurement Specification

PTO Inertia Brake Spring

Inner Spring (All) Minimum Free Length 61.6 mm (2.425 in)

Minimum Working Load 47.5 mm at 327 N (1.870 in. at 73 Ib)

Outer Spring Minimum Free Length 64.3 mm (2.531 in)

(655/755/756/855/856)
Minimum Working Load 47.5 mm at 700.5 N (1.870 in. at
157.5 Ib)

Outer Spring (955) Minimum Free Length 60.5 mm (2.382 in)

Minimum Working Load 44.5 mm at 1117 N (1.75 in. at 251 Ib)

Separator Plates Minimum Thickness 1.0 mm (0.039 in)

Brake Disks Minimum Thickness 1.9 mm (0.075 in)

Clutch Pack-to-Face Maximum Distance 43 mm (1.69 in)

Differential Cap Screws Torque 26 Nm (19 Ib-ft)

PTO Clutch

Separator Plate-to-Cylinder Maximum Distance 4.7 mm (0.185 in)

Top Plate Minimum Thickness 2.9 mm (0.114 in)

Clutch Disk Minimum Thickness 1.9 mm (0.075 in)

Separator Plate Minimum Thickness 1.0 mm (0.039 in)

Piston Return Spring Minimum Free Length 29 mm (1.14 in)

Minimum Working Load 17.5 mm at 540 N (0.689)n. at 121 Ib)

Differential Shaft Bearing Retainer Cap Screw Torque 26 Nm (19 Ib-ft)

Front Cover Assembly Torque

M12 Cap Screw 90 Nm (66 Ib-ft)

M10 Cap Screw 50 Nm (37 Ib-ft)

M8 Cap Screw 26 Nm (19 Ib-ft)

MFWD Gear Assembly Cover Cap Screw Torque 26 Nm (19 Ib-ft)

Continued on next page

50-10-3 191091
 TransaxlelSpecificaffons

Item Measurement Specification

Differential Ring Gear Backlash 0.15-0.21 mm (0.006-0.008 in)

Case-to-Differential Carrier Cap Torque 26 Nm (19 Ib-ft)

Screw

Rear Cover Cap Screws Torque

M 12 Cap Screw 90 Nm (66 Ib-ft)

M10 Cap Screw 50 Nm (37 Ib-ft)

PTO Valve Cover Cap Screw Torque 26 Nm (19 Ib-ft)

PTO Shield Cap Screw Torque 90 Nm (66 Ib-ft)

Final Drives

M 10 Cap Screws Torque 52 Nm (38 Ib-ft)

M16 Cap Screws W/Out ROPS Torque 187 Nm (138 Ib-ft)

PTO Valve Line Fitting Torque 49 Nm (36 Ib-ft)

Transaxle-To-Frame Cap Screw Torque 142 Nm (105 Ib-ft)

Transmission-To-Transaxle Cap Screw Torque 142 Nm (105 Ib-ft)

Drive Shaft-To-Engine Cap Screw Torque 49 Nm (36 Ib-ft)

Drive Shaft-To-Transmission Cap Screw Torque 60 Nm (45 Ib-ft)

ROPS Mounting Bolts Torque 215 Nm (159 Ib-ft)

Rear Wheel Lug Bolts Torque 115 Nm (85 Ib-ft)

-19~160CT91

50-10-4 191091
 Transax!eIRemova! Preparations

REPLACE SEALS

The transaxle front cover must be removed for the

following seal replacement:

Mid PTO Drive Shaft Seal (MB00600).

The transaxle rear cover must be removed for the

following seal replacement:

Rear PTO Drive Shaft Seal (CH14620).

The transaxle MFWD housing must be removed for the

following seal replacement:

MFWD Drive Shaft Seal (CH14765).

MX,HU,5010,7A 19160CT91

REMOVAL PREPARATIONS

1. Remove rockshaft housing. (See Section 70, Group

15.)

2. Remove drawbar.

3. Remove drain plug (A) to drain transaxle. Oil capacity

is approximately 17 L (4.5 gal).

4. Put wedge blocks in front of and behind both front

wheels.

5. Loosen rear wheel bolts.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT put lifting device under

transaxle or transaxle case could
become damaged.

6. Raise tractor and support both sides of frame in front

of transaxle with jack stands.

7. Remove rear wheels.

MX,HU,5010,9 19160CT91

50-10-5 191091
 TransaxlelDisconnect Linkage

8. Support ROPS with overhead hoist then remove four

bolts (A) and all washers from each side to remove
ROPS.

MX.HU.501O.10 19160CT91

DISCONNECT LINKAGE

1. Remove cotter pin and washer to disconnect right

brake link (A).

2. Remove cotter pin to disconnect range shifter link (8).

Late model tractors also have a stop link connected to
this range shifter arm.

3. Disconnect spring (C).

4. Remove nut and cap screw to disconnect

transmission control linkage (D). Right Side View

A-Brake Link 0-Transmission

B-Range Shifter Link Control Linkage
C-Spring

11 19160CT91

50-10-6 191091
 TransaxlelDisconnect Linkage

5. Remove cotter pin and washer to disconnect brake

link (A).

6. Remove cotter pin and drilled pin to disconnect PTO

control link (8).

7. Remove cotter pin and washer to disconnect PTO

selector link (C).

8. Remove cotter pin, washer, and drilled pin to

disconnect differential lock link (D).

9. Disconnect electrical leads (E and F).

A-Brake Link E-PTO Magnet Switch

B-PTO Control Link F-PTO Lamp Switch
C-PTO Selector Link
O-Oifferential Lock
Link

Left Side View

10. Remove cotter pin and washer to disconnect MFWD

shift link (A).

11. Remove the following: (see procedures in Group 05

of this section)

MFWD Drive Shaft

Transmission Drive Shaft
Hydrostatic Transmission.

Left Front View

MX,HU,5010,13A 19160CT91

50-10-7 191091
 TransaxlelRemove Transaxle

REMOVE ROCKSHAFT HOUSING ASSEMBLY

To remove rockshaft housing, see Section 70, Group 15.

BE SURE to protect transaxle internal components by

covering the opening with a shop cloth,

MX,HU,5010,13B 1916OCT91

DISCONNECT FLOW DIVIDER AND

SELECTIVE CONTROL VALVES

To disconnect flow divider valve and selective control

valves, see Section 70, Group 10,

REMOVE TRANSAXLE

1, Fasten two lifting eyes to transaxle and hold it in

place using a load-positioning sling and hoist.

MX,HU,5010,14A 19160CT91

50-10-8 191091
 TransaxlelRemove Final Drive Axles

2. Remove seven cap screws (A).

3. Remove three cap screws (8).

4. Remove bracket (C).

5. Disconnect PTO valve line (A).

6. Close all openings with caps and plugs to keep dirt

out of the hydraulic system.

7. Move transaxle assembly away from frame.

8. Safely support transaxle before continuing with

following procedures.

MX,HU,5010,16A 19160CT91

REMOVE FINAL DRIVE AXLES

1. Remove differential cap screws (A).

2. Remove short spacer (8) and long spacers (C).

Spacers are only used when the ROPS has been
removed on some models.

Right Side View

MX,HU,5010,17A 19-160CT91

50-10-9 191091
 TransaxlelRemove Final Drive Axles

3. Remove spring pin (A) on left side. Remove lever.

4. Remove final drive assemblies.

Left Side View

MX,HU,5010,1BA 19160CT91

5. Keep dowels (A) in their respective holes.

6. Remove washer (8) from right-side of differential lock

shaft.

7. Pull final drive pinion shaft, two plates, and two brake
disks from transaxle.

Right Side View

19 -19-160CT91

50-10-10 191091
TransaxlelRemove Final Drive Axles

50-10-11 191091
 Transax/eICross-Section View

CROSS-SECTION VIEW-TRANSAXLE

1-Main PTO/Hydraulic Pump 9-MFWD Shift Collar 19-PTO Clutch Drive Gear 28-Hydraulic Pump Coupler
Drive Shaft W/Splined 10-MFWD Drive Gear 20-PTO Clutch Pack (Disk 29-PTO Main Input Shaft
Collar 11-MFWD Output Drive and Plates) Drive Gear
(Engine Speed Input) Shaft 21-PTO Clutch Piston 30-Clutch Shaft Rear PTO
2-Hydro/Transaxle Input 12-MFWD Output Drive Gear 22-Clutch Shaft Sealing Drive Gear
Drive Gear 13-Hi-Range Input Gear Rings 31-Clutch Shaft Mid/Rear
3-Hillo Reduction/Speed 14-Hydraulic Reservoir 23-Brake Pack (Disks and PTO Shift Collar
Shaft Screen Plates) 32-Clutch Shaft Mid PTO
4-lo-Range Reduction Gear 15-Rear PTO Output Drive 24-Rear PTO Reduction Input Drive Gear
5-Hi-Range Reduction Gear Gear Shaft 33-Mid PTO Output Drive
6-Hi-lo Shift Collar 16-Rear PTO Drive Shaft 25-PTO Brake Piston Gear
7-lo-Range Input Gear 17-Rear PTO Transfer Gear 26-PTO Brake Springs 34-Mid PTO Transfer Gear
8-Differential Drive Shaft 18-Rear PTO Reduction 27-Main Hydraulic Pump 35-Mid PTO Drive Shaft
With Pinion Gear Gear

MX,HU,5010,20 -19-160CT91

50-10-12 191091
Transax/e/Cross-Section View

-19-160CT91

50-10-13 191091
 TransaxlelRepair Oil Supply System

REPAIR OIL SUPPLY SYSTEM

1. Remove supply tube (A).

NOTE: Inspect supply tube rubber boots for cracks, cuts,

hardening, or damaged clamps-replace if
necessary.

2. Remove four cap screws (8) to remove PTO shield

(C).

3. Remove filter screen adapter from rear of case.

MX.HU,5010,23 -19-160CT91

4. Pull out filter screen. Remove and discard O-ring (A).

Clean filter screen thoroughly in approved solvent, blow
dry with compressed air, and examine closely for
damage-replace if required.

MX,HU,5010,24 -19-160CT91

50-10-14 191091
 TransaxlelRepair PTO Inertia Brake

5. Remove main hydraulic pump. See Section 70, Group

05 for pump repair.

MX,HU.5010,25 19160CT91

6. Remove pump drive coupling.

REPAIR PTO INERTIA BRAKE

A CAUTION: Inertia brake cover is spring loaded.

Use caution when removing cap screws.

1. Loosen the five cap screws from the cover. Leave

one cap screw slightly engaged, and remove remaining
cap screws. Carefully remove the last cap screw while
holding the cover.

MX,HU,5010,27 -19-160CT91

50-10-15 191091
 TransaxlelRepair PTO Inertia Brake

2. Remove outside spring (A) and inside spring (8).

Check the spring free length and working load.

3. Keep dowel pins (C) in their respective holes.

4. Replace gasket (D).

A-Outside Spring C-Pin (2 used)

B-Inside Spring D-Gasket

INERTIA BRAKE SPRING SPECIFICATIONS

Inner Spring-all models Minimum free length 61.6 mm (2.425 in.)

Minimum working load 47.5 mm at 327 N
(1.870 in. at 73 lb.)

Outer Spring- Minimum free length 64.3 mm (2.531 in.)

(655/755/756/855/856) Minimum working load 47.5 mm at 700.5 N
(1.870 in. at 157.5 lb.)

Outer Spring-(955) Minimum free length 60.5 mm (2.382 in.)

Minimum working load 44.5 mm at 1117 N
(1.75 in. at 251 lb.)

5. Pull the inertia brake piston out using an 8 mm cap

screw.

6. Replace piston O-rings (A).

MX,HU,5010,29 19160CT91

50-10-16 191091
 Transaxle/Repair PTa Valves

7. Measure the distance between the inertia brake clutch

pack and the face of the housing. If the measurement is
more than 43 mm (1.693 in.), measure each of the disks
and plates.

The inertia brake separator plates must measure a

minimum thickness of 1.0 mm (0.039 in.) each.

The inertia brake disks must measure a minimum

thickness of 1.9 mm (0.075 in.) each.

8. Replace separator plates or disks as required.

PTO INERTIA BRAKE SPECIFICATIONS

Clutch Pack to Housing Face .............. 43 mm (1.69 in.)

maximum
Brake Plate ......................... 1.0 mm (0.039 in.)
minimum thickness
Brake Disk .......................... 1.9 mm (0.075 in.)
minimum thickness

9. Remove six disks and seven separator plates on 655,

755/756, and 855/856 tractors. Remove seven disks
and eight separator plates on 955 tractors.

MX,HU,5010,31 19160CT91

REPAIR PTO VALVES

1. Remove nine cap screws to remove PTO valve cover

(A).

MX,HU,5010,32 19-160CT91

50-10-17 191091
 TransaxlelRepair PTO Valves

2. Remove lube relief valve (A).

3. Remove cap screw and retaining plate (8). Push

shifter arm (C) straight into the transaxle case to
disengage internal shifter arm from lower valve.

MX,HU,5010,33 -19-160CT91

4. Remove PTO switch and holder (A). Pull out lower

valve assembly.

5. Remove snap ring (8).

6. Remove rear portion of PTO valve (C) with a 6 mm

cap screw. Pull out inside portion of valve with a
magnet.

7. Disassemble upper and lower valve assemblies.

Inspect and repair as required.

MX,HU,5010,35 -19-160CT91

50-10-18 191091
 Transaxle/Repair Rear PTa Shaft Assembly

REPAIR REAR PTO SHAFT ASSEMBLY

1. Remove seven cap screws from transaxle rear case

cover.

2. Remove rear case cover with PTO shaft assembly.

Keep two dowel pins (A) in their respective holes.

3. Inspect PTO shaft assembly, if parts show wear

replace them.

4. Remove PTO shaft assembly through the inside of

rear case cover.

MX,HU,5010,37 -19-160CT91

50-10-19 191091
 TransaxlelRepair Differential Assembly

5. Disassemble shaft as required. Inspect oil seal wear

sleeve (A). Replace as required.

6. Install rear case bearing (8) on shaft from smooth end

of shaft.

7. Install washer (C) and snap ring (D) on shaft.

,
~ i\
~~
8. Install oil seal wear sleeve (A) on shaft from splined
end with chamfer towards the bearing (8). ~ ..

9. Install first snap ring (E), 24-tooth rear PTO final drive
gear (F), and second snap ring (E).

10. Install bearing (G) on end of shaft.

11. See INSTALL REAR PTO SHAFT AND COVER later

in this section.

A-Oil Seal Wear Sleeve E-Snap Ring

B-Case Bearing F-Orive Gear
C-Washer G-Bearing
D-snap Ring

REPAIR DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY

1. Remove six cap screws from left-side differential

carrier.

MX,HU,5010,39 19160CT91

2. Jack differential carrier from transaxle case using two

8 mm cap screws through special threaded holes (A).

MX,HU,5010,40 -19-160CT91

50-10-20 191091
 TransaxlelRepair Differential Assembly

3. Remove differential assembly (A) by sliding assembly

to the left side to clear bearing (8) from right wall of
case and shift collar (C) from shifter fork.

4. Remove bearing (C) using a knife-edge puller.

5. Remove shift collar (D).

6. Remove ten cap screws (A) to remove ring gear (8).

A-Cap Screws C-Bearing

B-Ring Gear D-Shift Collar

MX,HU,S010,42 -19-160CT91

50-10-21 191091
 TransaxlelRepair Differential Assembly

7. Drive spring pin from cross shaft (A) to disassemble

differential pinion gears (D), bevel washers (E), locking
side gear (C), side gear (G) and flat thrust washers (8).

8. Inspect spring pin, cross shaft, pinion gears, side

gears, and washers for wear or damage-replace if
necessary.

9. Install side gears (C and G) (16 teeth) with flat thrust

washers (8) inside housing.

A-Pinion Shaft E-Bevel Thrust Washer

B-Flat Thrust Washer F-Differential Carrier
C-Right Side Gear G-Left Side Gear
D-Pinion Gears

10. Install pinion gears (A) (10 teeth) between side gears
and slide bevel thrust washers (8) between pinion gears
(A) and differential housing.

MX,HU,5010,44 -19-160CT91

50-10-22 191091
 TransaxlelRepair MFWD Gear Case Assembly

11. Install pinion cross shaft (A) and fasten with spring
pin (8).

MX.HU.5010,45 -19-160CT91

12_ Clean threads of cap screws and threaded ring gear

(41 teeth for 655, 755/756, and 855/856 tractors-39
teeth for 955 tractors) with clean and cure primer.

13_ Apply medium strength thread lock and sealer to the

cap screw threads.

14. Install ten cap screws. Tighten to 26 N'm (19 Ib-ft).

15. Install shift collar (A).

16. Install bearing (8).

MX,HU,5010,47 -19-160CT91

REPAIR MFWD GEAR CASE ASSEMBLY

NOTE: You DO NOT have to remove and disassemble

transaxle to repair MFWD output shaft seal and
gear assembly. It can be done without fully
disassembling the transaxle.

1. Remove five cap screws (A) to remove MFWD gear

drive assembly.

MX,HU,5010,48 -19-160CT91

50-10-23 191091
 TransaxlelRepair MFWD Gear Case Assembly

2. Keep alignment pins (A) in place.

MX.HU.5010,49 19160CT91

3. Remove gear assembly from housing by rotating shift

lever and shift collar follower (A) to allow clearance.

NOTE: MFWD housing oil seal (A) must be replaced

from inside the housing.

4. Inspect housing oil seal (A)-replace if necessary.

MX.HU.5010.51 -19-160CT91

50-10-24 191091
 TransaxlelRepair MFWD Gear Case Assembly

5. Use a knife-edge puller to remove bearings (A)-oil

seal wear sleeve (8) will come off with bearing.

NOTE: Detent balls (F) are spring loaded in the shaft.

Do not lose them when removing shift collar (C).

6. Slide shift collar (C) off splines slowly so you can

capture detent balls (F) and spring (G).

A-Bearing (2) E-Washer

B-Oil Seal Wear Sleeve F-Detent Ball (2)
C-Shlft Collar G-Spring
D-Gear H-Shaft

7. Install bearing (A) and oil seal wear sleeve (8), with
chamfer towards the bearing, over the small-diameter
splined end of shaft.

8. Install spring with two detent balls (C) into hole in

large-diameter splines.

9. Slide shift collar with raised side (D) on the

large-diameter splines as you depress the two detent
balls.

10. Install MFWD output drive gear (26 teeth for 655
tractors; 20 teeth for 755/756, 855/856, and 955
tractors), washer, and bearing on the smooth machined
surface of the shaft (see orientation of gear in two A-Bearing C-Detent Ball (2 used)
illustrations of previous module). B-Oil Seal D-Shift Collar

MX,HU,5010,53 19160CT91

50-10-25 191091
 TransaxlelRemove Front Gear Case Cover

REMOVE FRONT GEAR CASE COVER

1. Remove 17 cap screws (A) from front transaxle gear

case cover.

Transaxle With MFWD Shown

2. Remove front gear case cover (A) by rotating shifter

arm (8) to clear the shift fork notch; but allow the shift
fork to remain with the transaxle assembly.

MX,HU,5010,55 19160CT91

50-10-26 191091
 TransaxlelRemove Gear Shaft Assemblies

REMOVE GEAR SHAFT ASSEMBLIES

NOTE: All shafts are shown with the front case bearings
attached-the bearings may remain with the front
case cover as it is removed.

1. Identify all gear and shaft assemblies listed below

before doing any disassembly.

A-PTO Main Shaft F-Differentlal Drive

Assembly Shaft With MFWD
B-PTO Reduction Shaft Drive Gear Assembly
Assembly G-Mid PTO Shaft
C-PTO Shift Fork and Assembly
Lever Assembly H-Transfer Gear
D-Differential Lock Assembly
Lever Assembly I-PTO Clutch Shaft
E-Reduction Gear Assembly
Assembly

60CT91

2. Remove the transfer gear and shaft with front and

rear bearings.

MX,HU,5010,57 19160CT91

3. Remove the reduction shaft and gears and front and

rear bearings.

MX,HU,5010,58 19 160CT91

50-10-27 191091
 TransaxlelRemove Gear Shaft Assemblies

4. Remove the mid PTa shaft assembly.

MX,HU,5010,59 19160CT91

5. Pull bearing (A) from shaft using a knife-edge puller.

6. Disassemble differential drive shaft assembly by

removing all gears, washers, and snap rings-keep the
assembly in order as it is removed.

Transaxle With MFWD Shown

7. Remove five cap screws and retaining bracket (A).

<Xl
<Xl
(!l
::J

~
Z
:;>

MX,HU,5010,61 19160CT91

8. Remove differential drive shaft with bearing.

MX,HU,5010,62 19160CT91

50-10-28 191091
 TransaxlelRepair PTO Shift Fork Assembly

9. Remove PTO clutch shaft (A), PTO main shaft (8) and
PTO reduction shaft (C) all at the same time.

10. Rotate external PTO shift arm (D) downward to

remove PTO shift fork assembly (E) from case.

A-PTO Clutch Shaft D-External PTO Shift

B-PTO Main Shaft Arm
C-PTO Reduction Shaft E-5hift Fork Assembly

MX,HU,5010,63 -19-160CT91

REPAIR PTO SHIFT FORK ASSEMBLY

1. Remove the PTO select switch pin (A) now so you

won't loose it-keep it in a safe place until assembly.

2. Remove PTO select switch (A).

3. Remove two cap screws (8) to remove switch

mounting bracket and gasket (C).

MX,HU,5010,65 -19-160CT91

4. Remove spring pin (A), cap screw (8) and retainer

plate (C) to remove PTO shifter shaft (D).

5. Remove spring pin (E) to remove external PTO shifter

arm (F).

A-5prlng Pin D-PTO Shifter Shaft

--@
B-Cap Screw E-5prlng Pin
C-Retainer Plate F-PTO Shifter Arm

MX,HU.5010,66 -19-160CT91

50-10-29 191091
 TransaxlelRepair PTO Shift Fork Assembly

6. Separate PTO shift fork assembly by first removing

rear collar (8), then PTO fork shaft (F), then spring (J)
and ball (K).

7. Inspect all PTO shift components-replace if required.

8. Install external PTO shift arm (H) on PTO shifter shaft

(I).

9. Install new O-ring (N) and coat with grease.

10. Install spring (J), ball (K), and PTO fork shaft (F) into
PTO shift fork (A).

11. Install rear collar (8) on end of PTO fork shaft (F).

A-PTO Shift Fork H-External PTO Shift

B-Rear Collar Arm
C-Switch Pin I-PTO Shifter Shaft
D-Swltch Mounting J-8pring
Bracket and Gasket K-Ball
E-8witch L-8pring Pin
F-PTO Fork Shaft M-Retalner Plate
G-Internal PTO Shift N-O-Ring
Arm

12. Install external PTO shift arm assembly (A) through

case, through internal PTO shift arm (8) into case
mounting hole while aligning spring pin holes (C).

13. Install spring pin (D).

A-External Shift Arm C-Spring Pin Holes

Assembly D-Spring Pin
B-Internal PTO Shift
Arm

MX,HU,5010,68 19160CT91

50-10-30 191091
 Transaxle/Repair PTO Shift Fork Assembly

14. Install shifter shaft retaining plate (A) and cap screw
(8).

15. Install switch mounting bracket and gasket (C), then

install switch (D) in bracket.

A-Retaining Plate D-Switch

B-Cap Screw
C-Swltch Mounting
Bracket and Gasket

MX,HU,5010,69 19160CT91

16. Install PTO select switch pin (A).

50-10-31 191091
 TransaxlelRepair PTa Reduction Shaft Assembly

REPAIR PTO REDUCTION SHAFT

ASSEMBLY

1. Inspect PTa reduction shaft (A), bearings (8 and E),

snap rings (0), and 35-tooth reduction gear (C)-replace
components as required.

2. Pull bearings (8 and E) off shaft using a knife-edge

puller.

3. Remove two snap rings (0), one on each side, to

remove 35-tooth reduction gear (C) from shaft splines.

4. Install 35-tooth reduction gear (C) on shaft splines

and fasten with two snap rings (0).

5. On 655, 755/756 and 855/856 Tractors, install

bearings (8 and E) on ends of shaft.

IMPORTANT: On 955 Tractors only, end bearing (E)

has a thrust sleeve (F). Install this
thrust sleeve towards 11-tooth
reduction shaft transfer gear
(G)-thrust sleeve (F) holds bearing in
its case bore.

A-PTO Reduction Shaft E-Bearing

B-Bearing F-Thrust Sleeve
C-Gear G-Reduction Shaft
O-Snap Ring (2 used) Transfer Gear

19160CT91

50-10-32 191091
 TransaxlelRepair Main PTO Shaft Assembly

REPAIR MAIN PTO SHAFT ASSEMBLY

1. Inspect main PTO shaft (A), main PTO input gear (8),
and bearings (C and G).

2. Disassemble and repair as required. Remove bearings

(C and G) from shaft using a knife-edge puller.

3. Inspect and replace snap rings (E and F) as required.

4. Install main PTO input gear (8) (19 teeth on 655,

755/756, and 855/856 tractors-17 teeth on 955
tractors) on shaft with two snap rings (E).

5. Install snap ring (F) to shaft with washer (D) and large
bearing (C).

6. Install small bearing (G).

A-Main PTO Shaft E-5nap Ring (2 used)

B-Gear F-5nap Ring
C-Large Bearing G-Small Bearing
D-Flat Washer

19160CT91

50-10-33 191091
 Transaxle/Repair Mid PTO Shaft Assembly

REPAIR MID PTO SHAFT ASSEMBLY

1. Inspect mid PTO shaft assembly for wear or damage.

2. Disassemble shaft if required. Pull bearing (F) from

shaft using a knife-edge puller.

3. Remove snap ring (E) and drive gear (D).

4. Remove bearing {C} and oil seal wear sleeve (B)

together. Discard oil seal wear sleeve.

5. Install 3D-tooth mid PTO final drive gear (D) on shaft

(A) with hub side of gear to snap ring groove. Install
snap ring (E).

6. Install bearing (C). Apply grease to inside of oil seal

wear sleeve (B). Install sleeve with chamfer to bearing.
Use a knife-edge puller to push oil seal wear sleeve (B),
bearing (C), and gear (D) up against snap ring (E).

7. Install bearing (F).

A-Mid PTO Shaft D-Gear

8-011 Seal Wear Sleeve E-Snap Ring
C-Bearing F-Bearing

50-10-34 191091
 Transaxle/Repair Mid PTO Transfer Gear Assembly

REPAIR REDUCTION SHAFT ASSEMBLY

1. Inspect reduction shaft assembly. Disassemble as

required.

2. Remove large bearing (A) and small bearing (E) from

the shaft using a knife-edge puller. Remove reduction
gears (8 and D) and collar (C).

3. Assemble collar (C) onto shaft (F).

4. Install 31-tooth hi-range reduction gear (8) and

lo-range reduction gear (D) (23 teeth on 655, 755/756,
and 855/856 tractors-21 teeth on 955 tractors). The
hub side of both gears must face small bearing (E) end
of shaft.

5. Install large bearing (A) and small bearing (E).

A-Large Bearing D-Lo-Range Reduction

B-Hi-Range Reduction Gear
Gear E-5mall Bearing
C-Collar

19160CT91

REPAIR MID PTO TRANSFER GEAR

ASSEMBLY

1. Inspect transfer gear (8) bearings (A). Disassemble, if

required.

2. Remove two bearings (A) using a knife-edge

puller-bearings are identical.

3. Press new bearings (A) on 32-tooth mid PTO transfer

gear (8).

MX,HU,5010,75 19160CT91

50-10-35 191091
 TransaxlelRepair Differential Lock Lever Assembly

REPAIR DIFFERENTIAL LOCK LEVER

ASSEMBLY

1. Remove and discard C-ring (A).

Left Side View

MX.HU,5010,76 -19-160CT91

2. Depress spring (8) with washer (C) using special tool

(A).

3. Remove snap ring (D) from its groove while pressing

on spring washer (C) with special tool, then ease off on
tool pressure as you remove snap ring from shaft.

A-Speclal Tool C-Washer

B-Sprlng D-Snap Ring

Left Side View

4. Remove spring pin (A) from center of shaft inside the

case.

Front View
MX,HU,5010,7B -19-160CT91

50-10-36 191091
 Transaxle/Repair Differential Lock Lever Assembly

5. Remove shifter shaft from the side of the case.

Inspect spring pin (A) for wear or damage-replace if
required.

Right Side View

MX,HU,5010,79 19160CT91

8 and C-Spring Pins

O-Groove

6. Inspect shifter fork (A)-replace if required.

7. Inspect the double spring pins (8) and (C), one inside
the other. Replace if required.

8. Install large outside spring pin (8) with open side

away from groove (D) in shift fork (A). Install small spring
pin (C) inside large spring pin (8) with open side towards
groove (D) in shifter fork (A).

A-5hifter Fork

9. Install shifter shaft in case, through shift fork.

10. Install spring pin (A) with shift fork in position.

Front View
MX,HU,5010,81 -19-160CT91

50-10-37 191091
 Transaxle/Repair Range Shifter Shaft O-Ring

11. Install spring (A) and flat washer (8) on the shaft.

12. Install snap ring (C) on end of shaft; then, use the
un-notched end of special tool used earlier or a 1 in. ID
pipe (E) to push snap ring, washer, and spring inward
until snap ring seats in its groove in the shaft.

13. Install new O-ring (D).

14. Install external shift arm and spring pin.

A-Spring D-O-Ring
B-Flat Washer E-Pipe Left Side View
C-Snap Ring

MX,HU,5010,82 -19-160CT91

REPAIR RANGE SHIFTER SHAFT O-RING

NOTE: O-ring can be replaced without transaxle

disassembly.

1. Drain transaxle. Oil capacity is approximately 17 L (4.5

gal).

2. Move 2-speed range shifter to Lo-Range.

3. Remove cotter pin to disconnect shifter link (A) and

stop link (8) from external shifter arm (C), located at
right, front corner of transaxle, near mid PTO output
shaft.

4. Remove spring pin (D) to remove external shifter arm

(C).

5. Remove cap screw (E) and retainer plate (F).

A-Shifter Link O-Spring Pin

B-Stop Link E-Cap Screw
C-Shifter Arm F-Retainer Plate

50-10-38 191091
 Transax/e/Repair Range Shifter Shaft O-Ring

6. To replace O-ring (A), push straight in on shifter shaft

(8) until it stops, without turning shaft.

Training Aid Cutaway View-Right Side

This will disengage the internal shifter arm (C) from the
shifter fork (D).

A-O-Ring C-Internal Shifter Arm

B-Shifter Shaft D-Shifter Fork

Training Aid Cutaway View-Left Side

50-10-39 191091
 TransaxlelRepair Range Shifter Shaft O-Ring

7. Scribe a mark on outside case (cutaway) where drilled

hole (A) meets case.

8. Turn end of shifter shaft to the right to rotate internal

shifter arm towards front of case.

9. Pull shaft outward as far as it will go.

Training Aid Cutaway View-Right Side

You may have to turn shaft left and right slightly to

ensure internal arm is as far as it can go.

Training Aid Cutaway View-Left Side

MX,HU,5010,86 -19-160CT91

50-10-40 191091
 TransaxlelRepair Range Shifter Shaft O-Ring

10. Remove O-ring (A) with a pick and discard. Grease

new O-ring and install on shaft.

Training Aid Cutaway View-Right Side

11. Push shaft in so internal shifter arm (8) can be

rotated to the rear to align with shifter fork slot (turn left
on end of shaft until spring pin hole aligns with mark on
case, scribed earlier).

12. Pull straight out on shifter shaft to engage pin of

internal shifter arm (C) in slot of shifter fork (D).

Training Aid Cutaway View-Left Side

MX,HU,5010,88 -19-160CT91

50-10-41 . 191091
 TransaxlelRepair Range Shift Fork Assembly

13. Install retainer plate (F) and fasten with cap screw
(E).

14. Install external shifter arm (C) and fasten with spring
pin (D).

15. Connect shifter link (A) and stop link (8). Fasten
them with a new cotter pin.

A-Shifter Link D-Spring Pin

a-Stop Link E-Cap Screw
C-External Shifter Arm F-Retainer Plate

REPAIR RANGE SHIFT FORK ASSEMBLY

1. Inspect range shifter fork (A) for wear. Replace if

required.

2. Remove retaining plate (8) and two spring pins (C) to

disassemble shaft.

3. Remove and discard mid PTO shaft oil seal (D). Install
new oil seal from inside case cover.

A-Shifter Fork C-Spring Pin (2 Used)

B-Retainer Plate D-Oil Seal

MX,HU,5010,90 -19-160CT91

50-10-42 191091
 TransaxlelRepair PTO Clutch Assembly

4. Remove and inspect fork shaft (A), shifter fork (8),

spring (C) and ball (D)-replace if required.

5. Assemble shaft and shifter fork with spring and ball.

A-Fork Shaft C-5prlng

B-Shlfter Fork 0-8all

MX.HU,5010,91 -19-160CT91

6. Install new O-ring on end shaft.

7. Install internal shifter arm pin into slot of shifter fork

(A).

8. Install shifter shaft into front case cover and internal

shifter arm.

9. Install external shifter arm and fasten both arms with

spring pins (C) and external retainer plate (8).

A-5hifter Fork C-5prlng Pin (2 Used)

8-Retainer Plate O-Qil Seal

REPAIR PTO CLUTCH ASSEMBLY

1. Remove bearing (A) using a knife-edge puller.

MX,HU,5010,93 -19-160CT91

50-10-43 191091
 TransaxlelRepair PTO Clutch Assembly

2. Remove grooved washer (A). Remove clutch shaft

mid PTO drive gear (8) with two needle bearings (C).

3. Remove grooved washer (0) and shift collar (E).

A-Grooved Washer D-Grooved Washer

B-Gear E-Shift Collar
C-Needle Bearing (2
Used)

MX,HU,5010,94 19160CT91

4. Remove snap ring (A), splined collar (8), clutch shaft

rear PTO drive gear (C) with needle bearing (0), and
grooved washer (E).

5. Remove snap ring (F).

A-Snap Ring D-Needle Bearing

B-Spllned Collar E-Grooved Washer
C-Gear F-Snap Ring

6. Remove clutch gear (A).

7. Inspect bearings (8) and snap ring (C). Remove and

replace as required.

8. Remove the shaft (0) from the PTO cylinder (E).

A-Clutch Gear D-Shaft

B-Bearings E-PTO Clutch Cylinder
C-Snap Ring

MX,HU,5010,96 19160CT91

50-10-44 191091
 TransaxlelRepair PTa Clutch Assembly

9. Inspect PTO clutch shaft (A), bearing (8), and key (C).
Replace as required. Use a knife-edge puller to remove
the bearing.

10. Replace two fiber seal rings (D).

A-Clutch Shaft O-Seal Rings (2 Used)

B-Bearing E-Washer
C-Key

MX,HU,5010,97 19160CT91

11. Hold all the clutch disks together then measure the
space between the bottom separator plate and the PTO
cylinder. If space measures 4.7 mm (0.185 in.) or more,
replace all the clutch disks.

12. Disassemble clutch if required. Remove large snap

ring (A). Lift top plate (8) off clutch assembly.

Measure thickness of the top plate. A minimum thickness

is required and the plate must be flat.

MINIMUM THICKNESS SPECIFICATION

Clutch Top Plate , , , , , ................. 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)

MX,HU,5010,99 19160CT91

13. Remove 15 small springs (A) as the disks are

removed. The springs are located on three sides of the
clutch assembly.

655, 755/756, 855/856 ...................... 15 Springs

955 .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 18 Springs

MX,HU,5010,100 19160CT91

50-10-45 191091
 TransaxlelRepair PTO Clutch Assembly

14. Remove clutch disks (A) and separator plates (8).

Remove three pins (C).

Measure clutch plates and separator disks for minimum

thickness requirement. The separator disks must be flat.
.m
MINIMUM THICKNESS SPECIFICATION

Clutch Disk ............................. 1.9 mm (0.075 in.)

.z
i
.=?
Separator Plate .......................... 1.0 mm (0.039 in.)

655, 755/756, 855/856 ................ 6 clutch plates, 5 disks

955 ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 7 clutch plates, 6 disks

MX,HU,5010,101 19160CT91

15. Disassemble clutch piston by placing piston and

fabricated special tool (A) in a vise.

16. Tighten vise to compress spring (8) and flat washer

(C) to remove snap ring (D).

17. Slowly back off on vise to remove spring (8).

A-Special Tool C-Flat Washers

B-Spring O-Snap Ring

18. Remove piston (A). Piston must be free of nicks and

scratches; if not, replace it.

19. Check free length of piston return spring (C), replace

if required.

PISTON RETURN SPRING SPECIFICATION

Minimum Free Length ...................... 29 mm (1.14 in.)

Minimum Working Load .................... 17.5 mm at 540 N
(0.689 in. at 121 lb.)

MX,HU,5010,103 19160CT91

50-10-46 191091
 TransaxlelAssemble PTa Clutch

CROSS-SECTION VIEW-PTO CLUTCH

A-O-Ring F-Pin (3 used)

B-Clutch Piston G-Spring (15 used on
C-Clutch Cylinder 6171855/856-18
D-Plate (6 used on used on 955)
6171855/856-7 used H-Plate
on 955) I-Snap Ring
E-Clutch Disk (5 used J-Spring
on 6171855/856-6 K-Washer
used on 955) L-Snap Ring

MX,HU,5010,104 -19-160CT91

ASSEMBLE PTO CLUTCH

1. Install new C-ring (8). Lubricate piston (A) and C-ring

and install.

2. Put piston return spring (C) on top of piston.

105 -19-160CT91

3. Use a vise, the special tool, snap ring and flat washer
to compress and fasten return spring into clutch cylinder.

4. Install one of the thin separator plates into the bottom

of the slots in the wall of the clutch cylinder.

5. Install the three pins (A).

6. Install one spring on each pin as each of the five

clutch disks and five remaining separator plates are
installed alternately. Remember, there are seven
separator plates and six clutch disks on 955 units.

MX,HU,5010,106 -19-160CT91

50-10-47 191091
 TransaxlelAssemble PTO Clutch

IMPORTANT: Position the snap ring (A) so that the

open portion is against one of the
sides of the cylinder wall.

7. Install the thick separator plate (8) last and fasten the
assembly with snap ring (A).

MX,HU,501 0,1 07 -19-160CT91

8. Put washer (E) on clutch shaft (A).

9. Install bearing (8), key (C) and two new fiber seals
(D).

A-Clutch Shaft O-Fiber Seals (2 used)

B-Bearing E-Washer
C-Key

10. Assemble clutch gear (A) with snap ring (C) and two
bearings (8).

11. Install shaft (D) into PTa clutch cylinder (E).

12. Install clutch gear assembly (A) (28 teeth on 655,

755/756, and 855/856 tractors-25 teeth on 955
tractors) on shaft and into splines of clutch disks.

A-Clutch Gear O-Shaft

B-Bearings E-PTO Clutch Cylinder
C-Snap Ring

:ll
0-
W
~
9
z
=?

MX,HU,5010,109 -19-160CT91

50-10-48 191091
 Transaxle/Assemble PTO Clutch

13. Install snap ring (F).

14. Put grooved washer (E) on the shaft with grooves

away from snap ring.

15. Install bearing (0) in 19-tooth clutch shaft rear PTa

drive gear (C) and put on shaft.

16. Install collar (8) and snap ring (A).

A-8nap Ring D-Needle Bearing

B-8plined Collar E-Grooved Washer
C-Gear F-Snap Ring

MX,HU,501 0, 11 0 -19-160CT91

17. Install shift collar (E) over splines.

18. Install washer (0) with grooves away from snap ring.

19. Install two needle bearings (C) inside 29-tooth clutch

shaft mid PTa drive gear (8) and install gear on shaft.

20. Install washer (A) on shaft with grooves facing gear.

A-Grooved Washer D-Grooved Washer

B-Gear E-8hift Collar
C-Needle Bearing (2
Used)

111 -19-160CT91

21. Install bearing (A).

The PTa clutch assembly is complete and ready for

installation in the transaxle case.

MX,HU,501 0,112 -19-160CT91

50-10-49 191091
 TransaxlelRepair Differential Drive Shaft Assembly

INSTALL PTO CLUTCH ASSEMBLIES

1. Hold PTO clutch assembly (A) in position, but DO

NOT install.

2. Hold shift fork assembly (8) with collar (C) in position,

but DO NOT install.

3. Install switch pin (D) if not already in place.

A-PTO Clutch C-Collar

B-Shift Fork D-Switch Pin

MX.HU,5010,113 19160CT91

4. Put main PTO shaft (A) and then PTO reduction shaft
(8) in position.

5. Engage internal shifter arm (C) in shift fork groove.

6. Install all shafts and PTO clutch assembly. Check for

proper positioning of the shift fork assembly.

.REPAIR DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE SHAFT

ASSEMBLY

1. Inspect drive shaft (A) and bearing (D)-replace if

required.

2. Remove snap ring (8) and collar (C) first before

pressing bearing off shaft, away from the worm gear (8
teeth on 655, 755/756, and 855/856 tractors-7 teeth
on 955 tractors).

3. Assemble differential drive shaft bearing (D), collar

(C), and snap ring (8) on shaft (A).

A-Drive Shaft C-Collar

B-snap Ring D-Bearing

MX,HU,5010,115 19-160CT91

50-10-50 191091
 Transaxlellnstall Differential Drive Shaft Assembly

INSTALL DIFFERENTIAL DRIVE SHAFT

ASSEMBLY

1. Install differential drive shaft into case.

MX,HU,5010,116 19160CT91

IMPORTANT: You must pre-load bearing retainer as

shown for proper installation.

2. Fasten bearing retainer (A) with two cap screws (8)

on the left side. Tighten the two screws to 26 N'm (19
Ib-ft).

3. Install the remaining three cap screws and tighten to

26 N'm (19 Ib-ft).

4. Install grooved washer (A) with grooves to the outside,

lo-range drive gear (8) (28 teeth on 655, 755/756, and
855/856 tractors-30 teeth on 955 tractors), shift collar
(C), splined collar (D), and snap ring (E).

5. Install washer (F), 20-tooth hi-range drive gear (G),

collar (H), snap ring (I), 13-tooth MFWD drive gear (J),
washer (K), and bearing (L),

A-Grooved Washer G-Gear

B-Gear H-Collar
C-Shlft Collar I-Snap Ring
D-Splined Collar J-Gear
E-Snap Ring K-Washer
F-Washer L-Bearing

~.'~.'J".
..

MX,HU,501 0,11 B 19160CT91

50-10-51 191091
 Transaxlellnstall Mid PTO Transfer Gear Assembly

INSTALL MID PTO SHAFT ASSEMBLY

MX,HU,5010,119 -19-160CT91

INSTALL HIILO REDUCTION SHAFT

ASSEMBLY

INSTALL MID PTO TRANSFER GEAR

ASSEMBLY

MX,HU,5010,121 -19-160CT91

50-10-52 191091
 Transaxlellnstall Front Case Cover Assembly

INSTALL FRONT CASE COVER ASSEMBLY

1. Check that upper and lower pins (A) are in transaxle

case.

2. Install all outside bearings (8) on shaft assemblies, if

not previously installed. Lubricate the outside surfaces of
all bearings and the internal PTO shifter shaft (C) with
oil.

3. Lubricate outside and end surfaces of shaft (C) with

oil.

4. Install fork in shift collar (8) of differential drive shaft

assembly as you install range shifter fork assembly (A) in
transaxle case.

MX.HU,5010,123 -19-160CT91

50-10-53 191091
 Transaxlellnstall Front Case Cover Assembly

5. Install new gasket on front case cover.

6. Engage internal range shifter arm into range shifter

fork slot (8) as cover is installed. Check alignment of all
six bearings and two shifter shaft ends.

7. Fasten front case cover assembly (A) to transaxle

case.

Left Side View

MX,HU,5010,124 19160CT91

S. Tighten four M12 (A), six M10 (8), and seven MS (C)
cap screws to specifications listed below.

CAP SCREW TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

M12 90 N'm (66 Ib-ft)

M10 50 N'm (37 Ib-ft)

M8 26 N'm (19 Ib-ft)

Front View
125 19160CT91

50-10-54 191091
 Transaxle/lnstall MFWD Gear Case Assembly

INSTALL MFWD GEAR CASE ASSEMBLY

1. Rotate shifter lever to engage internal shifter arm (A)

with shifter collar as you install MFWD output drive shaft
assembly into case housing.

MX.HU.5010.126 19160CT91

1. Make sure alignment pins (A) are in place.

2. Install new gasket.

3, Align gear teeth as you install MFWD gear assembly.

Fasten with five M8 cap screws (A), Tighten screws to
26 N'm (19 Ib-ft).

MX,HU,5010,128 19160CT91

50-10-55 191091
 TransaxlelAdjust Backlash-Differential Assembly

ADJUST BACKLASH-DIFFERENTIAL
ASSEMBLY

1. Put a film of grease or oil on surfaces of bearing (8).

Align shifter fork (C) with collar and differential drive
shaft pinion (worm) gear with differential ring gear as you
install differential assembly (A) in transaxle housing.

Rear View

2. Install the same number of shims (A) into carrier

assembly as were removed.

Shim Pack Sizes

0.1 mm
0.3 mm
0.5 mm

3. Install bearing (8) into carrier.

MX.HU.5010,130 -19-160CT91

4. Add a coat of grease to the outside surface (A) of the

carrier.

MX,HU,5010,131 -19-160CT91

50-10-56 191091
 TransaxlelAdjust Backlash-Differential Assembly

5. Install carrier bearing on left-side bearing surface of

differential assembly, align six mounting holes and fasten
with M8 x 25 cap screws. Tighten cap screws to 26 Nm
(19 Ib-ft).

Left Side View

MX,HU,501 0, 132 -19-160CT91

6. Push bearing and differential assembly to the left side

using a disk driver. Differential assembly must be tight
against left shims and side carrier before backlash is
checked.

Tap disk driver lightly to ensure you don't damage any

parts.

Right Side View

7. Put a rod (A) through the right side carrier and into
the differential drive shaft pinion (worm) gear.

Use the rod to prevent movement of the pinion gear

while the backlash measurement is performed.

MX,HU,5010,134 -19-160CT91

50-10-57 191091
 Transaxle/Adjust Backlash-Differential Assembly

8. Install fabricated steel plate (A) across the transaxle

case. Mount the magnetic indicator base (8) on the
plate. Position a deflection gauge (C) against one of the
ring gear teeth (D).

9. Hold rod (E) firmly against the pinion gear while

moving the ring gear back and forth. Total ring gear
backlash movement must measure 0.15-0.21 mm
(0.006-0.008 in).

10. If proper backlash is not obtained, disassemble

carrier and add a shim(s) to decrease backlash or
subtract a shim(s) to increase backlash. Repeat
procedure to measure backlash.

11. Tighten six left-side carrier cap screws to 26 N'm (19

Ib-ft).

BACKLASH SPECIFICATION

Ring Gear ............................... 0.15-0.21 mm

(0.006-0.008 in.)

A-5teel Plate O-Ring Gear

B-Magnetic Base E-Rod
C-Oeflection Gauge

Rear View

135 19160CT91

50-10-58 191091
 Transaxlellnstall Rear Case Cover Assembly

INSTALL REAR PTa SHAFT ASSEMBLY

1. Install new rear seal from inside rear case cover.

2. Install rear PTO shaft assembly from inside rear case

cover.

3. Make sure two alignment pins (A) are installed in

case.

Rear View

INSTALL REAR CASE COVER ASSEMBLY

1. Install a new gasket over pins (A).

2. Align rear PTO shaft drive gear with PTO reduction

shaft gear up inside transaxle case as you align front
bearing of rear PTO shaft with transaxle case bearing
seat and the two guide pins (A).

Rear View
MX,HU,5010,137 19160CT91

50-10-59 191091
 Transaxlellnstall PTO Valve Assemblies

3. Fasten bottom half of cover with four M12 x 70 cap

screws (shown with torque wrench on head of one), two
M12 x 55 cap screws in bottom case cover holes and
one top half M10 x 50 cap screw (A). DO NOT install
cap screws in four PTO shield mounting holes (8) at this
time. Tighten other cap screws to below specifications.

REAR COVER TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

M12 Cap Screws ............................... 90 N'm

(66 Ib-ftj
M10 Cap Screws ............................... 50 N'm
(37 Ib-ftj

MX,HU,5010,138 -19160CT91

INSTALL PTO VALVE ASSEMBLIES

NOTE: Install PTO valves in reverse order of

disassembly (see Repair PTO Valve Assemblies
earlier in this section).

1. Install new O-rings on upper and lower valve

assemblies before you install them in valve bodies.

2. Engage internal PTO shifter lever (C) in lower valve.

Install retaining plate and cap screw (8).

3. Install lube relief valve (A). Left Side View

4. Install cover (A). Tighten nine cover cap screws and

retaining plate cap screw to 26 N'm (19 Ib-ft).

MX,HU,5010,140 19160CT91

50-10-60 191091
 Transaxlellnstall PTa Inertia Brake Assembly

INSTALL PTO INERTIA BRAKE ASSEMBLY

1. Install seven separator plates and six clutch disks for
655, 755/756 and 855/856 tractors (eight separator
plates and seven clutch disks for 955 tractors). Install a
separator plate first, then alternate clutch disks and
separator plates.

NOTE: When replacing an old housing (AM875949)

with a new housing (AM876998) on 655, 755,
and 855 tractors, a spacer M801959 must be
used to compensate for the additional depth in
the newer housing. The following units are
affected, 655 with housing sin below 610730; Rear View M37725

7551 756 and 8551856 units with housing sin

below 827729. Housing serial numbers above
these already have spacer factory installed.

2. Install spacer M801959 if needed, (See NOTE:

above).
3. Install new O-rings on collar (C) and piston (8). Apply
a light film of grease or oil to the O-rings.
4. Install collar (C) over piston (8) as you install them in
housing.

5. Make sure alignment pins (C) are in place.

6. Install new gasket (D).
7. Install small spring (8) inside larger spring (A). Put
springs against piston and install cover over two stud
bolts. Fasten cover with five cap screws and tighten
them to 26 N-m (19 Ib-ft.).

M37723

50-10-61
 Transaxlellnstal/ Oil Supply System

INSTALL OIL SUPPLY SYSTEM

1. Install pump drive coupling. The coupling fits in either

direction.

Rear View
MX,HU,5010,144 -19-160CT91

2. Install main hydraulic pump. Use two nuts and two

cap screws to attach pump, tighten them to 26 N'm {19
Ib-ft}.

3. Install new O-ring (A) on end of new or cleaned oil

supply filter screen and coat with oil before installing
filter into case.

MX,HU,5010,146 -19-160CT91

4. Install filter housing with three cap screws. Tighten

cap screws to 26 N'm (19 Ib-ft).

MX,HU.5010.147 -19-160CT91

50-10-62 191091
 Transaxlellnstall Final Drive Axle Assm's

5. Install PTO shield (C). Fasten it with flat washers and

four M12 x 55 cap screws (8). Tighten cap screws to 90
N'm (66 Ib-ft).

NOTE: Inspect rubber boots for cuts, cracks, hardness,

and etc. Replace if required.

6. Install oil supply tube (A) with rubber boots, protective

bushings, and band clamps.

INSTALL FINAL DRIVE AXLE ASSEMBLIES

1. Put two separator plates and two brake disks

alternately in place against snap ring on final drive pinion
shaft and install them into differential assembly.

2. Install washer (8) on differential lock shaft.

3. Make sure alignment pins (A) are in place.

4. Install gasket over alignment pins (A).

Right Side View

MX.HU,5010,149 -19-160CT91

50-10-63 191091
 Transaxlellnstall Final Drive Axle Assm's

5. Align brake camshaft (A) with notches (8) of brake

separator plates as you align three gears (C) of final
drive planetary with splines (D) of final drive pinion shaft.

6. Fasten final drive axle assembly with five M10 x 35

cap screws (E) and one M10 x 50 cap screw in top hole
of final drive case (cutaway). Tighten all six cap screws
to 52 Nm (38 Ib-ft).

Training Aid Cutaway View-Right Side

7. Install gasket over alignment pins (A).

8. Align brake camshaft (A) with notches of brake

separator plates (8) as you align three gears (C) of final
drive planetary with splines (D) of final drive pinion shaft.

9. Fasten final drive axle assembly with five M10 x 35

cap screws (E) and one M 10 x 50 cap screw (F) in top
hole of final drive case (cutaway in right side view).
Tighten all six cap screws to 52 Nm (38 Ib-ft).

10. Install external shifter arm (G) on end of differential

lock shifter shaft and fasten it with the spring pin
removed earlier.

Training Aid Cutaway View-Left Side

150 19160CT91

50-10-64 191091
 Transax/el/nstall Hydrostatic Transmission

INSTALL TRANSAXLE

1. Fasten two lifting eyes to transaxle assembly and lift it

into place using a load-positioning sling and hoist.
Support bottom of axles with floor jacks or blocks.

2. Install new O-ring on elbow fitting and connect

hydraulic line (A). Tighten connector to 49 N'm (36 Ib-ft).

MX,HU,5010,151 19160CT91

3. Install bracket (C) with three M14 x 35 cap screws

(B).

4. Install seven M14 x 35 cap screws (A). Tighten all ten

cap screws evenly to pull transaxle up to frame. Tighten
them to 142 N'm (105 Ib-ft).

INSTALL HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION

1. Fasten a lifting eye to the transmission and use a

hoist to lift it into place. Be sure control linkage is
positioned as shown.

Right Side View

MX,HU,5010,153A19160CT91

50-10-65 191091
 Transaxlellnstall Hydrostatic Transmission

2. Install new a-rings (A). Apply grease to a-rings to

hold them in place.

3. Install coupler (B) into transaxle.

4. Turn axles to align splines and gears as the

transmission is moved into place. Be careful not to
damage the a-ring sealing surfaces.

Top View-Right Side

5. Install two M14 x 60 cap screws and thick washers

(A). Tighten cap screws to 142 N'm (105 Ib-ft).

Right Side View

MX,HU,501 0, 155A19160CT91

50-10-66 191091
 Transax/el/nstall Linkage

IMPORTANT: Install new O-rings in all applications

before connecting hydraulic fittings.

6. Connect and tighten lines (C).

7. Install line (B) at both ends. Tighten fittings to 95-230

N'm (70-170 Ib-ft).

8. Connect electrical leads (A).

9. Install transmission drive shaft and MFWD drive shaft

(if equipped) in reverse order to disassemble procedures
found earlier in this section. Top View-Right Side

10. Fill transaxle with 17 L (4.5 gal) of JOHN DEERE

HY-GARD LOW VISCOSITY transmission and hydraulic
oil.

MX,HU,5010,156 -19-160CT91

INSTALL LINKAGE
1. Install electrical lead (F). (Blue wire and black wire.)

2. Install electrical lead (E). (Two blue wires.)

3. Install differential lock link (D). Fasten it with a drilled

pin, washer, and cotter pin.

4. Install PTa selector link (C). Fasten it with a washer

and cotter pin.

5. Install PTa control link (B). Fasten it with a drilled pin

and cotter pin.

6. Install brake link (A). Fasten it with a washer and

cotter pin.

A-Left Brake Link E-PTO Magnet Switch

B-PTO Control Link F-PTO Lamp Switch
C-PTO Selector Link
D-Differential Lock
Link

Left Side View

157 -19-160CT91

50-10-67 191091
 Transax/el/nstall ROPS

7. Install parts (E thru K) to connect transmission control

linkage (O).

8. Connect spring (C).

9. Install shifter link (8). Fasten it with a washer and

cotter pin. Late model tractors also have a stop link
connected to this shifter arm.

10. Install brake link (A). Fasten it with a washer and

cotter pin.

A-Brake Link G-Long Spacer

B-2-Speed Shift Link H-Reverse Control Tie
C-Spring Rod
0-Transmission I-Short Spacer
Control Linkage (E J-Transmission Control
thru K) Lever
E-Cap Screw K-Lock Nut
F-Forward Control Tie
Rod

INSTALL ROPS

1. Put ROPS in position with hoist. Install shorter bolt,

lock washer, and thick washer (A). Install two longest
bolts with lock washers (8). Install shortest bolt and lock
washer (C). Repeat this procedure for the left side.
Tighten all eight bolts evenly to 215 N'm (159 Ib-ft).

2. Install drawbar. Fasten it with drilled pin and spring

pin.

Right Side View

MX,HU,5010,159 -19-160CT91

50-10-68 191091
 TransaxlelFill Hydraulic System Reservoir

INSTALL REAR WHEELS

1. Install wheels.

2. Tighten lug bolts to 115 N'm (85 Ib-ft).

MX,HU,501 0,160 -19-160CT91

INSTALL ROCKSHAFT HOUSING ASSEMBLY

To install rockshaft housing assembly see Section 70,

Group 15.

CONNECT FLOW DIVIDER AND SELECTIVE

CONTROL VALVES

To connect flow divider valve and selective control

valves, see Section 70, Group 10.

MX,HU,5010,161A-19-160CT91

FILL HYDRAULIC SYSTEM RESERVOIR

Fill transaxle reservoir with John Deere Hy-Gard Low

Viscosity Transmission and Hydraulic Oil. Transaxle
capacity is approximately 17 L (4.5 gal).

MX,HU,5010, 161 B-19-160CT91

50-10-69 191091
 Transax~/AdjustConuoILmkages

BLEED HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

To bleed the hydraulic system see Section 70, Group 05.

MX,HU,5010,162 -19-160CT91

ADJUST CONTROL LINKAGES

A CAUTION: Transmission and transaxle control

linkages may be out of adjustment. Safely lift
drive wheels off ground and support tractor
frame on jack stands before making any
adjustments.

To check all transaxle functions and adjust transmission

control linkages see Section 250, Group 10.

163 -19-160CT91

50-10-70 191091
 Group 15
Final Drives

SERVICE EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS

NOTE Order tools from the U.S. SERVICE-GARDTM Catalog or from the European Microfiche Tool Catalog
(MTC). Some tools may be available from a local supplier.

Name Use

Bushing, Bearing and Seal Driver Set To service bearings and seal.

Press To service bearings.

Knife-Edge Puller To remove bearings and wear sleeves.

2-Jaw, Slide-Hammer To remove bearings and wear sleeves.

M8 Jackscrews To remove ring gear.

Snap Ring Pliers Set To disassemble planetary gear assembly.

50mm (2 in.) ID Pipe To install wear sleeves.

40mm (1-9/16 in.) ID Pipe To install bearings.

OTHER MATERIAL

Number Name Use

T43511 John Deere LOCTITE Clean and Clean Threads

Cure Primer

T43512 John Deere LOCTITE Thread Lock Retain differential cap screws
and Sealer (Medium Strength)

LDCTlTE is a trademark of the Loctite Corp. MX,HU,5015,2 19160CT91

50151 191091
 Final Drives/Remove Final Drives

SPECIFICATIONS

Item Measurement SpecIfIcation

Ring Gear Cap Screws Torque 26 N'm (19 Ib-ft)

Final Drives

M10 Cap Screw Torque 52 N'm (38 Ib-ft)

M16 Cap Screws W/Out ROPS Torque 187 N'm (138 Ib-ft)

ROPS Mounting Bolts Torque 215 N'm (159 Ib-ft)

Rear Wheel Lug Bolts Torque 115 N'm (85 Ib-ft)

MX,HU,5015,3 19160CT91

REMOVE FINAL DRIVES

NOTE' Most procedures are identical for both sides of

the final drives. Any unique procedures that
require special mention will be shown; otherwise,
treat the following procedures as identical for
both sides.

1. Park tractor safely.

2. Remove drawbar.

3. Remove drain plug to drain transaxle (A). Oil capacity

is approximately 17 L (4.5 gal).

50-15-2 191091
 Final Drives/Remove Final Drives

4. Put blocks in front and back of front wheels.

5. Loosen rear wheel bolts.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT put lifting device under

transaxle. Transaxle case could become
damaged.

6. Raise tractor. Support frame with jack stands.

7. Remove rear wheels.

Left Side View

MX,HU,5015,5 19160CT91

8. Attach an overhead hoist to RapS or get a helper to

hold RapS stationary while you remove bolts and
washers from both sides. Store RapS in a safe manner.

Right Side View

9. Disconnect brake link (A).

10. Disconnect differential lock link (8). (Left side only.)

Left Side View

MX,HU,5015,7 19160CT91

50-15-3 191091
 Final Drives/Planetary Carrier End Play Specification

11. Use a punch to drive out spring pin (A). Remove

differential lock lever. (Left side only.)

12. Hold final drive assembly with an overhead hoist or

floor jack and remove six cap screws (8).

NOTE: If tractor is not equipped with RaPS, remove

three cap screws from holes (C).

13. Remove final drive from transaxle. Clean machined

surfaces of any gasket material.

Left Side View

MX.HU.5015.8 -19-160CT91

PLANETARY CARRIER END PLAY

SPECIFICATION
SPECIFICATION

End Play (Max) ___ .. ___ .................. 0.6 mm (0.024 in.)

1. Stand final drive on wheel hub.

2. Install dial indicator.

3. Pull planetary carrier up. If out of specification, check

thrust washer, snap-ring, carrier, and axle snap-ring 955 Shown
groove for wear. Replace parts as necessary.

-19-160CT91

50-15-4 191091
 Final Drives/Disassemble Final Drives

DISASSEMBLE FINAL DRIVES

NOTE Disassembly procedure is shown for a left final

drive. The right side is similar, but some parts are
not interchangeable, left to right. Do not mix left
and right side parts.

1. Remove three springs (A) from actuator plate (8).

655, 755/756, 855/856 Shown-Left

MX,HU,5015,10 -19-160CT91

2. Remove actuator plate (A).

3. Remove six steel balls (8).

4. Remove six cap screws (C) to remove ring gear (D).

NOTE: It may be necessary to use two M8 jackscrews

directly across from each other to remove ring
gear from two alignment pins in final drive case.

A-Actuator Plate C-Cap Screw (6 used)

B-8teel Ball (6 used) O-Ring Gear

50-15-5 191091
 Final Drives/Repair Planetary Gear Assembly

5. Remove snap ring (A).

6. Remove planetary gear assembly.

655, 755/756, 855/856 Shown

955 Shown

REPAIR PLANETARY GEAR

ASSEMBLY-655, 755/756, AND 855/856
TRACTORS

1. Remove snap ring (A) and washer (8).

2. Drive out three spring pins (C).

655, 755/756, 855/856 Shown

MX,HU,5015,13 19160CT91

50-15-6 191091
 Final Drives/Repair Planetary Gear Assembly

3. Drive or press the three pinion shafts out of the

carrier. Take care not to lose any of the 22 needle
bearings (A) inside each pinion gear. Disassemble and
inspect all components for wear or damage-replace if
required.

655, 755/756, 855/856 Shown

4. Assemble gear on shaft with bevel edge (A) up.

655, 755/756, 855/856 Shown

MX,HU,5015,15 -19-160CT91

5. Install 22 needle bearings (grease-coated lightly) in

each pinion gear.

655, 755/756, 855/856 Shown

MX,HU,5015,16 -19-160CT91

50-15-7 191091
 Final Drives/Repair Planetary Gear Assembly

6. Install thrust washer (A) with oil groove side against

gear.

655, 755/756, 855/856 Shown

MX,HU,5015,17 -19-160CT91

7. Press pinion shafts into the carrier-one at a time.

The notch (A) on the end of each pinion shaft must
pOint to the inside of the carrier.

655, 755/756, 855/856 Shown

18 -19-160CT91

8. Drive spring pins into the shafts. The split face of

spring pin (A) must point up, away from the gear.

9. Tap down on the top of each pinion shaft (8) so the

roll pin rests against carrier surface.

10. Check pinion gears to see that they turn freely.

655, 755/756, 855/856 Shown

MX,HU,5015,19 -19-160CT91

11. Install washer (8) and snap ring (A).

655, 755/756, 855/856 Shown

MX,HU,5015,20 -19-160CT91

50-15-8 191091
 Final Drives/Repair Planetary Gear Assembly

REPAIR PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY-955 TRACTORS

955 Shown

955 Shown

A-Carrier C-Spring Pin E-Planetary Pinion Gear G-Needle Bearings

B-Pinion Shaft 0-Thrust Washers F-Needle Bearing Spacer

SPECIFICATION

Pinion-to-case clearance ............ 0.1-0.9 mm (O.004-0.035 in.)

1. Check planetary pinion gear assembly side 5. Put needle spacer (F) over needle bearings on the
clearance. If out of specification, check pinion shaft, bottom sides of planetary gears (side opposite the
spring pins, thrust washers, needle bearing spacer, chamfer).
gears and carrier for wear.
6. Put a thrust washer (D) on each side of planetary
NOTE' Each planetary pinion gear contains 22 needle gears with oil grooves towards the needle bearings
bearings. and align them, one at a time, inside the carrier with
the chamfer of gears painting up.
2. Drive out spring pins from pinion shafts.
7. Install pinion shafts (8), one at a time, with
3. Press out pinion shafts (8), one at a time, and notches toward inside splines of carrier. Drive in
inspect all parts for wear or damage-replace if spring pin with split facing up, away from pinion
required. gears.

4. During assembly, use a light coat of grease to hold

needle bearings (G) in place.

50-15-9 191091
 Final Drives/Remove Axle Shafts

REMOVE BRAKE CAMSHAFT ASSEMBLY

NOTE Do not mix left and right side brake camshafts,

they are not identical.

1. Remove snap ring (A) from its groove in brake

camshaft (C).

2. Push shaft out of housing and remove flat washer (8).

MX,HU,5015,22 -19-160CT91

3. Turn final drive over so it rests on the wide base.

4. Remove and replace the brake camshaft oil seal.

REMOVE AXLE SHAFTS

1. Turn axle on its side to remove three cap screws from

end of final drive housing.

MX,HU,5015,23 19-160CT91

4. Drive axle shaft out of housing using a soft faced

hammer. The two inside bearings will remain in the
housing.

5. Inspect and replace parts as required.

MX,HU,5015,24 -19-160CT91

50-15-10 191091
 Final Drives/Repair Axle Housing Assembly

REMOVE OIL SEAL WEAR SLEEVE AND

COVER

1. Remove oil seal wear sleeve (A) from axle shaft using
a knife-edge puller.

2. Inspect axle cover (hidden by knife-edge puller) for

damage. Replace, if required.

MX,HU,5015,25 -19-160CT91

REPAIR AXLE HOUSING ASSEMBLY

1. Remove oil seal from outer housing.

2, Remove snap ring (A) to service outer bearing (8).

MX,HU,5015,27 19160CT91

3. Turn housing over onto the square end to remove

inner bearing from inside housing, Use a puller if
necessary.

MX,HU,5015,28 -19-160CT91

50-15-11 191091
 Final Drives/Repair Axle Housing Assembly

4. Turn housing over on wide base to install new outer

bearing (8) in housing and install snap ring (A).

MX.HU,5015,28A -19-160CT91

5. Install a new seal (A). Push seal into housing using a

75 mm (2-15/16 in.) driver disk. Seal must bottom
against the snap ring.

6. Install seal housing cover (A) over axle shaft.

7. Apply grease to inside surface of oil seal wear sleeve

(8). Install oil seal wear sleeve on axle shaft using a
pipe with an inside diameter of 51 mm (2 in). Top of
sleeve must be flush with lip (C) on axle shaft.

MX,HU,5015,30 -19-160CT91

50-15-12 191091
 Final Drives/Assemble Axle Housing Assembly

ASSEMBLE AXLE HOUSING ASSEMBLY

IMPORTANT: Wrap splines of axle shaft with tape to

prevent cutting surface of oil seal as
you install shaft into housing.

1. Lay housing on its side to install axle shaft (A) into

housing (8) until oil seal wear sleeve (C) contacts end of
housing and cover (D) is aligned with housing mounting
holes.

A-Axle Shaft C-Oil Seal Wear Sleeve

B-Housing D-Seal Housing Cover

MX,HU,5015,31 -19-160CT91

2. Turn housing upright. Drive axle into the housing until

oil seal wear sleeve bottoms against the bearing snap
ring.

3. Fasten seal housing cover (A) with three cap screws.

Tighten cap screws to 26 N'm (19 Ib-ft).

50-15-13 191091
 Final Drives/Install Planetary Gear Assembly

4. Turn housing over onto the wheel hub.

5. Install new inner bearing (A) into housing. Push

bearing into place using a piece of pipe (8) with an
inside diameter of 40 mm (1-9/16 in.). Press on inner
race only.

MX,HU,5015,33 19160CT91

INSTALL BRAKE CAMSHAFT ASSEMBLY

I. Install brake camshaft (C) from outside.

2. Fasten it with washer (8) and snap ring (A).

INSTALL PLANETARY GEAR

ASSEMBLY-655, 755/756, 855/856
TRACTORS

1. Install planetary gear assembly. Fasten it with snap

ring (A).

655, 755/756, 855/856 Shown

MX,HU,5015,35 19160CT91

50-15-14 191091
 Final Drives/Install Planetary Gear Assembly

2. Clean the threads of all six ring gear mounting cap

screws and threaded axle housing using clean and cure
primer.

NOTE: Spring mounting holes on bottom of ring gear are

not symmetrical with alignment pins. Be sure ring
gear is turned so that spring mounting hole is not
directly next to brake camshaft.

3. Install ring gear (D) on alignment pins (seen in

previous illustration).

4. Apply thread lock and sealer (medium strength) on

threads of cap screws.

5. Install six cap screws (C). Tighten them to 26 N'm (19

Ib-ft).

6. Install and apply grease to six balls (B).

7. Put actuator plate (A) in place.

A-Actuator Plate C-Cap Screw (6)

B-Steel Ball (6) O-Ring Gear

8. Install three springs (A), with the shorter hook of

springs in ring gear, to anchor actuator plate (B) in
place.

9. Be sure two alignment pins are in place.

10. Install new gasket.

MX,HU,5015,37 -19-160CT91

50-15-15 191091
 Final Drives/Install Final Drives

INSTALL PLANETARY GEAR

ASSEMBLY-955 TRACTORS

1. Install planetary gear assembly. Fasten it with snap

ring (A).

NOTE: Spring mounting holes on bottom of ring gear are

not symmetrical with alignment pins. Be sure ring
gear is turned so that spring mounting hole is not
directly next to brake camshaft.

2. Install ring gear.

955 Shown
3. Apply thread lock and sealer (medium strength) on
threads of cap screws.

4. Install six cap screws. Tighten them to 26 N'm (19

Ib-ft).

6. Install and apply grease to six balls.

7. Put actuator plate in place.

8. Install three springs (A), with the shorter hook of

springs in ring gear, to anchor actuator plate (B) in
place.

9. Be sure two alignment pins are in place.

10. Install new gasket.

INSTALL FINAL DRIVES

1. Put two separator plates (A) and two brake disks (B)
alternately in place against snap ring (C) on final drive
pinion shaft.

2. Align notches of separator plates with brake camshaft

mounting hole (D) as you install splines of final drive
pinion shaft into differential assembly inside the transaxle
case.

A-Brake Plate (2) D-Brake Camshaft

B-Brake Disk (2) Hole Left Side View
C-Flnal Drive Pinion
Shaft

MX,HU,5015.39 19160CT91

50-15-16 191091
 Final Drives/Install Final Drives

3. Make sure alignment pins are in place.

4. Make sure new gasket is installed over alignment pins

and that a new D-ring is installed on differential lock
shifter shaft.

5. Align brake camshaft (A) with notches (8) of brake

separator plates. Align three gears (C) of final drive
planetary assembly with splines (D) of final drive pinion
shaft as you install final drive assembly.

6. Fasten final drive with five M10 x 35 cap screws (E)

and one M10 x 50 cap screw (F) in top hole of final
drive case (cutaway in right side view). Tighten all six
cap screws to 52 N'm (38 Ib-ft).

7. Install external shifter arm (G) on end of differential

lock shifter shaft and fasten it with the spring pin
removed earlier.

A-Brake Camshaft E-M10 x 35 Cap

B-Notches Screws
C-Gear (3 used) F-M10 x 50 Cap
D-Final Drive Pinion Screws
Shaft Splines G-External Shifter Arm

Training Aid Cutaway View-Right Side

50-15-17 191091
 Final Drives/Install ROPS and Final Assembly

8. Connect brake link (A). Fasten it with a washer and

cotter pin.

9. Connect differential lock link (8) (left side only).

Fasten it with a drilled pin, washer, and cotter pin.

10. On the right side: connect brake link, range shifter

link, and stop link (if equipped).

Left Side View

MX,HU,5015,41 -19-160CT91

INSTALL ROPS AND FINAL ASSEMBLY

1. Put ROPS in position with hoist. Install shorter bolt,

lock washer, and thick washer (A). Install two longest
bolts with lock washers (8)_ Install shortest bolt and lock
washer (C)- Repeat this procedure for the left side.
Tighten all eight bolts evenly to 215 N'm (159 Ib-ft).

2. Install drawbar. Fasten it with drilled pin and spring

pin.

Right Side View

3. Install wheels_ Tighten lug bolts to 115 N'm (85 Ib-ft).

IMPORTANT: Do not put lifting devise under

transaxle. Transaxle case could become
damaged.

4. Remove jack stands.

5. Fill transaxle with JOHN DEERE HY-GARD LOW

VISCOSITY transmission and hydraulic oil. Transaxle
capacity is approximately 17 L (4_5 gal).

MX,HU,5015,43 -19-160CT91

50-15-18 191091
 Final DrivesfAdjust Control Linkages

BLEED HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

To bleed the hydraulic system see Group 05, Section 70.

MX.HU.5015,44 -19-160CT91

ADJUST CONTROL LINKAGES

A CAUTION: Transmission control linkages may

be out of adjustment. Safely lift drive wheels
off ground and support tractor frame on jack
stands before any adjustments.

To check all transaxle functions and adjust transmission

control linkage see Section 250, Group 10.

50-15-19 191091
FmalDriveslAdjustConuolLmkages

50-15-20 191091
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Measurement Specification
Ring Gear-to-Differential Housing Cap Screw Torque 22 N-m (16 Ib-ft)

Differential Gear Total Backlash 0.17-0.23mm (0.007-0.009 in.)

Input Drive Housing Bearing Cap Screw Torque 26 N-m (19 Ib-ft)
Retainer

Input Drive Housing-to-Axle Housing Cap Screw Torque 82 N-m (60 Ib-ft)

Tie Rods Ends Torque 53 N-m (39 Ib-ft)

Bearing Case Cover Cap Screw Torque 52 N-m (38 Ib-ft)

MFWD End-Play Feeler Gauge 0.127-1.016 mm (0.005-0.040 in.)

OTHER MATERIAL

Number Name Use

T43511 John Deere LOCTITE Clean Clean threads
and Cure Primer

T43512 John Deere LOCTITE Retain brake plate cap screws

Threadlock and Sealer
(Medium Strength)

PT569 John Deere NEVER-SEEz<ID Lubricate axle shaft

Lubricant

John Deere GL-5 Gear Lubricate MFWD Internal

Lubricant Components-Capacity: 2.13 L (2.25
qt.) for 655, 755/756, and 855/856
tractors-3.3 L (3.5 qt) for 955
tractors.

LOCTITE is a trademark of the Loctite corporation

NEVER-SEEZ is a trademark of the Never-Seez Compound Corporation

50-20-1
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Remove MFWD Axle

SERVICE EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS

NOTE' Order tools from the U.S. SERVICE-GARDTM Catalog or from the European Microfiche Tool Catalog
(MTC). Some tools may be available from a local supplier.

Name Use

2-Ton Jack Stands To support frame.

Floor Jack To support MFWD assembly.

Hydraulic Press To and install remove bearings.

Snap Ring Pliers Set To remove snap rings.

Bushing, Bearing & Seal Drive Set To service bushings, bearings, and seals.

2-Jaw Slide Hammer Puller To remove bearings.

40 mm (1-9/16 in.) I.D. Pipe To install bearings and wear sleeves.

3-Jaw Puller To remove bearings.

Vise-Grip Pliers To set backlash.

Shim Pack Kit To adjust backlash.

REMOVE MFWD AXLE

1. Remove MFWD drive shaft.

2. On 655, 755/756, and early 855/856 tractors, remove

fuel tank. (See procedure in Section 30.) On late
855/856 and all 955 tractors, remove the battery.

3. Remove power steering cylinder from MFWD

mountings and tie it to the frame during MFWD repair.

DO NOT DISCONNECT POWER STEERING

HYDRAULIC HOSES OR FITTINGS (A). Right Side View

MX,HU,5020,3A -19-160CT91

50-20-2 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Remove MFWD Axle

4. Loosen lug nuts on front wheels before you raise front

of tractor.

5. Raise the front of the tractor and safely support the

frame behind the axle, about mid-engine area, to allow
removal of front axle.

6. Remove the front wheels.

7. Support the axle with a floor jack..

5. Remove axle pin mounting bolts (A).

6. Slide axle pin (8) part-of-the-way out to remove shims

(C).

MX,HU,5020,5 19160CT91

50-20-3 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Disassemble Final Drive Case

7. Remove axle pin (A) and bushing (8). Inspect and

replace, if required.
8. Lower axle from frame with floor jack and set axle on
blocks for disassembly.

DISASSEMBLE FINAL DRIVE CASE.

1. Remove tie rod (A).

M37587

2. Drain differential housing first and then each of the

spindle/final drive cases at plug (A). Capacity is
approximately 2.13 L (2.25 qt) for 655, 755/756, and
855/856 tractors-3.3 L (3.5 qt) for 955 tractors.
3. Remove six cover cap screws (8). Use a rubber
hammer to remove cover assembly from spindle
housing.

M37588

50-20-4
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Disassemble Final Drive Case

4. Remove bearing (A) from bearing case mount.

5. Remove snap ring (8) from hub shaft.

MX,HU,5020,9A 19160CT91

6. Press hub shaft (A) out of cover assembly.

7. Inspect oil seal wear sleeve (A) for wear. Remove and
replace if worn or damaged.

MX,HU,5020,11 19160CT91

8. Inspect oil seal for damage. Remove and replace if

required.

MX,HU,5020,12 19160CT91

50-20-5 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Assemble Final Drive Case

9. Remove outer snap ring.

MX.HU,5020,13 -19-160CT91

10. Push on ring gear race surface (A) to press it out of

bearing.

11. Inspect bearing for wear. Replace if required.

12. Inspect inner snap ring (A) and replace, if required.

MX,HU,5020,15 -19-160CT91

ASSEMBLE FINAL DRIVE CASE

1. Install inner snap ring (A) in lower groove of case

cover.

2. Install bearing in case cover.

MX,HU,5020,16 -19-160CT91

50-20-6 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Assemble Final Drive Case

3. Press on inner race surface of cover bearing to install

it on shaft (A) of ring gear (32 teeth for 655, 755/756,
and 855/856 tractors-40 teeth for 955 tractors).

MX.HU,5020,17 19-160CT91

4. Install outer snap ring in cover.

5. Coat surface of new seal with grease before you

install it in cover.

CD
~
w
~
z
~

MX,HU,5020,19 -19-160CT91

6. Install new oil seal wear sleeve on hub shaft, if

required.

MX,HU,5020,20 -19-160CT91

50-20-7 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)IAssemble Final Drive Case

7. Press hub into cover assembly.

M37600

8. Install snap ring (8) in groove of hub shaft.

9. Install bearing (A) on bearing case mount.

10. Install cover assembly, with arrow (A) pointing up,

onto bearing.

11. Fasten cover with six M 10 x 30 cap crews (8).

Tighten cap screws in a crossing pattern to 52 N-m
(38 Ib-ft).
12. Install axle differential center plug and each of the
spindle/final drive case plugs (A). Fill case with John
Deere GL-5 Gear Lubricant-SAE 80W-90. Capacity is
approximately 2.13 L (2.25 qt) for 655, 755/756, and
855/856 tractors-3.3 L (3.5 qt) for 955 tractors.

M37588

50-20-8
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Cutaway View-Spindle Gear Case

CUTAWAY VIEW-SPINDLE GEAR CASE

A-Steering Arm H-Top Spindle Bevel Drive M-oll Seal R-5nap Ring
B-oil Seal Wear Sleeve Gear N-5nap Ring 5-Bottom Spindle Bevel
C-Oil Seal I-Spindle Bevel Input Gear O-Washer Drive Gear
D-Ball Bearing WIBall Bearing P-Needle Bearing With T-Ball Bearing
E-Snap Ring J-5pindle Drive Shaft Inner Race U-Final Drive Bevel Ring
F-Washer K-Oil Seal Wear Sleeve Q-Washer Gear Assembly
G.....Ball Bearing L-Bushlng

Training Aid Cutaway View-Right-Front

This training aid cutaway view shows the proper housing. Use this as a reference for disassembly and
assembly order of the parts that make up the spindle assembly of the spindle housing.

50-20-9 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Disassemble Spindle Gear Case

DISASSEMBLE SPINDLE GEAR CASE

1. Drain axle differential at center plug first and then
each of the spindle/final drive case plugs (A). Capacity
is approximately 2.13 L (2.25 qt) for 655, 755/756, and
855/856 tractors-3.3 L (3.5 qt) for 955 tractors.
2. Remove six cover cap screws (8). Use a rubber
hammer to remove cover assembly.

NOTE: To disassemble and assemble final drive case,

see Disassemble Final Drive Case (page 50-
20-4) in this group. M37588

3. Remove two cap screws (8) and two nuts (C).

4. Remove six cap screws (A). Use a rubber hammer to
separate spindle and final drive housing assemblies
from axle housing.

M37601

50-20-10
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Disassemble Spindle Gear Case

5. Remove bevel gear and bearin.g from upper spindle

gear case. Inspect and replace, if required.

MX,HU,5020,28 -19-160CT91

6. Use a rubber hammer to remove steering arm.

7. Inspect oil seal wear sleeve (A) for damage. Remove

and replace, if required.

MX,HU,5020,30 -19-160CT91

8. Inspect upper case oil seal for damage. Remove and

replace, if required.

co
".' ~
w

~
z
~

MX,HU,5020,31 -19-160CT91

50-20-11 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Disassemble Spindle Gear Case

9. Use an internal puller to remove top bearing from

upper case. Inspect and replace, if required.

MX,HU,5020,32 19-160CT91

NOTE: Bearings in upper gear case (A) are identical.

10. Use a rubber hammer to remove upper gear case

(A) from lower gear case (8).

NOTE: The spindle shaft mayor may not stay in the

lower bearing of the upper case and/or the
bearing may fall out with the shaft. If bearing and
shaft remain in upper gear case, drive spindle
shaft from lower bearing and remove lower
bearing and washer from upper gear case. If
bearing and shaft separate from upper gear case,
you must hold the upper case up against the
spindle gear while you drive the shaft from the
bearing, gear and upper case.

The spindle shaft could also remain in the bottom

drive gear and ball bearing of the lower gear
case (B), separating itself from upper case
components. If this happens, wiggle the shaft out
of the ball bearing and gear. Or you may want to
walk the bearing and gear out using the shaft as
a handle and use a bearing puller to remove the
bearing from the spindle shaft.

50-20-12 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Disassemble Spindle Gear Case

11. Inspect oil seal wear sleeve (A) for damage. Remove
and replace, if required.

MX,HU,5020,34 -19-160CT91

12. Inspect upper gear case snap ring (A) for damage.
Remove and replace, if required.

13. Remove sleeve (A) from lower gear case. Inspect

and replace, if required.

14. Inspect stud bolts (8) and spring pins (C) for
damage. Remove and replace, if required.

MX,HU,5020,36 -19-160CT91

15. Remove and discard oil seal.

<Xl
g:
w
gJ
9
z
:;>

MX,HU,5020,37 -19-160CT91

50-20-13 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Disassemble Spindle Gear Case

16. Remove upper snap ring (A) and washer (8).

17. Remove and inspect inner bearing race. Replace, if
required.

M37612

18. Remove bearing (A) (if not already removed).

M85025

19. Remove gear (A) (13 teeth for 655, 755/756, and
855/856 tractors-12 teeth for 955 tractors), washer (8)
(955 tractors) and bearing (C).

NOTE: 955 tractors use a washer (B) between bearing

and gear.

M37627

20. Remove lower snap ring (A) and washer (not

depicted). Use an angled snap ring pliers.

M37613

50-20-14
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)IDisassemble Spindle Gear Case

21. Push needle bearing out of gear box with a 2 in.

driver disk.

M37614

50-20-15
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Cross-Section View

CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW-MFWD

A-Input Shaft F-Differential Bevel Pinion I-Spindle Bevel Input Gear M-Flnal Drive Bevel Ring
B-Input Gear Gear J-Top Spindle Bevel Drive Gear
C-Transfer Gear G-Differential Bevel Axle Gear N-Wheel Hub Shaft
D-Differential Drive Shaft Drive Gear K-Spindle Drive Shaft
With Bevel Pinion Gear H-Axle L-Bottom Spindle Bevel
E-Differential Bevel Ring Drive Gear
Gear

MX,HU,5020,46 -19-160CT91

50-20-16 191091
Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Cross-Section View

50-20-17 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Assemble Spindle Gear Case

ASSEMBLE SPINDLE GEAR CASE

NOTE: 955 tractors use a washer (C) between bearing
and gear.

1. Install bearing (A) in bottom of lower gear case. Use

a 2 in. driver disk to seat the bearing. Place gear (8) (13
teeth for 655, 755/756, and 855/856 tractors-12 teeth
for 955 tractors) on top of bearing. See Note above.

M37627

2. Install lower snap ring (A) with angled snap ring

pliers. Put washer (8) on top of snap-ring.

M37621

3. Install needle bearing (A) in gear case. Push needle

bearing with a 2 in. disk until it contacts lower washer.
4. Install inner race (8), upper washer (C), and upper
snap ring (D).

5 Install oil seal-coat surface of seal with grease, then

push seal into gear case until it seats against upper
snap ring.

M37623

50-20-18
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Assemble Spindle Gear Case

6. Install collar-collar must seat against oil seal.

MX,HU,5020,51 19160CT91

7. Install oil seal wear sleeve (A) on upper gear case

using a 1-9/16 in. ID pipe.

19160CT91

NOTE: All gear cases on MFWD axles with serial

number (017049- ) will have washer (E)
between bearing (A) and snap-ring (8). All

~!
replacement gear cases will also have this
washer.
cr J($< ')
8. Install bearing (A) in upper gear case 1/16 in. below .'<:-:::..~ \<;s.:>""-.

snap ring groove, then install washer (E).

9. Install snap ring (8), bearing (C), and oil seal (D).

A-Searing 0-011 Seal

S-8nap Ring E-Washer
C-Searing

MX,HU,5020,53 19160CT91

50-20-19 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Assemble Spindle Gear Case

10. Install spindle shaft (A) in gear case. Put short

splines of shaft through 16-tooth gear (8) and smooth
surface of end of shaft into bearing. Tap shaft into
bearing with a rubber hammer until it is fully seated.

MX,HU,5020,54 -19-160CT91

11. Install upper gear case assembly (A) into lower gear
case assembly (8). Spindle shaft splines must align with
gear in bottom of lower gear case.

-19-160CT91

12. Install a new oil seal wear sleeve (A) if required, coat
the seal with grease and install with a socket or short
pipe,

MX,HU,5020,56 -19-160CT91

50-20-20 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Assemble Spindle Gear Case

13. Install steering arm assembly with a rubber hammer.

19160CT91

14. Install M10 x 30 cap screws (A) and M10 nuts (8).
Do not tighten them until after spindle case is attached
to axle housing (Step 21).

MX.HU.5020,58 19160CT91

15. Assemble bearing (A) and 15-tooth gear (8). Install

bearing and gear into upper gear case.

MX,HU,5020,59 -19-160CT91

50-20-21 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Assemble Spindle Gear Case

16. Install ball bearing (A) onto mounting surface of

lower gear case. Match final drive ring gear mounting
surface (8) with ball bearing (A) when hub assembly is
installed in Step 18, below.

17. Align axle shaft splines with spindle input gear

splines as you install spindle assembly on differential
drive axle.

18. Install hub assembly on spindle assembly with

cover arrow (A) pointing up.

M37589

19. Install six M1 0 x 30 cap screws (8) and tighten in a

crossing pattern to 52 N-m (38 Ib-ft).

20. Tighten steering arm cap screws and nuts to 52

N-m (38 Ib-ft) at this time.

21. Install axle differential center plug and each of the

spindle/final drive case plugs (A). Fill case with John
Deere GL-5 Gear Lubricant-SAE 80W-90. Capacity is
approximately 2.13 L (2.25 qt) for 655, 755/756, and
855/856 tractors-3.3 L (3.5 qt) for 955 tractors.
M37588

50-20-22
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Disassemble Differential Input Housing

DISASSEMBLE DIFFERENTIAL INPUT

HOUSING

1. Remove five regular cap screws (A) and two special

cap screws (8) to remove drive housing cover and
gasket.

NOTE: Input shaft, gear and bearing may not come off
with cover. If they remain in the differential
housing, grab the end of the input shaft and walk
the bearing out of its seat.

MX,HU,5020,60 -19-160CT91

2_ Pull bearing (A) from input gear (8)_ Remove gear

from input shaft. Replace any damaged components.

-19-160CT91

3. Push input shaft (A) out of the housing. Washer (C)

will be between bearing (8) and the housing.

4. Inspect the shaft and bearing for wear or damage.

Use a puller over the small splined end of shaft to
remove the bearing. Remove and discard oil seal (D).

MX,HU,5020,62 -19-160CT91

5. Use a puller to remove the small bearing from

differential pinion drive shaft so you can remove the
snap ring to remove the transfer gear. Remove cap
screws (A) from retaining plate to remove large bearing
and pinion drive shaft.

MX,HU,5020,63 -19-160CT91

50-20-23 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWDjlDisassemble Differential

6. Inspect pinion gear drive shaft (A), large bearing (8),

and transfer gear (C) for wear or damage.

7. Remove snap ring (0) to remove transfer gear (C).

8. Use a puller to remove large bearing (8). The small

cover bearing (E) mounts on the right end of the shaft.

A-Pinion Gear Drive D-Snap Ring

Shaft E-Small Cover Bearing
B-Large Bearing F-Retaining Plate
C-Transfer Gear G-Cap Screw (2)

DISASSEMBLE DIFFERENTIAL

1. Remove seven cap screws to separate the left

axle/spindle housing from the center differential housing.

MX,HU,5020,65 -19-160CT91

2. Remove differential assembly from the axle housing.

Remove all shims (A) from housing. Keep the shims
together for installation.

MX,HU,5020,66 -19-160CT91

50-20-24 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Disassemble Differential

3. Remove six cap screws (A) to remove ring gear (8).

4. Inspect the bearings (they are identical) for wear or

damage and replace, if necessary.

5. Use the appropriate type pullers to remove bearings

(C).

MX,HU,5020,67 -19-160CT91

6. Drive spring pin (A) out of differential housing and

pinion shaft (8).

7. Push shaft (8) out of housing.

8. Remove pinion thrust washers (A) and their respective

pinion gears.

MX,HU,5020,69 -19-160CT91

9. Remove thrust washer (8) from each of the side

pinion gears (A).

MX.HU,5020,70 -19-160CT91

50-20-25 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Assemble Differential

ASSEMBLE DIFFERENTIAL

1. Install thrust washers (8) onto (14 teeth) side pinion

gears (A) and install into drive housing.

MX,HU,5020,71 -19-160CT91

2. Align pinion gears (10 teeth) and thrust washers (A)

with drive housing pinion shaft bore.

. .,.,'"
"L ~
'"
,72 -19-160CT91
~

3_ Install pinion shaft with hole (A) as shown and install

spring pin.

MX,HU,5020,73 -19-160CT91

4. Install identical bearings (C).

5. Clean threads of all cap screws (A) and the

differential housing with clean and cure primer.

6. Apply thread lock and sealer (medium strength) to the

threads of the cap screws.

7. Install ring gear (8) (41 teeth for 655, 7551756, and
855/856 tractors-38 teeth for 955 tractors) and tighten
cap screws (A) to 22 N'm (16 Ib-ft).

MX,HU,5020,74 -19-160CT91

50-20-26 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Assemble Differential

NOTE- Assemble and adjust the differential assembly

with the axle housing vertical.

8. Install the same number of shims (A) that were

removed into housing.

NOTE: Do not install transfer gear, snap ring, nor small

cover bearing on pinion gear drive shaft until
backlash adjustment has been made.

9. Press large bearing on pinion gear drive shaft (8) (8

teeth for 655, 7551756, and 855/856 tractors-9 teeth
for 955 tractors).

10. Put retaining plate (F) over shaft as shown.

11. Install differential assembly (A) on top of shims

inside the housing.

MX,HU,5020,76 19160CT91

50-20-27 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Assemble Differential

12. Notch (8) must be positioned as shown. Install and

tighten two M8 x 20 bearing retainer cap screws (A) to
26 N'm (19 Ib-ft).

MX.HU.5020.77 -19-160CT91

12. Fasten a vise-grip pliers to the splines to the right of

the snap ring groove of the pinion gear drive shaft. Let
the pliers rest against the power steering cylinder
mounting of the axle housing.

13. Install a side deflection gauge. Adjust pointer (A) to

the side of a gear tooth, 2/3 of the way to the outside
of the ring gear.

14. Adjust the gauge to zero. Lightly move differential

back and forth. Total backlash should measure
0.17-0.23 mm (0.007-0.009 in.).

IMPORTANT: The pinion gear drive shaft must be

removed each time a shim adjustment
is made. Tighten the bearing retainer
plate each time it is installed to
properly recheck the backlash.

15. Adjust backlash by adding or removing shims

between the differential assembly bearing and its axle
housing seat. Shims are available in a kit. Shims come in
0.1 mm (0.004 in.), 0.3 mm (0.012 in.), and 0.5 mm (0.02
in.) thicknesses.

16. Tighten bearing retainer plate cap screws to 26 N'm

(19 Ib-ft) after final backlash has been set. Install
transfer gear and snap ring on pinion gear drive shaft at
this time.

50-20-28 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Assemble Differential

17. Assemble input housing: install new oil seal (D),

place thrust washer (C) on top of oil seal, press bearing
(8) onto input shaft (A), and install the shaft in the
housing-long splines through the inside of the oil seal
first. The shaft bearing must seat fully inside the housing
cover.

MX,HU,5020,79 -19-160CT91

18. Install bearing (A).

19. Install input gear (8) (25 teeth for 655,

755/756,855/856 tractors and 28 teeth for 955 tractors)
on input shaft with raised side of gear up and away from
the seal.

20. Install bearing (C).

21. Align gears, ends of shafts, and new gasket (D) as

you install input housing cover on differential axle
housing.

22. Install larger centering cap screws (A) loose. Start

remaining cap screws (8), then tighten cap screws (A).
Tighten all cap screws to 26 N'm (19 Ib-ft).

MX.HU,5020,81 -19-160CT91

50-20-29 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Assemble Axle Housings

ASSEMBLE AXLE HOUSINGS

1. Install new seal (A).
2. Install shaft (8) with short splines into spindle input
gear inside left axle housing.

3. Align long splines of left axle shaft with splines of

differential assembly.
4. Make sure seal remains in its groove as you slide
housing together.
5. Clean all cap screw and housings threads using
clean and cure primer.
6. Apply thread lock and sealer (medium strength) to
the threads of seven M1 0 x 30 cap screws (A).
7. Tighten cap screws to 52 N-m (38 Ib-ft).

NOTE: Install drain plug(s) and fill MFWD with John M37680
Deere GL-9 Gear Lubricant-SAE 80W-90.
Capacity is approximately 2. 13 L (2.25 qt) for
655, 755/756, and 855/856 tractors-
3.3 L (3.5 qt) for 955 tractors.

8. Install tie rod (A). Tighten tie rod castle nuts to 53

N-m (39 Ib-ft), turn nut forward to drilled hole and install
cotter pin. See page 50-20-32 for tie rod adjustment.
9. Install axle to tractor in reverse order of disassembly
procedures at the beginning of this section.

M37588

50-20-30
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Assemble Axle Housings

10. When you install the power steering cylinder, tighten

both castle nuts to 75 N'm (55 Ib-ft) before you install
cotter pins. Make sure both power steering hoses and
their fittings (A) are in good condition and installed
properly-otherwise replace and/or repair, if required.

11. Install front wheels. Tighten lug nuts to 79 N'm (58

Ib-ft) on 655, 755/756, and 855/856 tractors-120 N'm
(89 Ib-ft) on 955 tractors.

12. Before you remove tractor support equipment, adjust

axle end-play.

MX,HU,5020,84A -19-160CT91

50-20-31 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Adjust Front Axle Toe-In

ADJUST FRONT AXLE END-PLAY

SPECIFICATION

End-Play ................... 0.127-1.016 mm (0.005-0.040 in.)

1. Safely jack up tractor so axle is free to pivot.

2. With feeler gauge, measure gap between axle housing

and bushing.

3. Add or deduct shims (C) between pin flange (8) and

tractor frame to gain specification.

4. Tighten cap screws to 88 N'm (65 Ib-ft).

ADJUST FRONT AXLE TOE-IN

1. Position wheels so they are pointing straight ahead.

2. Measure distance between the inner edges of the

tires at the rear.

3. Measure front distance between tires. When properly

adjusted, front distance should be 3-9 mm (1/8-3/8 in.)
less than rear distance.

MX,HU,5020,86 19160CT91

50-20-32 191091
 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Adjust Front Axle Toe-In

4. Loosen tie rod nuts and adjust tie rod to lengthen or

shorten distance.

IMPORTANT: Make sure there is free movement of

ball joints after tightening.

5. Tighten tie rod nuts to 118 N'm (87 Ib-ft.).

MX,HU,5020,87 19160CT91

50-20-33 191091
Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)/Adjust Front Axle Toe-In

50-20-34 191091
 Group 25
Power Train Gears And Shafts

50-25-1 191091
 Power Train Gears And Shafts/Exploded View

EXPLODED VIEW-POWER TRAIN GEARS AND SHAFTS

1-MFWD Left Hub Shaft 17-MFWD Right Hub Shaft 32-Transaxle Rear PTO 46-Left Final Drive Pinion
2-MFWD Left Final Drive 18-MFWD Differential Input Reduction Gear - Carrier
Ring Gear -(32T-6551 Shaft Pinion Gear -(8T- (35T-AII) 47-Left Final Drive Pinion
755/855,40T-955) 655/755/855, 9T-955) 33-Transaxle Rear PTO IBrake Drive Shaft -
3-MFWD Left Bottom 19-MFWD Differential Reduction Shaft Pinion (12T-AII)
Spindle Gear -(13T-6551 Transfer Gear -(20T-655 Gear - (11T-AII) 48-Transaxle Differential
755/855, 12T-955) 1755/855/, 22T-955) 34-Transaxle Mid PTO (Left) Side Pinion Gear
4-MFWD Left Spindle Shaft 20-MFWD Differential Input Transfer Gear - (16T-AII)
5-MFWD Left Top Spindle Gear -(25T-6551755/855, (32T-AII) 49-Transaxle Differential
Gear - (16T-AII) 28T-955) 35-Transaxle Mid PTO Pinion Gears -
6-MFWD Left Spindle 21-MFWD Differential Input Output Drive Shaft (10T-AII)
Input Gear - (15T-AII) Shaft 36-Transaxle Mid PTO 50-Transaxle Differential
7-MFWD Left Axle Drive 22-Transaxle MFWD Output Output Gear - (30T-All) (Right) Side Pinion Gear
Shaft Shaft 37-Transaxle Hi-Range (16T-AII)
8-MFWD Differential Ring 23-Transaxle MFWD Output Reduction Gear - 51-Transaxle Differential
Gear - (41T-65517551 Gear - (26T-655,20T-755 (31T-AII) Ring Gear-(41T-6551755
855, 38T-955) 1855/955) 38-Transaxle HilLo 1855, 39T-955)
9-MFWD Differential Side 24-Transaxle MFWD Drive Transfer Shaft 52-Transaxle Rear PTO
Pinion Gears - (14T-All) Gear - (13T-AII) 39-Transaxle Lo-Range Output Gear - (24T-All)
10-MFWD Differential 25-Hydro/Transaxle Input Speed Gear - (23T-6551 53-Transaxle Rear PTO
Pinion Gears - Drive Gear - (19T-AII) 755/855/, 21T-955) Output Drive Shaft
(10T-AII) 26-Transaxle Main PTO 40-Transaxle Hi-Range 54-Right Final Drive
11-MFWD Right Axle Drive Drive Gear - (19T-6551 Speed Gear - (20T-All) Pinion/Brake Drive Shaft
Shaft 755/855, 17T-955) 41-Transaxle Lo-Range (12T-AII)
12-MFWD Right Spindle 27-Transaxle Main PTOI Reduction Gear - (28T- 55-Right Final Drive
Input Gear - (15T-AII) Hydraulic Pump Drive 6551755/855, 30T-955) Pinion Carrier
13-MFWD Right Top Spindle Shaft 42-Transaxle HilLo Input 56-Right Final Drive
Gear - (16T-AII) 28-Transaxle Mid PTO Shaft Pinion Gear -(8T- Pinion Gears - (16T-AII)
14-MFWD Right Spindle Input Gear - (29T-AII) 6551755/855, 7T-955) 57-Right Final Drive Ring
Shaft 29-Transaxle Rear PTO 43-Left Final Drive Hub Gear - (45T-AII)
15-MFWD Right Bottom Input Gear - (19T-AII) Shaft 58-Right Final Drive Hub
Spindle Gear -(13T-6551 30-Transaxle PTO Clutch 44-Left Final Drive Ring Shaft
755/855, 12T-955) Drive Gear - (28T-6551 Gear - (45T-AII)
16-MFWD Right Final Drive 755/855, 25T-955) 45-Left Final Drive Pinion
Ring Gear-(32T-6551755 31-Transaxle PTO Clutchl Gears - (16T-AII)
/855, 40T-955) Brake Drive Shaft

EXPLODED VIEW-GEAR-MESH PATTERN

1 With 2 29 With 32 47 (Right Set) With 48

2 With 1 and 3 33 (Pinion) With 52 48 With 47 (Right Set)
5 With 6 34 With 28 & 36 and 49
8 With 18 (Pinion) 37 With 25 & 40 49 With 50
9 With 10 39 With 41 50 With 49 & 54 (Left Set)
12 With 13 42 (Pinion) With 51 54 (Left Set) With 50
15 With 16 43 With 46 54 (Inside Right Set) With
19 With 20 44 With 45 BrakelSeparator Plates
23 With 24 45 With 44 & 47 (Far 54 (Far Right Set) With 56
25 With 37 Left Set) 55 With 58
26 With 30 47 (Inside Left Set) With 56 With 54 & 57
28 With 34 BrakelSeparator Plates

50-25-2 191091
 Power Train Gears And Shafts/Exploded View

MX HU 5025 2 -19-160CT91

50-25-3 191091
Power Train Gears And Shafts/Exploded View

50-25-4 191091
 Group 30
Speed Control Linkage
SPECIFICATIONS
Item Measurement Specification
Bronze Bushing Inside Diameter 19.0880.025 mm
(0.75150.001 in.)

Forward/Reverse Tie Rods Center of Eyelets 346 mm (13.62 in.)

Preliminary Length

Transmission Swash plate Bracket Torque 41 N-m (30 Ib-ft)

Cap Screw

Neutral Return Spring Initial Length 133 mm (5.25 in.)

REMOVE SPEED CONTROL LINKAGE

1. Park tractor safely. Engage park brake.
2. Turn depth control lever (A) clockwise until stops.
3. Remove four cap screws. Remove panel (B) by lifting
right-rear corner of panel first and moving panel out the
right side after you clear head of depth control cap
screw.

M43634

50-30-1
 Speed Control Linkage/Remove Speed Control Linkage

4. Remove panel (A).

655 Shown
MX,HU,5030,2 19160CT91

5. Remove spring pin (A) to remove pawl (8).

Inside Right Frame

6. Disconnect spring (A).

7. Remove cap screw (8) to remove neutral return level

(C).

8. Remove nut (D) and bolt (E) to disconnect rod (F).

A-Spring E-Bolt
B-Cap Screw F-Speed Control Tie
C-Neutral Return Level Rod
O-Lock Nut

Under Right Foot Rest

MX,HU,5030,4 19160CT91

50-30-2 191091
 Speed Control Linkage/Remove Speed Control Linkage

9. Remove cruise control pawl and tie rod assembly (A).

Inside Right Frame

10. Disconnect switch lead (A).

11. Remove cap screw (8) to remove transmission

speed control lever (C).

Inside Right Frame

12. If neutral start switch is being replaced, be sure to

install spacer (A) between switch and speed control
lever.

MX,HU,5030,7 19160CT91

50-30-3 191091
 Speed Control Linkage/Remove Speed Control Linkage

13. Inspect neutral return lever rollers (8). Replace them

if they DO NOT turn freely.

14. Inspect bronze bushing in lever (D) for excessive

wear on the inside diameter. If bushing is being
replaced, be sure to align hole in bushing with grease
fitting hole in lever. Ream bushing to 19.088 0.025
mm (0.7515 0.001 in.) diameter.

A-Lock Nut F-Short Cap Screw

8-Roller (2 used)
C-Washer (2 used)
D-Neutral Return Lever
G-Long Cap Screw
H-Eccentrlc Pivot
I-Seal Cover (2 used)
i
.. :::;
E-Thin Washer J-Felt Seal (2 used)

MX,HU,5030,B 19160CT91

15. Remove speed control pedals.

Under Right Foot Rest

16. Inspect bushings (A) for wear. Remove and discard

them if they are worn excessively.

Under Right Foot Rest

MX,HU,5030,10 19160CT91

50-30-4 191091
 Speed Control Linkage/Remove Speed Control Linkage

17. To replace cruise control linkage, remove foot rest

(A), panel (8), and panel (C).

Right Side View

MX.HU,5030,11 -19-160CT91

18. Remove bolt (A) and cotter pins (8) to disconnect

cruise control ratchet assembly (C).

19. Remove cotter pin (D) to disconnect link (E).

20. Remove lock nut (F) to remove cruise control lever

(G).

A-Bolt D-Cotter Pin

B-Cotter Pin (2) E-Cruise Control Link
C-Cruise Control F-Lock Nut
Ratchet Assembly G-Cruise Control Lever
Right Side View

50-30-5 191091
 Speed Control Unkage/3-Dimensional View

SPEED CONTROL LINKAGE

A-Cruise Control Ratchet C-Cruise Control Lever F-Transmission Swashplate H-Forward Control Tie Rod
Bracket D-Cruise Control Link Rod Control Bracket I-Forward Control Pedal
B-Master Brake Release E-Reverse Control Tie Rod G-Neutral Return Bracket J-Reverse Control Pedal
Link

13 -19-160CT91

50-30-6 191091
 Speed Control Linkage/Install Speed Control Linkage

INSTALL SPEED CONTROL LINKAGE

1. Assemble parts (A thru D).

A-Cruise Control C-Bolt and Lock Nut

Ratchet Bracket D-Eccentric Pivot
B-Master Brake
Release Link

MX.HU.5030,14 19160CT91

2. Install ratchet assembly (C). Fasten it with bolt (A).

3. Install lever (G). Fasten it with bolt (F).

4. Install link rod (E). Fasten it with washers and cotter

pins (8 and D).

5. Connect ratchet assembly (C) to service/park brake

with washer and cotter pin (8).

A-Bolt E-Cruise Control Link

B-Cotter Pin (2) Rod
C-Cruise Control F-Bolt Inside Right Frame
Ratchet Assembly G-Cruise Control Lever
D-Cotter Pin

Right Side View

6. Install new bronze bushings flush with ends of boss.

Ream bushings to 19.088 0.025 mm (0.7515 0.001
in.) diameter.

Under Right Foot Rest

MX,HU,5030,16 -19-160CT91

50-30-7 191091
 Speed Control Linkage/Install Speed Control Linkage

7. Install speed control pedals. Check to see that pedals

move freely.

Under Right Foot Rest

MX,HU,5030,17 19160CT91

IMPORTANT: One end of tie rod has left-hand

threads-make sure you don't strip
these threads by turning eyelet in the
wrong direction.

If installing new speed control tie rods, preliminary length

adjustment (A) from center of eyes should be 346 mm
(13.62 in.) for both reverse and forward rods.

8. To adjust length, loosen jam nuts (8). Turn both ends

evenly to specified length then tighten jam nuts.

18 -19-160CT91

9. Put same amount of washer shims on pedal shaft as

were removed. Put cruise control pawl on the shaft and
use a punch to align holes. Add or remove shims as
required to reduce shaft end-play.

10. Install cruise control pawl and tie rod assembly (8).
Fasten it with spring pin (A).

Inside Right Frame

MX,HU,5030,19 -19-160CT91

50-30-8 191091
 Speed Control Linkage/Install Speed Control Linkage

11. Install transmission speed control bracket (C). Fasten

it with cap screw (8). Tighten cap screw to 41 N'm (30
Ib-ft).

12. Connect switch lead (A).

Inside Right Frame

MX,HU,5030,20 -19-160CT91

13. Assemble neutral return lever parts (A thru J).

.. . .

A-Lock Nut F-Short Cap Screw . .."...

~
\rit :., .".. : -:.. ". .'"."
B-Roller (2 used) G-Long Cap Screw .~'<'~.' JI. .
," . . . . ". '. i:."..
. ;I.I..............
~
. :.... :\'!Cl:'.:::.'
..... '" .'.
.' ..

C-Washer (2 used) H-Eccentric Pivot \

. . . ..

D-Neutral Return Lever I-Seal Cover (2 used) : :.;". ;" :. . <.\~. . ".. ":". .<:$p~.:.
E-Thin Washer J-Felt Seal (2 used)

14. Install neutral return lever assembly (C). Fasten it to

transmission with cap screw (8).

15. Install transmission control linkage parts (E thru K).

16. Fasten other end of rod (F) to control pedal with

lock nut (D),

17. Connect spring (A). Adjust coil length to 133 mm

(5.25 in.).

A-Spring G-Long Spacer

B-Cap Screw H-Reverse Control Tie Under Right Foot Rest
C-Neutral Return Lever Rod
D-Lock Nut I-Short Spacer
E-Bolt J-Transmission Speed
F-Forward Control Tie Control Lever
Rod K-Lock Nut

<Xl
<Xl
(!l
::J
~
"?
z
=?

MX,HU,5030,22 -19-160CT91

50-30-9 191091
 Speed Control Linkage/Install Speed Control Linkage

18. Install panels (C and B) and foot rest (A).

Right Side View

MX.HU,5030,23 -19-160CT91

19. Install panel (A).

655 Shown

20. Adjust transmission control linkage. Adjust cruise

control linkage. (See Section 250.)

21. Install panel (B). Be sure depth control lever (A)

aligns properly with bolt head. Fasten panel with four
cap screws.

MX,HU,5030,25 -19-160CT91

50-30-10 191091
 Section 60
Steering and Brakes Repair
Contents
Page Page

Group OS-Standard Front Axle Group 1S-Brake Linkage

Essential Tools ....................... 60-05-1 Specifications ....................... 60-15-1
Service Equipment and Tools ............ 60-05-1 Service Equipment and Tools ........... 60-15-1
Other Material ....................... 60-05-1 Remove Brake Linkage ................ 60-15-1
Specifications ........................ 60-05-2 Install Brake Linkage .................. 60-15-6
Remove Standard Front Axle ............ 60-05-2 Repair Brake Disks .................. 60-15-11
Install Standard Front Axle .............. 60-05-3
Adjust Axle End-Play .................. 60-05-4
Remove Spindle Shaft and Hub .......... 60-05-4
Repair Spindle Shaft Bushing ........... 60-05-5
Repair Spindle Shaft Bearing and Race ... 60-05-6
Install Spindle Shaft and Hub ............ 60-05-6
Remove Wheel Bearings ............... 60-05-7
Install Wheel Bearings ................. 60-05-8
Adjust Toe-In ........................ 60-05-9

Group 10-Steering Valve

Service Equipment and Tools ............ 60-10-1
Fabricated Tools ...................... 60-10-1
Other Material ....................... 60-10-1
Specifications ........................ 60-10-2
Remove Steering Valve ................ 60-10-3
Disassemble Steering Valve ............ 60-10-4
Disassemble Metering Section ........... 60-10-7
Disassemble Steering Tube Section ..... 60-10-10
Cross-Section View .................. 60-10-12
Assemble Steering Valve .............. 60-10-13
Assemble Metering Section ............ 60-10-14
Assemble Control Valve Section ........ 60-10-19
Install Steering Valve ................. 60-10-22

60-1
Contents

60-2 191091
 Group 05
Standard Front Axle

ESSENTIAL TOOLS
NOTE: Order tools from the U.S. SERVICE-GARDTM Catalog or from the European Microfiche Tool Catalog
(MTC). Some tools may be available from a local supplier.

Number Name Use

JTO 1732 Blind Hole Puller Remove Spindle shaft bushing.

MX,HU,6005,1 19-160CT91

SERVICE EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS

NOTE: Order tools from the U.S. SERVICE-GARDTM Catalog or from the European Microfiche Tool Catalog
(MTC). Some tools may be available from a local supplier.

Name Use

Feeler Gauge Measure axle end-play

Bushing, Bearing and Seal Drive Set Service spindle bushing and race

2-Jaw Puller Remove spindle race

Press Service wheel bearing and races

-19-160CT91

OTHER MATERIAL

Number Name Use

John Deere Multi-Purpose Lubricant Lubricate wheel bearings, and

spindles

MX,HU,6005,2A -19-160CT91

60-05-1 191091
 Standard Front Axle/Remove Standard Front Axle

SPECIFICATIONS

Item Measurement Specification

Steering cylinder-to-spindle nut Torque 75 N'm (55 Ib-ft)

Tie rOd-to-spindle nut Torque 53 N'm (39 Ib-ft)

Toe-in adjustment Length 6 mm (1/4 in.) less in front than rear

of front tire

Tie rod nut Torque 118 N'm (87 Ib-ft)

Pivot pin nut Torque 130 N'm (96 Ib-ft)

MX,HU,6005,3 -19-160CT91

REMOVE STANDARD FRONT AXLE

1. Remove power steering cylinder-DO NOT disconnect

lines (A).

2. Remove fuel tank or battery, depending on which

tractor you are working on.

3. Raise front of tractor and support on frame behind the

axle.

4. Remove front wheels.

5. Support the axle with a jack.

MX,HU,6005,5 -19-160CT91

60-05-2 191091
 Standard Front Axle/Install Standard Front Axle

6. Remove lock nuts and cap screws (A).

7. Slide pivot pin (8) part of the way out. Remove shims
(C).

8. Remove pivot pin and bushing.

9. Lower axle out of frame.

10. Inspect axle, pivot pin, and bushing for excessive

wear or damage. Replace as necessary.

INSTALL STANDARD FRONT AXLE

1. Raise axle into frame. Install bushing, pivot pin and

shims.

2. Install and tighten cap screws and lock nuts to 130

Nm (96 Ib-ft).

3. Install and tighten front wheels.

4. Raise tractor and remove support stands.

5. Lubricate axle pivot with multi-purpose grease.

6. Install fuel tank or battery, depending on which tractor

you are working.

7. Install power steering cylinder, tighten castle nuts to

75 Nm (55 Ib-ft).

-19-160CT91

60-05-3 191091
 Standard Front Axle/Remove Spindle Shaft and Hub

ADJUST AXLE END-PLAY

1. Raise front of tractor and push axle assembly fully

backward.

2. Measure distance between frame and axle pivot

support with a 1 mm (0.040 in.) feeler gauge. If gauge
slides in, remove one shim. If gauge does not slide in,
check for axle end play. If no end play, add one shim.

3. To adjust end play, loosen cap screws and remove or

add shims (A) as necessary.

REMOVE SPINDLE SHAFT AND HUB

1. Raise tractor and remove wheel.

2. Push end of axle all the way down and install wood
block (A).

3. Disconnect tie rod end (8) and steering cylinder end

(C).

60-05-4 191091
 Standard Front Axle/Repair Spindle Shaft Bushing

4. Remove cap (A).

5. Remove set screw and lower shaft and hub from axle.

6. Inspect spindle shaft and bushing for excessive wear

or damage. Replace as necessary.

REPAIR SPINDLE SHAFT BUSHING

1. Remove bushing. Use 31.75 -38.1 mm (1-1/4-1-1/2

in.) blind hole puller and slide hammer as shown.

,12 -19-160CT91

60-05-5 191091
 Standard Front Axle/Install Spindle Shaft and Hub

2. Install new bushing until it bottoms on shoulder in

housing. Use 31.75 (1-1/4 in.) and 36.51 mm (1-7/16 in.)
driver disks.

MX,HU,6005,13 19160CT91

REPAIR SPINDLE SHAFT BEARING AND

RACE

1. Remove grease seal and bearing.

2. Inspect bearing and race for excessive wear or

damage. Replace as necessary.

3. Use a 2-jaw puller with slide hammer to remove race.

4. Install new race until it bottoms on shoulder in

housing. Use a 57.15 mm (2-1/4 in.) driver disk.

5. Pack bearing with multi-purpose grease.

6. Install bearing and new seal. Be sure sealing flange

faces down.

15 19160CT91

INSTALL SPINDLE SHAFT AND HUB

1. Install thrust washer with outside chamber up.

MX,HU,6005,16 19-160CT91

60-05-6 191091
 Standard Front Axle/Remove Wheel Bearings

2. Lubricate spindle shaft with a light film of

multi-purpose grease. Slide shaft into spindle housing.

3. Install set screw and tighten nut.

4. Install housing cap.

5. Connect power steering cylinder end (C). Tighten

castle nut to 75 N'm (55 Ib-ft). Install cotter pin.

6. Connect tie rod end (8). Tighten castle nut to 53 N'm

(39 Ib-ft). Install cotter pin.

7. Lubricate spindle grease fitting with multi-purpose

grease.

8. Install wheels and tighten lug nuts to 79 N'm (58 Ib-ft)

on 655, 755/756, and 855/856 tractors-120 N'm (89
Ib-ft) on 955 tractors.

REMOVE WHEEL BEARINGS

1. Raise tractor, remove wheel and hub cap.

2. Remove cotter pin and castle nut.

3. Slide washer, bearing, and wheel hub off shaft.

4. Inspect bearing and shaft for excessive wear or

damage. Replace as necessary.

5. Remove inner bearing and seal. Use a 46 mm

(1-13/16 in.) driver disk.

6. Inspect bearing for excessive wear or damage.

Replace as necessary.

MX,HU,6005,19 19160CT91

60-05-7 191091
 Standard Front Axle/Install Wheel Bearings

7. Inspect races for excessive wear or damage. Replace

as necessary.

8. To remove inner or outer race use a soft drift.

MX,HU,6005,20 19160CT91

INSTALL WHEEL BEARINGS

1. Use a 58.7 mm (2-5/16 in.) driver disk to install inner

or outer race. Drive race in until it bottoms in hub bore.

2. Pack inner bearing with multi-purpose grease and

install a hub.

3. Install new seal flush with hub surface. Use a 65 mm

(2-9/16 in.) driver disk.

4. Pack outer bearing with multi-purpose grease.

5. Install hub, bearing, and washer on spindle.

6. Install and tighten nut until a slight drag is felt when

hub is turned. Back nut off 1/4 turn or just enough to
install cotter pin.

7. Install cotter pin and hub cap.

8. Install and tighten wheel.

MX,HU,6005,23 -19-160CT91

60-05-8 191091
 Standard Front Axle/Adjust Toe-In

ADJUST TOE-IN

1. Position wheels so they are pointing straight ahead.

2. Measure distance between the inner edges of the

tires at the rear.

MX,HU,6005,23A -19-160CT91

3, Measure front distance between tires. When properly

adjusted, front distance should be 6 mm (1/4 in.) less
than rear distance.

4, Loosen tie rod nuts and adjust tie rod to lengthen or

shorten distance,

IMPORTANT: Make sure there is free movement of

ball jOints after tightening.

5. Tighten tie rod nuts to 118 N'm (87 Ib-ft).

60-05-9 191091
Standard Front Axle/Adjust Toe-In

60-05-10 191091
 Group 10
Steering Valve

SERVICE EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS

NOTE' Order tools from the U.S. SERVICE-GARDTM Catalog or from the European Microfiche Tool Catalog
(MTC). Some tools may be available from a local supplier.

Name Use

Feeler Gauge Measure rotor-to-stator clearance

13-Ton Puller Set Remove steering tube bushing

Bushing, Bearing and Seal Driver Set Install steering tube bushing

0.18 mm (O.OO? in.) Shim Stock Align Commutator ring with drive plate

MX,HU,6010,1 -19-160CT91

FABRICATED TOOLS

STEERING VALVE FIXTURE:'

Steering valve fixture is used to hold steering valve.

Material required: One piece of 5 x 102 x 203 mm (3/16

x 4 x 8 in.) 1020 mild steel flat stock.

Fastening Hardware: Four 5/16-24 UNF nuts,

A-203 mm (8.0 in.) 0-102 mm (4.0 in.)

8-9.5 mm (3/8 in.)1 E-51 mm (2.0 in.)
C-51 mm (2.0 in.) Diameter Hole

1 Four Diameter Holes Equally Spaced on a 83 mm (3-114 in.)

Diameter Circle

OTHER MATERIAL

Number Name Use

T43511 John Deere LOCTITE Clean and Clean Threads

Cure Primer

TY9369 John Deere LOCTITE Thread Lock Retain metering assembly screws
and Sealer (Low Strength)

LGCTlTE is a trademark of the Loctite Corp_ MX,HU,6010,3 -19-160CT91

60-10-1 191091
 Steering Valve/Specifications

SPECIFICATIONS
Item Measurement Specification

Rotor-to-Stator Clearance Maximum Clearance 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)

Top of Steering Tube to Bushing Dimension 2.5 mm (0.1 in.)

Metering Assembly Screws Torque 1.4 0.1 N-m (12 1 Ib-in.)

Port Cover Nuts Torque 27 3 N-m (240 24 Ib-in.)

Check Ball Plug Torque 14 3 N-m (124 27 Ib-in.)

Steering Wheel Nut Torque 13-16 N-m (10-12Ib-ft.)

60-10-2
 Steering Valve/Remove Steering Valve

REMOVE STEERING VALVE

1. Remove muffler. (See Section 20, Group 15)

2. Remove pedestal side panels, battery and battery

base for 655, 755/756, and early 855/856 tractors or
fuel tank for late 855/856 and all 955 tractors.

3. Remove driveshaft (A) as described in Section 50,

Group OS.

A CAUTION: To avoid injury from escaping

hydraulic oil under pressure, relieve the
pressure in the system by stopping the engine
and operating all hydraulic control valves.

4. Disconnect four hydraulic lines (8). Close all openings

with caps and plugs to keep dirt out of the hydraulic
system.

NOTE: If necessary put identification tags on hydraulic

lines to aid in installation.

5. Remove steering wheel cap and nut (A).

IMPORTANT: Do not hit on end of steering shaft or

damage to steering shaft will occur.

6. Remove steering wheel from steering column.

MX,HU,6010,7 -19-160CT91

60-10-3 191091
 Steering Valve/Disassemble Steering Valve

NOTE: To aid in installation of the steering valve, note

the position of relief valve (A).

7. Remove four nuts (8) to remove steering valve.

MX,HU,6010,8 -19-160CT91

DISASSEMBLE STEERING VALVE

NOTE: This disassembly procedure is for the 5-port and

4-port steering valves. The differences are noted.

IMPORTANT: Do not hold steering valve in a vise

during disassembly. Steering valve can
be damaged. Disassemble steering
valve in a clean work area.

1. Install power steering valve, with steering column

down, in steering valve fixture (A). (See Fabricated Tools
in this group.) Fasten valve to fixture using four 5/16-24
UNF nuts.

NOTE: Check position of alignment grooves (8) in valve

body to aid in assembly.

2. Loosen check ball plug or relief valve plug one turn.

NOTE: Fitting types may va/}' depending on application.

IMPORTANT: Do not damage fittings during nut

removal. Do not nick or scratch the
machined surfaces of the steering
valve.

3. Remove nuts to remove port cover assembly (four

plates bonded together.)

M21601 OR, 13A -19-160CT91

60-10-4 191091
 Steering Valve/Disassemble Steering Valve

NOTE 5-port steering valve shown.

4. Remove seal ring and O-rings (A).

M216010R,14A 19160CT91

5. Units with check valve-remove plug (A), O-ring (8),

and check ball (C).

Units with relief valve-remove plug (D), and relief valve

assembly (E).

6. Inspect port cover for scratches on machined surfaces

or damage to fittings. Replace cover if damaged.

NOTE: Port manifold has three springs which may come

loose during disassembly.

7. Carefully remove port manifold (three plates bonded

together).

IMPORTANT: Do not interchange springs. The

steering valve has two sets of springs.
Keep springs with respective manifold.

8. Remove three springs (A).

9. Inspect springs and pins (8) for distortion, wear, or

damage.

NOTE: If one spring is damaged, all six springs in valve

must be replaced.

M21601 ,16 19160CT91

60-10-5 191091
 Steering Valve/Disassemble Steering Valve

10. Inspect port manifold machined surfaces (A) for

scratches or scoring. A polished pattern from the rotation
of the valve plate and hex drive assembly is normal. All
edges (8) must be sharp, free of nicks and burrs.

NOTE: Scoring is indicated by fine scratches or grooves

cut into the manifold. When these scratches can
be detected by feel with finger nail or lead pencil,
the manifold should be replaced.

MX,HU,6010R,17 -19-160CT91

11. Remove the valve ring and two seal rings (A). Check
valve ring for nicks and scoring. If the valve ring is
damaged, it must be replaced.

12. Remove valve plate. Inspect the slots and ground

surfaces for nicks or wear. If the valve plate is scored or
the edges are not sharp, the valve plate and valve ring
both must be replaced.

13. Remove and inspect hex drive assembly. Check

sides and slot for wear, grooves, or scoring. Pin (A)
should be tight and show no wear or damage.

14. Remove three springs (8).

15. Inspect springs for broken coils, wear, or damage.

MX,HU,6010R,20 19160CT91

60-10-6 191091
 Steering Valve/Disassemble Metering Section

16. Remove the isolation manifold (four plates bonded

together). Check manifold surface, holes and edges for
nicks, or unusual wear. A polished pattern from the
rotation of the valve plate and commutator cover is
normal.

MX,HU,6010R,21 -19-160CT91

DISASSEMBLE METERING SECTION

1. Remove drive link. Check the four crowned surfaces

(A) for wear or scoring.

2. Remove metering ring and upper and lower seals (A).

If the bore (8) is scored, the metering ring must be
replaced.

IMPORTANT: Do not clamp metering assembly in a

vise.

3. Remove metering assembly. Put assembly on a clean

surface.

MX,HU,6010R,24 -19-160CT91

60-10-7 191091
 Steering Valve/Disassemble Metering Section

4. Remove commutator seal (A).

5. Remove 11 screws to remove commutator cover.

Inspect screws for damage and replace if necessary.

MX,HU,6010R,25 19160CT91

6. Check commutator cover machined surface (A) for

nicks, burrs, scoring, or unusual wear. A polished pattern
due to rotation of the commutator is normal.

IMPORTANT: Handle commutator ring with care; it is

easily broken.

7. Remove commutator ring and inspect for wear, burrs,

cracks, or scoring.

NOTE: The commutator ring and commutator are a

matched set. If either is worn or damaged, both
must be replaced.

60-10-8 191091
 Steering Valve/Disassemble Metering Section

IMPORTANT: DO NOT use a screwdriver to remove

commutator. Commutator can be
damaged.

8. Remove commutator and five pins (A) using a wood

dowel or equivalent.

NOTE: The commutator is made up of two plates

bonded together. It is a permanent assembly and
cannot be disassembled.

9. Check commutator machined surface, holes and

edges for nicks. Edges must be sharp.

MX,HU,6010R,28 -19-160CT91

10. Remove drive link spacer. Check spacer for grooves,

wear, or damage.

11. The rotor should rotate and orbit freely within the
stator, Check commutator side of stator face for grooves
or scoring.

NOTE: Stator and rotor are a matched set. If either are

worn or damaged, both must be replaced.

12. Measure rotor-to-stator clearance. Center rotor lobe

(A) between stator lobes and check clearance directly
opposite lobe (A).

ROTOR-TO-STATOR SPECIFICATIONS

Maximum allowable clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)

If rotor clearance exceeds 0.08 mm (0.003 in.), replace

rotor and stator.

MX,HU,6010R,30 -19-160CT91

60-10-9 191091
 Steering Valve/Disassemble Steering Tube Section

13. Lift the rotor and stator from the drive plate. Check
the drive plate side of the rotor assembly for nicks,
grooves, or scoring.

A spiral pattern due to rotor movement is normal.

MX,HU,M6010R,31-19-160CT91

14. The thrust bearing side of the plate should also

show a normal wear pattern without grooves, flaking, or
dents.

15. The flat sides of the input shaft hole should not be
grooved or worn.

16. Remove parts (A-E).

Inspect bearing for broken or missing roliers, metal

flakes, or dents.

Check seal spacer and bearing spacer for wear or

damage.

A-Thrust Bearing C-Face Seal

Spacer D-Back-Up-Ring
B-Thrust Bearing E-Seal Spacer

DISASSEMBLE STEERING TUBE SECTION

1. Remove upper cover plate (four plates bonded

together).

Check plate surface for grooves, dents, or metal flakes.

A polished pattern due to the action of the seal is

normal.

MX,HU,6010R,34 -19-160CT91

60-10-10 191091
 Steering Valve/Disassemble Steering Tube Section

2. Remove steering shaft and snap ring (A).

3. Inspect steering shaft serrations, threads, and flats for

grooves, wear, or damage.

MX,HU,6010R,35 19160CT91

4. Remove washer and steering tube (A).

NOTE: Steering tube and retaining plate (8) are a

matched set. If either part is worn or damaged,
both must be replaced.

IMPORTANT: Hold steering tube in a soft-jaw vise.

Be careful not to crush steering tube.

5. Inspect bushing (A) for wear or damage. If bushing

replacement is necessary, straighten crimped area of
steering tube using a punch.

6. Remove bushing using a 2-jaw, slide hammer puller.

7. Remove nuts holding the four bolts to the fixture, and

remove the bolts.

Check bolt threads for wear or damage.

MX,HU,6010R,38 19160CT91

60-10-11 191091
 Steering Valve/Cross-Section View

CROSS-SECTION VIEW-STEERING VALVE

1-Port Cover 10-Metering Ring 1S-5teering Shaft 26-commutator Ring

2-Port Manifold 11-Upper Cover Plate 19-5teering Tube 27-Drive Link
3-Valve Assembly 12-5eal Spacer 20-Thrust Bearing 28-commutator Seal
4-lsolation Manifold 13-Back-Up Ring 21-Trust Bearing Spacer 29-Hex Drive Assembly
5-Cap Screw (11 used) 14-Face Seal 22-5eal Ring (5 used) 3()-;-Spring (3 used)
6-Commutator Cover 15-5nap Ring 23-Drive Plate 31-5pring (3 used)
7-Commutator 16-Washer 24-Drlve Link Spacer 32-Nut (4 used)
8-Stator 17-Bolt (4 used) 25-Alignment Pin (9 used) 33-0-Rlng (5 used)
9-Rotor

-19-160CT91

60-10-12 191091
 Steering ValvelAssemble Steering Valve

ASSEMBLE STEERING VALVE

NOTE: This assembly procedure is for the 4-port and

5-port steering valves. The differences are noted.

1. Thoroughly clean and dry all parts.

2. Use a seal kit when assembling the steering valve.

3. Put clean hydrostatic oil on internal parts as they are

assembled.

4. Install four bolts, with short threaded end down, in

fixture. Install nuts and tighten finger tight.

MX,HU,6010R,40A19160CT91

5. Install bushing (A) with recesses away from driver

using a 3/4-in. driver disk (8) and a 1-3/8 in. driver disk
(C). Push bushing down until it is 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) below
top of steering tube.

6. Slightly bend the end of the steering tube over the

bushing using a punch.

7. Apply clean multi-purpose grease on the inside of

bushing.

19160CT91

60-10-13 191091
 Steering ValvelAssemble Metering Section

8. Install steering tube (A) on bolts. 8e sure the square

holes in the steering tube are seated on the square
shoulders of the bolts.

9. Apply clean multi-purpose grease on retainer plate (8)

and washer.

10. Install washer.

MX,HU,6010R,42 19160CT91

11. Install snap ring (A) on steering shaft.

12. Install steering shaft with treaded end down into

steering tube.

IMPORTANT: Alignment grooves must be on only

one side of steering valve for proper
valve operation.

13. Install upper cover plate over four bolts with the
highly polished surface up.

ASSEMBLE METERING SECTION

1. Apply clean multi-purpose grease on the face of the

upper cover plate, steering shaft end, and thrust bearing.

2. Install parts (A-E).

A-Thrust Bearing C-Face Seal

Spacer D-Back-Up Ring
B-Thrust Bearing E-Seal Spacer

MX,HU,6010R,4S -19-160CT91

60-10-14 191091
 Steering ValvelAssemble Metering Section

3. Put drive plate (A) on a clean surface with slot

downward.

4. Install and turn stator (8) until the stator slots (C) are
aligned with drive plate holes (D).

5. Install rotor (E) with five pin holes (F) up.

A-Drive Plate D-Drlve Plate Holes

B-5tator E-Rotor
C-5tator Slots F-Pin Holes

MX.HU,6010R,46 19160CT91

6. Apply multi-purpose grease on spacer.

7. Install spacer in rotor drive slot.

8. Install commutator (A), with long grooves (8) upward,

on rotor.

IMPORTANT: Pins must be Installed below the

surface of the commutator to prevent
commutator cover damage.

9. Align commutator holes with rotor holes and install

five pins.

10. Put a few drops of clean hydrostatic oil into each

groove of the commutator.

60-10-15 191091
 Steering ValvelAssemble Metering Section

11. Align commutator ring slots (A) with stator slots (8)
and install commutator ring.

12. Align commutator cover holes (C) with commutator

ring slots. Install commutator cover with flat surface
toward commutator.

MX,HU,6010R,49 19-160CT91

13. Clean screw threads using clean and cure primer.

Apply thread lock and sealer (low strength) on screw
threads. Install 11 screws into metering assembly. DO
NOT tighten screws at this time.

IMPORTANT: The following procedure must be used

to minimize an out-of-round condition
between commutator ring and drive
plate. The commutator ring is
self-centering when the drive plate is
shimmed.

14. Install metering assembly, with drive plate (A) up into

metering ring (8).

15. Make six pieces of 0.18 mm (0.007 in.) shim stock

(C), approximately 13 mm (0.5 in.) wide x 38 mm (1.5 in.)
long. Install two shims each between drive plate and
metering ring 120 apart.

-19-16OCT91

60-10-16 191091
 Steering ValvelAssemble Metering Section

16. Turn metering ring over on a flat surface and push

metering assembly down. Tighten 11 screws in several
steps and in the sequence shown to 1.4 0.1 N'm (12
1 Ib-in.).

17. Install LARGE end of drive link into the slot in the
rotor. Hold the drive link and rotate the metering
assembly by hand. The rotor should turn freely inside the
stator.

If they bind or DO NOT move, disassemble and inspect

to find the cause. Repeat steps 3-17.

60-10-17 191091
 Steering ValvelAssemble Metering Section

18. Apply clean multi-purpose grease on seal ring. Install

seal ring on metering ring end with no pin holes.

IMPORTANT: Align pin hole (A) in metering ring with

groove (8) on upper cover plate so that
remaining parts can be aligned
correctly.

19. Install metering ring with pin holes up on bolts.

20. Apply clean multi-purpose grease on drive plate

surface.

21. Install metering assembly, with drive plate down into

metering ring. Turn metering assembly until the steering
shaft engages the drive plate hole. When properly
seated, the metering assembly is below the surface of
the metering ring.

22. Apply clean multi-purpose grease on commutator

seal (A) and seal ring (8).

23. Install commutator seal with yellow mark (C) down

into commutator cover.
~
(!)

24. Install seal ring and pins (D). ~

=?
A-Commutator Seal C-Yellow Mark
8-Seal Ring D-Pln (2 used)

MX.HU.6010R,56 -19-160CT91

60-10-18 191091
 Steering ValvelAssemble Control Valve Section

ASSEMBLE CONTROL VALVE SECTION

IMPORTANT: Align grooves (A) in isolation manifold

with groove (8) in upper cover plate.

1. Install isolation manifold, with recessed slots up, on

metering ring.

2. Install pins (C).

MX,HU,6010R,57 19160CT91

3. Install three 13 mm (112 in.) springs (8) in recessed

slots of the isolation manifold.

4, Install hex. Drive assembly, with pin (A) up, on drive

link.

5. Apply clean multi-purpose grease on seal rings (A).

Install seal rings on valve ring.

6. Align valve ring holes (8) with pins (C) to install valve
ring.

60-10-19 191091
 Steering ValvelAssemble Control Valve Section

IMPORTANT: Valve plate must be installed with

"PORT SIDE" (A) directly opposite (12
o'clock position) from alignment groves
(B) for proper operation. Valve plate
spring slots and springs must be
aligned to prevent spring damage when
installing port manifold.

7. Install valve plate, with "PORT SIDE" up, on isolation

manifold. Turn valve plate to make sure springs are
centered in valve plate spring slots.

8. Apply clean hydrostatic oil on valve plate.

MX.HU.6010R,60 -19-160CT91

9. Install three 19 mm (3/4 in.) springs (F) in recessed

slots (A) of the port manifold.

IMPORTANT: Align grooves (H) in port manifold with

grooves (C) in isolation manifold. Be
careful not to damage springs while
installing port manifold.

10. Install port manifold with springs toward valve plate.

Be sure pins (D) engage alignment holes (G) in port
manifold. Be sure hex drive assembly pin (B) engages
center hole (E) in port manifold.

A-Recessed Slots F-19 mm (3/4 in.)

B-Hex Drive Assembly Spring (3 used)
Pin G-Port Manifold
C-Isolation Manifold Alignment Hole (2
Grooves used)
D-Pin (2 used) H-Port Manifold
E-Port Manifold Center Groves
Hole

-19-160CT91

60-10-20 191091
 Steering ValvelAssemble Control Valve Section

11. Units with check valve-install a-ring (B) on plug (A).

Install check ball (C). Be sure check ball is seated in
bottom of hole. Install and tighten plug.

Units with relief valve-install relief valve assembly and

plug. Tighten plug.

M216010R.62X -19-160CT91

12. Apply clean multi-purpose grease on five a-rings (A)

and seal ring (B). Install a-rings and seal ring in port
cover.

IMPORTANT: Align grooves (C) in port cover with

grooves (0) in port manifold.

13. Install port cover with seals toward port manifold.

A-O-Rings (5 used) D-Port Manifold

B-Seal Ring Alignment Grooves
C-Port Cover
Alignment Grooves

60-10-21 191091
 Steering Valve/Install Steering Valve

14. Install and tighten four nuts in the sequence shown.

Tighten in several steps to 27 3 N-m (240 24 Ib-in.).
15. Tighten plug (A) to 14 3 N-m (124 27Ib-in.).
16. Remove nuts to remove steering valve from fixture.

M36876

INSTALL STEERING VALVE

IMPORTANT: For proper operation, the steering valve

must be installed with the relief valve (A)
toward the right side of the machine.
Hydraulic lines must be connected to the
correct fittings.

1. Position steering valve with relief valve toward the right

side of the machine. Fasten with four nuts (8).

2. Install steering wheel. Install and tighten nut (A) to 13-

16 N-m (10-12Ib-ft.)
3. Install steering wheel emblem cap.

M43837

60-10-22
 Steering Valve/Install Steering Valve

4. Install new O-rings and connect hydraulic lines (8).

5. Install drives haft (A) as described in Section 50,

Group 05.

6. Install battery base, battery, and pedestal side panels

for 655, 755/756, and early 855/856 tractors.

7. Install muffler. (See Section 20, Group 15)

8. Install fuel tank for late 855/856 and all 955 tractors.

60-10-23 191091
Steering Valve/Install Steering Valve

60-10-24 191091
 Group 15
Brake Linkage

SPECIFICATIONS

Item Measurement Specification

Brake Disk Minimum Thickness 4.4 mm (0.173 in.)

Spline Backlash Maximum 1.2 mm (0.047 in.)

Brake Plate Minimum Thickness 2.3 mm (0.090 in.)

Brake Plate Maximum Warpage 0.3 mm (0.012 in.)

Brake Bushings I. D. 19.099 0.025 mm (0.7515 0.001

in.)

MX,HU,6015,l -19-160CT91

SERVICE EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS

NOTE: Order tools from the U.S. SERVICE-GARDTM Catalog or from the European Microfiche Tool Catalog
(MTC). Some tools may be available from a local supplier.

Name Use

Reamer To ream bushings.

lA -19-160CT91

REMOVE BRAKE LINKAGE

1. Park tractor safely. Block wheels, remove key, and

disengage park brake.

2. Turn depth control lever (A) clockwise until it stops.

3. Remove four cap screws. Remove panel (B) by lifting

right rear corner first then lift up depth control lever (A)
to clear depth control bolt head and move panel out the
right side of the tractor.

MX,HU,6015,2 -19-160CT91

60-15-1 191091
 Brake Linkage/Remove Brake Linkage

4. Remove five bolts. Remove left foot rest (A).

5. Disconnect spring (8).

6. Remove cotter pin (C) and washer.

7. Hold brake rod (D) in place and remove left brake

pedal (E).

A-Left Foot Rest D-Left Brake Rod

B-spring E-Left Brake Pedal
C-Cotter Pin

Under Left Footrest

8. Remove roll pin. Remove park brake lever (A).

9. Remove right brake pedal (8) and bushing (C).

Inspect bushing (C). Replace bushing if it is worn

excessively.

Under Left Footrest

MX,HU,601S,4 -19-160CT91

60-15-2 191091
 Brake Linkage/Remove Brake Linkage

10. Remove cotter pin (A) and washer to disconnect

cruise control-brake disengage link (8).

11. Remove roll pin (C) to remove cruise control pawl

(D).

A-Cotter Pin C-Roll Pin

B-Crulse Control-Brake D-Cruise Control Pawl
Disengage Link

Inside Right Frame

MX.HU.6015.5 19160CT91

12. Disconnect springs (A and 8).

13. Remove lock nut (C). Disconnect transmission

control rod (D).

A-Right Brake Spring C-Lock Nut

B-Service/Park Brake D-Transmission
Spring Control Rod

Under Right Footrest

14. Remove speed control pedals.

Under Right Footrest

MX.HU.6015.7 19160CT91

60-15-3 191091
 Brake Linkage/Remove Brake Linkage

15. Inspect bushings (A) for wear. Remove them if they

are worn excessively.

Under Right Footrest

16. Install new bushings flush with ends of boss.

Ream bushings to 19.099 0.025 mm (0.7515 0.001

in.).

Under Right Footrest

17. Remove service/park brake pedal (A) right brake

lever (B), and bushing (C).

Inspect parts for excessive wear or damage. Replace

parts as required.

Under Right Footrest

60-15-4 191091
 Brake Linkage/Remove Brake Linkage

18. Remove cotter pin and washer to remove forward

brake rods (A).

19. Remove cotter pin and washer to remove rearward

brake links (8).

20. To replace right side pivot (C):

Remove right fender.
Disconnect spring (D).
Remove cotter pin (E) and washer.

21. To replace left side pivot (F):

Remove left fender. Right Side
Disconnect spring (G).
Remove cotter pin (H) and washer.
Remove differential lock pedal (I).

A-Forward Brake Rod F-Left Side Pivot

B-Rearward Brake Link G-Spring
C-Right Side Pivot H-Cotter Pin
O-Spring I-Differential Lock
E-Cotter Pin Pedal

22. Check forward brake rod (A) for damage. Check

brake arm pin (D) for excessive wear or damage.
Replace parts as necessary.

A-Forward Brake Rod C-Spacer

B-Nut (2 used) O-Brake Arm Pin

23. To replace park brake lock linkage, remove five bolts

to remove right footrest (A) and panel (8).

24. Turn knob (C) counterclockwise to remove it.

Right Side
MX,HU,6015,13 -19-160CT91

60-15-5 191091
 Brake Linkage/Install Brake Linkage

25. Remove roll pin (A) and cotter pin (8) to remove link
(C).

26. Remove bolt (D) to remove transmission lock lever

(E).

A-Roll Pin D-Bolt

B-Cotter Pin E-Transmission Lock
c-Transmission Lock Lever
Link

Right Side

MX,HU,6015,14 19160CT91

27. Disconnect spring (A). Remove cotter pin (8) to

remove brake lock rod.

28. Remove pivot (C),

Bottom View-Inside Right Frame

INSTALL BRAKE LINKAGE

1, Install brake lock pivot (C),

2, Install brake lock rod. Fasten it with a washer and

cotter pin (8).

3. Install spring (A),

Bottom View-Inside Right Frame

MX,HU,6015,16 19160CT91

60-15-6 191091
1~____________________________B_r._a_k_e_L_m_k_a_g_e~_z_n_st_a_U_B_r._ak_e
__L_m_k_ag_e____________________________ ~
4. Install bolt (D) through seat bracket, lock lever (E) and
bushing, two washers, seat lock lever and bushing,
washer and nut.

5. Install link and ratchet assembly (C). Fasten it with a

washer and cotter pin (8) and roll pin (A).

A-Roll Pin O-Bolt

B-Cotter Pin E-Transmission Lock
C-Transmission Lock Lever
Link Assembly

Right Side

MX,HU,6015,17 -19-160CT91

6. Install washer, spring, and knob (C).

Panel (8) and footrest (A) can be installed after the

control pedals have been installed to provide better
access.

Right Side

60-15-7 191091
 Brake Linkage/Install Brake Linkage

7. Install right side pivot (C). Faster it with a washer and

cotter pin (E).

8. Install differential lock pedal (I) and left side pivot (F).
Fasten both with a washer and cotter pin (H).

9. Install forward brake rods (A) and rearward links (8).

Fasten them with washers and cotter pins.

10. Connect springs (0 and G).

A-Forward Brake Rod F-Left Side Pivot

B-Rearward Brake Link G-Sprlng
C-Right Side Pivot H-Cotter Pin
D-5pring I-Differential Lock
E-Cotter Pin Pedal

Left Side

11. Install service/park brake pedal (A), right brake lever

(8), and bushing (C).

Under Right Footrest

12. Install speed control pedals.

Check to see that pedals move freely.

Under Right Footrest

MX,HU,6015,21 -19-160CT91

60-15-8 191091
 Brake Linkage/Install Brake Linkage

13. Put pins in slots of brake levers and connect springs

(A and 8).

14. Connect transmission control rod (O) to pedal with

lock nut (C).

A-Right Brake Spring C-Lock Nut

B-Service/Park Brake D-Transmission
Spring Control Rod

Under Right Footrest

MX,HU,6015,22 -19-160CT91

15. Install cruise control pawl (O). Fasten it with roll pin
(C).

16. Install washer on each side of link (8) and fasten

link with cotter pin (A).

A-Cotter Pin C-Roll Pin

B-Cruise Control-Brake D-Cruise Control Pawl
Disengage Link

Top View-Inside Right Frame

17. Install bushing (C), right brake pedal (8), and park
brake lever (A) on park brake shaft. Fasten lever (A) to
shaft with a roll pin.

Under Left Footrest

MX,HU,6015,24 -19-160CT91

60-15-9 191091
 Brake Linkage/Install Brake Linkage

18. Hold brake rod (0) in place and install left brake
pedal (E).

19. Install washer and cotter pin (C).

20. Connect spring (8).

21. Install footrest (A). Fasten it with five bolts.

A-Left Footrest D-Left Brake Rod

B-Spring E-Left Brake Pedal
C-Cotter Pin

Under Left Footrest

22. Install panel (8). 8e sure depth control lever (A)

aligns with bolt head. Fasten panel with four cap screws.

23. Adjust brake linkage. (See Section 260.)

24. Adjust transmission control linkage. (See Section

250.)

MX,HU,6015,26 19160CT91

60-15-10 191091
 Brake Linkage/Repair Brake Disks

REPAIR BRAKE DISKS

1. Remove final drive axles. (See Remove Final

Drives-Section 50, Group 15.)

2. Remove shaft (C), brake disks (8), and plates (A).

A-Brake Plate (2) D-Brake Camshaft

B-Brake Disk (2) Hole
C-Final Drive Pinion
Shaft

MX,HU,6015,27 -19-160CT91

3. Measure brake disks.

BRAKE DISK SPECIFICATION

Thickness New .............. 4.6-4.8 mm (0.181-0.189 in.)

Minimum ......................... 4.4 mm (0.173 in.)

Spline Backlash New .......... 0.13-0.31 mm (.005-.012 in.)

Maximum ......................... 1.2 mm (0.047 in.)

Replace brake disks if out of specification.

BRAKE PLATE SPECIFICATION

Thickness New .............. 2.5-2.7 mm (0.098-0.106 in.)

Minimum ......................... 2.3 mm (0.090 in.)

Warpage New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)

Maximum ......................... 0.3 mm (0.012 in.)

Replace brake disks if out of specification or if surface is

scored or grooved.

5. Remove three springs (A). Replace all three if any are

broken or stretched.

6. Inspect actuator plate (8) for scoring or roughness.

Use 400 grit emery paper to smooth the brake face if
necessary.

MX,HU,6015,30 19160CT91

60-15-11 191091
 Brake Linkage/Repair Brake Disks

7. Inspect six steel balls (A) for damage. Replace any

that are damaged.

8. Inspect brake camshaft (B) for wear or damage. To

remove camshaft, remove snap ring (C) and washer.

MX,HU,6015,31 19160CT91

9. Clean all parts. Install camshaft, washer, and snap

ring.

10. Install and apply grease to six steel balls.

11. Put actuator plate (B) in place. Fasten it with three

springs (A). Put shorter hook of springs on ring gear.

12. Install new gasket. Be sure two guide pins are in

place.

13. Install final drive axles. (See Install Final

Drives-Section 50, Group 15.)

60-15-12 191091
 Section 70
HYDRAULICS REPAIR
Contents
Page

Group OS-Hydraulic Pump

Service Equipment and Tools ......... 70-05-1
Specifications .................... 70-05-1
Remove HydrauliC Pump . . . . . . . . . . . .. 70-05-2
Disassemble Hydraulic Pump . . . . . . . . .. 70-05-4
Assemble Hydraulic Pump . . . . . . . . . . .. 70-05-5
Repair Suction Screen .............. 70-05-7
Install Hydraulic Pump .............. 70-05-7
Hydraulic System Bleed Procedure . . . . .. 70-05-8

Group 10-Flow Divider and Selective Control

Valves (SCV's)
Other Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 70-10-1
Remove Flow Divider and SCV's ....... 70-10-1
Repair System Relief Valve. . . . . . . . . .. 70-10-3
Repair Priority Flow Divider . . . . . . . . . .. 70-10-3
Repair Proportional Flow Divider ....... 70-10-4
Repair Regenerative and Float
Sections-SCV's ................. 70-10-5
Install Flow Divider and SCV's . . . . . . . .. 70-10-9

Group 15-Rockshaft
Service Equipment and Tools ......... 70-15-1
Specifications .................... 70-15-2
Remove Piston Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 70-15-3
Repair Lowering Check Valve ......... 70-15-3
Repair Stop Valve ................. 70-15-4
Repair Implement Relief Valve ........ 70-15-5
Install Rockshaft Piston Cover ........ , 70-15-5
Remove Rockshaft Piston . . . . . . . . . . ., 70-15-6
Install Rockshaft Piston ............. 70-15-7
Remove Rockshaft Housing .......... 70-15-7
Disassemble Rockshaft Housing ...... 70-15-10
Repair Rockshaft Housing and
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 70-15-11
Assemble Rockshaft Housing ........ 70-15-12
Install Rockshaft Housing ........... 70-15-14
Remove Control Valve ............. 70-15-16
Disassemble Control Valve .......... 70-15-17
Assemble Control Valve ............ 70-15-19
Adjust Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 70-15-23

Group 20-Hydraulic Hoses

Repair Hydraulic Hoses ............. 70-20-1

70-1 191091
 C_o_nt_en_t_s______________________________
L I_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~

70-2 191091
 Group 05
Hydraulic Pump

SERVICE EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS

NOTE: Order tools from the U.S. SERVICE-GARDTM Catalog or from the European Microfiche Tool Catalog
(MTC). Some tools may be available from a local supplier.

Name Use

Driver Set To install seals.

Snap Ring Pliers Set To remove/install snap ring.

MX,HU,7005,1A 19160CT91

SPECIFICATIONS

Item Measurement Specification

Transaxle Case Capacity 17 L (4.5 gal)

Relief valve spring Free length 50.7 mm (2 in.)

Priority flow divider spring Free length 66 mm (2.6 in.)

Compressed length 31.4 mm/54 N (1.24/12 Ib)

Proportional flow divider spring Free length 58.5 mm (2.3 in.)

Compressed length 46 mm/4.9 N (1.81 in.l1.1 Ib)

Flow divider bolts Torque 17 Nm (12 Ib-ft)

Rockshaft valve spool retainer Torque 10 Nm (88 Ib-in.)

Rockshaft valve bolts Torque 24 Nm (18 Ib-ft)

Fender bracket bolts Torque 149 Nm (110 Ib-ft)

Hydraulic Pump Pressure Lines Torque 34 Nm (25 Ib-ft.)

Hydraulic Pump Adapter Torque 47 Nm (35 Ib-ft.)

Hydraulic SCV lines Torque 27 Nm (20 Ib-ft.)

70-05-1 191091
 Hydraulic Pump/Remove Hydraulic Pump

REMOVE HYDRAULIC PUMP

1. Park tractor safely.

2. Disconnect battery ground cable.

3. Remove drawbar.

4. Remove drain plug to drain transaxle case (A).

Capacity of transaxle is approximately 17 L (4.5 gal).

MX,HU,7005,2 19160CT91

NOTE' Check rubber boot for cuts, cracks, leaks,

hardness, and etc. Remove and replace, if
required.

5. Loosen 2 clamps (A). Loosen clamp (C) on hydro

return tube and clamp (D) on pump inlet fitting.

6. Disconnect suction tube and hose from suction tube

adapter (8) and rubber boot from pump inlet fitting by
rotating assembly to the left. Let assembly hang from
hydro return tube.

MX,HU,7005,3 -19-160CT91

7. Remove four bolts with washers to remove PTO

shield.

70-05-2 191091
 Hydraulic Pump/Remove Hydraulic Pump

AVOID HIGH-PRESSURE FLUIDS

Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin

causing serious injury.

Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before

disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all
connections before applying pressure.

Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect

hands and body from high pressure fluids.

If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any

fluid injected into the skin must be surgically removed
within a few hours or gangrene may result. Doctors
unfamiliar with this type of injury should reference a
knowledgeable medical source. Such information is
available from Deere & Company Medical Department in
Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.

A CAUTION: To avoid injury from escaping

hydraulic oil under pressure, relieve the
pressure in the hydraulic system by turning off
the engine and cycling through all hydrauliC
control lever positions several times.

8. Disconnect hydraulic pump outlet line (A). Close all

openings with caps and plugs to keep dirt out of the
hydraulic system.

9. Remove two nuts and two cap screws fastening pump

to transaxle housing.

-19-160CT91

10. Inspect splines on pump shaft and coupler for

excessive wear.

MX,HU,7005,7 -19-160CT91

70-05-3 191091
' - - - - - - - - - -
Hydraulic Pump/Disassemble Hydraulic Pump J
DISASSEMBLE HYDRAULIC PUMP

IMPORTANT: Watch closely how internal components

are removed so you can assemble
them exactly as they were removed.
This will ensure wear surfaces are
matched during assembly. Only the
gasket, O-rings, and packings are
serviced individually. The housing, gear
o
set, and bushings are not serviced
individually. If excessive wear, scoring,
or blue discoloring from overheating
are discovered in the housing, gear set,
or bushings the entire pump assembly
must be replaced.

1. Remove inlet fitting and its O-ring from left side of

pump housing.

2. Remove pump cover. Check to see that passages (A)

in the cover are open.

3. Remove O-rings (and packing on 955 tractors) from

rear bushings, recess in housing, and left port between
cover and housing.

3. Remove O-rings (A), (8), and (C).

NOTE: Some pumps have an additional packing that fits

in recess around a-rings (AJ.

70-05-4 191091
 Hydraulic Pump/Assemble Hydraulic Pump

4. Remove gear set and four bushings from housing.

5. Inspect the housing for severe wear and scoring. A

small amount of wear in the gear tract is normal.

6. Also inspect the shafts and inside diameters of the

bushings for wear, scoring, and blue
discoloration-indicating overheating.

Pump components shown here are not serviced

individually; if damaged or worn, replace with new
hydraulic pump assembly.

MX,HU,7005,9 -19-160CT91

7. Turn pump housing around. Remove snap ring (if

equipped) (7.2 gpm pump only on 955 tractors) and
shaft seal (A) from housing. Make sure passageway (8)
is open.

ASSEMBLE HYDRAULIC PUMP

1. Clean and dry all parts.

2. Use new O-rings and seals.

3. Apply a thin layer of clean hydraulic oil to all internal

parts.

4. Use a 25 mm (1 in.) diameter disk driver to install new

shaft seal-top of seal should be flush with housing
surface. On pumps equipped with a snap ring, push seal
in to a depth just below snap ring groove, then install
snap ring.

70-05-5 191091
 Hydraulic Pump/Assemble Hydraulic Pump

5. Install new O-rings on all bushings. Install front set of

bushings, O-ring side first, into pump housing. On some
pumps, install a new packing also.

6. Install gear set, making sure O-ring seals are not

damaged.

MX,HU,7005,12 -19-160CT91

7. Match and mate rear bushings with gear set and

place them in the housing, O-ring side (A) away from the
gear set. On some pumps, install a new packing also.

8. Place new oblong O-ring (8) in the housing recess.

Install new O-ring (C) in left housing port.

9. Install cover and tighten socket-head cap screws to

25 N'm (18 Ib-in).

13 -19-160CT91

10. Make sure ports (A) are clean. Place new O-ring in
inlet fitting and install on left port of pump housing.
Tighten cap screws to 25 N'm (18 Ib-ft).

MX,HU,7005,13A -19-160CT91

70-05-6 191091
 Hydraulic Pump/Install Hydraulic Pump

REPAIR SUCTION SCREEN

1. Remove three bolts and suction tube adapter (A).

2. Remove suction screen, clean or replace.

3. Install new a-ring on end of suction screen and new

packing in groove of tube adapter.

4. Install suction screen inside transaxle housing.

5. Install suction tube adapter (A). Be sure packing

remains in its groove (coat it with thin layer of oil or
grease). Tighten three M8 x 35 cap screws to 25 N'm
(18 Ib-ft). Install and tighten drain plug.

MX.HU,7005,14 19160CT91

INSTALL HYDRAULIC PUMP

NOTE: Make sure there is a compression ring (bushing)

between rubber boot (A) and suction tube hose
and each hose clamp. Compression rings protect
hose 'rom being cut by clamps.

1. Check inlet rubber boot (A) and suction tube hose for
cuts, cracks, or hardness. Replace, if required. Fasten it
to pump inlet.

2. Connect suction tube to rubber boot and tighten hose

clamp.

3. Place coupling (B) on splined pump shaft.

4. Use a new gasket on pump mounting surface and

install pump assembly on transaxle housing. Tighten nuts
and cap screws to 25 N'm (18 Ib-ft).

5. Connect rubber boot (A) to hydro line and tighten

hose clamp.

6. Install PTa shield and tighten four M12 x 55 cap

screws to 90 N'm (66 Ib-ft).

70-05-7 191091
 Hydraulic Pump/Hydraulic System Bleed Procedure

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM BLEED PROCEDURE

After installing a repaired or replacement part. air must

be purged from the system.

1. Fill transaxle with 17 L (4.5 gal) of John Deere

Lo-Viscosity HY-GARD oil.

2. Start engine and run at half throttle.

3. Cycle all hydraulic lever functions several times.

4. Shut engine off and inspect hydraulic components and

fittings for leaks.

5. Check transaxle oil level again and add required

amount to bring it up to the full mark.

MX,HU,7005,16 -19-160CT91

70-05-8 1{11091
 Group 10
Flow Divider and Selective Control Valves (SCV's)

OTHER MATERIAL

Number Name Use

T43511 John Deere LOCTITE Clean and Clean threads

Cure Primer

T43512 John Deere LOCTITE Threadlock Retain screws and plugs

and Sealer (Medium Strength)

LOCT/TETM is a trademark of the Loctite Corp. MX,HU, 7010,1 -19-160CT91

REMOVE FLOW DIVIDER AND SELECTIVE

CONTROL VALVES (SCV'S)

1. Remove operator's seat and sheet metal. (See

Section 80, Group 15.)

2. Remove cotter pin and washer. Remove park brake

rod (A) from lock lever.

MX,HU,7010,2 -19-160CT91

3. Remove two cap screws and nuts (A).

4. Loosen PTO and Hi-Lo range lever shoulder bolts (8).

70-10-1 191091
 Flow Divider and Selective Control Valves (SCV's)/Remove Flow Divider and SCV's

AVOID HIGH-PRESSURE FLUIDS

Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin

causing serious injury.

Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before

disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all
connections before applying pressure.

Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect

hands and body from high pressure fluids.

If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any

fluid injected into the skin must be surgically removed
within a few hours or gangrene may result. Doctors
unfamiliar with this type of injury should reference a
knowledgeable medical source. Such information is
available from Deere & Company Medical Department in
Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.

5. Tilt seat bracket (A) rearward.

A CAUTION: To avoid injury from escaping

hydraulic oil under pressure, relieve the
pressure in the system by stopping the engine
and operating all hydraulic control valves.

6. Disconnect two lines from front flow divider and four

lines from selective control valves.

7. Remove four socket head bolts to remove flow divider

and selective control valves.

MX,HU, 7010,5 -19-160CT91

70-10-2 191091
 Flow Divider and Selective Control Valves (SCV's)/Repair Priority Flow Divider

REPAIR SYSTEM RELIEF VALVE

1. Remove plug to remove valve assembly (you may

want to put relief valve in a soft vise to break valve plug
loose).

Left Side
MX.HU.7010.6 19-160CT91

NOTE Components D-I should fall out of valve

chamber on their own.

2. Use large screwdriver to remove retainer (C). Remove

seat (8) and D-ring (A) with an D-ring pick.

3. Inspect seat (8), poppet (D), washer (F), and collar

(H) for excessive wear or damage. Replace as
necessary.

4. Inspect spring (E) for free length of 50.7 mm (2 in.)

and a compressed length of 42 mm at 325 N (1.65 in. at
73 Ib). Replace as necessary.

5. Replace D-rings (A and G) and sealing ring (J). A-Q-ring G-O-ring

B-Seat H-Collar
6. Dip all parts in clean hydraulic oil before assembly. C-Retainer I-Shims
D-Poppet J-8ealing Ring
E-8pring K-Plug
7. Install (A - C). 8e sure four slotted side of retainer F-Washer
faces seat. Tighten retainer to 29 N'm (22 Ib-ft).

8. Install (0 - K). Tighten plug to 98 N'm (72 Ib-ft).

REPAIR PRIORITY FLOW DIVIDER

1. Remove plug from each end to remove priority flow

divider (you may want to put valve body in a soft vise to
break plugs loose).

Left Side
MX,HU, 7010,8 -19-160CT91

70-10-3 191091
 Flow Divider and Selective Control Valves (SCV's)/Repair Proportional Flow Divider

NOTE: 655 and 955 will have spacer with axle holes
instead of spool assembly and spring

2. Inspect spool assembly (C) for excessive scoring or

damage. Replace as necessary

3. Inspect spring (D) for free length of 66 mm (2.6 in.)

and a compressed length of 31.4 mm at 54 N (1.24 in.
at 12 Ib). Replace as necessary.

4. Replace O-ring (8).

5. Dip all parts in clean hydraulic oil before assembly. Right Side

6. Install (A thru D). 8e sure end of spool assembly with

two side holes is installed to gear pump port side of flow
divider.

7. Tighten plugs to 98 N'm (72 Ib-ft).

A-Plug (2 used) C-Spool Assembly

B-O-Ring (2 used) D-Sprlng

MX,HU,7010,9 -19-160CT91

REPAIR PROPORTIONAL FLOW DIVIDER

1. Remove plug from each end to remove proportional

flow divider (you may want to put valve body in a soft
vise to break plugs loose).

Left Side

70-10-4 191091
 Flow Divider and Selective Control Valves (SCV's)/Repair Regenerative and Float Sections-SCV's

2. Inspect dividing valve (D) for excessive scoring or

damage. Replace as necessary.

3. Inspect spring (C) for a free length of 58.5 mm (2.3

in.) and a compressed length of 46 mm at 4.9 N (1.81
in. at 1.1 Ib). Replace as necessary.

4. Replace O-ring (8).

5. Dip all parts in clean hydraulic oil before assembly.

6. Install (A - D.)
Right Side
IMPORTANT: Be sure slot end of dividing valve is
towards the gear pump port side of
flow divider.

7. Tighten plugs to 44 N'm (33 Ib-ft).

A-Plug (2 used) C-Spring (2 used)

a-O-ring (2 used) D-Dividlng Valve

MX,HU,7010,10 19-160CT91

REPAIR REGENERATIVE (FRONT) AND

FLOAT (REAR) SECTIONS-SCV'S

NOTE: Rear valve float section shown unless otherwise

stated.

1. Remove lift check plug (A), spring (8), and poppet (C)
from center port.

2. Inspect spring, poppet, and seat for wear or damage.

Replace parts as necessary.

3. Remove two socket head bolts (A) to remove detent

cover (8), and spool (C).

4. Remove O-ring (D), seal (E), and plate (F) and inspect
spool and valve body for scoring and wear. Spool and
body are not serviced. If either is damaged, replace
complete control valve assembly.

MX,HU,7010,13 19-160CT91

70-10-5 191091
 Flow Divider and Selective Control Valves (SCV's)/Repair Regenerative and Float Sections-SCV's

5. Remove two socket head bolts to remove lever

support (A), seal (B), and O-ring (C).

":.,.:,". "".,...""
::. !::C::i
. ..'.:. . .

1.

'"

MX,HU, 7010,14 -19-160CT91

6. Remove detent holder (A) by driving the spool away

from the holder. Use caution to protect the spool from
damage. Be careful not to lose the two detent balls (B)
th~t will be free after removing the detent holder.

MX,HU,7010,15 -19-160CT91

7. Remove detent screw (D) to disassemble spool. Use

medium strength thread lock and sealer on the threads
of the screw.

8. Inspect spring and detent screw for damage. Replace

~'
as necessary.
.:...''.:
A-Deep Spring Guide
B-Spring
C-Shallow Spring
D-Detent Screw
E-Detent Balls
Guide

9. Drive out roll pin (A), to release large ball (C) and
spring (B).

MX,HU,7010,17 -19-160CT91

70-10-6 191091
 Flow Divider and Selective Control Valves (SCV's)/Repair Regenerative and Float Sections-SCV's

10. The detent screw in the front regenerative valve

section has a cross spring (A) to seat the balls. The rest
of the valve section is serviced the same as the rear

.
section.

.~IA'\
::::.......:.~
'"-...... A:

Front valve regenerative section shown.

MX.HU,7010,18 19-160CT91

11. Clean and dry all parts.

12. Use all new O-rings and seals to assemble valves.

13. Before assembly, apply clean hydraulic oil on all

internal parts.

14. Install spring (B), large ball (C), and hold in place
with roll pin (A).

MX.HU,7010,19 19160CT91

15. Clean the threads of detent screw (D) and internal

threads of the spool using clean and cure primer.

16. Apply thread lock and sealer (medium strength) to

the threads of the detent screw.

17. Assemble centering spring assembly and fasten with

detent screw.

A-Deep Spring Guide D-Detent Screw

B-Spring E-Detent Balls
C-Shallow Spring
Guide

19160CT91

70-10-7 191091
 Flow Divider and Selective Control Valves (SCV's)/Repair Regenerative and Float Sections-SCV's

18. Apply LU8RIPLATE lubricant on centering spring

assembly, detent screw, and inside of detent holder (A).

19. Insert small detent balls (8) into holes of detent

screw and drive on detent holder. Make sure balls
remain in position.

MX,HU,7010,21 -19-160CT91

20. Slide cover (A), plate (8), seal (C), and C-ring (D)
over spool. Recess side of seal should face toward
plate. Use care to prevent damage to spool.

A-Cover C-Seal
B-Plate D-O-ring

MX,HU,7010,22 19160CT91

21. Install spool assembly into housing.

22. Install two socket head bolts (A) and plate (8). Make
certain seal recess fits into hole in plate. Tighten bolts to
11 N'm (96 Ib-in.).

70-10-8 191091
 Flow Divider and Selective Control Valves (SCV's)/lnstal/ Flow Divider and SCV's

NOTE: Seal recess faces lever support.

23. Install new a-ring (C) and seal (8), lever support (A),
and two socket head bolts. Tighten bolts to 11 N'm (96
Ib-in.).

24. Install lift check assembly (0) with new a-ring on

plug. Tighten plug to 44 N'm (33 Ib-in.).

25. Install new a-ring (E) on face of valve body.

A-Lever Support D-Lift Check Assembly

8-Seal E-O-ring
C-O-ring

MX,HU, 7010,24 -19-160CT91

INSTALL FLOW DIVIDER AND SELECTIVE

CONTROL VALVES (SCV'S)

1. an bench, install four socket head bolts through flow

divider and selective control valves.

70-10-9 191091
 Flow Divider and Selective Control Valves (SCV's)llnstall Flow Divider and SCV's

2. Install flow divider and selective control valves with

bolts to rockshaft piston cover. Tighten bolts diagonally
to 17 N'm (12 Ib-ft). Actuate valves to verify they are not
"sticky" due to uneven bolt torque.

IMPORTANT: When tightening hydraulic line

connections, use two wrenches to
prevent line twisting and
overtightening. Align swivel fittings and
hydraulic lines carefully to prevent line
stress. Line damage or stress will
cause premature line failure.

3. Connect two lines to flow divider housing. Tighten

union connectors to 47 N'm (35 Ib-ft.). Tighten line nut to
34 N'm (25 Ib-ft.)

Connect four lines to selective control valve. With swivel

loose, connect and tighten line-to swivel to 27 N'm (20
Ib-ft.). Hold swivel in position while tightening swivel nut
to 27 N'm (20 Ib-ft.).

4. Move seat bracket (A) forward till it is level.

MX.HU,7010,26 -19-160CT91

5. Tighten PTe and Hi-La lever shoulder bolts (A).

6. Install and tighten two cap screws and nuts (A).

7. Install park brake rod (A) through lock lever slot.

Fasten it with washer and cotter pin.

8. Install operator's seat. (See Section 80, Group 15.)

9. Install sheet metal panels. (See Section 80, Group

15.)

MX,HU,7010,28 -19-160CT91

70-10-10 191091
 Group 15
Rockshaft

SERVICE EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS

NOTE Order tools from the U.S. SERVICE-GARDTM Catalog or from the European Microfiche Tool Catalog
(MTC). Some tools may be available from a local supplier.

Name Use

Bushing, Bearing, and Seal Driver Set Service rockshaft bushing

MX,HU,TOOLS,l 19160CT91

70-15-1 191091
 RockshafflSpecificaffons

SPECIFICATIONS

Item Measurement Specification

Check Relief Valve Spring Free Length 27.7 mm (1.09 in.)

Compressed Length 18 mm at 10 N

(0.71 in. at 2 Ib)

Stop Valve Spring Free Length 36 mm (1.4 in.)

Compressed Length 14 mm at 59 N

(0.55 in. at 13 Ib)

Overload Relief Valve Spring Free Length 44 mm (1.73 in.)

Compressed Length 38 mm at 170 N

(1.5 in. at 38 Ib)

Rockshaft Cylinder 10 60.00-60.046 mm

(2.362-2.364 in.)

Rockshaft Piston 00 59.94-59.97 mm

(2.360-2.361 in.)

Piston-to-Cylinder Maximum Clearance 0.3 mm (0.012 in.)

Rockshaft Sleeve 00 44.95-44.975 mm

(1.769-1.77 in.)

Rockshaft Bushing 10 45.0-45.039 mm

(1.771-1.773 in.)

Sleeve-to-Bushing Maximum Clearance 0.4 mm (0.016 in.)

Lift Arm-to-Rockshaft Torque 52 Nm (38 Ib-ft)

Control Valve-to-Rockshaft Torque 26 Nm (19 Ib-ft)

Control Valve Cover-to-Rockshaft Torque 27 Nm (20 Ib-ft)

Piston Cover-to-Rockshaft Torque 88 Nm (65 Ib-ft)

Flow Oivider-to-Rockshaft Torque 17 Nm (12 Ib-ft)

Continued on next page

70-15-2 191091
 Rockshaft/Repair Lowering Check Valve

Item Measurement Specification

Rockshaft-to-Transmission Torque 52 N'm (38 Ib-ft)

Overload Relief Valve Retainer Torque 27 N'm (20 Ib-ft)

Overload Relief Valve Plug Torque 78 N'm (58 Ib-ft)

Check Relief Valve Plug Torque 34 N'm (25 Ib-ft)

MX,HU,7015,2 19160CT91

REMOVE PISTON COVER

1. Remove operator's seat. (See Section 80, Group 15.)

2. Remove flow divider and selective control valve (if

equipped). (See Group 10 in this section.)

3. Remove four socket head bolts. Remove cover.

MX,HU,7015,3 19160CT91

REPAIR LOWERING CHECK VALVE

1. Remove check relief valve plug. Remove valve

assembly.

Left Side

70-15-3 191091
 RockshaftlRepair Stop Valve

2. Inspect poppet (A) for excessive wear or damage.

Replace as necessary.

3. Inspect spring (8) for a free length of 27.7 mm (1.09

in.) and a compressed length of 18 mm at 10.1 N (0.71
in. at 2.27 Ib).

4. Dip all parts in clean hydraulic oil. Assemble in order

as shown. Tighten plug to 34 N'm (25 Ib-ft).

A-Poppet C-8ealing Ring

B-8pring D-Plug

MX,HU,7015,5 19160CT91

REPAIR STOP VALVE

1. Remove two socket head bolts. Remove handle

assembly.

2. Remove stop valve (A) with a M5 cap screw.

3. Inspect stop valve and seven steel balls (C) for

excessive wear or damage. Replace as necessary.

4. Inspect spring (D) for free length of 36 mm (1.4 in.)

and a compressed length of 14 mm at 59.2 N (0.55 in.
at 13.3 Ib). Left Side

5. Replace O-ring (8).

6. Dip stop valve and O-ring in clean hydrauliC oil before

assembly.

7. Apply light coat of grease to seven steel balls before

assembly.

8. Install handle assembly (E). Fasten it with socket

head bolts (F). Tighten bolts to 25 N'm (18 Ib-ft).

A-8top Valve D-Spring

B-O-ring E-Handle Assembly
C-S.7 mm (11/32 in.) F-8ocket Head Bolt
Ball (7 used)

70-15-4 191091
 Rockshaftllnstall Rockshaft Piston Cover

REPAIR IMPLEMENT RELIEF VALVE

1. Remove overload relief valve plug. Remove valve
assembly.
2. Use large screwdriver to remove retainer (C).
3. Inspect seat (8), poppet (D), and roll pin (E) for
excessive wear or damage. Replace as necessary.
4. Inspect spring (F) for free length of 44 mm (1.73 in.)
and a compressed length of 38 mm at 170 N (1.5 in. at
38.2Ib).
5. Replace O-ring (A).
6. Dip all parts in clean hydraulic oil. Assemble in order
as shown. Tighten retainer to 27 N-m (20 Ib-ft) and plug
to 78 N-m (58 Ib-ft).

A-O-ring F-Spring
8-Seat G-Shim
C-Retainer H-Sealing Ring
O-Poppet I"":'Plug
E-Roll Pin

M4341 0

INSTALL PISTON COVER

1. Replace O-rings (A, 8, C, and D).

IMPORTANT: O-ring (e) fits into plug (E). Plug (E) is

press fit into housing.

2. Apply oil to O-ring (D) before installing piston cover.

M43411

M43412

70-15-5
 RockshaftlRemove Rockshaft Piston

3. Install rocks haft piston cover. Fasten it with four

socket head bolts. Longer two bolts to the top.

4. Tighten bolts diagonally to 88 N'm (65 Ib-ft).

5. Install flow divider and selective control valve. (See

Group 10 in this section.)

6. Install operator's seat and sheet metal panels. (See

Section 80, Group 15.)

REMOVE ROCKSHAFT PISTON

1. Remove operator's seat. (See Section 80, Group 15.)

2. Remove flow divider and selective control valves (if

equipped). (See Group 10 in this section.)

3. Remove rockshaft piston cover. (See Group 15 in this

section.)

4. Install M6 cap screw in piston. Pull piston out.

MX,HU,7015,10 19160CT91

5. Inspect cylinder wall and piston for excessive scoring

or damage.

Cylinder 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 60.000-60.048 mm
(2.362-2.364 in.)
Piston 00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59.94-59.97 mm
(2.360-2.361 in.)
Piston to cylinder maximum wear clearance ... . . . . . . . . .. 0.3 mm
(0.012 in.)

6. Replace O-ring (A) and backup ring (B). Be sure

backup ring ends DO NOT overlap each other.

70-15-6 191091
 Rockshaft/Remove Rockshaft Housing

INSTALL ROCKSHAFT PISTON

1. Dip piston in clean hydraulic oil. Install piston.

2. Install rockshaft piston cover. (See Group 15 in this

section.)

3. Install flow divider and selective control valve. (See

Group 10 in this section.)

4. Install operator's seat and sheet metal panels. (See

Section 80, Group 15.)

MX.HU.7015.12 -19160CT91

REMOVE ROCKSHAFT HOUSING

1. Remove operator's seat and fenders. (See Section 80,

Group 15.)

2. Remove cotter pin and drilled pin (A). Remove lift rod
from lift arm.

3. Remove shoulder bolt (8). Remove PTO selector from

fender bracket.

4. Remove MFWD rod from selector, if equipped (not

shown).

70-15-7 191091
 RockshaftlRemove Rockshaft Housing

5. Remove cotter pin and washer (A). Remove park

brake rod (8) from lock lever.

6. Remove should bolt (C) and two cap screws (D).

Remove fender bracket (E).

7. Remove seat bracket (F).

A-Washer D-Cap Screws (2 used)

B-Park Brake Rod E-Fender Bracket
C-Shoulder Bolt F-Seat Bracket

Right Side

14 19160CT91

70-15-8 191091
 RockshafflRemove Rockshaff Housing

AVOID HIGH-PRESSURE FLUIDS

Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin

causing serious injury.

Avoid the hazard by relieving pressure before

disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Tighten all
connections before applying pressure.

Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard. Protect

hands and body from high pressure fluids.

If an accident occurs, see a doctor immediately. Any

fluid injected into the skin must be surgically removed
within a few hours or gangrene may result. Doctors
unfamiliar with this type of injury should reference a
knowledgeable medical source. Such information is
available from Deere & Company Medical Department in
Moline, Illinois, U.S.A.

A CAUTION: To avoid injury from escaping

hydraulic oil under pressure, relieve the
pressure in the system by stopping the engine
and operating all hydraulic control valves.

8. Disconnect two lines from flow divider and four lines

from selective control valve.

9. Disconnect line (A) from gear pump. Remove line

from tractor.

70-15-9 191091
 RockshaftlOisassemble Rockshaft Housing

Early Model Rockshaft Shown Late Model Rockshaft Shown

10. Remove eight cap screws and one nut with lock
washers to remove rocks haft housing.

16 -19-160CT91

DISASSEMBLE ROCKSHAFT HOUSING

1. Remove flow divider (A), selective control valves (8),

piston cover (C) and piston.

2. Remove turnbuckle (D), control valve cover and

control valve assembly (E).

3. Remove feedback arm (F) and lift arms (G).

A-Flow Divider E-Control Valve Cover

8-SCV F-Feedback Arm
C-Piston Cover G-Lift Arms
D-Turnbuckle

70-15-10 191091
 RockshaftlRepair Rockshaft Housing and Components

4. Remove retainer (8), splined sleeve (C) with D-ring

(D). Carefully remove rockshaft (A). Lift crank arm (E)
from housing.

5. Remove piston. (See Remove Rockshaft Piston earlier

in this group.)

A-Rockshaft O-O-ring
B-Retainer E-Crank Arm
C-Splined Sleeve

MX,HU,7015,18 -19-160CT91

REPAIR ROCKSHAFT HOUSING AND

COMPONENTS

1. Inspect piston (A) and cylinder wall. (See Group 15 in

this section.)

2. Inspect rockshaft (8) and crank arm (C) splines for

excessive wear or damage.

3. Check piston rod (D) for damage or excessive

looseness in rod-to-crank connection. Replace as
necessary by removing spring pin.

,19 -19-160CT91

4. Check splines in sleeve for damage. Examine splined

sleeve for wear. Replace as necessary.

Sleeve 00 ......................... 44.95-44.975 mm

(1.769-1.77 in.)
Sleeve to bushing
maximum wear clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 0.4 mm
(0.016 in.)

MX,HU,7015,20 -19-160CT91

70-15-11 191091
 RockshaftlAssemble Rockshaft Housing

5. Check bushings for wear.

Bushing 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 45.00-45.039 mm
(1.771-1.773 in.)

6. Replace bushings as necessary. Press out old

bushings.

7. Press new bushing into housing until outer edge of

bushing is 4.2 mm (0.166 in.) below surface of bore. Use
a 1-15/16 driver disk (A) and a 1-3/4 in. driver disk (8).

ASSEMBLE ROCKSHAFT HOUSING

1. Lubricate all mating parts and O-rings with clean

hydraulic oil prior to assembly.

2. Fasten piston rod to crank arm with spring pin.

3. Install rockshaft, aligning index marks (A) on crank

arm and rockshaft.

MX,HU,7015,22 19160CT91

4. Install new O-ring to crank arm end of splined sleeve.

IMPORTANT: Be sure splined sleeves are installed

O-ring end first.

5. Grease lightly and install splined sleeve (C) and O-ring

(0).

6. Install retainer (8).

MX,HU,7015,24 19160CT91

70-15-12 191091
 RockshafflAssemble Rockshaff Housing

7. Install lift arm to rockshaft, aligning index marks (A).

8. Install feedback arm and washer.

9. Install lift arm retaining bolts and lock washers.

Slightly raise and drop lift arms. Tighten bolts to 52 N'm
(38 Ib-ft).

MX.HU,7015,25 19-160CT91

10. Install control valve, using new a-rings. Tighten

socket head bolts to 26 N'm (19 Ib-ft).

11. Install control valves and cover (E), using new

gasket. Install and tighten cap screws diagonally to 27
N'm (20 Ib-ft).

12. Install turnbuckle (D).

13. Dip piston in clean hydraulic oil, then install it.

14. Install piston cover (C) using new a-rings. Apply oil
to a-rings before installation. Install socket head bolts.
(Longer bolts to the top.) Tighten bolts diagonally to 88
N'm (65 Ib-ft).

15. Install SCV's (8) and flow divider (A) using new
a-rings. Apply oil to a-rings before installation. Install
four socket head bolts. Tighten bolts diagonally to 17
N'm (12 Ib-ft).

, -19-160CT91

70-15-13 191091
' - - - - - - - - - - - .
Rockshaftllnstall Rockshaft Housing J
INSTALL ROCKSHAFT HOUSING

Early Model Rockshaft Shown Late Model Rockshaft Shown

1. Replace rockshaft-to-transaxle gasket.

2. Install rocks haft housing. Install and tighten eight cap

screws and one nut with lock washers to 53 Nm (38
Ib-ft).

3. Install gear pump to flow divider line (A).

4. Connect flow divider and selective control valve lines.

MX,HU,7015,28 19160CT91

70-15-14 191091
 Rockshaftllnstall Rockshaft Housing

5. Install seat bracket (F).

6. Install right fender bracket (E). Fasten it with two cap
screws (0).
7. Install Hi-Lo range selector to fender bracket. Fasten
it with shoulder bolt (C).
8. Install park brake rod (8) to lock lever. Fasten it with
washer (A) and cotter pin.

M43505

9. Install MFWO rod to selector if equipped (not shown).

10. Install PTO selector to fender bracket. Apply thread
lock on shoulder bolt (8) and install.
11. Install lift rod to lift arm. Fasten it with drilled pin (A)
and cotter pin.

NOTE: Rockshaft lift arms should be horizontal with

tractor frame when in the full up position. Lift
arm adjustment is made by adjusting the lift rod
(shorten or lengthen). If adjustment is
necessary, remove lift rod, then shorten or
lengthen by turning lift rod yoke (C). When M43493
adjustment is complete tighten set nut. See
Step 11 for installation.

12. Install fenders and operator's seat. (See Section 80,

Group 15).
13. Check level of hydraulic oil. Add oil as needed.

70-15-15
 RockshaftlRemove Control Valve

REMOVE ROCKSHAFT CONTROL VALVE

1. Remove seat assembly (See Section 80, Group 15).

2. Remove right fender.

3. Remove bolt (A).

4. Loosen shoulder bolt (8).

5. Remove seat bracket (C) on 655 only.

MX,HU,7015,30 -19-160CT91

6. Remove shoulder bolt (A) two bolts (8) and fender

bracket.

7. Remove cotter key and washer (C).

8. Disconnect valve linkage (D).

MX,HU,7015,31 -19-160CT91

9. Tip seat bracket (A) forward.

10. Remove rockshaft valve cover (8).

11. Remove three metric hex head bolts.

12. Remove valve.

MX,HU,7015,33 -19-160CT91

70-15-16 191091
 RockshaftlOisassemble Control Valve

13. Remove rubber seal washers and 100 mesh screens

(A) that align with valve ports (B). Clean or replace
screens and seal washers as needed.

14. Remove and discard O-ring (C).

15. Remove all gasket material from mating surfaces of

rocks haft housing and valve cover.

MX,HU,7015,34 19-160CT91

DISASSEMBLE ROCKSHAFT CONTROL

VALVE

1. Remove O-rings from recesses in back of valve.

2. Bend lock tab down on bolt (A).

IMPORTANT: DO NOT remove or attempt to adjust

lower valve adjusting screw (C). This is
a factory adjustment.

3. Remove bolt (A) connecting plate (8), and spool

assembly (0, E, and F).

NOTE: Spool and valve body are not serviced. If either A-Bolt D-Spring
is damaged, replace valve assembly. B-Connecting Plate E-Spring Guide
C-Nut F-Spool
4. Inspect spool and bore for scoring and sticking.

70-15-17 191091
 RockshaftlDisassemble Control Valve

5. Remove load check plug (A), spring (B), and poppet

(C).

6. Inspect for damage.

MX,HU,7015,36 -19-160CT91

7. Remove lowering valve plug (A), spring (B), and spool

(C). Inspect for damage.

A-Plug D-O-ring
B-Spring E-Back-Up Ring
C-Spool

MX,HU,7015,37 -19-160CT91

8. Insert short end of hex wrench through spool bore

and into hole in flow control spool. Carefully pull up until
plug (A) can be removed.

9. Remove flow control plug (A), spool (B), and spring

(C). Inspect for damage.

-19-160CT91

70-15-18 191091
 Rockshaft/Assemble Control Valve

10. Remove unloading valve plug (A), spring (B), and

poppet (C). Inspect for damage.

MX,HU,7015,39 19160CT91

ASSEMBLE ROCKSHAFT CONTROL VALVE

1. Clean and dry all parts.

2. Before assembly, apply clean hydraulic oil on all

internal parts.

3. Install new O-ring on unloading valve plug (A).

4. Assembly poppet (C), spring (B), and plug into valve

and tighten.

MX,HU,7015,40 19160CT91

5. Put flow control spring (C) inside poppet (B).

6. Put new O-ring on plug (A) and install assembly in

valve body and tighten.

, 1 19160CT91

7. Install new back-up ring (E) and O-ring (D) on

lowering valve spool (C).

8. Assemble spool (C), spring (B), and plug (A) into valve
using care not to damage O-ring. Tighten plug.

A-Plug O-Q-Ring
B-Spring E-Back-Up-Ring
C-Spool

MX,HU,7015,42 19160CT91

70-15-19 191091
 RockshaftlAssemble Control Valve

9. Assemble load check poppet (C) and spring (B) into

valve.

10. Put new O-ring on plug (A). Install and tighten plug.

MX,HU,7015,43 -19-160CT91

11_ Assemble spring (D) and spring guide (E) onto spool
(F).

12. Install spool into valve body.

13. Clean the threads of bolt (A) and the internal threads
of the spool with clean and cure primer.

14. Apply thread lock and sealer (medium strength) to

the threads of the bolt.

15. Align connecting plate (B) to spool and fasten with

bolt to 10 N'm (88 Ib-in.).

NOTE: Make certain cross pin (A) on end of spool is at

right angles to valve mounting surface.

16. Bend locking tab up against bolt head.

70-15-20 191091
 Rockshaft/Assemble Control Valve

17. Install 100 mesh screens in recesses of rocks haft

housing with wide face side of screens (A) to the
outside.

18. Install rubber seal washers (B).

19. Install new O-ring (C).

20. Align valve ports (B) with 100 mesh screens and
seal washers (A).

21. Install valve on transaxle with three socket head

bolts. Tighten socket head bolts 24 Nm (18 Ib-ft).

70-15-21 191091
 RockshaftlAssemble Control Valve

22. Install new gasket and original cover. Tighten cap

screws to 27 N'm (20 Ib-ft). Make sure internal linkage is
away from valve spool.

MX.HU.7015,46 -19-160CT91

23. Reconnect linkage using a washer on each side of

turnbuckle (D) and insert cotter key (C).

24. Install fender bracket and two bolts (8). Tighten to .

149 N'm (110 Ib-ft).

25. Install and tighten shoulder bolt. (A).

MX.HU.7015,47 -19-160CT91

26. Install and tighten fender bolt (A).

27. Install seat bracket (C). (655 only).

28. Tighten shoulder bolts (8).

29. Install right fender.

30. Install seat assembly. (See Section 80, Group 15.)

70-15-22 191091
 Rockshaft/Adjust Control Valve

ADJUST ROCKSHAFT CONTROL VALVE

1. Loosen turnbuckle jam nut (A).

2. Start engine and run at full throttle.

3. Place rockshaft lever in full raise position.

4. Turn turnbuckle (8) until the engine loads down.

5. Lengthen turnbuckle another 4 to 6 flats.

6. Cycle lift arms.

7. There should be a small amount of movement in the

lift arms at full raise.

MX.HU.7015.49 19160CT91

70-15-23 191091
 RockshaftlAdjust Control Valve
' - - - - - - - - - -
J

70-15-24 191091
 Group 20
Hydraulic Hoses

REPAIR HYDRAULIC HOSES

NOTE: These repair procedures are for O-Ring Face

Seal fittings (ORFS) only. The type used on 55
Series Tractors and implements.

1. Put hose fitting (8) of broken hose in a bench vise.

2. Remove coupler fitting (A) from hose fitting (8).

3. Move hose fitting up so you can clamp hose in vise

just below fitting.

4. Turn left-hand threaded hose fitting (8) to the left

(clockwise) to remove it.

5. Cut new hoses from bulk stock to proper length.

70-20-1 191091
 Hydraulic Hoses/Repair Hydraulic Hoses

6. Put new hose in vise so end of hose is high enough

to accept fitting.

7. Turn hose fitting (8) to the right (counterclockwise) to

install it.

8. Put hose fitting (8) in the vise.

9. Install coupler fitting until nut (A) is tight against hose

fitting.

MX.HU.7020.2 19160CT91

70-20-2 191091
 Section 80
Miscellaneous Repair
Contents
Page Page

Group 15-0perator's Seat Group 20-European Roll-Gard

Remove Operator's Seat- Exploded View-European Roll-Gard .... 80-20-2
North American ..................... 80-15-1
Install Operator's Seat- Group 25-German Rear Hitch
North American ..................... 80-15-2 Exploded View-German Rear Hitch ..... 80-25-2
Exploded View-
European .......................... 80-15-4 Group 30-3-Point Hitch
Remove Operator's Seat- Repair Center Link ................... 80-30-1
Early European ..................... 80-15-6 Repair Adjustable Lift Link ............. 80-30-1
Install Operator's Seat-
Early European ..................... 80-15-8
Adjust Operator's Seat -
European ......................... 80-15-10
Adjust Operator's Weight-
European Seat. .................... 80-15-12
Adjust Operator's Height-
European Seat. .................... 80-15-18

80-1
Contents

80-2 191091
 Group 15
Operator's Seat

REMOVE OPERATOR'S SEAT-NORTH

AMERICAN

NOTE: On 755/756, 855/856 and 955 tractors, PTO

select knob (E), and two-speed select knob (C)
must be removed.

1. Turn mower depth control (A) to the right (clockwise)

until it stops.

2. Remove top deck panel (8) by lifting right-rear corner

first, then lift depth control so it clears depth control bolt
and move it out the right side of operator's station.

3. Remove four bolts (F) under fenders and remove A-Mower Depth D-8elector Panel
selector panel (D). Control E-PTO Selector
B-Deck Panel F-Attaching Bolts
C-Two-Speed Selector

MX,HU,8015,1 -19-160CT91

4. Disconnect seat switch (A).

5. Remove two bolts, spacers, and large flat washers (8)

fastening safety cables (C).

MX,HU,8015,2 -19-160CT91

6. Remove nuts (A) fastening seat rails to seat brackets.

7. Remove seat assembly. Inspect, repair and/or replace

any damaged parts.

80-15-1 191091
 Operator's Seat/Install Operator's Seat-North American

INSTALL OPERATOR'S SEAT-NORTH

AMERICAN
1. Align front and rear seat rail studs (A and B) with four
tractor mounting bracket holes.

2. Place harness J-clamps over left front stud (A) and

rear studs (B and C).

3. Place hydraulic tube clamp over stud (C).

4. Install four nuts on studs and tighten.

MX,HU,8015,4 19-160CT91

NOTE: Safety cables must be installed in a crossed

pattern.

5. Install two bolts, large flat washers, spacers, and

safety cables (B).

6. Connect seat switch (A).

MX,HU,8015,5 -19-160CT91

7. Install select panel (D) with four cap screws (F) under
fenders (on 755/756, 855/856, and 955 tractors). Install
PTO select knob (E) and two-speed select knob (C).

8. Install top deck panel (B). Make certain mower depth

control knob (A) fits over depth control bolt.

A-Mower Depth D-8elector Panel

Control E-PTO Selector
B-Deck Panel F-Attachlng Bolts
C-Two-Speed Selector

80-15-2 191091
Operator's Seat/Install Operator's Seat-North American

80-15-3 191091
' - - - - - - - - - - - - _ .
Operator's Seat/Exploded View-European J
EXPLODED VIEW-EUROPEAN SEAT ASSEMBLY

A-Seat G-Seat Switch Actuator L-Rubber Boot Fastening O-Forel Aft Suspension
B-Left Forel Aft Seat Rail Bracket Pins Rails
C-Right Forel Aft Seat H-Operator Weight Indicator M-Height Adjustment P-Light Harness
Adjustment Rail I-Seat Switch Assembly Step-Bracket Assembly Q-Light Assembly
O-Suspension Assembly J-Base Mounting Brackets N-Weight Adjustment R-License PlatelLight
E-Oamper Assembly K-Rubber Boot Ratchet-Lever Assembly Mounting Bracket
F-Stop Bumper

MX,HU,8015,7A -19-160CT91

80-15-4 191091
 Operator's SeatlExp~0 ded View-European

M49271

80-15-5 191091
 Operator's Seat/Remove Operator's Seat-Early European

REMOVE OPERATOR'S SEAT-EUROPEAN

(EARLY VERSION)
NOTE: On 755/756, 855/856 and 955 tractors, PTO
select knob (E), and two-speed select knob (C)
must be removed. ROLL-GARD@ has been
removed from most pictures for clarity purposes
only.

1. Turn mower depth control (A) to the right (clockwise)

until it stops.

2. Remove top deck panel (8) by lifting right-rear corner

first, then lift depth control so it clears depth bolt and
move it out the right side of operator's station. A-Mower Depth D-Selector Panel
Control E-PTO Selector
3. Remove four bolts (F) under fenders (on 755/756, B-Deck Panel F-Attachlng Bolts
855/856, and 955 tractors) and remove selector panel C-Two-Speed Selector
(D).

MX,HU,801S,8A -19-160CT91

4. Disconnect seat light (optional) at connectors (A and

8).

80-15-6 191091
 Operator's Seat/Remove Operator's Seat-Early European

5. Bend rail stop tabs (A) up to a horizontal position.

6. Push seat lever (A) up, then slide seat forward off
suspension rails.

MX.HU.8015.9 19160CT91

7. Remove four nuts (A), two front and two rear, from
suspension mounting brackets.

80-15-7 191091
 Operator's Seat/Install Operator's Seat-Early European

8. Disconnect seat switch connector (A) to remove

suspension to work bench.

9. Inspect, repair and/or replace any damaged parts of

the seat and the suspension.

INSTALL OPERATOR'S SEAT-EUROPEAN

(EARLY VERSION)
NOTE: ROLL-GARD@ has been removed from most
pictures for Clarity purposes only.

1. Rest seat suspension assembly on tractor mounting

brackets while you connect seat switch connector to
harness connector (A).

2. Align four socket head cap screws with four holes of

tractor mounting brackets and foot control pedals lockout
rod with side bracket as you set seat assembly in place.

3. Fasten seat assembly to tractor with four nuts (A), two

front and two rear.

MX,HU,801S,13 -19-160CT91

80-15-8 191091
 Operator's Seat/Install Operator's Seat-Early European

4. Slide operator's seat on suspension rails, if removed

earlier.

5. Bend last two stop tabs (A) down to prevent seat

from sliding forward off the suspension rails.

MX,HU,8015,14A -19-160CT91

6. Connect license plate light connectors (A and B) to

tractor harness leads, if equipped.

7. Install operator's station sheet metal.

8. Adjust striker bar bracket so lockout rod is centered

inside front tube of bracket. Tighten cap screw to 25
Nm (18 Ib-ft).

80-15-9 191091
 Operator's SeatlAdjust Operator's Seat-European

ADJUST OPERATOR'S SEAT-EUROPEAN

NOTE- ROLL-GARD@ has been removed for clarity

purposes only.

1. Have a helper slowly sit in the operator's seat.

2. Look at the striker bar (A) on the right side of the

seat as the helper slowly puts more weight on the seat.
It must align with and strike the curved seat switch
plunger plate (8) to engage the seat safety switch. This
establishes operator presence for the electrical PTO
safety circuit.

If the striker bar does not strike the plunger plate, adjust
the switch mounting bracket (0) outward until it does. If
you adjust the switch bracket out all the way and contact
is not made, bend the striker bar inward until it contacts
the curved plunger plate, but not too far inward that the
switch plunger is bottomed-out inside the switch.

3. Look also at the right-side foot control pedals lockout

rod (C). It should be depressed far enough to unlock the
pedals for forward or reverse travel when the operator is
fully at rest in the seat.

If the pedals lockout rod (C) does not unlock the pedals
when the operator is fully at rest in the seat, adjust the
rod (with the helper out of the seat) by turning the nut to
A-8trlker Bar C-Pedals Lockout Rod
the left (counterclockwise) to lengthen the rod until the B-Curved Plunger O-Switch Mounting
pedals are unlocked. Plate Bracket

NOTE- The operator's height and weight are important to

the proper adjustment and safety function of the
European seat assembly. If the operator is
light-in-weight, and the seat assembly is adjusted
for a tall-heavy operator, the striker bar (A) may
not reach the plunger plate (8) to engage the
seat switch and prevent the PTO from being
engaged. Also, the lockout rod (C) may not
depress far enough to unlock the right-side foot
control pedals and the tractor will not move in
either direction.

80-15-10 191091
 Operator's SeatlAdjust Operator's Seat-European

A CAUTION: The operator's height and weight

are important to the proper adjustment and
safety function of the European seat assembly.
Lets say, for example, the operator is
short-in-height and light-in-weight with the seat
assembly adjusted for a short-light operator.
The operator moves out of the seat. The
striker bar (A) may not disengage the plunger
plate (8) to open the seat switch and shut off
the PTO. Also, the lockout rod (C) may not
raise high enough to lockout the right-side
foot control pedals and allow the tractor to
move if either of the pedals are accidentally
depressed.

-19-160CT91

80-15-11 191091
 Operator's Seat/Adjust Operator's Weight-European Seat

ADJUST OPERATOR'S WEIGHT-EUROPEAN

SEAT
IMPORTANT: If the customer/operator is not present
when you install the seat, BE SURE to
instruct him/her on these seat
adjustment procedures when the
tractor is delivered.

NOTE: ROLL-GARD@ has been removed for clarity

purposes only.

FOR THE HEAVY OPERATOR:

1. Turn adjustment handle to the positive position (A);

then, crank the handle until indicator (8) points to the
bottom of the large figure on the decal.

2. Operator sits in seat and bounces seat up and down

to see if seat is comfortable without bottoming-out:

If seat does bottom-out, operator cranks on handle (in

positive position) until seat has a nice cushioned feel
without bottoming-out;

LOOK: Striker bar (A) must engage striker plate (8)

which engages the seat safety switch and
establishes operator presence.

FEEL: Lockout rod (C) must be depressed far enough to

unlock right-side foot control pedals. Depress both
forward and reverse pedals-they should move
freely through their full range of motion.

80-15-12 191091
 Operator's Seat/Adjust Operator's Weight-European Seat

If seat does not bottom-out,

LOOK: Striker bar (A) may not engage plunger plate (8).

Turn adjustment handle to the negative position (C) and

crank on handle until engagement is made between
striker bar {A} and plunger plate {B}, without
bottoming-out the plunger inside the switch.

FEEL: Lockout rod (D) must be depressed far enough to

unlock right side foot control pedals. Depress
both forward and reverse pedals-they should
move freely through their full range of motion.

A-Striker Bar C-Negative Position

B-Plunger Plate D-Lockout Rod

80-15-13 191091
 Operator's Seat/Adjust Operator's Weight-European Seat

VERIFY SAFETY: Turn the key to the ON position only

and engage the PTO lever.

LOOK: PTO light must come on and magnet must hold

PTO lever engaged.

Raise off the seat.

LOOK: PTO light must go out within a short time.

LISTEN: PTO magnet will make a loud click sound as

the striker bar (A) disengages from the plunger
plate (8) causing the seat switch to break the
current flow to the magnet, disengaging the
PTO lever in a short amount of time.

MX,HU,8015,24C t9-1S0CT91

80-15-14 191091
 Operator's SeatlAdjust Operator's Weight-European Seat

ADJUST OPERATOR'S WEIGHT-EUROPEAN

SEAT

FOR THE LIGHT OPERATOR:

1. Turn adjustment handle to the negative position (A);

then, crank the handle until indicator (8) points to the
top of the small figure on the decal.

2. Operator sits in seat and bounces seat up and down

to see if seat is comfortable without bottoming-out:

If seat does bottom-out, operator turns adjustment

handle to positive position and cranks on handle until
seat has a nice cushioned feel without bottoming-out;

LOOK" Striker bar (A) must engage striker plate (8)

which engages the seat safety switch and
establishes operator presence.

FEEL: Lockout rod (C) must be depressed far enough to

unlock right-side foot control pedals. Depress both
forward and reverse pedals-they should move
freely through their full range of motion.

80-15-15 191091
 Operator's Seat/Adjust Operator's Weight-European Seat

If seat does not bottom-out,

LOOK: Striker bar (A) may not engage plunger plate (8).

A-Negative Position
B-Striker Bar
C-Plunger Plate
D-Lockout Rod

Turn adjustment handle to the negative position (A) and

crank on handle until engagement is made between
striker bar (B) and plunger plate (C), without
bottoming-out the plunger inside the switch.

FEEL: Lockout rod (D) must be depressed far enough to

unlock right side foot control pedals. Depress
both forward and reverse pedals-they should
move freely through their full range of motion.

80-15-16 191091
 Operator's SeatlAdjust Operator's Weight-European Seat

VERIFY SAFETY: Turn the key to the ON position only

and engage the PTO lever.

LOOK: PTO light must come on and magnet must hold

PTO lever engaged.

Raise off the seat.

LOOK: PTO light must go out within a short time.

LISTEN: PTO magnet will make a loud click sound as

the striker bar (A) disengages the plunger plate
(8) causing the seat switch to break the current
flow to the magnet, disengaging the PTO lever
in a short amount of time.

FEEL: Lockout rod (C) must raise far enough to lockout

the right-side foot control pedals and prevent the
tractor from moving if either of the pedals are
accidentally depressed. Touch each pedal-they
must not move.

MX.HU,8015,25C -19-160CT91

80-15-17 191081
 Operator's SeatlAdjust Operator's Height-European Seat

ADJUST OPERATOR'S HEIGHT-EUROPEAN

SEAT
IMPORTANT: If the customer/operator is not present
when you install the seat, BE SURE to
instruct him/her on these seat
adjustment procedures when the
tractor is delivered.

NOTE: ROLL-GARD@ has been removed for clarity

purposes only.

FOR THE TALL OPERATOR:

1. Operator sits in seat, pulls out on the colored height

adjustment knob (A) and moves it into Setting 3 (8). This
allows the seat to raise to its highest limit. Operator
must see if there is engagement between striker bar (C)
and plunger plate (D) and that lockout rod (E) is
depressed far enough to unlock forward and reverse foot
control pedals.

A CAUTION: A tall operator may adjust seat too

high and too far back and risk hitting his/her
head on the European Roll-Gard above.

2. Operator carefully bounces seat up and down to see

if seat is in a comfortable position to operate all tractor
controls without hitting his/her head on the Roll-Gard
above:

A-Adjustment Knob D-Plunger Plate

B-Setting 3 E-Lockout Rod
C-Striker Bar

80-15-18 191091
 Operator's SeatlAdjust Operator's Height-European Seat

If operator's head comes close to or hits the

Roll-Gard, operator should move height knob to Setting
2 (A) and test the clearance again. Repeat procedure
until a comfortable and safe setting is reached.

LOOK: Striker bar (8) must engage plunger plate (C)

which engages seat safety switch to establish
operator presence. If not, turn weight handle from
positive position to negative and crank handle
until it does (without bottoming out plunger inside
the switch).

FEEL: Lockout rod (D) must be depressed far enough to

unlock right-side foot control pedals. Depress both
forward and reverse pedals-they should move
freely through their full range of motion. If not,
turn adjustment nut (E) to the left
(counterclockwise) until pedals lockout is released.

VERIFY SAFETY: Turn the key to the ON position only

and engage the PTO lever.

LOOK: PTa light must come on and magnet must hold

PTa lever engaged.

Raise off the seat.

LOOK: PTa light must go out within a short time.

LISTEN: PTa magnet will make a loud click sound as

the striker bar (A) disengages the plunger plate
(8), causing the seat switch to break the
current flow to the magnet, disengaging the
PTa lever in a short amount of time.

FEEL: Lockout rod (C) must raise high enough to lockout A-Settlng 2 D-Lockout Rod
the right-side foot control pedals and prevent the B-Striker Bar E-Adjustment Nut
C-Plunger Plate
tractor from moving if either of the pedals are
accidentally depressed. Touch each pedal-they
must not move.

19160CT91

80-15-19 191091
 Operator's SeatlAdjust Operator's Height-European Seat

ADJUST OPERATOR'S HEIGHT-EUROPEAN

SEAT

FOR THE SHORT OPERATOR:

1. Operator sits in seat, pulls out on the colored height

adjustment knob (A) and moves it into Setting 0 (8). This
lowers the seat to its lowest limit.

2. Operator carefully bounces seat up and down to see

if seat is in a comfortable position to operate all tractor
controls without bottoming-out:

If operator cannot reach all tractor controls

comfortably, operator should first adjust seat forward on
its rails and/or turn weight handle to negative position A-Adjustment Knob D-Plunger Plate
and crank until a comfortable position is reached without B-Setting 0 E-Lockout Rod
bottoming out. C-Striker Bar F-Adjustment Nut

LOOK: Striker bar (C) must engage plunger plate (D)

which engages seat switch to establish operator
presence. If not, adjust weight handle negatively
until it does.

FEEL: Lockout rod (E) must be depressed far enough to

unlock right-side foot control pedals. Depress both
forward and reverse pedals-they should move
freely through their full range of motion. If not,
turn adjustment nut (F) to the left
(counterclockwise) until pedals lockout is released.

19160CT91

80-15-20 191091
 Operator's SeatlAdjust Operator's Height-European Seat

VERIFY SAFETY: Turn the key to the ON position only

and engage the PTO lever.

LOOK: PTO light must come on and magnet holds PTO

lever engaged.

Raise off the seat.

LOOK: PTO light must go out within a short time.

LISTEN: PTO magnet will make a loud click sound as

the striker bar (A) disengages the plunger plate
(8) (shown here with slight air gap which is
difficult to see from angle photographed),
causing the seat switch to break the current
flow to the magnet, disengaging the PTO lever
in a short amount of time.

FEEL: Lockout rod (C) must raise high enough to lockout

the right-side foot control pedals and prevent the
tractor from moving if either of the pedals are
accidentally depressed. Touch each pedal-they
must not move.

FOR THE MEDIUM OPERATOR:

The adjustment required for a medium build operator is

obtained by various adjustment combinations of the body
types mentioned previously.

IMPORTANT: This European seat should be adjusted

each time an operator climbs into the
seat to ensure a comfortable and SAFE
operating environment. Operators-DO
NOT ASSUME THIS SEAT IS ADJUSTED
CORRECTL V-take the time to adjust it
to suit you before you start the engine,
especially when other operators have
driven the tractor before you.

80-15-21 191091
Operator's SeatlAdjust Operator's Height-European Seat

80-15-22 191091
 Group 20
European Roll-Gard

80-20-1 191091
 European RoII-GardIExploded View-European Roll-Gard

EXPLODED VIEW-EUROPEAN ROLL-GARD

A-M16 x 40 Bolt (2 used) F-U-Frame I-Flat Washer (2 used) L-M20 x 130 Bolt (2 used)
B-Lock Washer (8 used) G-M20 x 125 Drilled Pin (2 J-5pring Locking Pin (2 M-Rlght Post Assembly
C-Flat Washer (8 used) used) used) N-M16 x 120 Bolt (4 used)
D-Left Post Assembly H-Lock Nut (2 used) K-Flat Washer (2 used) Q-M16 x 130 Bolt (2 used)
E-5tructural Permit Decal

Install structural permit decal (E) on inside of right Install M20 x130 bolts (L) from outside-in. Tighten
post, centered between bends in post. bolts and nuts (H) to 68 N'm (50 Ib-ft).

Tighten M16 x 40 (A), M16 x 120 (N), and M16 x 130 Install M20 x 125 drilled pin (G) from inside-out so
(0) bolts to 315 N'm (232 Ib-ft). spring locking pin (J) is on outside.

MX.HU,8020,1 19160CT91

80-20-2 191091
 European Roll-Gard@/Exploded View-European Roll-Gard@

M49276

-19-160CT91

80-20-3 191091
European Roll-Gard/Exp/oded View-European Roll-Gard@

80-20-4 191091
 Group 25
German Rear Hitch

80-25-1 191091
 German Rear Hitch/Exploded View-German Rear Hitch

EXPLODED VIEW-GERMAN REAR HITCH

A-Hitch Receiver Assembly E-M14 x 40 - 8.8 Bolt (4 G-Spring Locking Pin I-M12 x 35 - 10.9 Bolt (4
B-Nut (4 used) used) H-Lock Washer (4 used) used)
C-Lock Washer (4 used) F-Drllled Pin With Welded
D-Hitch Pin With Locking Chain
Lever

Tighten M12 x 35 - 10.9 bolts to 130 N'm (97 Ib-ft).

Tighten M14 x 40 - 8.8 bolts to 140 N'm (103 Ib-ft).

MX,HU,8025,1 -19-160CT91

80-25-2 191091
 German Rear Hitch/Exploded View-German Rear Hitch

M492n

-19-160CT91

80-25-3 191091
German Rear Hitch/Exploded View-German Rear Hitch

80-25-4 191091
 Group 30
3-Point Hitch
REPAIR CENTER LIFT LINK
IMPORTANT: Improper setting of 3-point hitch can
cause bent or broken lift link arms,
tire damage, and chain damage. 3-
point hitch must not be allowed to
swing from side to side with or
without attachments. Install spring
furnished with tractor to eliminate any
lateral movement. Also, review
Operators Manual for correct setting
for 3-point hitch spread using the
spreader bar from each attachment.

1. To disassemble center link, remove two screws and

lock washers (A).
2. Thread center link end (8) out until roll pin (C) in end
of threaded shaft, is centered in screw hole. Repeat for
other end.
3. Turn center link so screw hole faces downward. Tap
center link lightly for roll pin to fall out. Thread center link
end all-the-way out. Repeat procedure to remove other
end.
4. Inspect and repair or replace parts as necessary.
5. For assembly reverse disassembly steps.
A-Screws and Lock Washers D-Center Link Body
B-Center Link End (2 used) E-Jam Nut
C-Roll Pin (2 used)

REPAIR ADJUSTABLE LIFT LINK

IMPORTANT: Improper setting of 3-point hitch can
cause bent or broken lift link arms,
tire damage, and chain damage. 3-
point hitch must not be allowed to
swing from side to side with or
without attachments. Install spring
furnished with tractor to eliminate any
lateral movement. Also, review
Operators Manual for correct setting
for 3-point hitch spread using the
spreader bar from each attachment.

Disassembly and assembly is the same as center link,

except you remove grease fitting instead of two screws
and lock washers.
Inspect and repair or replace parts as necessary.
A-Yoke End D-Roll Pin (2 used)
B-Lift Link Body E-Jam Nut
C-Grease Fitting F-Lift Link End

80-30-1
3-Point Hitch/Repair Adjustable Lift Link

80-30-2 191091
 Section 210
Machine Operational Checkout Procedure
Contents
Page

Group 05-Machine Operational Checkout

Procedure
Before You Start ................. 210-05-1
Foot Control Pedal Lockout Check . . . .. 210-05-1
Instrument Panel Lamps Check . . . . . .. 210-05-1
Coolant Lamp/Neutral Start Check .... 210-05-2
Fuel Gauge Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 210-05-2
Light Switch Check ............... 210-05-2
PTO Safety Start Check . . . . . . . . . . .. 210-05-2
Starting Circuit Check. . . . . . . . . . . . .. 210-05-3
Engine Performance Check . . . . . . . . .. 210-05-3
Tachometer and Idle Speed Check .... 210-05-3
PTO/Seat Safety Switch Check . . . . . .. 210-05-3
PTO Operation Check ............. 210-05-4
PTO/Seat Switch Bypass Check ...... 210-05-4
PTO Brake Check ................ 210-05-5
Power Steering Check ............. 210-05-6
Priority Power Steering Check . . . . . . .. 210-05-6
Master/Park Brake Lock Check. . . . . .. 210-05-6
Transmission Neutral Check ......... 210-05-7
Left and Right Turn Brakes Check. . . .. 210-05-7
Transmission Drive Check. . . . . . . . . .. 210-05-7
Transmission Neutral Return Check. . .. 210-05-7
Cruise Control Lock Check . . . . . . . . .. 210-05-8
Cruise Control Release Checks . . . . . .. 210-05-8
Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 210-05-9
Differential Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . .. 210-05-9
Two-Speed Axle Check ............ 210-05-9
Selective Control Valve (SCV) Check.. 210-05-10
Rockshaft Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 210-05-10
Rockshaft Stop Valve Check . . . . . . .. 210-05-11

210-1 191091
Contents

210-2 191091
 Group 05
Machine Operational Checkout Procedure

BEFORE YOU START

This operational checkout procedure is designed for Perform these checks on a level surface in a large,
you to perform a quick step-by-step check of the open area. No special tools or equipment are
entire machine. required. ALL CHECKS ARE PERFORMED WITH
YOU IN THE OPERATOR'S SEAT, UNLESS
Perform ALL of these checks. These checks will refer OTHERWISE INSTRUCTED. Perform these checks
you to a specific system of the machine for a more with a mid or rear PTO drive attachment mounted on
detailed step-by-step method of resolving machine the tractor.
problems. These procedures also provide you a
method of evaluating trade-in equipment and Begin with Step 1 and read from left to right. Read
performing an annual checkout. each step completely before performing the check.

A large majority of typical machine problems can be Do the entire operational checkout procedure, making
detected by using these operational checkout note of problems that need to be resolved. Once the
procedures and your senses of LOOK, LISTEN, and machine checkout is complete, turn to the appropriate
FEEL. sections in this manual to correct any problems.

MX,HU,21005,1 -19-160CT91

o FOOT CONTROL
PEDAL LOCKOUT
Raise OFF seat. Step on FORWARD,
then REVERSE control
OK: GO TO e
CHECK pedals. NOT OK: GO TO
SECTION 250
LOOK/FEEL: Pedals
MUST NOT move.

M43932 -UN-31 AUGBB MX,HU,21005,2 -19-160CT91

e INSTRUMENT
PANEL LAMPS
Turn key switch ON. model 855/856 tractors only. Late
model 855 and all 955 tractors
have mechanical fuel transfer
CHECK
LOOK: Oil pressure, battery
discharge and engine preheat lamp pumps.
ON.

LISTEN: Fuel pump MUST BE

operating (rapid, faint clicking
M43925 -UN-31AUGBB
sound)-655, 755/756, and early

NOTE: On 655 and 755/756 preheat lamp will

go OFF in 8 seconds or less, or may not come
OK: GO TO e
on if engine is hot. On 855/856 and 955, NOT OK: GO TO
preheat lamp will only come ON if ambient SECTION 240
temperature is about 40F (toC) or less.

210-05-1 191091
 Machine Operational Checkout Procedure/PTa Safety Start Check

A CAUTION: BE Turn key switch to OK: GO TO ..

COOLANT AWARE that if START.
TEMPERATURE
LAMP AND
neutral start system NOT OK: GO TO
NEUTRAL START is defective, machine LOOK: Coolant SECTION 240
CHECK
may START and temperature lamp ON,
move forward or engine MUST NOT
Key switch OFF. rearward. crank.

Throttle at SLOW idle, M43898 -UN-31 AUG88

foot control pedal in
SLOW FORWARD.

MX,HU,21005,4 -19-1S0CT91

FUEL GAUGE
LOOK: Fuel gauge OK: GO TO Cit
CHECK MUST move to
indicate approximate NOT OK: GO TO
Turn key switch ON. fuel level in tank. SECTION 240

Add a known amount

of fuel to tank as
needed to verify fuel
gauge is working.
MX,HU,21005,5 -19-1S0CT91

LIGHT SWITCH
LOOK: Lights should operate (from left to right)
as follows:
OK: GO TO e
CHECK
NOT OK: GO TO
Turn key switch ON. A-OFF SECTION 240
B-Warning lights
Turn light switch to C-Rear work light (if equipped), headlights, and
each position. hoodlights
D-Warning lights, headlights, and hoodlights.
M43928 -UN-12SEP91 MX,HU,21005,S -19-1S0CT91

A CAUTION: BE Briefly turn key switch OK: GO TO

PTO SAFETY AWARE that if PTO to START position and
START CHECK
safety circuit is release. NOT OK: GO TO
Open hood. defective, machine SECTION 240
may START and PTO LOOK/USTEN: PTO
Turn key switch ON. may ENGAGE. magnet (A) will "click"
as it disengages from
Engage PTO lever lever (B), and lamp will
(PTO lamp will come M43929 -UN-31AUG88
go out almost
ON). instantaneously.

-19-1S0CT91

210-05-2 191091
 Machine Operational Checkout Procedure/PTO/Seat Safety Switch Check

STARTING
Master/Park Brake Briefly turn key to OK: GO TO .,
CIRCUIT CHECK
pedal engaged in START position and
(NORMAL
PARK position. release. NOT OK: GO TO
OPERATION)
SECTION 240
PTO OFF. LISTEN: Starter MUST
crank engine.

M43898 UN31AUG88 MX,HU,21005.8 -19-160CT91

., ENGINE Move throttle lever LISTEN/FEEL: Engine OK: GO TO

PERFORMANCE
from SLOW to FAST MUST accelerate
CHECK
idle. smoothly WITHOUT NOT OK: GO TO
hesitation. Engine SECTION 220
START engine. MUST idle (SLOW and
FAST) at constant
speed WITHOUT
"hunting" or "surging".
M43933 -UN-31 AUG88 MX,HU,21005.9 19-160CT91

TACHOMETER
START engine and run LOOK: Tachometer OK: GO TO.
AND IDLE SPEED
at SLOW idle, then should read about
CHECK
FAST idle. 1400 rpm at SLOW NOT OK: GO TO
idle and about 3425 SECTION 220
rpm at FAST idle.

LISTEN: Engine rpm

increases and
M43975 -UN-31AUG88
decreases smoothly.

FEEL: Engine vibration

MUST smooth-out as
rpm increases.

MX,HU,21005,10 -19-160CT91

Turn key switch ON. ENGAGE PTO lever. OK: GO TO

~ PTO/SEAT
SAFETY SWITCH
LOOK: PTa lamp ON. NOT OK: GO TO
CHECK
SECTION 240
Raise OFF seat for
1-2 seconds.

LOOK: PTa lever

M43927 -UN-31 AUG88
MUST DISENGAGE.
PTa lamp MUST turn
OFF.

LISTEN: You will hear

a loud "click" as PTa
magnet DISENGAGES.

11 -19-160CT91

210-05-3 191091
 Machine Operational Checkout Procedure/PTO/Seat Switch Bypass Check

PTO OPERATION Move PTO selector lever to one of the three

CHECK positions, then ENGAGE PTO lever.

NOTE: Have a helper LOOK: PTO lever MUST remain engaged. PTO
watch PTO shafts from dash lamp MUST be ON.
a SAFE distance, they
MUST rotate when Recycle PTO lever and repeat for other two
ENGAGED. selector lever positions.

Run engine at SLOW

idle.

M43927 -UN-31AUGBB

MX,HU,21 005,12 -19-160CT91

Mid PTO shaft (A) OK: GOTO.

MUST turn when
selector lever is in PTO SHAFTS DON'T
MIDDLE and DOWN TURN: GO TO
position. SECTION 250

Rear PTO shaft (8) LAMP NOT ON: GO

MUST turn when TO SECTION 240
selector lever is in
MIDDLE and UP
position.

M45005 -UN-31AUGBB

MX,HU,21005,13 -19-160CT91

48 PTO/SEAT SWITCH BYPASS CHECK Move PTO selector

lever (A) into rear PTO
Pull seat switch
plunger (8) OUTWARD
Operator OFF seat. position. into OVERRODE
position, then ENGAGE
Tilt seat forward. PTO lever.

Turn key switch ON.

LOOK: PTO magnet OK: GO TO 45

and lever MUST stay
ENGAGED. PTO lamp LEVER/MAGNET DO
ON. NOT STAY ENGAGED
OR LAMP DOES NOT
COME ON: GO TO
SECTION 240,

M43931 -UN-31 AUGBB MX,HU,21 005,14 -19-160CT91

210-05-4 191091
 Machine Operational Checkout Procedure/PTa Brake Check

PTO LEVER CHECK: mid-mounted attachment.

PTO BRAKE CHECK

START engine and run at 1/3 Move throttle to FAST idle.

it. CAUTION: Perform this check in a clean,
open area. throttle.

NOTE: Tractor MUST have a mid PTa and a Move PTO selector lever to the
rear PTa driven attachment installed for this DOWN position (MID PTO).
check.
ENGAGE PTO lever to drive

Be ready to note the time needed to stop PTO

rotation of mid-mounted attachment.

Move PTO lever into OFF position.

LOOK/USTEN: Attachment MUST STOP in 4

seconds or less from the time the PTa lever is
M4S9S6 -UN-S1AUG88
DISENGAGED.

Move throttle back to 1/3 speed.

(Continued on next page)

MX,HU,21005,15 -19-160CT91

Be ready to note the time needed to stop

(PTO BRAKE CHECK attachment PTO rotation.
continued)
Raise OFF seat so seat switch plunger (B)
PTO/SEAT SWITCH DISENGAGES .
CHECK
LOOK/USTEN: Attachment MUST STOP in 4
ENGAGE PTO lever to seconds or less from the time the PTa lever
drive mid-mounted M4S9S1 -UN-S1AUG88
kicks OFF.
attachment.
Move throttle to 1/3 speed.
Move throttle to FAST
idle.

PTO/OVERRIDE Move PTO selector Raise seat, then pull

SWITCH CHECK lever into the UP plunger (B) outward to
position (REAR PTO). engage OVERRIDE
Operator OFF tractor. switch.

it. CAUTION: Keep

feet clear of any
attachment.
M4S9S0 -UN-S1AUG88 Continued on next a e
210-05-5 191091
 Machine Operational Checkout Procedure/Master/Park Brake Lock Check

ENGAGE PTO lever, Be ready to note the OK: GO TO.

then move throttle to time needed to stop
FAST idle. attachment rotation. NOT OK: GO TO
SECTION 250 FOR
Push plunger into OFF PTO LEVER CHECK.
position. GO TO SECTION 240
FOR PTO/SEAT
LOOK/LISTEN: SWITCH CHECK,
M43931 -UN-31 AUG88 M43936 -UN-31AUG88
Attachment must stop PTO/OVERRIDE
in 4 seconds or less SWITCH CHECK, AND
from the time the PTO PTO LAMP CHECK.
lever kicks OFF and
loud "click" sounds.
PTO lamp goes OFF
instantly.

Move throttle to SLOW

idle.

MX.HU.21005.15B-19-160CT91

POWER
Turn steering wheel fully left and right. OK: GO TO.
STEERING CHECK
LOOK/FEEL: Wheels MUST turn SMOOTHL Y NOT OK: GO TO
Run engine at FAST from stop-to-stop. There MUST NOT BE any SECTION 260
idle. hesitation or jerky movement. Wheels MUST
stop turning when steering wheel is STOPPED.

M43855 -UN-31 AUG88 MX.HU.21 005.16 -19-160CT91

a; PRIORITY
LOWER attachment to
the ground.
Turn steering wheel
and RAISE attachment
OK: GO TO
POWER STEERING
CHECK
at the same time. NOT OK: GO TO
Turn steering wheel. SECTION 270
Run engine at FAST FEEL: Steering effort
idle. LOOK/FEEL: Note and smoothness of
effort needed to turn turn MUST BE the
steering wheel and same.
smoothness of turn. M43855 -UN-31AUG88
MX.HU.21005.17 -19-160CT91

G MASTER/PARK
FULLY DEPRESS
master/park brake
Raise park brake lever
(A) into LOCK position
BRAKE LOCK
CHECK
pedal. and release
master/park brake
pedal. Release park
brake lever.

LOOK/FEEL: Master/park brake pedal MUST OK: GO TO 48

stay in depressed (LOCKED) position. Park brake
lever MUST stay in LOCK position. Directional NOT OK: GO TO
foot control pedals MUST BE LOCKED in SECTION 260
NEUTRAL position.

M43947 -UN-31AUG88 MX.HU.21005.1B -19-160CT91

210-05-6 191091
 Machine Operational Checkout Procedure/Transmission Neutral Return Check

MX.HU.21005.21 -19-160CT91

TRANSMISSION NEUTRAL RETURN CHECK

Run engine at HALF
throttle.
Perform this check in a clean, wide open area.
Fully depress forward
Move two-speed axle lever into HI position. control pedal. Release
pedal while tractor is
moving.

LOOK/FEEL: Tractor MUST come to a SMOOTH OK: GO TO.

STOP within 3 seconds.
NOT OK: GO TO
NOTE- Stopping time may be longer if equipped SECTION 250
with additional attachments or shorter if no
attachments are installed

Repeat this check in reverse.

MX.HU.21005.22 -19160CT91

210-05-7 191091
 Machine Operational Checkout Procedure/Cruise Control Release Checks

CRUISE
Hold cruise control
CONTROL LOCK
lever (A) UP.
CHECK

Engine OFF.

M43940 UN31AUG88

Slowly depress forward control Slowly continue procedure through

pedal and release after the first or mid and then full range of travel.
second notch ENGAGES.

Release cruise control lever.

LOOK- Both the cruise control lever

and forward foot control pedal
M43932 UN-31AUG88
MUST remain ENGAGED.

FEEL: Pawl of foot control linkage ENGAGES OK: GO TO.

each notch of ratchet bracket.
NOT OK: GO TO
LOOK/FEEL: Forward control pedal and cruise SECTION 250
control lever MUST stay ENGAGED in any
notched position.

MX,HU,21005,23 19160CT91

Depress forward Depress forward foot

CRUISE
CONTROL
control pedal. control pedal further
RELEASE CHECKS
and release.
Pull UP on cruise
Engine OFF. control lever (A) and LOOK' Cruise control
HOLD. Release lever MUST
Check low, mid, and forward foot control DISENGAGE and
high ranges of travel. pedal at desired point. return to the bottom of
M43940 -UN-31 AUG88
Release cruise control M43932 -UN-31AUG88
its slot almost
lever. instantaneously. Foot
control pedals MUST
LOOK: Cruise control return to NEUTRAL.
lever and forward foot
control pedal MUST
remain ENGAGED.

-19-160CT91

Reset cruise control Depress master/park brake.

lever (A) anywhere in
the range of travel. LOOK: Cruise control lever MUST DISENGAGE
and return to the bottom of its slot. The foot
control pedals MUST return to NEUTRAL.

M43940 -UN-31AUG88 M43938 -UN-31AUG88 Continued on next a e

210-05-8 191091
 Machine Operational Checkout Procedure/Two-Speed Axle Check

Reset cruise control Push DOWN on cruise control lever (A). OK: GO TO
lever anywhere in the
range of travel. LOOK/FEEL: Cruise control lever MUST NOT OK: GO TO
DISENGAGE and return to the bottom of its slot. SECTION 250
The foot control pedals MUST return to
NEUTRAL.

MX,HU,21005,25 19160CT91

e MECHANICAL
FRONT WHEEL
ENGAGE MFWD lever. LOOK: Inside (right)
wheel MUST slip or
OK: GO TO e
DRIVE (MFWD)
Turn steering wheel scuff forward. NOT OK: GO TO
CHECK
FULL right. SECTION 250
NOTE: If necessary,
Perform this check in a Drive machine slowly repeat test with MFWD
wide-open dirt, gravel, forward in SHARP right DISENGAGED and
or short grassy area. turn. compare results.
M43941 UN31AUG88

Run engine at SLOW

idle.

MX,HU,21005,26 19160CT91

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CHECK

DEPRESS differential
lock pedal with heel of
Perform this check in a wide-open dirt, gravel, or left foot.
short grassy area.

MFWD disengaged, engine at SLOW idle.

Drive tractor in a SHARP right turn.

M43942 UN31AUG88

LOOK: Inside (right) front wheel MUST scuff OK: GO TO e

forward slightly while turning.
NOT OK: GO TO
NOTE: If necessary, repeat check with SECTION 250
differential lock DISENGAGED and compare
results.

TWO-SPEED AXLE LEVER CHECK

Put two-speed selector lever in LO-RANGE
position.
Perform this check in a clean, wide-open area.
Depress forward control pedal FULLY and note
ground speed.
Run engine at HALF throttle.
STOP, shift lever to HI-RANGE position, repeat
check.
M43943 -UN-31AUG88 Continued on next a e
210-05-9 191091
 Machine Operational Checkout ProcedurelRockshaft Check

FEEL: Ground speed should be NOTE: After Serial Number 615000, OK: GOTOe
about TWICE-AS-FAST in HI as it reverse speed is the same in HI- or
was in Lo. LO-range. NOT OK: GO TO
SECTION 250
Put two-speed lever in NEUTRAL,
depress forward control pedal.

LISTEN: There MUST NOT BE any

noise or gear clash.
MX.HU,21005,28 19160CT91

SELECTIVE
Slowly pull SCV lever back and release .
CONTROL VALVE
(SCV) CHECK
LOOK/FEEL: Lever MUST return to NEUTRAL.

Slowly push lever forward to first stop and

release.

LOOK/FEEL: Lever MUST return to NEUTRAL.

M4S97S UNS1AUG88
Slowly push lever fully forward past detent into
FLOAT position.

LOOK/FEEL: Lever MUST stay in position.

MX,HU.21005,29 -19-160CT91

Slowly pull SCV lever to the left and release. OK: GO TO ED

(toward seat) and release.
FEEL: There MUST BE two NOT OK: GO TO
LOOK/FEEL: Lever MUST return to distinctive positions-farthest SECTION 270
NEUTRAL. position is the REGENERA TlVE
function. Released lever MUST
NOTE: You will feel a small detent return to NEUTRAL.
and hear a slight "click" as you
M4S974 UNS1AUG88
move out of neutral-this is NOT to
be mistaken for the first stop.

Slowly push lever to the right to

first stop and release.

LOOK/FEEL: Lever MUST return to

NEUTRAL.

Slowly push lever to the right to

first stop then slowly apply more
pressure to push lever fully right

Turn stop valve (A) FULLY OPEN

ROCKSHAFT
CHECK
(counterclockwise).

Run engine at FAST idle.

(Continued on the next page)

M4S882 UN-S1 AUG88 MX,HU,21005,31 -19-160CT91

210-05-10 191091
 Machine Operational Checkout ProcedurelRockshaft Stop Valve Check

(Rockshaft Check Move rockshaft lever Move rockshaft lever OK: GO TO

I continued) fully forward into fully back into stop
LOWER position_ quadrant (FULL RAISE NOT OK: GO TO
position)_ SECTION 270
NOTE- It may be
necessary to push LOOK: Rockshaft
rockshaft arms down MUST raise FULL Y.
into fully lowered
M43946 -UN-31AUGBB
position. FEEL: Lever will spring
slightly into notched
stop quadrant_

MX,HU,21005,32 -19-160CT91

ROCKSHAFT
Turn stop valve (A)
STOP VALVE
FULLY CLOSED
CHECK
(clockwise)_

Partially LOWER
rockshaft.

M43B62 -UN-31AUGBB

Move rockshaft lever back to Move throttle to SLOW idle, then OK: Procedure
RAISE position_ turn OFF engine_ complete_

LOOK- Rockshaft arms MUST NOT FULLY OPEN stop valve NOT OK: GO TO
MOVE. (counterclockwise)_ SECTION 270

LISTEN: System relief valve will

give off a humming sound as
system goes in RELIEF.
MX,HU,21005,33 -19-160CT91

210-05-11 191091
Machine Operational Checkout ProcedurelRockshaft Stop Valve Check

210-05-12 191091
 Section 220
Engine/Fuel Operation and Tests
Contents
Page Page

Group OS-Engine Systems Operational Engine Runs Fine For An Hour,

Checkout Procedure Loses Power Then Stops ............ 220-10-4
Before You Start ..................... 220-05-1 Tests And Adjustments ............... 220-10-4
Engine Lubrication Check ............. 220-05-1 Adjust Throttle Cable . . . . . . . 220-10-4, 220-10--5
Engine Coolant Check ................ 220-05-1 Test Electric Fuel Pump Flow and
Air Restriction Indicator Check .......... 220-05-2 Pressure ......................... 220-10-5
Radiator Screen Check ............... 220-05-2 Electric Fuel Pump
Fan and Belt Check .................. 220-05-2 Test Specifications ................. 220-10-5
Throttle Lever Check ................. 220-05-2 Test Mechanical Fuel Pump Flow
Fuel System Check .................. 220-05-3 and Pressure ..................... 220-10-5
Engine Start Check .................. 220-05-4 Mechanical Fuel Pump
Engine Oil Pressure Check ............ 220-05-4 Test Specifications ................. 220-10-5
Engine Idle Speed Check .............. 220-05-4 Bleed Fuel Injection System ........... 220-10-6
Engine Performance Check ............ 220-05-4 Fuel Injection Pump Timing-655 and
Operator Complaint Not Identified ....... 220-05-5 755/756 Tractors .................. 220-10-6
Fuel Injection Pump Timing-855/856
Group 10-Engine System Diagnosis and 955 Tractors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220-10-6
Before you Start ..................... 220-10-1 Test Cooling System ................. 220-10-6
Engine Operating Check .............. 220-10-1 Test Radiator Cap ................... 220-10-6
Engine Will Not Start or Starts Hard ...... 220-10-2 Cylinder Compression Pressure Test ..... 220-10-7
Engine Surges or Stalls Frequently ...... 220-10-2 Cylinder Compression Pressure
Engine Misses ...................... 220-10-2 Test Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220-10-7
Engine Does Not Develop Full Power .... 220-10-2 Adjust Slow and Fast Idle ............. 220-10-7
Excessive Black or Gray Exhaust Engine Idle Speed
Smoke ........................... 220-10-3 Specifications ............. 220-10-7, 220-10-8
White Exhaust Smoke ................ 220-10-3 Engine Oil Pressure Test ............. 220-10-8
Slow Acceleration/Engine Will Not Engine Oil Test Specifications .......... 220-10-8
Accelerate/No Fast Idle Speed ........ 220-10-3 Cooling Fan Installation-955 .......... 220-10-9
Abnormal Engine Noise, Loud
Knock, or Vibration ................. 220-10-3
Low Oil Pressure .................... 220-10-3
High Oil Pressure .................... 220-10-3
Oil in Coolant or Coolant in Oil .......... 220-10-3
Engine Overheats ................... 220-10-3
Engine Runs Cold ................... 220-10-3
Engine Starts But Then Stops When Key
Is Released ....................... 220-10-3
Diesel Fuel In Crankcase .............. 220-10-4
Idle Erratic, Can't Keep Air Bled From
Injection Lines ..................... 220-10-4
Fuel Shut-off Solenoid Releases
When Engine Warms Up ............. 220-10-4
White Smoke Coming From
Crankcase Breather................. 220-10-4
Engine RPM Will Not Lower ............ 220-10-4
Blue Exhaust Smoke ................. 220-10-4

220-1
Contents

220-2 191091
 Group 05
Engine Systems Operational Checkout Procedure

BEFORE YOU START

Always begin with this group to identify a failure in This procedure is designed as a quick check of the
the engine system. The step-by-step procedures will system. While performing the check, concentrate only
provide you with a quick check of the system. If a on the check you are performing and disregard
failure is indicated, you will be referred to a more signals from unrelated components.
detailed check, adjustment, or test.

Always start with the first step and follow the

sequence from left to right. Read each step
completely before performing the check.

MX,2200SHU,1 19160CT91

ENGINE
Inspect for external Repair or replace as
LUBRICATION engine oil leakage from required then .... GO
CHECK oil pan gasket, drain TOe
plug, valve cover
Open hood, Check gasket, valve cover
engine oil level, nuts (with a-ring), head
condition, and gasket, fuel injection
viscosity. pump gaskets, oil fill
M43888 -UN-31 AUG88
caps, breather,
breather cap and hose,
dipstick tube, oil
pressure switch, and
oil filter.

On 955 and late 855

tractors:
If engine oil level is
high, check mechanical
fuel transfer pump for
internal leak.
MX,2200SHU,2 19-160CT91

ENGINE
Inspect for external Repair or replace as
COOLANT CHECK
coolant leakage from required then .... GO
radiator, water pump, TOe
Check for proper water pump/thermostat
coolant level. hose, thermostat cover
and housing, drain
plug, radiator cap, and
radiator hoses.
M43889 -UN-31AUG88
Inspect radiator hoses
for cracks or hard
conditions.

Inspect radiator for

bent fins, dents, and
cracked seams.

220-05-1 191091
 Engine Systems Operational Checkout Procedure/Throttle Lever Check

e AIR RESTRICTION INDICATOR CHECK LOOK' Yellow indicator

position MUST BE
IMPORTANT: Indicator will not register below red mark.
correctly if the air intake system has a leak
prior to the location of the indicator. NOTE: It is normal for
indicator to show 380
mm (15 in.) vacuum
with clean primary
M4B505 -UN-11DEC89
element.

Run engine at FAST idle.

Pinch rubber inlet boot partially shut

to restrict air flow and observe
indicator operation.
Indicator MUST hold most restricted
reading.

Push button to RESET.

.
OK: SYSTEM
NORMAL GO TO

NOT OK: SEE

SECTION 30.
Indicator should move with
moderate restriction.
MX.22005HU,4 -19-160CT91

., RADIATOR Inspect grille, and Clean as required

SCREEN CHECK radiator screen for then .... GO TO 0
debris or plugged
condition.

MX.22005HU,4A -19-160CT91

FAN AND BELT Inspect fan blades. They must be straight and Repair, replace, or
CHECK not striking the radiator core or fan shroud. adjust as required,
then .... GO TOe
Check fan for loose mounting cap screws.

Fan belt should have 10 to 15 mm (0.4 to 0.6

in.) deflection when a 11 kg (24 Ib) force is
applied midway between alternator and engine
M43B91 -UN-31AUGBB
sheave.
MX.22005HU.5 -19-160CT91

., THROTTLE Engine OFF . Move throttle lever FEEL: Throttle lever

from SLOW idle MUST move smoothly
LEVER CHECK
position to FAST idle from SLOW to FAST
position. idle position with a
slight drag.

M43933 -UN-31 AUGBB

Move throttle lever to LOOK: Governor throttle lever MUST contact the OK: GO TO
SLOW idle position. SLOW idle stop screw (A).
NOT OK: GO TO e,
LOOK: Throttle lever should have a slight gap at GROUP 10
bottom of its slot after governor throttle lever
has hit the SLOW idle stop. Throttle cable
should not have any loaded pressure on it.

60CT91

220-05-2 191091
 Engine Systems Operational Checkout Procedure/Fuel System Check

FUEL SYSTEM
Inspect for external Check for water in
CHECK
fuel leakage from tank, sediment bowl.
transfer pump, filter,
Be sure fuel tank has lines, pump, and Remove water and
the correct grade of nozzles. debris from sediment
diesel fuel in it. bowl and fuel tank.
Repair leaks or replace
defective parts.
M43893 UN31AUG88 M43894 UN31AUG88

Disconnect nozzle 655, 755/756, AND

return hose (A). Use EARLY 855/856
compressed air to TRACTORS
check that hose is not
plugged. Open fuel Engine OFF, turn key
tank cap to listen for switch ON.
air flow.
LISTEN: A ticking
M43895 UN31AUG88
If hose is plugged, M43896 UN31 AUG88
sound MUST BE heard
clean or replace it. from the fuel transfer
pump.

If a ticking sound is
not heard, test fuel
transfer pump. (See
Section 240.)

955 AND LATE MODEL 855 Tighten inlet bleed screw (A).
TRACTORS
Turn key OFF.
NOTE: Mechanical fuel transfer
pump is driven off an injection Wipe components free of any
pump cam lobe. Fuel flow starts spilled fuel.
as-soon-as operator turns the key
to START position (cranking). Connect fuel shut-off solenoid
connector.
M70681 UN-29JAN90
Disconnect fuel shut-off solenoid
connector so the engine will crank
but NOT START.

Loosen inlet bleed screw (A).

Turn key to START position.

LOOK: Fuel MUST flow from inlet

bleed screw with NO air bubbles
present.

START engine briefly. Repair, replace, or

clean fuel system
LOOK: Fuel shut-off solenoid MUST pull-in and components, then .... GO
hold-in. TOe

If it does not hold-in, test fuel shut-off solenoid.

(See Section 240.)

220-05-3 191091
 Engine Systems Operational Checkout Procedure/Engine Performance Check

Turn key switch to ON OK: GO TO.

ENGINE START
CHECK
position. When preheat
light goes out, turn key Starter will not crank
Operator on seat. to START position. engine... SEE SECTION
240.
Master/Park brake LISTEN: Starter MUST
locked in PARK crank engine. Starter cranks but
position. engine will not
M43898 -UN-31AUG88
LISTEN: Engine MUST start.... GO TO IN
PTO lever OFF. START. GROUP 10

MX.2200SHU.B -19-160CT91

Run engine at FAST OK: GO TO.

ENGINE OIL idle.
PRESSURE CHECK
Oil leaks.... Tighten or
LOOK: Engine oil replace engine oil filter.
MUST NOT leak from
oil filter. Oil pressure lamp
stays ON .... GO TO 0
LOOK' Oil pressure IN GROUP 10
lamp MUST go OUT.
MX,22005HU,9 -19-160CT91

., ENGINE IDLE Move throttle lever to SLOW idle position . OK: GO TO.
SPEED CHECK
LOOK: Tachometer MUST read 1400 50 rpm. NOT OK: GO TO . ,
Run engine at HALF GROUP 10.
throttle for five minutes Move throttle lever to FAST idle position.
to warm engine.
LOOK: Tachometer MUST read 3425 25 rpm.

MX,2200SHU,10 -19-160CT91

START engine. LISTEN: Engine MUST LISTEN: Governor

ENGINE accelerate smoothly, MUST NOT SURGE, it
PERFORMANCE
CHECK
Move throttle lever without hesitation. MUST hold engine at a
from SLOW idle to constant rpm.
'FAST idle position. LOOK' Exhaust gas
MUST BE CLEAR. LISTEN: Engine MUST
run smoothly and NOT
make any abnormal
M43933 -UN-31 AUG88
sounds.

Engage PTO lever, LISTEN: Governor LISTEN: Engine MUST

and/or operate MUST increase and run smoothly and NOT
hydraulic functions to decrease engine rpm make any abnormal
load engine. You may smoothly to match load sounds.
want to take tractor condition.
outside to mow some
tall grass for a more LOOK' Exhaust gas
meaningful check_ MUST BE CLEAR.
on next
220-05-4 191091
 Engine Systems Operational Checkout Procedure/Operator Complaint Not Identified

Turn steering wheel LISTEN: Engine MUST OK: SYSTEM NORMAL

fully right or left to NOT hesitate or
make a sharp turn. stumble. NOT OK: GO TO 0,
GROUP 10

.,
M43855 UN31AUG88 MX,22005HU,11 19160CT91

OPERATOR
If you completed the checkout procedure and REPEAT THE ENGINE
COMPLAINT NOT
DID NOT isolate a malfunction, the problem may SYSTEM CHECKOUT
IDENTIFIED
be intermittent. PROCEDURE UNTIL
MALFUNCTION IS
Try to duplicate the conditions of the malfunction IDENTIFIED.
identified by the operator.

MX,22005HU,12 19160CT91

220-05-5 191091
Engine Systems Operational Checkout Procedure/Operator Complaint Not Identified

220-05-6 191091
 Group 10
Engine System Diagnosis
BEFORE YOU START
Always perform the system checkout procedure in Engine rpm and temperature are critical in most engine
Group 05 before making any tests or adjustments in this tests. Be sure to follow test specifications carefully.
group. The step-by-step procedures in this group
provide you with the detailed diagnostic information you Always start with the first step and follow the sequence
will need to isolate a malfunction. Basic diagnostic from left to right. Read each step completely before
equipment is used. performing the tests.

It is assumed that you are familiar with the machine and Upon completing a test or adjustment, check to see
its engine and fuel system components. whether the problem is corrected by performing the
corresponding checkout procedure in Group 05 .

ENGINE If engine DOES ENGINE WILL NOT START OR STARTS LOW OIL PRESSURE:
OPERATING NOT operate prop- HARD: GO TO f) GOTOO
CHECK erly, select the
ENGINE SURGES OR STALLS FRE- HIGH OIL PRESSURE:
Operator on seat. appropriate symp-
QUENTLY: GO TO 4]) GO TO f)
tom.
Master/Park brake
pedal locked in If engine DOES ENGINE MISSES: GO TO e OIL IN COOLANT OR COOL-
NOT crank, see ANT IN OIL: GO TO 4)
PARK position. ENGINE DOES NOT DEVELOP FULL
PTO lever OFF. Section 240. POWER: GO TO 0 ENGINE OVERHEATS:
GOTOQ
EXCESSIVE BLACK OR GRAY
EXHAUST SMOKE: GO TO 0 ENGINE RUNS COLD:
WHITE EXHAUST SMOKE: GO TO G GOTO
ENGINE STARTS BUT THEN
SLOW ACCELERATION: GO TO (;)
STOPS WHEN KEY IS
ABNORMAL ENGINE NOISE: RELEASED: GO TO 4D
GO TO 4D
DIESEL FUEL IN CRANK-
WHITE SMOKE COMING FROM CASE: GO TO 0
CRANKCASE BREATHER: GO TO G
IDLE ERRATIC, CAN'T KEEP
CAN'T LOWER ENGINE RPM: AIR BLED FROM INJECTION
GOTO) LINES: GO TO G
BLUE EXHAUST SMOKE: GO TO G FUEL SHUTOFF SOLENOID
RELEASES WHEN ENGINE
WARMS UP: GO TO ()
ENGINE RUNS FINE FOR AN
HOUR, LOSES POWER THEN
STOPS: GO TO (!)

220-10-1
 Engine System Diagnosis/Engine Misses

o ENGINE WILL NOT

START OR STARTS
Check for proper fuel and fuel quality. Test injection nozzles.
(See CTM-3.)
Test fuel transfer pump output.
HARD GO TO ~ or (g) Check injection pump timing and check
Bleed fuel system. GO TO 0 to see if plunger is stuck. GO TO~ or
Check fuel shut-off solenoid for binding Remove fuel injection pump and have it
and adjust. (See Section 240.) tested. (See CTM-3.)
Test cold start aid controller. Check cranking speed.
(See Section 240.) Check for proper oil viscosity.
Test engine compression. Air heater control functioning improperly
GO TO G Broken starter spring in governor assem-
Check and adjust valve clearance. bly.
(See CTM-3.) Improper cylinder head torque, gasket
Improper air restriction indicator installed. leaking or head warped. (See CTM-3.)
G ENGINE SURGES OR Check fuel quality. Check injection pump timing.
STALLS FREQUENTLY Replace fuel filter and air cleaner. GO TO ~ or
Test fuel transfer pump output. Test cooling system. GO TO ~ or ~
GO TO ~ or (g) Check thermostat. (See CTM-3.)
Check fuel shut-off solenoid adjustment. Test engine compression.
(See Section 240.) GO TO G
Bleed fuel system. GO TO 0 Check and adjust valve clearance.
Check governor for binding, weight (See CTM-3.)
retainer loose. Remove fuel and injection pump and
Test injection nozzles. have it tested. (See CTM-3.)
(See CTM-3.) Check for loose or broken engine
mounts.
ENGINE MISSES Check fuel quality. Check injection pump timing.
Replace fuel filter and air cleaner. GO TO ~or
Test fuel transfer pump output. Test cooling system if overheating.
GO TO ~ or (g) GO TO ~or ~
Bleed fuel system. GO TO 0 Check thermostat. (See CTM-3.)
Check injection nozzle return line for Test engine compression. GO TO G
restriction. Check and adjust valve clearance.
Test injection nozzles. (See CTM-3.)
(See CTM-3.)
G ENGINE DOES NOT Check and adjust idle speeds. GO TO e Check and adjust valve clearance.
DEVELOP FULL POWER Check fuel quality. (See CTM-3.)
Replace fuel filter and air cleaner. Check for broken start-up spring in fuel
Test fuel transfer pump output. control lever.
GO TO ~ or (g) Remove fuel injection pump and have it
tested. (See CTM-3.)
Bleed fuel system. GO TO 0
Vacuum in fuel tank (try with cap
Check fuel shut-off solenoid for binding
removed).
and adjust linkage. (See Section 240.)
Air leak between fuel tank and injection
Check governor linkage and injection
pump.
pump rack for binding. (See CTM-3.)
Restriction in exhaust system.
Check injection nozzle return line for
restriction. Brakes dragging.
Test injection nozzles. (See CTM-3.) Hydraulic system operating against
restriction.
Check injection pump timing.
GO TO ~or
Test engine compression. GO TO G

220-10-2
 Engine System Diagnosis/Slow Acceleration/Engine Will Not Accelerate/No Fast Idle Speed

G EXCESSIVE BLACK OR Check air filter. Test engine compression. GO TO G

GRAY EXHAUST SMOKE Test injection nozzles. (See CTM-3.) Remove fuel injection pump and have it
Check injection pump timing. tested.
GOTO ~or ~ Check thermostat.

o WHITE EXHAUST SMOKE Test injection nozzles. (See CTM-3.)

Check injection pump timing.
Test engine compression. GO TO G
Check for cracked head or leaking head
GOTO~ or~ gasket.
Piston rings not seated.

CD SLOW ACCELERATIONI Check air filter. Check governor linkage and injection
ENGINE WILL NOT ACCEL- Test injection nozzles. (See CTM-3.) pump rack for binding. (See CTM-3.)
ERATE/NO FAST IDLE Check injection pump timing. Check for broken start-up spring in fuel
SPEED GO TO ~ or~ control lever.
Check fuel shut-off solenoid for binding Gasoline in fuel.
and adjust. (See Section 240.) Incorrect hydraulic relief pressure.
Check and adjust fast idle speed.
GOTOO
o NOISE,
ABNORMAL ENGINE
LOUD KNOCK, OR
Check engine oil level Have injection pump checked for equal
fuel directory.
Test injection nozzles. (See CTM-3.)
VIBRATION Check injection pump timing. Inspect pistons, piston pins, pin bush-
GOTO~or ~ ings, connecting rod bearings and rod
caps. (See CTM-3.)
Check and adjust valve clearance. (See
CTM-3.) Inspect main bearings and bearing
caps. (See CTM-3.)
LOW OIL PRESSURE Test oil pressure indicator light and Inspect for excessive connecting rod
sender. (See Section 240.) bearing clearance, (See CTM-3.)
Check oil pressure. GO TO e Inspect for cracked cylinder block.
Inspect for excessive main bearing
clearance. (See CTM-3.)
HIGH OIL PRESSURE Test oil pressure indicator light and Check oil pressure. GO TO e
sender. (See Section 240.)
o OIL IN COOLANT OR
COOLANT IN OIL
Test engine compression for leaking
cylinder head gasket. GO TO G
Inspect for cracked cylinder block.
(See CTM-3.)
ENGINE OVERHEATS Test water temperature indicator light Check for excessive hydraulic system
and sender. (See Section 240.) temperature. (See Section 270.)
Check thermostat. (See CTM-3.) Test injection nozzles. (See CTM-3.)
Test cooling system. GO TO ~ or Check injection pump timing.
Fan installed backwards, see page GOTO~or ~
220-10-9 Inspect for scored piston. (See CTM-3.)
ENGINE RUNS COLD Test water temperature indicator light
and sender. (See Section 240.)
Check thermostat. (See CTM-3.)
CD ENGINE STARTS BUT THEN STOPS WHEN KEY IS RELEASED Check fuel shut-off solenoid hold-in cir-
cuit. (See Section 240.)

220-10-3
 Engine System Diagnosis/Diesel Fuel In Crankcase

G) DIESEL FUEL IN CRANKCASE Injector stuck open, bad spray Engine being run for short peri-
pattern ods of time.
Check engine compression
o FROM
IDLE ERRATIC, CAN'T KEEP AIR BLED
INJECTION LINES .
Inspect lines between fuel tank and injection pump for restrictions.
Inspect fuel lines and fittings on suction side of fuel transfer pump for
openings that could draw air. Check nozzle spray pattern. Have injec-
tion pump tested.
CD FUEL SHUT-OFF SOLENOID Test and adjust fuel shut-off Test fuel shut-off solenoid ground
RELEASES WHEN ENGINE WARMS UP solenoid. circuit.
o WHITE SMOKE COMING FROM
CRANKCASE BREATHER
Check oil level. Verify breather tube location.
Check oil pressure. GO TOCi) Rings not seated or rings are
Check engine compression. worn. Check rocker arm bearings
GOTOG for excessive oil flow (leakage).

e CAN'T LOWER ENGINE RPM Check Injection Pump throttle

shaft for binding.
Reconnect governor linkage link
to rack pin.
Injection pump rack binding. Check for distortion of delivery
valve barrel due to over-torquing.
o BLUE EXHAUST SMOKE Check compression. Remove
exhaust manifold and run engine
Bent piston rod~ (See CTM-3)
Check condition of cylinder walls,
to see what cylinder is smoking. pistons and rings. (See CTM-3)
CD ENGINE RUNS FINE FOR AN HOUR, LOSES POWER THEN STOPS Injection pump and injectors are
clogged or restricted due to con-
NOTE: Tractor is used in an extremely dusty environment. taminated fuel.

TESTS & ADJUSTMENTS

ADJUST THROTTLE Loosen jam nut (A) and set screw (B) on gover-
CABLE nor throttle lever.
Spring tension will move governor throttle lever
up against SLOW idle stop (C).

Move throttle lever within 2mm (1/16-in.) of bot-

tom of its slot (SLOW idle).
Loosen set screw (A) at bottom of throttle lever
inside pedestal area.
Move throttle wire (B) forward until 2mm (1/16-
in.) is sticking out of anchor.
Tighten set screw (A).
IMPORTANT: Throttle cable housing
MUST BE slack to prevent it from breaking
when engine oscillates during accelera-
M43900 tion.

NOTE: Set cable jam nut (C) so 6mm (1/4-in.)

of threads are exposed whenever cable is
installed or replaced. This will provide the
proper number of threads to install boot (D)
and, at-the-same-time, provide proper slack.

Continued on next page

220-10-4
 Engine System Diagnosis/Adjust Throttle Cable

ADJUST THROTTLE CABLE Make sure governor throttle lever is up against

SLOW idle stop (C).
Tighten set screw (8) and jam nut (A).
Move throttle lever to FAST idle. See that gov-
ernor throttle lever hits FAST idle stop before
throttle lever reaches upper end of slot in dash;
a 2 mm (1/16-in.) gap is recommended.
Connect a scale to bottom of the grip on the
throttle lever.
M43902 IMPORTANT: Steering ped-
See picture left side.
estal panel and dash panel
Tighten or loosen lock nut (A) to adjust tension
brace MUST BE fastened
of friction disks (8) until 4.5-7 kg (10-16Ibs.)
securely before throttle cable
of force is required to move throttle lever.
is connected to governor
throttle lever. Move throttle lever to SLOW idle position.

e TEST ELECTRIC
FUEL PUMP FLOW
FlOW-
Disconnect fuel pump outlet hose from fuel fil-
AND PRESSURE ter. Collect fuel in a graduated container.
-655,755/756, AND EARLY Turn ignition switch to ON position for 30 sec-
855 TRACTORS ONLY onds. DO NOT start engine. Record measure-
ment.
NOTE: Perform test with
fuel at room temperature.
M43913

TEST SPECIFICATIONS - PRESSURE-Connect gauge from JDG-356

ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump Pressure Test Kit to outlet hose.
Fuel temperature-15-25C Turn ignition switch to ON position. DO NOT
(59-77F) start engine.
Minimum fuel flow -200 ml Record pressure reading.
(7 oz.) for 30 seconds OUT OF SPEC: Replace electric fuel pump.
Minimum fuel pressure-21
kPa (3 psi)

~ TEST MECHANICAL FlOW-

FUEL PUMP FLOW Disconnect fuel shut-off solenoid connector to
AND PRESSURE prevent STARTING engine.
-lATE 855 AND All 955
Disconnect fuel pump outlet hose from fuel fil-
TRACTORS
ter. Collect fuel in a graduated container.
NOTE: Perform test with Turn ignition switch to START (cranking) posi-
fuel at room temperature. tion for 30 seconds. DO NOT start engine.
M70682 Record measurement.

TEST SPECIFICATIONS - PRESSURE-

MECHANICAL FUEL PUMP Connect gauge from JDG-356 Fuel Pump
Fuel temperature- Pressure Test Kit to outlet hose.
15-25C (59-7rF) Turn ignition switch to START position for 30
Minimum fuel flow - seconds.
115 ml (4 oz.) for 30 seconds Record pressure reading.
Minimum fuel pressure- OUT OF SPEC:
29 kPa (4.2 psi) Replace mechanical fuel pump.

220-10-5
 Engine System Diagnosis/Bleed Fuel Injection System

., BLEED FUEL Loosen rear bleed screw (A) on fuel filter. Turn key
INJECTION switch to ON position. Fuel transfer pump will run.
SYSTEM Tighten bleed screw (A) when fuel appears WITHOUT
air bubbles. Loosen bleed screw (8). Turn key switch
to ON position. Fuel transfer pump will run. Tighten
bleed screw (8) when fuel appears WITHOUT air bub-
bles.

IMPORTANT: START engine. If engine Crank engine over with

When loosening or runs rough, loosen fuel starter. Tighten fuel line
tightening fuel injection line at No.3 whenfu~appeaffiat
injection lines, DO injection nozzle (A). nozzle WITHOUT air
NOT turn pump Tighten fuel line when bubbles. Repeat proce-
delivery valve fit- fuel appears at nozzle dure for numbers 2 and 1
tings. Turning WITHOUT air bubbles. If injection nozzles if neces-
pump fittings can engine DOES NOT sary. If engine DOES
damage pump START, loosen fuel injec- NOT START, repeat
internally. tion line at No.3 injection bleed procedure.
nozzle (A).

e FUEL
INJECTION
IMPORTANT: Fuel injection pump timing is set at
factory and MUST NOT be changed. If pump has
PUMP TIMING- been serviced or if setting was changed (evi-
655 AND 755/ denced by removed or wrinkled paint) set back to
756 TRACTORS original position.
DO NOT use old shims. Remove sealant from
housing (A). Timing could be affected.
Install one NEW 0.5 mm (0.020 in.) shim (8).
Tighten four nuts to 20 N-m (180 Ib-in.).

e FUEL
INJECTION
Position index timing between 3 & 4. Tighten nuts to
26 N-m (19 Ib-ft.).
PUMP TIMING-
855/856 AND
955 TRACTORS

e TEST COOL-
ING SYSTEM
% Connect D-05104ST Cooling System Pressure
Pump to radiator. Pressurize cooling system to
A CAUTION: DO 117kPa (17 psi). Watch pressure gauge for pres-
NOT remove radia- sure decrease. If pressure decreases, check
tor cap until radiator radiator, radiator hoses, freeze plugs, and con-
hose is cool to the nections for leakage. Repair or replace parts as
touch. necessary.

~ TEST Install radiator cap on D-05104ST Cooling System

RADIATOR CAP Pressure Pump. Use water to wet the radiator cap
seal. Pressurize radiator cap until it OPENS. Watch
pressure gauge for a pressure decrease.
TEST SPECIFICATIONS - RADIATOR CAP
Opening pressure-97-104 kPa
~.~inimum pressure-90 kPa (13 psi)
M43980
After 15 seconds if cap leaks; retighten then test
again. If radiator cap does not meet specifications,
replace cap.

220-10-6
 Engine System Diagnosis/Cylinder Compression Pressure Test

CYCLINDER A CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure can penetrate the skin causing serious
COMPRESSION injury. Relieve pressure before disconnecting fuel injection lines. Tighten all con-
PRESSURE nections before applying pressure. Keep hands and body away from pinholes and
TEST nozzles that eject fluids under high pressure. Use a piece of cardboard or paper to
search for leaks. If any fluid is injected under the skin, it must be surgically removed
within a few hours by a doctor who is familiar with this type of injury or gangrene
may develop.

NOTE: Start and run engine approximately 5 minutes until engine reaches normal
operating temperature.

Remove air cleaner. Remove fuel injection nozzles. (See CTM-3)

Remove heat protectors from injector nozzle ports.
Disconnect fuel shut-off solenoid wiring lead (A).

NOTE: Motorite Compression Tester can be used using

JT01681 Adaptor and JDG472 Adaptor.

Connect JT01682 Pressure Gauge and Hose (B) to fuel nozzle

port using JDG472 Adaptor (C) for 655 and 755/756 Tractors, on
all 855/856 and 955 Tractors use JDG560 Adaptor (C).
IMPORTANT: DO NOT overheat starting motor during test.
Crank engine for a few seconds with starting motor. Record pres-
sure reading for each cylinder.

o TEST SPECIFICATIONS - CYLINDER

COMPRESSION PRESSURE
If pressure reading is
LOW, check piston
Connect fuel shut-of solenoid wiring
lead.
Minimum compression pressure (all)- rings and valves for Install heat protectors and new gaskets.
2308 kPa (335 psi) wear or damage. (See Install fuel injection nozzles.
CTM-3) Check air (See CTM-3)
Maximum compression difference between
cleaner housing, ele-
cylinders-490 kPa (71 psi) Install air cleaner.
ments and hoses for
signs of leakage. Bleed fuel injection system. (See C))

ADJUST SLOW AND FAST IDLE START and warm engine to operating temperature.
Disconnect throttle cable. Use a photo tachometer such as
JT05719 to check engine rpm. Follow manufacturer's instruc-
tions. Read rpm at flywheel. Hold injection pump throttle lever for-
ward (away from flywheel) and read photo tachometer.

ENGINE IDLE If SLOW idle rpm is NOT correct, loosen

SPEED nut (A) and turn screw (B) to adjust
SPECIFICATIONS SLOW idle.
SLOW idle- After adjustment, tighten nut (A).
1450 50 rpm Hold injection pump throttle lever rear-
FAST idle- ward (toward flywheel) and read photo
3425 25 rpm tachometer.

220-10-7
 Engine System Diagnosis/Engine Oil Pressure Test

On 655 and 755/756 On 855/856 and 955 Trac-

Tractors, if FAST idle tors, if FAST idle rpm is
rpm is NOT correct, NOT correct, remove wire
remove wire nut (A). and loosen nut (A). Turn
Loosen nut (8). Turn screw (8) until FAST idle
screw (C) until FAST speed is to specification.
idle speed is to specifi- After adjustment, tighten
cation. After adjust- nut (A).
ment, tighten nut (8).
Install nut (A). If To adjust throttle cable.
engine will NOT meet M44000 GOTOf)
FAST idle specifica-
tion, replace governor
spring. (See CTM-3)

Disconnect wiring lead and remove oil pressure sender (A), for 655
and 755/756 Tractors, or (8) for 855/856 and 955 Tractors.

NOTE: On 755/756 Tractors, the flywheel bolt may have to be

backed out slightly to clear test hose fitting.

A-JT03349 Adaptor Install JT03349 Adaptor

(A) in oil pressure sender
B-JT03017 Hose
port. Connect JT03017
C-JT05577 Gauge Hose (8) and a 0-700 kPa
(0-100 psi) gauge
JT05577 (C).
START and warm engine to
operating temperature.
Move throttle to FAST idle.
Record pressure reading.
TEST SPECIFICATION-
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
365 69 kPa (53 10 psi)

If pressure reading is LOW, check oil pressure If oil pressure regulating valve is not IF PRESSURE DOES NOT
regulating valve for a broken spring or a stuck damaged, add shims to inside of cap. INCREASE: Check for a
or damaged valve. (See CTM-3) Each 1 mm (0.039 in.) of shim thick- worn or damaged oil pump.
ness INCREASES oil pressure approxi- (See CTM-3)
mately 14 kPa (2.0 psi). Install oil pressure sender
and sender wiring lead.

220-10-8
 Engine System Diagnosis/Cooling Fan

COOLING FAN INSTALLATION-955

PROBLEM:

Cooling fan installed backwards and/or is contacting the

crankshaft pulley.

SOLUTION:
1. Fan will have "JT" stamped in black ink on the front
side of the cooling fan. This mark should face the
radiator.
2. Measure from the front of the engine block (next to
the cup plug above the water pump) to the rear edge of
the fan blade. Dimension should be 107mm (4.212 in.),
if not, add a washer (M802003) between the fan and
hub to move the fan forward 2mm.

NOTE: Clearance between the cooling fan and lower

pulley on crankshaft should be 5-6mm (.2 in.).
(measured from one of the three raised nubs on the
pulley)

I
220-10-9
Engine System Diagnosis

220-10-10
 Section 240
Electrical Operation and Tests
Contents
Page Page

Group OS-Electrical System Checkout Fuel Gauge Sender Bench Test ....... 240-10-11
Before You Start ..................... 240-05-1 lighting Circuit No-lights-Work ....... 240-10-12
Instrument Panel Lamps Check ......... 240-05-1 light Switch Test ................... 240-10-12
Coolant Lamp And Neutral Start Check ... 240-05-2 Starter Circuit Test ................. 240-10-12
Fuel Gauge Check ................... 240-05-2 PTa Safety Start Test ............... 240-10-13
lighting Circuit Check ................ 240-05-2 Seat Switch Test. .................. 240-10-13
Starting Circuit Check ................ 240-05-3 Time Delay Control (TDC) Module Delay
PTa Safety Start Check ............... 240-05-3 Function Test .................... 240-10-13
PTa/Seat Switch Check ............... 240-05-3 PTa Magnet Voltage Test ............ 240-10-14
PTa Check ......................... 240-05-3 Time Delay Control (TDC) Module PTa
PTa/Seat Switch Bypass Check ........ 240-05-4 Test ............................ 240-10-14
Time Delay Control (TDC) Module Input
Group 10-Electrical System Diagnosis Voltage Test ..................... 240-10-14
About This Group .................... 240-10-1 PTa Indicator Lamp Test ............ 240-10-15
Before You Start ..................... 240-10-1 PTa Selector Switch Test ............ 240-10-15
Systems Grounds Check .............. 240-10-2 Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Test ........... 240-10-15
Test Battery ........................ 240-10-3 Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Pull-In Test. ..... 240-10-16
Test Battery Voltage .................. 240-10-3 Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Ground Circuit
Charge Battery ...................... 240-10-3 Test ............................ 240-10-16
Increase Charge Rate ................ 240-10-4 Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Hold-In Test ..... 240-10-16
Continue Charging Battery ............. 240-10-4 Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Voltage Test ..... 240-10-16
Battery Load Test. ................... 240-10-5 Adjust Fuel Shutoff Solenoid-
Dash Lamps Test .................... 240-10-5 655 and 755/756 ................. 240-10-17
Oil Pressure Lamp Test ............... 240-10-5 Adjustment Fuel Shutoff Solenoid-
Discharge (Alternator) Lamp Short Circuit 855/856 and 955 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10-17
Test. ............................ 240-10-6 Starter AMP Draw Test .............. 240-10-17
Alternator Ground Test ................ 240-10-6 Starter No Load Test-Running ....... 240-10-18
Alternator Regulated Current Output Starter No Load Test-RPM .......... 240-10-19
Test. ............................ 240-10-6 Starter No Load Test-AMP Draw ..... 240-10-19
35 Amp Alternator Unregulated Current
Output Test ....................... 240-10-7 Group 15-Theory of Operation
40 Amp Alternator Unregulated Current About This Group ................... 240-15-1
Output Test. ...................... 240-10-8 Component Locations ................ 240-15-1
Engine Preheat Circuit Check .......... 240-10-8 PTa Lamp Switch Location ............ 240-15-1
Engine Preheat Lamp Short Circuit Test .. 240-10-8 Transmission Neutral Start Switch
Engine Preheat Controller Test-655 and Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-15-1
755/756 .......................... 240-10-9 Thermo-Start Control Module Location ... 240-15-2
Engine Preheat Controller Test-855/856 Thermo-Start Components Locations. . . . 240-15-2
and 955 .......................... 240-1 0-9 Fuel Transfer Pump Location .......... 240-15-3
Coolant Temperature Lamp Check ...... 240-10-9 Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Location ......... 240-15-3
Coolant Temperature Lamp Short Circuit PTa Selector Switch Location ......... 240-15-4
Test ............................ 240-10-10 PTa Safety Seat Switch Location ....... 240-15-4
Transmission Neutral Start Test. ....... 240-10-10
Fuel Gauge Full Test ................ 240-10-11
Fuel Gauge Empty Test .............. 240-10-11 Continued on next page
Fuel Gauge Sender In-Tank Test ....... 240-10-11

240-1
 Contents

Page

Time Delay Control (TOG) Module

Location ..................... 240-15-4
PTO Magnet Location ............. 240-15-4
Fuel Gauge Sender Location . . . . . . . .. 240-15-5
Oil Pressure Sender Location ........ 240-15-5
Water Temperature Sender Location ... 240-15-5
Warning Light Flasher Element Location. 240-15-6
Electrical Circuit Operation .......... 240-15-7
PTO Electrical Circuit Operation . . . . . .. 240-15-8
Fuel Transfer Pump Operation. . . . . .. 240-15-10
Engine Preheat Circuit Operation . . . .. 240-15-11
Fuel Shutoff Circuit Operation ....... 240-15-12
Starting Circuit Operation .......... 240-15-13
Charging Circuit Operation ......... 240-15-14
Oil Pressure Circuit Operation ....... 240-15-15
Coolant Temperature Circuit Operation. 240-15-16
Fuel Gauge Circuit Operation ....... 240-15-17
Lighting Circuit Operation .......... 240-15-18
655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955
Electrical Schematics ........... 240-15-19

240-2 191091
 Group 05
Electrical System Checkout

BEFORE YOU START

Always begin with this group to identify a failure in This procedure is designed as a quick check of the
the electrical system. The step-by-step procedures in system. While performing the check, concentrate only
this group provide you a quick check of the system. on the check you are performing and disregard
No tools are required to perform these checks. If a signals from unrelated components. If you are
failure is detected, you will be referred to a more unfamiliar with the operation or location of system
detailed check, adjustment, or test. components, refer to Group 15 in this section.

Always start with the first step and follow the

sequence from left to right. Read each step
completely before performing the check.

,1 -19-1

INSTRUMENT
Lock master/park Turn key switch ON.
PANEL LAMPS
brake pedal into PARK
CHECK
position. LOOK: Oil pressure,
battery discharge, and
engine preheat lamp
ON.

M43925 -UN-31 AUG88

NOTE: On 655 and 755/756

tractors preheat lamp will go OFF in
or less. OK: GO TO e
8 seconds or less or may not come On later 855 and all 955, setting is
NOT OK: GO TO . '
ON if engine is hot or ambient 18 cC (64 CF) or less. GROUP 10
temperature is above 4.4 cC (40CF).

On early 855/856, preheat lamp will

only come ON if ambient
temperature is about 4.4 cC (40 cF)
MX,24005HU,2 -19-160CT91

240-05-1 191091
 Electrical System Checkout/Lighting Circuit Check

A CAUTION: Be Turn key switch to OK: GO TO.,

COOLANT LAMP aware that if neutral START.
AND NEUTRAL
start system is LAMP NOT ON: GO
START CHECK
defective, machine LOOK: Coolant TO e, GROUP 10.
will START and move temperature lamp ON,
in either direction. engine MUST NOT ENGINE STARTS: GO
crank. TO e, GROUP 10.
Throttle at SLOW idle,
control pedal in SLOW M43898 -UN-31AUGBB
NOT- Oil pressure
forward_ lamp and preheat lamp
maybe ON.

Turn key switch ON. OK: GO TO.

FUEL GAUGE
CHECK
LOOK: Fuel gauge NOT OK: GO TO . '
MUST move to GROUP 10.
indicate approximate
fuel level in tank.

LISTEN: On tractors
M43926 -UN-31AUGBB
with electric fuel
transfer pumps, you
will here the clicking
sound of the pump.

ADD a KNOWN
amount of fuel to tank
as needed to verify
fuel gauge operation.

MX,24005HU,4 -19160CT91

Turn key switch ON. OK: GO TO.,

LIGHTING
CIRCUIT CHECK
Turn light switch to each position. NOT OK: GO TO . '
GROUP 10.
LOOK: Lights should operate as follows:

A-OFF.
B-Warning lights FLASH.
M43928 -UN-12SEP91
C-Rear work light (if equipped), headlights, and
hoodlights ON.
D-Hoodlights, headlights, and warning lights ON.

NOTE: The tachometer and fuel gauge lamps

are ON when switch is in positions C and D.

MX,24005HU,5 -19-160CT91

240-05-2 191091
 Electrical System Checkout/PTO Check

., STARTING Master/park brake ON . Turn key to START. OK: GO TO e

CIRCUIT CHECK
PTO OFF. LISTEN: Starter MUST NOT OK: GO TO
crank engine. Engine GROUP 10.
MUST START.

-19-160CT91

Turn key switch ON. Briefly turn key switch OK: GO TO

PTO SAFETY to START and release.
START CHECK
Engage PTO lever. NOT OK: GO TO
Open hood. LOOK/LISTEN: PTO GROUP 10.
LOOK: PTO lamp ON. magnet (A) will "click"
Operator ON seat. as it DISENGAGES
A CAUTION: Be from lever (8). PTO
aware that if PTO lamp OFF.
safety circuit is M43929 -UN-31AUG88
defective, machine
will START and PTO
will ENGAGE.

MX,24005HU.7 -19-160CT91

Operator ON seat. Engage PTO lever. OK: GO TO

PTO/SEAT
SWITCH CHECK
Turn key switch to ON LOOK' PTO lamp ON. NOT OK: GO TO
position ONLY. GROUP 10.
Raise OFF seat for
1-2 seconds.

LOOK/LISTEN: PTO
M43927 -UN-31AUG88
magnet will "click" as
it DISENGAGES.

LOOK: PTO lamp OFF.

MX,24005HU,8 -19-160CT91

PTO CHECK
Operator ON seat. Engage PTO lever. OK: GO TO e
Key switch ON. LOOK: Magnet MUST MAGNET NOT
be ENGAGED with ENGAGED: GO TO
PTO selector lever set lever. PTO lamp ON. GROUP 10
at mid or mid/rear
position. INDICATOR LAMP
NOT ON: GO TO
~. GROUP 10.
M43927 -UN-31AUG88 ~X,24005HU,9 -19-160CT91

240-05-3 191091
 Electrical System Checkout/PTO/Seat Switch Bypass Check

CD PTO/SEAT
Move PTO selector
lever (A) to rear PTO.
OK: PROCEDURE
COMPLETE.
SWITCH BYPASS
CHECK
Pull seat switch (8) NOT OK: GO TO
Tilt seat forward. OUT into OVERRIDE e. GROUP 10.
position.
Turn key switch ON.
Engage PTO lever.

LOOK: Lever magnet

MUST ENGAGE. PTO
lamp ON.

Move PTO selector to

mid/rear position.

LOOK/LISTEN: PTO
magnet MUST
DISENGAGE. A loud
M43931 UN31 AUG88
"click" sound as
magnet DISENGAGES.
PTO lamp OFF.

10 19160CT91

240-05-4 191091
 Group 10
Electrical System Diagnosis

ABOUT THIS GROUP

This group contains tests for the major components schematic diagrams to trace current flow to locate
of the different electrical circuits. If a component in a the problem. It is generally best to use a probe
circuit does test OK, you must then understand the tester, test light or volt/ohm meter to trace current
theory of operation for the entire circuit to locate the flow. Start at the component that has the malfunction
problem. You will be referred to Group 15-Theory of and trace the current flow backwards toward the
Operation to explain how individual circuits work. battery. After you have isolated the problem and
Read that information and be sure you understand made the needed repairs, perform the operational
the operation of the circuit. check (Group 05) for that circuit. This will verify that
the problem has been corrected.
Once you understand the circuit operation, use the
individual circuit diagram or the total system

BEFORE YOU START

Always perform the System Checkout in Group 05 additional information, read the Theory of Operation
before making any tests in this group. The in Group 15.
step-by-step procedures in this group provide you
with the detailed diagnostic information you need to Always start with the first step and follow the
isolate a malfunction. Basic diagnostic equipment is sequence from left to right. Read each step
used. It is assumed that you are familiar with the completely before performing the test.
machine and its electrical components. If you need

MX.24010HU.2 -19-160CT91

TEST EQUIPMENT

Where appropriate, use a good flashlight tester, probe

light tester, and/or volt/ohm meter to perform the
diagnostic tests in this group.

MX.HU.24010.2A -19-160CT91

240-10-1 191091
 Electrical System Diagnosis/Test Battery

SYSTEM GROUNDS Verify the system grounds using an appropriate

CHECK tester. Check for good continuity between battery
negative (-) terminal and the following:
Key switch OFF.
Alternator ground terminal (A).
Open hood and
remove engine side Pedestal ground connection (B) at steering
panels. column support.

M42280 UN12SEP91

19160CT91

Battery ground Radiator hose removed

connection (A) at for clarity.
right-side engine
starter-mounting plate. Battery ground wire
(A), ground strap (B)
Frame ground (B) at and wire harness
engine mount and ground (C).
jumper cable mounting
hardware (C).

M42296 -UN-23SEP91 M48506 -UN-11DEC89

OK: TEST BATTERY, GO TO.

NOT OK: CLEAN, TIGHTEN, AND/OR REPLACE

GROUND CONNECTIONS OR WIRES AS
NEEDED BEFORE TESTING BATTERY OR
PERFORMING OTHER DIAGNOSES.

MX,24010HU,4 19-160CT91

240-10-2 191091
 Electrical System Diagnosis/Charge Battery

., TEST BATTERY Check electrolyte level Test the specific ALL CELLS LESS
in each cell of battery. gravity of each cell THAN 1.175: GO TO
If problem is with start-
ing circuit, perform all
If low, add the proper
amount of clean soft
with a hydrometer. e
ALL CELLS MORE
battery tests. If prob- water. Specifications are
THAN 1.225 WITH
lem is with other com- listed at right.
LESS THAN 50
ponents, perform
POINTS VARIATION:
battery tests ONLY if
GOTOG)
starter DOES NOT
crank engine satisfac-
torily. ALL CELLS LESS
THAN 1.225 WITH
LESS THAN 50
POINTS VARIATION:
GO TO Q
VARIATION MORE
THAN 50 POINTS:
REPLACE BATTERY

TEST BATTERY Test battery voltage NOTE: Battery DOES 12.4 VOLTS OR
VOLTAGE with voltmeter or NOT need to be MORE: GO TO G
JT05685 Battery DISCONNECTED from
Tester. tractor. LESS THAN 12.4
VOLTS: GO TO f)

CHARGE Connect charger to

BATTERY battery and charge at a
SLOW rate.

The maximum charg-

ing time at BOOST set-
ting is 10 minutes.
Allow an additional 5
minutes for each 10 F
below 70 F.

M49598

IF BATTERY DID NOT NEED

WATER AT STEP e
AND IS
ACCEPTING 10-AMP CHARGE:
GOTOG

IF BATTERY REQUIRED WATER

AT STEP eOR IF ALL CELLS
WERE BELOW 1.175 BUT
BATTERY IS ACCEPTING A
10-AMP CHARGE:
GO TO G)

IF BATTERY DOES NOT ACCEPT

A 1O-AMP CHARGE AFTER 10
MINUTES AT BOOST SETTING:
REPLACE BATTERY.

240-10-3
 Electrical System Diagnosis/Battery Load Test

G) INCREASE
Set charger at 15-25 IMPORTANT: Check specific gravity IF VARIATION
CHARGE RATE amps. Decrease charge rate after 30 minutes (60 BETWEEN CELLS IS
if battery gases or minutes for MORE THAN 50
bubbles excessively maintenance free POINTS: REPLACE
or becomes too batteries). BATTERY.
warm to hold.
IF VARIATION
BETWEEN CELLS IS
LESS THAN 50
POINTS: GO TO

19160CT91

CONTINUE
Continue charging IF BATTERY WAS IF BATTERY WAS
CHARGING
battery until specific DISCHARGED AT A DISCHARGED AT A
BATTERY
gravity is 1.230-1 .265 SLOW RATE (OR FAST
points. DISCHARGE RATE IS RATE-CHARGE
IMPORTANT: UNKNOWN)-CHARGE BATTERY AT 20-25
Decrease charge rate BATTERY AT 10-15 AMPS. BATTERY MAY
if battery gases or AMPS FOR 6-12 REQUIRE 2-4
bubbles too much or HOURS HOURS CHARGING
if battery gets too (MAINTENANCE FREE TIME (MAINTENANCE
warm to hold. BATTERIES MAY FREE BATTERIES
REQUIRE 12-24 MAY NEED 4-8
HOURS) THEN: GO HOURS) THEN: GO
TOO TOO

MX,24010HU.10 19160CT91

240-10-4 191091
 Electrical System Diagnosis/Oil Pressure Lamp Test

o BATTERY LOAD
TEST
Connect JT05685
Tester to battery.
OK: GO TOO

NOT OK: REPLACE

Follow instructions on
BATTERY
back of meter for
testing battery.

M36665

o DASH LAMP
TEST
If any lamp DOES NOT
operate properly,
OIL PRESSURE LAMP TEST: GO TO.

BATTERY DISCHARGE LAMP TEST: GO TO e

go to the appropriate
test as listed at right. (ALTERNATOR WARNING LAMP TEST)

If a good battery will not ALTERNATOR GROUND TEST: GO TO CD

hold charge (current draw
on battery when key is ENGINE PREHEAT LAMP TEST: GO TO 0
in "OFF" position). See
alternator ground test. COOLANT TEMPERATURE LAMP TEST: GO
TOG

PTO LAMP TEST: G

OIL PRESSURE Turn key switch ON. Disconnect wire (A) LAMP ON: REPLACE
LAMP TEST from oil pressure OIL PRESSURE
switch and ground it to SENSOR.
engine block.
LAMP NOT ON:
LOOK: Lamp should CHECK BULB, THEN
beaN. REFER TO CIRCUIT
M43948 DIAGRAM IN GROUP
15 TO DIAGNOSE
MALFUNCTION IN
THE LAMP CIRCUIT.

240-10-5
 Electrical System Diagnosis/Alternator Regulated Current Output Test

BATTERY Key switch OFF. Unplug connector (A) CONTINUITY:

DISCHARGE from back of alternator. BROWN WIRE FROM
(ALTERNATOR) Remove indicator ALTERNATOR TO
LAMP SHORT lamp socket from dash Check for continuity BULB SOCKET IS
CIRCUIT TEST panel. between brown wire SHORTED TO
and ground. GROUND.
Check 1O-amp fuse. Remove bulb.
Visually check that NO CONTINUITY: GO
bulb is good. TOO

ALTERNATOR Key switch OFF. OUTPUT NEAR ZERO:

GROUND TEST ALTERNATOR DIODES ARE DEFECTIVE
Install ammeter inserts ALLOWING CURRENT TO PASS TO GROUND.
with positive battery REMOVE AND REPAIR ALTERNATOR AS
cable. NEEDED. SEE COMPONENT TECHNICAL
MANUAL CTM3 (10AUG93) ON DIODE REPAIR.
Remove red B+ lead
(A) on rear of alterna- NOTE: There is normally a vety small current
tor. drain through alternator.

OUTPUT WELL ABOVE ZERO:

THERE IS ANOTHER CURRENT DRAW.
CONTINUE DIAGNOSTICS. GO TO e, 0,
OR OTHER APPLICABLE TESTS FOR CUR-
RENT DRAW.

o ALTERNATOR
REGULATED CUR-
RENT OUTPUT
Remove left engine
side panel.
Connect JT05712 Cur-
rent Gun (A) over red
wire on back of alterna-
TEST Turn lights on for a few tor. Always check volt-
minutes to discharge age at regulator (DC or
battery. AC).

Be sure selector switch

on current gun is set
for DC current.

M43950

240-10-6
 Electrical System Diagnosis/35 Amp Alternator Unregulated Current Output Test

Turn load knob (A) AMP OUTPUT DOES

fully counterclockwise, NOT DECREASE,
then connect JT05685 BATTERY VOLTAGE
Battery Tester to GOES ABOVE 15:
battery. (Conventional Replace Regulator.
voltmeter can also be
used). AMP OUTPUT IS
HIGH BUT BATTERY
START engine and run
VOLTAGE DOES NOT
at FULL throttle.
INCREASE: Test Bat-
tery (Beginning Of This
Amp output (read on
Group) And Verify
current gun) should
Ground Connections.
start out high until
battery voltage comes
AMP OUTPUT IS LOW
up to 13.8-14.7.
BUT BATTERY VOLT-
After battery voltage
AGE EVENTUALLY
comes up, amp output
INCREASES OR AMP
should start to
OUTPUT IS BELOW
M43951
decrease.
BATTERY VOLTAGE:
GOTOQ) ORe

e ALTERNATOR
UNREGULATED
START engine and
run at FULL throttle.
OUTPUT 35 AMPS
OR MORE:
CURRENT OUT- Alternator is ok, mal-
PUTTEST-35 Use a screwdriver to function is in charging
AMP ground regulator (A) to system wiring. Refer
Connect JT05712 alternator frame (B). to the charging
Current Gun as system circuit diagram
Insert screwdriver in Group 15 to diag-
instructed in step 4.
blade through cooling nose malfunction.
Be sure selector switch fins on back side of
on current gun is set alternator. Touch OUTPUT LESS THAN
for DC current. blade tip to base of 35 AMPS:
regulator and to alter- Check each stator lead
nator frame. for continuity to
ground. (See CTM3)
Read output on If yes, look for pinched
ammeter. wire at engine shroud-
ing. Stator leads
IMPORTANT: Com- should not have conti-
plete this test IN nuity to ground. Verify
M36661 LESS THAN 10 SEC- ground connections at
ONDS or battery battery, harness, and
WILL BE DAMAGED. regulator. Check wir-
ing between battery
and regulator to insure
battery voltage at (red)
B+ connection.
See Note.
NOTE: If AC voltage is tested; a grounded (shorted) stator can still
show good AC volts if tested directly at wires coming from IMPORTANT: No volt-
under flywheel. This problem does not show up until the age at B+ (voltage
shorted stator is connected to the regulator. If AC voltage is sensing) terminal at
checked at the regulator after the wires are connected, regulator will nor-
voltage will show low or zero. Repair or replace stator. mally result in an
overchargel battery
failure situation.

240-10-7
 Electrical System Diagnosis/35 Amp Alternator Unregulated Current Output Test

~ ALTERNATOR START engine and OUTPUT 40 AMPS

~ UNREGULATED run at FULL throttle. OR MORE:
CURRENT OUT- Alternator is ok, mal-
PUT TEST- Insert a Phillips screw- function is in charging
40 AMP driver through small system wiring. Refer
round hole (A) to to the charging
Connect JT05712
ground terminal "F" system circuit diagram
Current Gun as
screw to rear cover. in Group 15 to diag-
instructed in step 4.
nose malfunction.
Read output on
Be sure selector switch
ammeter. OUTPUT LESS THAN
on current gun is set
for DC current. 40 AMPS:
IMPORTANT: Com- Check each stator lead
plete this test IN for continuity to
LESS THAN 10 SEC- ground. (See CTM3)
ONDS or battery If yes, look for pinched
WILL BE DAMAGED. wire at engine shroud-
ing. Stator leads
M48576 should not have conti-
NOTE: If AC voltage is tested; a grounded (shorted) stator can still nuity to ground. Verify
show good AC volts if tested directly at wires coming from ground connections at
under flywheel. This problem does not show up until the battery, harness, and
shorted stator is connected to the regulator. If AC voltage regulator. Check wir-
is checked at the regulator after the wires are connected, ing between battery
voltage will show low or zero. No voltage at B+ (voltage and regulator to insure
sensing) terminal at regulator will normally result in an battery voltage at B+
overcharge/ battery failure situation. Repair or replace connection. See Note.
stator.
.. ENGINE Remove preheat LAMP ON: GO TO
W PREHEAT CIRCUIT
CHECK
controller (A) from ~ OR G
socket.
LAMP NOT ON: Con-
Check 1O-amp fuse Turn key switch ON. trol module probably
and bulb before con- ok. Malfunction is in
tinuing diagnosis. Connect jumper wire lamp circuit. See the-
from gray lead terminal ory information on
(B) to ground. engine preheat circuit
(GROUP 15) for diag-
LOOK: Lamp ON. nosis.

_ ENGINE Remove preheat CONTINUITY: GRAY

~ PREHEAT LAMP controller (A) from WIRE TO
SHORT CIRCUIT socket. CONTROLLER IS
CHECK SHORTED, REPAIR
Remove bulb socket OR REPLACE.
from dash and remove
bUlb. NO CONTINUITY:
INSTALL BULB AND
Check for continuity SOCKET, THEN ... GO
between terminal with
gray lead (B) and
TO e OR G
ground.

240-10-8
 Electrical System Diagnosis/Coolant Temperature Lamp Check

A ENGINE PRE- Place test light on glow Dash lamp will be ON OK: PREHEAT CON-
~ HEAT CONTROL- plug terminal (A). for 9 seconds or less, TROLLER IS OK.
LER TEST-655 test light ON for 30 CHECK GLOW
AND 7551756 Turn key switch ON. seconds or less. PLUGS.
Open hood. LOOK: Dash lamp ON, Note: Hotter engine
NOT OK: CHECK
test light ON. temperatures will
Use flashlight tester. FUSIBLE LINK
reduce times that
M43954
FROM STARTER TO
lamps are ON.
MODULE SOCKET
(RED WIRE).
REPLACE CONTROL
MODULE AS
NEEDED.

ENGINE PREHEAT NOTE: On 855/856, IF temperature is not below 4.4 C (40 F), module
CONTROLLER TEST-855/856 module only operates can be removed from tractor and placed in refrig-
AND 955 when temperature is erator or freezer.
below 4.4 0 C (40 0 F) on
Open hood. early models, and 18 0 Install module on tractor and perform tests quickly
C (64 0 F) on later 855 before module warms up.
Use flashlight tester.
models.

Place test light on air OK: PREHEAT CONTROLLER IS OK. CHECK

heater terminal (A). AIR HEATER.

Turn key switch ON. NOT OK: CHECK FUSIBLE LINK FROM
STARTER TO MODULE SOCKET (RED WIRE).
LOOK: Dash lamp ON REPLACE CONTROL MODULE AS NEEDED.
for 15 seconds, test light
ON for 45 seconds.

COOLANT Turn key switch ON. Disconnect wire from LAMP ON: TEST
TEMPERATURE temperature sensor (A) SENSOR AND
LAMP CHECK and ground it. REPLACE AS
NEEDED.
If lamp stays ON CD LOOK: Lamp ON.
all times, GO TO LAMP NOT ON:
CHECK BULB AND
M43956
10 AMP FUSE. THEN
REFER TO CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM IN
SECTION 15 TO
DIAGNOSE COOL-
ANT TEMPERATURE
CIRCUIT.

240-10-9
 Electrical System Diagnosis/Fuel Gauge Full Test

Key switch OFF. Remove bulb socket CONTINUITY:

COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
from dash and remove ORANGE/WHITE
LAMP SHORT
Disconnect wire from bulb. WIRE FROM SOCKET
CIRCUIT TEST
coolant temperature TO SENSOR IS
sensor. Check for continuity SHORTED TO
between terminal with GROUND. REPAIR OR
orange/white wire (A) REPLACE.
and ground.
M36636 -UN-08SEP88
NO CONTINUITY:
TEST SENSOR AND
REPLACE AS
NEEDED.

-19160CT91

TRANSMISSION
The transmission Remove operator platform sheet metal (A) and
NEUTRAL START
neutral start switch is seat platform sheet metal (B).
TEST
NON-ADJUSTABLE. If
machine started with
control pedal
depressed, use the
following procedure to
replace switch:

MX,24010HU,25 19160CT91

Disconnect Remove bolt (A) and REPEAT STEP" IN

transmission control remove swashplate GROUP 05.
rod (A) from with neutral start
transmission. switch.

NOTE: Access control Remove neutral start

rod from right side switch from swashplate
frame under fender. and install new switch.
M43959 -UN-31AUG88 M43960 -UN-31AUG88 MX,24010HU,26 19160CT91

240-10-10 191091
 Electrical System Diagnosis/Fuel Gauge Sender Bench Test

., FUEL GAUGE Remove front grille Disconnect black/white GAUGE READS FULL:
FULL TEST
screen. wire (A) from sender. CONNECT WIRE,
THEN ... GO TOe
Turn key switch ON. LOOK: Fuel gauge
MUST read FULL. GAUGE DOES NOT
READ FULL: CHECK
VOLTAGE AT
YELLOW LEAD ON
M43961 UN31 AUG88
GAUGE AND
GROUND (BLACK) ON
GAUGE. REPLACE AS
NEEDED.

19160CT91

FUEL GAUGE
Turn key switch ON. Use a jumper wire to short across the two
EMPTY TEST terminals (A) on sender.

LOOK Fuel gauge MUST read EMPTY.

GAUGE READS EMPTY: GO TO.

GAUGE DOES NOT READ EMPTY: VERIFY

M43962 UN31AUG88
GROUND (BLACK WIRE). REPLACE GAUGE AS
NEEDED.

MX,24010HU,28 19160CT91

~ FUEL GAUGE
Key switch OFF. Measure resistance
across terminals on
RESISTANCE
APPROXIMATELY
SENDER INTANK
TEST
Disconnect both wires sender (A). 2192 OHMS: SENDER
from fuel gauge OK.
sender. Resistance reading will
depend on fuel level in RESISTANCE ABOVE
tank. OR BELOW 2-192
OHMS: GO TO.
M43962 UN31 AUG88 MX,24010HU,29 19160CT91

Remove sender from Place ohmmeter RESISTANCE SPEC IN SPEC: SENDER

~ FUEL GAUGE
SENDER BENCH
fuel tank. across terminals of OK.
TEST
sender. EMPTY-O-6 OHMS
OUT OF SPEC:
Move float arm to FULL-178-192 REPLACE SENDER.
empty position, then OHMS
full position.

MX,24010HU,30 19160CT91

240-10-11 191091
 Electrical System Diagnosis/PTO Safety Start Test

.. LIGHTING Key switch ON. Check for voltage at VOLTAGE: VERIFY

U CIRCUIT terminal with yellow/ THAT THERE IS
NO-LiGHTS-WORK red wire (A) of light VOLTAGE AT "BAT'
TEST switch connector. TERMINAL (WHITE/
BLACK WIRE) ON
If warning lamps DO
KEY SWITCH, THEN
NOT flash properly,
... GOTOe
replace flasher unit.
NO VOLTAGE:
REFER TO CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM IN GROUP
15.

e LIGHT SWITCH
TEST
Key switch OFF. Verify continuity of
switch in each position:
OK: LIGHT SWITCH
OK. REFER TO CIR-
CUIT DIAGRAM IN
(A) OFF-NONE GROUP 15.
(B) WARN-BAT + WA
(C) WORK-BAT + NOT OK: REPLACE
HU + FL LIGHT SWITCH,
(D) RUN-BAT + HU + THEN REPEAT., ,
M43928 WA GROUP 05.

G) STARTER If starter cranks engine A Caution: Be

CIRCUIT TEST but engine DOES NOT aware that engine
START: GO TO ~ could START and
run during this test.
If starter does not crank
or cranks engine Engage and LOCK
SLOWLY or master/park brake.
ERRATICALLY:
GO TO CD Throttle at SLOW idle.

Disconnect purple wire STARTER RUNS: MALFUNCTION IS IN

(A) from starter solenoid. STARTING CIRCUIT (PURPLE WIRES). REFER
TO CIRCUIT DIAGRAM GROUP 15 FOR DIAG-
Connect jumper wire to NOSIS.
terminal. Jump across
to large starter terminal STARTER DOES NOT RUN: REPAIR STARTER
(B). AS INSTRUCTED IN CTM-3.
M43964

240-10-12
 Electrical System DiagnosislTime Delay Control (TDC) Module Delay Function Test

CD PTO SAFETY
START TEST
Turn key switch ON. Put test light on left OK: KEY SWITCH OK.
side terminal of fuse REFER TO PTO CIR-
Remove PTO 10-amp holder (A). CUlT DIAGRAM IN
NOTE: PTa safety fuse (second from top) GROUP 15.
circuit is controlled by from fuse block. Briefly turn key to
the key switch. This START. Test light NOT OK: TEST KEY
test checks the should go OFF with SWITCH CONTINU-
function of the key key in START position. ITY USING INFORMA-
switch. TION ON FOLDOUT
M43965
WIRING DIAGRAM IN
Master/park brake GROUP 15.
locked in PARK
position.

Use flaShlight tester.

Tilt seat forward. Check continuity SEAT SWITCH OK:

SEAT SWITCH
TEST
Key switch OFF.
across terminals of
connector (A).
CONNECT SEAT
SWITCH, GO TO
e

Separate 3-pin OFF SEAT-NO CON- NOT OK: REPLACE

connector for seat TINUITY. SEAT SWITCH THEN,
switch. REPEAT 0 GROUP
SWITCH 05.
M43966
DEPRESSED-CON-
TINUITY BETWEEN
PINKIWHITE AND
YELLOW WIRES.

SWITCH PULLED UP
(OVERRIDE)-CON-
TINUITY BETWEEN
BLUE AND YELLOW
WIRES.

e TIMEDELAY
CONTROL (TDC)
Verify good ground at GOOD GROUND:
black wire at PTO REPLACE TDC
MODULE DELAY switch connector (B), MODULE, THEN ...
FUNCTION TEST this is done because of GO TO ,GROUP
inaccessibility of TDC 05.
IMPORTANT: Be sure
4-pin connector (A).
to perform Step 12 POOR GROUND:
before this test. CLEAN CONNEC-
TIONS AS NEEDED,
Turn key switch ON.
THEN ... GO TO. '
GROUP 05.

240-10-13
 Electrical System Diagnosis/PTO Indicator Lamp Test

~ PTOMAGNET Key switch ON. Check for voltage at VOLTAGE: REPLACE

W VOLTAGE TEST blue wires on PTO MAGNET.
Operator ON seat. lever magnet
connector (A). NO VOLTAGE: GO TO
Use flashlight tester.
Replace striker plate if
em
smaller than 1.5 inch
M43968
(38 mm) in diameter.

e TIMEDELAY
CONTROL (TOC)
Check for voltage at
blue wires on PTO
VOLTAGE: WIRES TO
MAGNET BROKEN
MODULE PTO connector (B), this is OR CONNECTOR
TEST
done because of NOT TIGHT.
inaccessibility of TDC REPAIR OR
Key switch ON.
4-pin connector (A). REPLACE.
Operator ON seat.
NO VOLTAGE: GO TO
Use flashlight tester. em

G1) TDC INPUT Raise seat and remove Check for voltage at NO VOLTAGE:
VOLTAGE TEST seat switch from its yellow wire (C) and PROBLEM IN
bracket. pink/white wire (D) of ACCESSORY
Tape seat switch seat switch, this is WIRING (YELLOW
plunger CLOSED (B). done because of WIRE) REFER TO
inaccessibility of TDC GROUP 15.
Turn key switch to ON 4-pin connector (A).
position ONLY. VOLTAGE: VERIFY
GROUND AT BLACK
Use flashlight tester. WIRESONTDC
CONNECTOR, THEN
REPLACE TDC
MODULE AS
NEEDED.

M43967

240-10-14
 Electrical System Diagnosis/Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Pull-in Test

PTO INDICATOR Key switch ON, engine Check for voltage at VOLTAGE BOTH
LAMP TEST OFF. terminals on indicator TERMINALS:
lamp switch (A). PROBLEM IS IN
Operator ON seat. BLACK GROUND
If voltage at only one WIRE FROM SWITCH.
PTO lever ENGAGED. terminal. replace
switch. NO VOLTAGE:
NOTE: If PTO dash PROBLEM IS IN
indicator lamp is not M43981 YELLOW WIRE FROM
on, check bulb and FUSE TO BULB OR IN
fuse first, then BLUE WIRE FROM
proceed with BULB TO SWITCH.
diagnosis.

Use flashlight tester.

CD PTO SELECTOR
SWITCH TEST
Key switch ON. Check for voltage at VOLTAGE BOTH
terminals on PTO TERMINALS:
Seat switch in override selector switch (A). PROBLEM IN WIRING
Test seat switch (Step (up) position. BETWEEN SWITCH
12) before performing If voltage at only one AND CLUTCH. SEE
this test. Use flashlight tester. terminal, REPLACE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM,
SWITCH. GROUP 15.
M43981
NO VOLTAGE:
PROBLEM IN
ACCESSORY CIR-
CUIT (YELLOW
WIRES). REFER TO
PTO CIRCUIT DIA-
GRAM, (GROUP 15).

CD FUEL SHUTOFF Open hood, remove Briefly turn key switch SOLENOID MOVES:
SOLENOID TEST right side panel. to start. GOTO~

Lock master/park LOOK: Solenoid SOLENOID DOES

brake in PARK plunger (A) MUST NOT MOVE: GO TO
position. move in. em
M43969

240-10-15
 Electrical System Diagnosis/fuel Shutoff Solenoid Voltage

e FUEL SHUTOFF
SOLENOID
Disconnect white
solenoid wire (A) from
Connect jumber wire to
battery positive
PULL-IN TEST back side of starter. terminal.

Key switch OFF.

Important: Do not
Note: Pull -in circuit jump wire more than
activated by starter. 1 second or solenoid
Solenoid pulls in when may be damaged.
starter runs.
Briefly JUMP to
"white" solenoid wire.

LOOK: Solenoid MUST

PULL-IN.

SOLENOID PULLS-IN: DISASSEMBLE

STARTER (CTM-3) AND CHECK
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS.

em
SOLENOID DOES NOT PULL-IN: (verify linkage
moves freely by hand) GO TO

~ FUEL SHUTOFF Key switch OFF. Separate connector (A) GOOD GROUND:
~SOLENOID at solenoid. Voltage must be 12
GROUND CIRCUIT volts DC.
TEST
Check for good continu- REPLACE SOLENOID.
ity between harness
side of connector and POOR/NO GROUND:
ground at battery nega- CLEAN AND
M43971 tive post. TIGHTEN SYSTEM
GROUNDS (BEGIN-
NING OFTHIS
GROUP). REPEAT
TEST.

em FUEL SHUTOFF
SOLENOID
Turn key switch ON. Push solenoid plunger
(A) FULLY IN.
SOLENOID STAYS IN:
GOTO.
HOLD-IN TEST
LOOK: Solenoid MUST SOLENOID DOES
stay IN. NOT STAY IN: Discon-
nect linkage and
repeat.
GO TOCf:)

~ FUEL SHUTOFF Key switch ON. Check for voltage at yel- VOLTAGE: VERIFY
SOLENOID low wire on solenoid GROUND (STEP 16B),
VOLTAGE TEST Use flashlight tester. connector (A). REPLACE SOLENOID
Minimum voltage is 9 AS NEEDED.
volts D.C.
NO VOLTAGE:
REFER TO CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM IN GROUP
M43971
15.

240-10-16
 Electrical System Diagnosis/Starter AMP Draw Test

Push fuel shutoff arm AFTER ADJUSTMENT:

ADJUST FUEL
SHUTOFF (A) toward solenoid GO TO e,
GROUP
SOLENOID-655 until it STOPS. 05.
AND 755/756
Turn adjustable link (B) IF ENGINE STILL
Disconnect fuel shutoff until it ALIGNS with DOES NOT START,
lever from solenoid lever hole. TEST FUEL PUMP AS
plunger. INSTRUCTED IN
M43972 UN31AUG88
Turn link OUT two SECTION 220.
Turn key switch ON, additional turns and
push solenoid plunger assemble.
FULLY IN.

Disconnect fuel shutoff Push fuel shutoff arm

ADJUST FUEL SHUTOFF
SOLENOID-855/856 AND 955 lever from solenoid (A) toward solenoid
plunger. until it STOPS.

Turn key switch ON, Turn adjustable link (B)

push solenoid plunger until it ALIGNS with
FULLY IN. lever hole.

M43989 -UN-07SEP88
Turn link OUT two
additional turns and
assemble.

AFTER ADJUSTMENT:
GO TO e,
GROUP
05.

IF ENGINE STILL
DOES NOT START,
TEST FUEL PUMP AS
INSTRUCTED IN
SECTION 220.
MX.24010HU,48 -19-160CT91

Before performing Remove right side Separate connector (A)

STARTER AMP starter draw test, test panel. from fuel shutoff
DRAW TEST
battery as instructed in solenoid so ENGINE
the beginning of this WILL NOT START
group. during test.

M43971 -UN-31AUG88 MX.24010HU,49 -19-160CT91

240-10-17 191091
 Electrical System Diagnosis/Starter No Load Test-RPM

NOTE: Battery location varies, some tractors 230 AMPS OR LESS

have the battery located behind the front grille. BUT RPM IS LOW: GO
TO.
IMPORTANT: Before making any test
connections, turn load knob (A) on meter 230 AMPS OR LESS
counterclockwise FULLY. AT 300 RPM:
STARTER OK.
Connect JT05685 Battery Tester to tractor
battery: Red lead to positive (+) terminal, black MORE THAN 230
lead to negative (-) terminal. AMPS: GOTO.

Check engine rpm while CRANKING. Use

JT028201 or JT01638 Photo Tachometer.

Adjust load knob clockwis~ until battery voltage

reads the same as when cranking.

Again, crank engine with starter. Meter should

read 230 amps or less.

M43951 -UN-31 AUG88 Turn load knob counterclockwise FULLY.

STARTER NO Mount starter in a vise. SOLENOID "CLICKS"

LOAD OR CHATTERS,
TEST-RUNNING Use jumper cables to MOTOR DOES NOT
connect starter to RUN: REPLACE
Disconnect battery tractor battery or one SOLENOID.
ground cable. of similar capacity.
PINION GEAR
Remove starter to Connect positive clamp ENGAGED BUT
bench. to starter common MOTOR DOES NOT
terminal (A). Connect RUN: REPAIR OR
negative clamp to REPLACE STARTER
starter body (B). MOTOR. (SEE
SECTION 40.)
Connect a jumper wire
to starter terminal (C). STARTER ENGAGES
Jump wire to positive AND RUNS: GO TO
cable clamp as shown.

Starter MUST engage

and run.
M36656 -UN-29AUG88 MX,24010HU,51 -19-160CT91

240-10-18 191091
 Electrical System Diagnosis/Starter No Load Test-AMP Draw

STARTER NO Mount starter in a vise RPM ABOUT 3000:

LOAD
and connect to a GOTOe
TEST-RPM battery as instructed in
Step 17A. RPM BELOW 3000:
BE SURE BATTERY IS
With starter RUNNING, OF PROPER SIZE
check no load rpm AND IS FULLY
with D-05011 ST CHARGED. REPEAT
Tachometer (A) or TEST AS NEEDED
JT028201 or JT01638 WITH FULLY
Photo Tachometer. CHARGED BATTERY.
Follow manufacturer IF BATTERY IS OK,
instructions with REPAIR OR REPLACE
tachometer. STARTER (SEE
CTM-3).
No load rpm SHOULD
BE about 3000 .

STARTER NO
Mount starter in a vise AMPERAGE 90 OR
LOAD
and connect to a LESS: STARTER OK.
TEST-AMP battery as instructed in MALFUNCTION IS IN
DRAW
Step 17A. WIRING ON
TRACTOR
With starter RUNNING, CONNECTIONS AND
check amperage with GROUNDS.
JT05712 Current Gun
(A). AMPERAGE MORE
THAN 90: REPAIR OR
Starter SHOULD draw REPLACE STARTER.
90 amps or less at (SEE CTM-3).
3000 rpm.

M36658 -UN-29AUG88
MX,24010HU,53 -19-160CT91

240-10-19 191091
Electrical System Diagnosis/Starter No Load Test-AMP Draw

240-10-20 191091
 Group 15
Theory of Operation
ABOUT THIS GROUP
This Group contains information on the location of
electrical components along with information on how to
access them. Also in this Group is theory of operation.
The theory is limited to a description of each circuit and
an explanation of how the circuit functions. At the end of
this Group you will find the different electrical schematic
diagrams that will aid you in your service and diagnosis
of the electrical system.

COMPONENT LOCATIONS
The information that follows will help you locate and
access many of the electrical components. Obvious
components such as the starter, alternator, key switch,
etc. will not be shown. See CTM-3 (10Aug 93 or later)
for more specific information on removal and installation
of electrical components.

PTO LAMP SWITCH

The PTO lamp switch (A) is located on the rear of the
transaxle (left side).

TRANSMISSION NEUTRAL START SWITCH

The transmission neutral start switch (A) is attached to
the inside of the swash plate bracket located on the right
side of the hydrostatic transmission.

It aligns with the cam roller of the neutral return bracket.

M47001

240-15-1
 Theory of Operation/Thermo-Start Components Locations

THERMO-START CONTROL MODULE

The thermo-start control module (A) is located on the

upper right side of the engine firewall.

Open hood to access it.

THERMO-START COMPONENTS

GLOW PLUGS (655 AND 755/756 MODELS ONLY): The

glow plugs (A) are located on the top of the engine
cylinder head, between the fuel injectors and the rocker
arms cover.

AIR HEATER (855/856 AND 955 MODELS ONLY): The

air heater element (8) is located in-line between the
engine air cleaner and the intake manifold.

Open hood and remove air cleaner canister and hose to

access either of them.

MX.24015HU.6 -19-160CT91

240-15-2 191091
 Theory of Operation/Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Location

FUEL TRANSFER PUMP

The fuel transfer pump (A) is located on the right side of

the engine on all 655, 755/756, and 856 tractors. Only
early 855 tractors had the electric fuel transfer pump.
Late 855 and all 955 tractors use a mechanical fuel
transfer pump that is driven off one of the lobes of the
fuel injection pump cam shaft.

Open hood and remove right side engine panel to

access.

FUEL SHUTOFF SOLENOID

The fuel shutoff solenoid (A) (655 and 755/756 models)

is located on the right, front side of the engine.

The fuel shutoff solenoid (8) (855/856 and 955 models)

is located on the right, rear side of the engine, behind
the fuel filter.

Open hood and remove right side engine panel to

access it.

MX,24015HU,8 -19-160CT91

240-15-3 191091
 Theory of Operation/PTO Magnet Location

PTO SELECTOR SWITCH

The PTO selector switch (A) is located on the left side

of the transaxle, above the final drive axle housing.

NOTE: Various components removed for clarity only.

PTO SAFETY SEAT SWITCH

The PTO safety seat switch (A) is located under the

tractor seat on the slide suspension.

MX,24015HU,10 19160CT91

TIME DELAY CONTROL (TDC) MODULE

The time delay module (A) is located in the pedestal

compartment under the key switch.

Open hood and remove left side pedestal panel to

access it.

PTO MAGNET

The PTO magnet (A) is located inside the pedestal

compartment above the key switch.

MX,24015HU,12 -19-160CT91

240-15-4 191091
 Theory of Operation/Water Temperature Sender Location

FUEL GAUGE SENDER

The fuel gauge sending unit (A) is mounted on the top

right side of the fuel tank located at the front of 655,
755/756, 856, and early 855 tractors.

On late 855 and all 955 tractors, the fuel gauge sending
unit (A) is located on the top left side of the fuel tank
under the hood, inside the pedestal compartment.

Raise hood to gain access to both.

OIL PRESSURE SENDER

The oil pressure sender switch (A) is located on the right

side of the engine, just to the rear of the oil filter.

Open hood and remove right side engine panel to

access it.

MX,24015HU,14 -19-160CT91

WATER TEMPERATURE SENDER

The water temperature sender switch (A) is located in

the thermostat housing under the top radiator hose, near
the alternator.

Open hood and remove left side engine panel to access

it.

MX,24015HU,15 -19-160CT91

240-15-5 191091
 Theory of Operation/Warning Light Flasher Element Location

WARNING LIGHT FLASHER ELEMENT

The warning light flasher element (A) is located under

the dash panel, near the warning light switch.

Open hood to access it.

240-15-6 191091
 Theory of Operation/Electrical Circuit Operation

ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT OPERATION

The next several pages contain the various electrical The following electrical circuits are covered:
circuits and their theory of operation. There have
been several changes to the electrical harnesses PTO Circuit Operation
over the years and these circuit theories are generic Fuel Transfer Pump Circuit Operation
in nature. Therefore, you will be able to better Engine Preheat Circuit Operation
understand each circuit if you reference the Fuel Shutoff Circuit Operation
appropriate electrical schematic for the tractor you Starting Circuit Operation
are servicing at the same time. Charging Circuit Operation
Oil Pressure Circuit Operation
Coolant Temperature Circuit Operation
Fuel Gauge Circuit Operation
Lighting Circuit Operation

240-15-7 191091
 Theory of Operation/PTO Electrical Circuit Operation

PTO CIRCUIT OPERATION

-.

A-Battery O-Key Switch G-Indicator Lamp J-PTO Selector Switch

B-Starter E-Fuse H-PTO Lamp Switch K-PTO Magnet
C-Fusible Link F-Fuse I-Seat Switch L-TOe Module

The PTO circuits supply current to the PTO magnet, The energized time delay element closes a transistor
safety interlocks, and dash indicator lights. (L-5), completing the relay coil path to ground (L-4).

Battery current (A) flows to the starter (B) common The energized relay coil (L-6) pulles the contact
terminal, through the protective 16-gauge fusible link points closed, allowing current to flow from terminal
(C) to the key switch (D) "BAT" terminal. (L-2) to (L-1) and to the PTO magnet (K).

When the key switch is in the ON position, current The energized PTO magnet (K) magnetically "locks"
flows through the "ACC" terminal through the 1O-amp onto the PTO dash lever locking plate inside the
fuse (E) to the seat switch (I). Current also flows at dash compartment. When the PTO dash lever is
the same time through the "IGN" terminal through manually moved forward into the engaged position,
the 1O-amp fuse (F) to the PTO dash lamp (G) and the linkage forces the PTO valve spool rearward to
PTO lamp switch (H). engage the PTO clutch and release the PTO brake.
This rearward spool movement also pushes against
PTO SELECTOR IN MID, MID/REAR, OR REAR the PTO lamp switch (H), causing it to close. Current
POSITION-OPERATOR ON SEAT now flows through the closed PTO lamp switch to
ground, which lights up the dash indicator lamp (G).
NOTE: In this story, the letter references are to
components, number references are to The PTO selector lever is always set at one of the
circuits. three operational positions. The PTO selector switch
(J) is actuated (by internal transaxle components)
When the operator is on the seat, current flows only when the PTO selector lever in moved up into
through the closed seat switch contacts (1-2) to the the rear PTO position.
TDC module time delay circuit (L-3). Current within
the TDC flows from (L-3) to the relay coil (L-6) and (Continued on the next page)
time delay element (L-7).

240-15-8 191091
 Theory of Operation/PTO Electrical Circuit Operation

PTO CIRCUIT OPERATION (CONTINUED)

A-Battery D-Key Switch G-Indicator Lamp J-PTO Selector Switch

B-Starter E-Fuse H-PTO Lamp Switch K-PTO Magnet
C-Fusible Link F-Fuse I-Seat Switch L-TOC Module

PTO SELECTOR MID, MID/REAR, OR REAR lamp (G) turns off. At this same instant, the PTO
POSITION-OPERATOR OFF SEAT magnet hinged bracket is pulled away from the PTO
dash lever locking plate by the PTO valve linkage,
If operator leaves the seat, the seat switch contact creating a loud "click" sound as it hits the pedestal
opens (1-1), breaking the current path to the TDC panel.
seat delay element (L-7) and to the relay coil (L-6).
However, the relay coil does not open because it Returning to the seat re-energizes the PTO circuits
continues to receive current flow from terminal (L-2) that re-energize the magnet. The PTO dash lever
through the "locked in" contact points (L-6). must be returned to the OFF position to re-establish
the magnetic field between the lever locking plate
Approximately one to two seconds after current path and the magnet before PTO operation can be
to the TDC seat delay element (L-7) is broken, the re-engaged.
time delay element (L-7) opens the transistor (L-5),
breaking the relay coil's (L-6) path to ground. The PTO SELECTOR IN REAR POSITION-OPERATOR
relay coil (L-6) is de-energized, opening the contact OFF SEAT
pOints, which, in turn, breaks the current flow to the
PTO magnet (K). Raise seat and pull the seat switch plunger (I)
outward into override position (1-3).
The magnetic field collapses between the magnet
and the PTO dash lever locking plate. Spring tension Current flows from the 10-amp fuse (E) through the
in the PTO valve instantly forces the spool to move seat switch contact (1-3) to the PTO selector switch
forward engaging the PTO brake and disengaging the (J-1). The PTO selector lever must be in the rear (up)
PTO clutch. This forward spool movement opens the position (J-2). Current then flows directly to the PTO
PTO lamp switch contact (H) which breaks the magnet (L). The PTO magnet is energized at all times
current path to ground and the PTO dash indicator when the system is in the override mode.

240-15-9 191091
 Theory of Operation/Fuel Transfer Pump Operation

FUEL TRANSFER PUMP OPERATION

--.
8

A-Battery C-Fuslble Link E-Fuse F-Fuel Transfer Pump

B-Starter D-Key Switch

The fuel transfer pump is used on all 655 and 10-amp fuse (E), the alternator tie. point, and the fuel
7551756 models, and early 855/856 units. Later 855 transfer pump (F) to ground.
and all 955 models use a mechanical fuel pump
driven by a lobe of the injection pump cam shaft. Current flowing through the fuel pump energizes an
electromagnet which retracts the pump plunger
The fuel transfer pump pulls fuel from the fuel tank against a compression spring. The pump plunger
and supplies it under pressure to the fuel injection actuates a stop switch when fully retracted. The stop
pump. switch breaks the current flow to the electromagnet
allowing the compression spring to return the pump
Current flows from the battery (A) to the starter (B) plunger to it's extended position. The electromagnet
common terminal and to the key switch (0) "BAT" re-energizes and the cycle is repeated. This cycle is
terminal. The starter to key switch connection is repeated many times per second to create the
protected by a 16-gauge fusible link (C). pumping action.

Turning the key switch to ON or to START allows

current to flow through the "IGN" terminal, the

240-15-10 191091
 Theory of Operation/Engine Preheat Circuit Operation

ENGINE PREHEAT CIRCUIT OPERATION

GLOW PLUGS; L.__~=:;=.J

--. B

A-Battery D-Fuslble Link F-Fuse H-Preheat Controller

B-8tarter E-Key Switch G-Indicator Lamp I-Glow Plugs!Air Heater
C-Fusible Link

The engine preheat circuit regulates current flow to Internal switching also completes the battery to glow
the glow plugs (655 and 755/756 models) or air plug/air heater circuit (Terminal 2 to 4).
heater (855/856 and 955 models) used to assist in
cold weather starting. The wait and heat times for the 655 and 755/756
models vary based on temperatures sensed by the
Current flows from the battery (A) to the starter (B) control module. The maximum wait light time is eight
common terminal, the key switch (E) "BAT" terminal seconds and the maximum glow plug heat time is 30
and the control module (H) No. 2 terminal. The key seconds.
switch and control module connections contain
16-gauge fusible links (C and D). The wait and heat times for the 855/856 and 955
models are constant. Whenever the sensed
When the key switch is in the ON or START position, temperature is below 4C (40F) the dash wait lamp
current flows through the "IGN" terminal to the lights for 15 seconds and the air heater glows for 45
1a-amp (F), the dash mounted wait light (G), and the seconds.
control module (H) No. 3 terminal.
The engine may be started after the dash wait lamp
Current flows from the No. 3 terminal through the goes out. Once the wait light goes out, the glow
module temperature sensor to ground (Terminal 3 to plugs or air heater will remain on to assure smooth
1). The sensed value is a combination of air and engine start and warm up. The glow plugs or air
machine temperatures. When the sensed temperature heater will turn off when the predetermined time or
is below predetermined limits (cold weather), the temperature limit is reached.
control module completes a path to ground which
lights the dash wait lamp (Terminal 5 to 1).

-19-160CT91

240-15-11 191091
 Theory of Operation/Fuel Shutoff Circuit Operation

FUEL SHUTOFF CIRCUIT OPERATION

NEUTRAL

A-Battery C-Fusible Link E-Hold-In Coil G-Neutral Start Switch

B-Starter 0-8tarter Solenoid F-Fuse H-Pull-In Coil

The fuel shutoff solenoid mechanically actuates the through the "ST" terminal to the transmission neutral
shutoff lever of the fuel injection pump. start switch (G).

The solenoid plunger is controlled by pull-in coil (H) When the transmission is in neutral (switch contacts
and hold-in coil (E). closed), current flows to the starter solenoid (D). As
the starter solenoid energizes, internal contacts close
Current flows from the battery (A) to the starter (B) allowing current to flow to the fuel shutoff solenoid
common terminal and to the key switch "BAT" pull-in coil (H). Both pull-in coil and starter engage
terminal. The starter to key switch connection simultaneously. The pull-in coil draws 50 amps.
contains a 16-gauge fusible link (C).
The pull-in coil (H) remains energized until the key
Turning the key switch to the START position allows switch is released from the START position. The
current to flow through the "IGN" terminal and hold-in coil (E) holds the plunger in a retracted
1O-amp fuse (F) to energize the solenoid hold-in coil position until the key switch is turned OFF.
(E). The hold-in coil draws 1 amp. Current also flows

240-15-12 191091
 Theory of Operation/Starting Circuit Operation

STARTING CIRCUIT OPERATION

+
B

A-Battery C-Fusible Link E-Key Switch F-8olenoid

B-8tarter O-Neutral Start Switch

Current flows from the battery (A) to the starter (B) With the transmission switch closed and the key
common terminal and to the key switch (E) "BAT" switch in START position, the starter solenoid (F) is
terminal. The starter to key switch connection energized. Current flows from the battery through
contains a 16-gauge fusible link (C). internally closed solenoid contacts to the starter
motor windings.
Turning the key switch to the START position allows
current to flow through the "ST" terminal to the The starter motor will remain engaged until the key
transmission neutral start switch (D). switch is released from START or the transmission is
moved from NEUTRAL.
The current path to the starter motor solenoid (F) is
only completed when the transmission switch (D) is in
the closed position (foot control pedals in NEUTRAL).

19160CT91

240-15-13 191091
 Theory of Operation/Charging Circuit Operation

CHARGING CIRCUIT OPERATION

A-Battery C-Alternator E-Fuse G-Key Switch

B-5tarter D-Indicator Lamp F-Fuse
The early tractors used a 35 amp alternator. The later is proportional to the field voltage. The field voltage is
tractors use a 40 amp alternator. Both systems controlled by the built-in regulator.
operate the same way.
The regulator monitors battery voltage from current
The charging system utilizes an alternator, with flowing through the key switch (G) and the 10-amp
regulated output, to maintain proper battery fuse (E) to the alternator. The regulator adjusts the
state-of-charge. field voltage to keep the battery charged.

The alternator is designed to provide high current Charging system operation is monitored by the
output, even at relatively low engine speeds. regulator and is indicated by the alternator warning
lamp (D). The warning lamp will light whenever the
Current output from the alternator (C) flows to the system current draw is greater than the alternator
common terminal on the starter (B) and to the output. Normally, this only occurs when cranking the
positive battery terminal (A). engine.

Alternator output is determined by the amount of

magnetism in the field coil. The amount of magnetism

19160CT91

240-15-14 191091
 Theory of Operation/Oil Pressure Circuit Operation

OIL PRESSURE CIRCUIT OPERATION

-.
-
T

A-Battery C-Fusible Link E-Fuse G-Oil Pressure Switch

B-Starter D-Key Switch F-Indicator Lamp

The oil pressure lamp circuit warns the operator if the The sensor unit contains a normally-closed switch
engine oil pressure drops below 48 kPa (7 psi). which allows the dash lamp to light whenever the key
switch is ON and the engine is NOT running.
Current flows from the battery (A) to the starter (B)
common terminal and to the key switch (D) "BAT" During engine START-UP, the dash lamp will be lit
terminal. The starter to key switch connection momentarily, until engine oil pressure increases
contains a 16-gauge fusible link (C). enough to OPEN the sensor switch contacts and the
lamp turns OFF.
Turning the key switch to ON or START allows
current to flow through the "IGN" terminal to the
1O-amp fuse (E), the dash indicator lamp (F), and the
engine mounted pressure switch (G).

240-15-15 191091
 Theory of Operation/Coo/ant Temperature Circuit Operation

COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT OPERATION

--

A-Battery C-Fusible Link E-Fuse G-Temperature Switch

B-Starter D-Key Switch F-Indicator Lamp

The coolant temperature circuit warns the operator, The sensor is a normally-open switch. The switch will
through a dash warning lamp, when the engine close, completing a circuit path to ground, only when
coolant temperature exceeds 11 DOC (23DOF). coolant temperature goes above 11 DOC (23DOF).
When the switch closes, the dash warning lamp will
Current flows from the battery (A) to the starter (B) light.
common terminal and to the key switch (D) "BAT"
terminal. The starter to key switch connection A separate wire, from the dash lamp to the key
contains a 16-gauge fusible link (C). switch ground terminal, allows the warning lamp to be
"test-lit" when the key switch is in the START
When the key switch is in the ON or START position position. This is done because the warning lamp
current flows to the 1D-amp fuse (E), the dash might never light, this way the operator is assured the
warning lamp (F), and the engine coolant temperature lamp is good and will light if coolant temperature
switch (G). exceeds 11 DOC (23DOF).

240-15-16 191091
 Theory of Operation/Fuel Gauge Circuit Operation

FUEL GAUGE CIRCUIT OPERATION

-. .-
+
B

A-Battery C-Fusible Link E-Fuse G-Fuel Level Sensor

B-Starter D-Key Switch F-Fuel Gauge

Fuel level is monitored by a dash mounted dial The fuel level sensor consists of a ball float
gauge. The dial gauge is electrically connected to an connected to a variable resistor. The ball float and
in-tank float type sending unit. resistor position varies with fuel level. Circuit
resistance decreases as fuel level decreases.
Current flows from the battery (A) to the starter (B)
common terminal and to the key switch (D) "BAT" The fuel gauge is calibrated to reflect changes in
terminal. The starter to key switch connection circuit resistance (fuel level) through dial movement.
contains a 16-gauge fusible link (C). When the fuel level is low, the resistance is
decreased to the pOint that dial reads EMPTY, time
When the key switch is in the ON or START position to refill the tank.
current flows to the "IGN" terminal, the 1O-amp fuse
(E), the fuel gauge (F), and fuel level sensor (G).

240-15-17 191091
 Theory of Operation/Lighting Circuit Operation

LIGHTING CIRCUIT OPERATION

WARNING UGHTS

FRONT HEADUGHTS
MID HEADUGHTS
TAIL UGHTS
INSTRUMENT UGHTS

--.
.. WORKUGHT :egJ

----------------~
A-Battery D-Key Switch G-Flasher Unit J-Fuse
B-Starter E-Light Switch H-Warning Lights K-Rear Work Light
C-Fusible Link F-Fuse I-Lights L-Fuse

Current flows from the battery (A) to the starter (B) The light switch has four positions (see electrical
common terminal and to the key switch (D) "BAT" schematics for switch functional chart). Depending on
terminal. The starter to key switch connection the selected function, current flows through the
contains a 16-gauge fusible link (C). appropriate terminal(s) to the protective fuses (F, J,
or L), the lighting components (H,I or K), and to
When the key switch is in the "ACC" or ON position, ground.
current flows to the "ACC" terminal to the light
switch (E) terminal. The warning light circuit contains a flasher element
(G).

-19-160CT91

240-15-18 191091
 Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

655, 755/756, 855/856, AND 955

ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

The electrical schematic diagrams found on the following

pages are separated chronologically by harness
changes. Find the diagram that corresponds to the
features found on the tractor being serviced. A brief
summary of harness changes is provided on the left
hand page to aid you in using the proper diagram.

Listed below are the electrical schematic diagrams

provided:

EARLY 655, 755/756, AND 855/856 SCHEMATIC

LATE 655, SECONDARY 755 AND 855 SCHEMATIC
LATE 855 AND ORIGINAL 955 SCHEMATIC
LATE 755 SCHEMATIC
EARLY 855 AND 955 EUROPEAN SCHEMATIC
LATE 855 AND 955 EUROPEAN SCHEMATIC
755 EUROPEAN SCHEMATIC

240-15-19 191091
 Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

EARLY 655, 755/756, AND 855/856 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC-

The original harness design with multiple The fuel tank in front of the radiator, inside the
component grounds. grille.
The battery located in the steering pedestal area. The exhaust muffler at rear of engine.
35 AMP alternator.

240-15-20 191091
 Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

WORK WARN'G TAIL HEAD TO--BlK

LT LTS LTS LTS
.YELJWHT
(OPT.)
~
____--------------~----------~~--------YEWWHT------------~------_+----~
YEWWHT----------~
YELJ
lOA WHT FUEL HOOD
TACHOMETER FI"'T'"""T'1"
SENDER LIGHTS
GRN FUSE BlK
GRN BLOCK
DK.GRN GRN r-_________ BRN ______________________-+~----------------------------------~
YEWWHT .--------YEl------------__
YELJRED ~--+_-------YELJBlK--------~-~

~-_r-----YEl--------------------_,
~----YEl-------------JPN~ .---;----RED------------------------,
BlK BLK
I LIGHT SWITCH POSITIONS
BlK
OFF NONE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
~--+-+---Y;El

WARN BAT +W1

VEL - COOLA~ 5 3T~i:;02 REDIWHT--:----1r---UJULJ
WORK BAT+HU+FL TEMP CONTrOllER (OR) AIR HEATER ":"
TO RUN BAT+HU+W2 1Ll-----~I------__t-l~==~:;;~d.-ORG/WHT~LANT TEMP.
. - - - - - - - - -.. BlK~ YELJ
RED BlK I ~
.1 TAN lOll PRESS. -
KEY SWITCH POSITIONS
KEY SWITCH
="';F-==J-=F--GRY TO (!) I I SWITCH~
__~-YELJRED------...... I ":"
ACC BAT + ACC ~---YELJRED--_r---- .....
OFF
RUN
NONE
BAT+IGN+ACC
START BAT+IGN+ST G+GRD
~~---BlK--------_;-------r_r-------------------~
~~~-----YEL!RED------4-------'

.-----+----------BlU/BlK ~
PN~
BlK
I L..--------YEl ~RED
rUJ-BlK
t=F
I
I FUEL SHUT-oFF
SOLENOID
~
TO \.!r--BlK BLK W1R~~DED I ~
"G=COOLANT BULB CHECK POINT
3 1 I WHT
.---~r------PUR-----------------------------~ I /...~===tm:t=tiYEl
VEL
I .I~-------r--~BRN
TRANS. SWITCH CONTROL MODULE
PTO LAMP SWITCH I E
r---, r - INGW' ------------- ~ RED I BlK 0

: F~O;~:
/
PUR--I~~~~~I----r_--~--+_~ I I I
hALTERNATOR
I1... NEIIT.
_ _ _ ...1
I \!)TO
I... _ ...I I I I RED
BlU/BlK ____________________________-r____4---' I I ~---PUR--~=r=t====~
BlK .---------YEl------------------+_----r---------' I I
OPERATOR PTO I
r----------BlU----, B
S=~T I RELAY-.- I I RED
.---_+_-BlU~EL ~i~ T
r :] SWITCH ........L
I I FUSIBLE
I I I l J LINK
PTO SELECTOR SWITCH
r MliHsoTH'
~~I-~-l.~~I-BlU--~===1=============--~
ON I
r-------r---+-PN~HT

BlK
PN~WM
BlK
I
I
I
I
1
TIME
DELAY

~
:
I
I
I
'-- ____
RED
J
FUSIBLE~
'2
(1.0mm)

I1... REAR I ) LINK

_ _ _ ...1 PN~HT PTO MAGNET TO@ FUEL PUMP
,------------_/
~BlK--""" RED----------------------------------------------------------------------------------~I
RED

TO @---BlK--...... EARLY 655, 755/756, 855/856 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC

'WIRING HARNESS NUMBERS
M42200 655 AM102054, 755/756 AM102145, 855/856 AM102053

MX 24015HU 288 -19-160CT91

240-15-21 191091
Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

240-15-22 191091
Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

240-15-23 191091
 Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

LATE 655, SECONDARY 755 AND 855 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC-

The secondary harness design with single ground The new E-coat paint process introduced.
through the harness. 35 AMP alternator.

240-15-24 191091
 Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

WORK WARN'G TAIL HEAD

LT LTS LTS LTS TO@--BLK ....---------BLK----~
(OPT.)
VEWWHT--------~~---+_------~-
....----------GRN---___. .c::== YELJWHT------4----4---....
I -----YELJWHT-----....
YELJ
....+-_--+--I
lOA WHT
TACIHOMETER , .........., HOOD
LIGHTS
GRN FUSE
GRN FUEL
BLOCK
SENDER
DK.GRN .--_ _ _ _ _ BRN _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~-----------------___.
YELJWHT ....------YEl,------__...
YELJRED L..4--1~---VEL/BLK-------~---I
' - - - - - - - - - Y E L , _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _----.
.------YEL------~PN~ ....----RED'-----------~
BLK BlK
I LIGHT SWITCH POSITIONS
BLK
OFF NONE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
_---4--I---VEL
BAT + W1 3THERM02
WARN
VEL 5 START 4 REDNVHT-!--t~..lUl..J..J
WORK BAT+HU+FL
CONTROLLER
1 (OR) AIR HEATER -=
RUN BAT+HU+W2 L-_+_--+---~---+_44~~_+-----O-R-GNV~HT~LANTTEMP.
BlK I 1-~ -:!:-
@ -

KEY SWITCH POSITIONS

KEY SWITCH YELJ
RED
1 TO
TAN
I
L-.
lOlL PRESS.
I SWITCH
---J-._ _ ~
-

.='-T-_YELJRED _ ____'
ACC BAT + ACC ~---YElJRED,---+-----' BLK I -=
I
OFF NONE 1~~--BlK----_4---~~-----~-----~ PN~ 1 FUEL SHUT-oFF
RUN BAT+IGN+ACC ~___:f---YELJRED---_f_--.......J BlK ' - + - - - - YEl-.......,...nl- RED ~OLENOID
START BAT+IGN+ST G+GRD
BLK r----+------'"-- BLU/BLK--...J TO <D- BLK BLK I
* G=COOlANT BULB CHECK POINT TO@
1 1 WHT
r---4----PUR----------------~ I r::==I:vE-+-+-+
~ VEL f- YEl

I BRN
TRANS. SWITCH CONTROL MODULE
------------- ,
WIRE
PTO LAMP SWITCH BRAIDED I E
INGeAA'
r - / CABLE
I BlK 0

:-J1~O:~:
CHASSIS

I I GAD hALTERNATOR
PUR-~-4~~~-;---+_-r~
I NEUT. I
I I RED 1 \!lTO
L __ RED
L. _ .J
~.J

I I 1
BLU/BLK-====-;;;~========:t===I=~---.J I I ~---PUR--~=t~====~~
BLK r-r-----YEL
OPERATOR I I
....-------BLU--.... BLU i SEAT SWITCH RED

~
El VEL I I FUSIBLE
r OvERi OFF' .---+_-BLU BLU-- I

'2
I I LINK
ON I
.-----t---t-PNKNVHT PNKjW~IT--..-+--I I
PTO SELECTOR SWITCH BLK-I I
r Mlo:BOTH' (1.0mm)
L-~I--r~~I---BLU-~==~~==========~--, ~K I I FUSIBLE~
I REAR I LINK
L. _ _ _ .J PNKjWHT PTO MAGNET TO@ 1, _____________ ) FUEL PUMP

~BLK----' REDI-------------------------------------RED---....I
~---------~~----BLK--.......J

TO ( D - B l K - - - - - - - - '
LATE 655, SECONDARY 755, SECONDARY 855 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
M42201
IWIRING HARNESS NUMBERS - 655 AM105090, 755 AM105091, 855 AM105092 I
MX 24015HU 29A 19160CI91

240-15-25 191091
Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

2401526 191091
Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

240-15-27 191091
 Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

LATE 855 AND ORIGINAL 955 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC-

The battery and fuel tank locations were switched. European harness lead connection incorporated in
40 AMP alternator. North American harness.
Exhaust muffler moved to top of engine.

-19-160CT91

240-15-28 191091
 Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

WORK TO (ij-BlK
LT ,----yEWWHT.------------------~------+__4------------~--
YEUWHT------~--~____,_----YEUWHT------------~------_+--+__,

YELJ
YEUWHT-----------, 1 I
10A WHT
TACHOMETER , .................... WHL1)T
BlK BlK HOOD
LIGHTS
GRN FUSE
GRN BLOCK FUEL
SENDER
DK.GRN GRN r-------___ BRN ______________________-4_____________________________________,
YEUWHT
YEl/RED ~-----------YELJBlK--------------~--~
r-------------YEl---------' ~-------------YEl--------------------_,
~----------YEl-------------JPN~ r--------RED------------------------~
BlK BlK ENGINE
I LIGHT SWITCH POSITIONS
~H;R;O-S~;,. )
BlK
OFF NONE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
~---+-+----YEL
BAT + W1 - - - - ~ 3THERM02
WARN
VEL COOLA~T l 5 START 4 RED/WHT--~---jt__"UI.JUu
WORK BAT+HU+FL TEMP I CONT~OLLER (OR) AIR HEATER -=
RUN BAT+HU+W2 L -________ +_----~------4_~~----~--------O-RG-/W~HT~~p.
BlK I - - ...L

KEY SWITCH
@1 TO I.
TAN
lOlL PRESS.
I SWITCH
-=
=-F-'=+-=~- GRY
~
KEY SWITCH POSITIONS
~~-YEl/RED,-------I I
ACC BAT + ACC ~------YELJRED'---+----~
I
OFF NONE i~~----BLK--------~~----~_+-----------~--------~ PNK/ I FUEL SHUT-OFF
RUN BAT+lGN+ACC
START BAT+IGN+ST +GRD
~--~-----YELJREDI------~----~
L..-__________
I
BLK L-----_ _ _ _ _ YEl ::;;::=""fTl-RED ~SOLENOIO
rUJ-BlK
TO <D~------B-l-K--I I
*G=COOLANT BULB CHECK POINT
3 11WHT
~~~-----PUR---------------------------------, I ._-----+YEl
I I~------~--~BRN
TRANS. SWITCH CONTROL MODULE
------------- ,
WIRE
PTO LAMP SWITCH BRAIDED I
r - INGEAA' / CABLE
I
~ -J10FF~
CHASSIS
PUR--I~~~~~I----~--_4--+_~ ( I
GRD
RED I
I
1.._
~NI
.J
II.. NEUT.
_ _ _ .J
I
I I I
BlU/BLK ____________________________-+____-t---' I I L.....-----PUR-----=:::t:::t:===~
BlK ---YEl------------------+_----r--------.J I I
OPERATOR PTO I
r : ] S=~T SWITCH
...-----------BlU----.., B I RELAY:-r: I I

....:=LI.~t:1=~ .-------_4-=--=--=-~~-P-N~~~
I __ I I FUSIBLE
I l J

~
I RED LINK
PTO SELECTOR SWITCH
ON:
'HT~BLK
HT
I TIME ~~ I
r MID"BO'TH' I
DELAY
I '-----_ J \
(1.0mm)
2

I I BlU--~===t============~--~ BLK I
1 I FUSIBLE
LINK~
II.. _ _REAR
_ .J
I
PNK/WHT PTO MAGNET ToG> ,------------_/
)

TO
~BlK-----I
Q)_____ BlK ______ ----I
REO----------------------------------------------------------------------~T~-RED----~
L------REO-----@ EUROPEAN
HARNESS
LATE 855 AND ORIGINAL EI55 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
M42202 I WIRING HARNESS NUMBER AM106740 I
MX 24015HU 30A -19-160CT91

240-15-29 191091
Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

240-15-30 191091
Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

240-15-31 191091
 Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

LATE 755 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC-

European harness lead connection incorporated in

North American harness_
40 AMP alternator.

, -19-160CT91

240-15-32 191091
 Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

WORK WARN'G TAIL HEAD

LT LTS LTS LTS TO@--BlK r--------------BlK--------~
(OPT.)
YEWWHT------;_~F- ____,-----
YELJWHT---------...,
YELJ
10A WHT
HOOD
LIGHTS
GRN
GRN FUEL
SENDER
DK.GRN GRN
YEWWHT
YEL/RED ~----------YEWBlK--------------------I

'---------------YEl..,...--------------~
r-----------YEl-------..JpNK/ ,.--------RED-------------------.
BlK BlK ENGINE
\ LIGHT SWITCH POSITIONS

~H;R;O-S~~ )
BlK
OFF NONE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
...---+-+--YEl
WARN BAT + W1 - -COOLANP 3THERM02
VEL :'. , 5 START 4 REDIWHT-~---1--UlJ....Jl.J
WORK BAT+HU+FL TEMP 1 CON~OLLER (OR) AIR HEATER '::"
TO RUN BAT+HU+W2 , ORGIWHT-.!.,I"
C"O"OLANT TEMP.
~--------------.BlKiG) ~-+----+---~I----~-+~~~B-lK---------..... : ~~

J.. TAN lOll PRESS. -

KEY SWITCH POSITIONS

KEY SWITCH
""t..~=+":;:::"""'GRY (!)TO I I' SWITCH~
w::::~-YEl/RED,-------1
BlK 1 '::"
~------YELJRED--+------I
ACC BAT + ACC 1
OFF NONE ~+----ORGI-------_+------;_~--------.------------~ PNK/ 1 FUEL SHUT-oFF
RUN BAT+\GN+ACC
~~~----YEWRED-----4_----~ BlK y..------YEl,----,,~1_RED ~SOlENOID

START BAT+IGN+ST G+GRD

.. X---------ORG~HT-~------_+~
r-------I----------BlU/BlK---~
TO (IrBlK BlK 1
*G=COOLANT BULB CHECK POINT 1 1 WHT
r--~~-----PUR------------------------~ '::==~;FI'I-+-+YEl
,~ YEl'--
1
TRANS. SWITCH
+ e>+-I---+--. 1 BRN
CONTROL MODULE WIRE
1
PTO LAMP SWITCH
r---, IN GEAR ' ------------- BATTERY BRAIDED
B~
E
r - / ~
, CHASSIS CABLE
1
A
0

: J1~::: ALTERNATOR
GRD
I I
PURI-~~~~~-_r---+__+~ (
IL _ _ NEUT. I RED , \.!JTO
_ J
L_ J
1 , 1 RED
BLU/BlK ________________________; -___t -.....
BLK ~-----YEl----------------f_--__4------..J
OPERATOR
,
1
1
I
~------PUR---~=r=+===~
,
r-----------BlU----. BLU-, SEAT SWITCH 1 RED

~
EL YEL-.-L , BLK FUSIBLE
r OVeRi OFfl r---+_-BLU BLU , 1
I I ,.-----+-~-PNK/WHT PNK/WHT , l RED J LINK
I
PTO SELECTOR SWITCH
ON
BLK---,- 1 '-- ____ J \ 2
r NlliHIOTH' (1.0mm)
L-~I--r~~I-BLU--~===t============~-~ B~' 1 FUSIBLE~
IL REAR
___ J
I LINK
PNK/WHT PTO MAGNET TOm', ) FUEL PUMP
._------------
~BlK----"'" RED-------------------------------------------------------------------T.---REO------I
....- - - - R E D - - @ EUROPEAN
L--------------~~----BLK-----1

TO @ - - B L K - - - - - - I HARNESS
LATE 755 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
M42203
I WIRING HARNESS NUMBER AM108177 I
MX 24015HU 31A -19-160CT91

240-15-33 191091
Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

240-15-34 191091
Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

240-15-35 191091
 Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

EARLY 855 AND 955 EUROPEAN ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC-

Horn location moved from top of engine to inside Brown hot lead instead of red hot lead from 15
front grille area. amp fuse to No. 30 terminal of hazard switch on
Pull type hazard switch. some models.

19160CT91

240-15-36 191091
 Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

FRONT FRONT
CLEARANCE TURN HOOD
REAR LICENSE REAR LTS. LTS.
REAR REAR FENDER HEAD HORN
WORK PLATE BRAKE/ (CLEAR LENS) (AMBER)
TURN TAIL WORK LTS.
LT. LT. WARN.

~ ~
LTS. LTS. LTS. I BlU~
(OPT.) (OPT.)
(AMBER)
LTS.
(RED) (RED) BlU BRN ::; BR~
BlK------- r:LMVHT : BRN~ fD==7
t...:'BRN ::; CLEAR GRN
i '---'---.r-.......... .~ VEL

L----'_ _ BRN~ HORN LOCATION WAS

BlK BRN
BlK GRN
~
ONLY CHANGE MADE
<h TO INTERMEDIATE
o BRNI--~-+--L-~
r--1~---~--------~GRY
r-+---------WHT--~
HARNESS AM108164-IT
MOVED FROM ENGINE
COMPARTMENT TO INSIDE
VEL ~--1--~--------------~-r-+-4---4~---BlU-----~
~_~ ~-----~-~r+-+--4-----YEl
HORN BUTTON FRONT GRILLE AREA.
DK.GRN
-YEl,------+-+-+--1~f_-----YEl-+___,
~~--~BLK-----~----~

TRAILER GRV
LIGHTS
CONNECTOR

30 31lnJD
30 DO 5454F
ON r1

~--

POS.
OFF
1
'--------------------------DK.GRN

CONNECTIONS
NONE
B &W1
TOUNUSED
MAIN HARNESS
11
FLASHER CIRCUIT
lOA

DK.GRN
BRAKE SW.
BlK
c:::Jl

s;?1
I

15A
L DO R

A POSITIVE BRN
WIRE TO HAZARD
2 B & Fl & HU BRN ~-------~-+~---BRN
SWITCH FROM 15A
3 B & HU & W2
FUSE
---
FUSE
RED
FUSE WAS USED IN
ERROR ON SOME
BLOCK BLOCK
MAIN HARNESS WHT/ EARLY MODELS
VELIRED BlK
LIGHT SWITCH
CAB BRN
RED OUTLET
YELl
L-1--4-------WHT C3!IDD
C2
49
DOc
GRV 31 DO
(j}-BRN-<f
VEl/RED-------J YTO RE L-==---I
FUEL GAGE LT. FLASHER
49C

CONTROLLER
BRN

~BAT.
BlK NEG. MAIN/EUROPEAN @ RED/
WHT
CABLE
BRN
3
HARNESS
CONNECTOR
POINT
MAIN HARNESS
CONNECTOR
MAIN HARNESS f4i:\A
CONNECTOR POINT -...::::;
WIRE POINT MAIN HARNESS
BRAIDED GROUND ~~--BRN----_ _ _~
CHASSIS CONNECTOR POINT
GROUND
CABLE CONNECTIONS TRAILER LTS.
1~ENG EARLY 855 AND 955 EUROPEAN ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC DASH INDICATORS
2 GRD

M42204 AM107845 AND AM108164 HARNESSES

MX 24015HU 32A 19160CT91

240-15-37 191091
Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

2401538 191091
Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

240-15-39 191091
 Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

LATE 855 AND 955 EUROPEAN ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC-

Push button type hazard switch.

Park light circuit added.

19160CT91

240-15-40 191091
 Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

FRONT FRONT HOOD

CLEARANCE TURN WORK HORN
REAR LICENSE REAR LTS. LTS. LTS.
REAR REAR
WORK PLATE BRAKE/ FENDER (CLEAR) (AMBER)
TURN TAIL
LT. LT. WARN. WORK
LTS. LTS. BlU--------l
BlU~
(OPT.) (OPT.) LTS. LTS.
(AMBER)

f
(RED) BRN
(RED) BR~
BRN~
VEL/~
WHT _ n* ;;;I[]
TO
BlK/WHT BRN
l@

~RN
MAIN BRN
BlK '"\ HARN';::.E::::;SS:::"'-_-4-+l
1 TO .-----.... BlK
BlK MAIN AM107847 L...--....L.--BRNl

r-~----+_~~--------GRV ~
HARNESS ,.1
MAIN <h
HARNESS BlK-+-_-4-..L.;,--+=:.=J.I[]
BlK VEll r+--r----------WHT
WHT GRN

L..G+R-V-+--BLU--1r+'------i:----~~~~~~~~~~+-,GR~~ORN
DK.GRN VEL ~-----~~~r+r+-~-,
1------....1
VEL :UTTON
~~---+~---BlK----------4-~
TRAILER
LIGHTS BlK--....
POS
LEFT
CONNECTIONS
B & L
[ ~
VEL
r-~;-;-BlK/WHT+-~------------~ HAZARD
CONNECTOR L_~+===~~ OFF NONE
WHT RIGHT B & R
ON r 1 BRAKE SW. \ =:-+---, SWITCH

n
BlK-------1-1-. "-oA.-_WHTI L
BlK
'-------------------------DK.GRN c::::J
't-+-----r--WHT

MAIN HARNESS TOUNUSED

c::::J
POS. CONNECTIONS MAIN HARNESS lOA
OFF NONE LIGHT SWITCH FLASHER CIRCUIT

1 VEl.--./-. GRN
B &W1 DK.GRN
2 B & Fl & HU
3 B & HU & W2
WHT
---
FUSE ---
FUSE C3!ID0 49
B K
BLOCK BLOCK C2 DOc

31DD49c
PARK LT.
87A
SWITCH Y CAB
RED OUTLET

YEL/RED--------l RELAY RED-I-------....I

GRV-r------~
FUEL GAGE LT.

CfJ t.....==Q;3-BlK '----BRN _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~

BRN ~ MAIN/EUROPEAN TRAILER LTS.

BAT.
1
BRN7
c...---
ENGINE
GROUND
HARNESS
CONNECTOR
POINT
MAIN HARNESS
CONNECTOR
MAIN HARNESS
CONNECTOR POINT
;;;;0.4
6
YEL/WHT-----'
DASH INDICATORS

NEG. WIRE POINT

CABLE _BRAIDED MAIN HARNESS
CABLE CONNECTOR POINT
6-BlK
CHASSIS
LATE 855 AND 955 EUROPEAN ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
GROUND

M42205 AM108187 HARNESS

MX 24015HU 33A 19-160CT91

240-15-41 191091
Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

240-15-42 191091
Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

240-15-43 191091
 Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

755 EUROPEAN ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC-

Harness had to be split because available area

inside steering pedestal was insufficient.
Push button type hazard switch.

19160CT91

240-15-44 191091
 Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

FRONT FRONT HOOD

CLEARANCE TURN WORK HORN
REAR LICENSE REAR REAR REAR
FENDER LTS. LTS. LTS.
WORK PLATE TURN BRAKE/ TAIL

~
LT. LT. LTS. WARN. LTS.
WORK
LTS. :ll~R) BlU)J{AMBER)
(OPT.) (OPT.) (AMBER) LTS. (RED) I @-BRN ~ ~ ,.-,
BR~
BlU

fi
(RED)
~,. ~
~r] ~
BlK
YEL!
WHT
BlK
ffi
:)
~ "\.
"\.
9 BlK/WHT

@BRN
-

:ll!--------.
~
BRN

GRN
'f AM107847 iL......L...J"""_...... ~
BlK B~R~N~==t=t====:=rr~ BlK,. / BRN BRN

~::: :iH~ n=~:~~~~~~~~~~J===~~~~~~~~~~~~~;V~El~_~~~~~G_~_YH_T--_~--7--~

BRN .( l--+=t::t:t"t-....J GRN '-----'_ _ BRN
<h !.:ATE CHANGE: THIS
WHITE WIRE HAS BEEN
RE-ROUTED TO "B"
TERMINAL OF THE
Yr-~-----~
DK.GRN ~_ _ _ _ _Y....JEl ~------+~+4~~--4-----YEl--~~.~ HORN BUTTON TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

~~----~BlK-------++....J ~~~==~~~YEl~
G~RN ~
GRN
TRAILER ~4-~~~GRN-+------------~~ ,......:...r.:.--....J POS CONNECTIONS
LIGHTS LEFT B& L VEL
CONNECTOR I--""*"--+--+- BlK/WHT+-------------' OFF NONE HAZARD
RIGHT B&R
ON :- -: BRAKE SW. r=-+-....., SWITCH

n
BlK --------I'_+_.. """"':'::.L-_ WHT/
BlK
~---- ________________________________________ DK.GRN c::J 1
I ....,...+------~~-WHT

POS. CONNECTIONS MAIN HARNESS TOUNUSED

MAIN HARNESS
c::J I
10A
OFF NONE LIGHT SWITCH FLASHER CIRCUIT

1 B &W1 DK.GRN 15A

2 B & Fl & HU ~"'Ir--rel_.:.........J rt-r.---I!!S2!~=_REDI--t====~-t:j~~-===JJ
3 B & HU & W2 ---
FUSE
RED
C3mID0 49
WHT
BLOCK C2DOc
31 DO 49C
PARK LT.
87A
SWITCH Y CAB FLASHER
r-H=i=3i---J.- BRN
OUTLET CONTROLLER
ENGINE
GROUND
~ lEFT
BRN SIDE yEL!RED-------------l RELAY RED--~------------....J
FUEL GAGE LT.
@--BRN 8 GRy-r-----------~
------------------------~~
ENGINE
~----BRN------------__~
STARTER
MTG. PlT. MAIN/EUROPEAN TRAILER LTS.

~A
HARNESS DASH INDICATORS
MAIN HARNESS
CONNECTOR MAIN HARNESS
CONNECTOR
BAT.
RIGHT POINT
POINT
CONNECTOR POINT 'CY
NEG.
SIDE MAIN HARNESS
CABLE CONNECTOR POINT
' " WIRE
3 BRAIDED
CABLE
755 EUROPEAN ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC
CHASSIS
GROUND

M42206 AM108176 AND AM108909 HARNESSES

MX 24015HU 34A -19-160CT91

240-15-45 191091
Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Electrical Schematics

240-15-46 191091
 Section 250
Power Train Operation and Tests
Contents
Page Page

Group OS-Power Train System Checkout Transmission Relief Valve High Pressure
Before You Start .... . . . . . . . . . . . .. 250-05-1 Test ........................ 250-10-7
Transmission and Transaxle Oil Leak Adjust Transaxle Differential Lock Pedal. 250-10-8
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 250-05-1 Adjust PTO Lever and PTO Selector
Oil Cooler Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 250-05-1 Lever ....................... 250-1 0-8
Transmission Neutral Check ......... 250-05-1 Adjust Transaxle Two-Speed Axle Lever. 250-10-9
Transmission Neutral Return Check . . .. 250-05-2 Adjust Cruise Control Lock .......... 250-10-9
Adjust Forward Control Pedal ........ 250-10-9
Transmission Drive Check . . . . . . . . . .. 250-05-2
Adjust Reverse Control Pedal ....... 250-10-10
Differential Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . .. 250-05-2
Adjust Seat/Control Pedals Lockout
PTO Linkage Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 250-05-3
Rod ....................... 250-10-10
Seat Switch PTO By-Pass (Override)
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 250-05-3
Group 15-Theory of Operation
PTO Brake Check ................ 250-05-4
Power Train Operation ............. 250-15-1
Two-Speed Axle Linkage Check ...... 250-05-4
Hydrostatic Transmission General
Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 250-15-2
Linkage Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 250-05-4
Cross-Section View-Hydro Center
Cruise Control Lock/Release Check . . .. 250-05-5 Section ...................... 250-15-3
Cruise Control Release Check Hydrostatic Transmission Neutral
(Forward) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 250-05-5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 250-15-4
Cruise Control Release Check Hydrostatic Transmission Forward
(Master/Park Brake) ............. 250-05-5 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 250-15-5
Cruise Control Adjustment Check . . . . .. 250-05-5 Hydrostatic Transmission Reverse
Forward Control Pedal Check ........ 250-05-6 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 250-15-6
Reverse Control Pedal Check ........ 250-05-6 Foot Control Linkage Operation . . . . . .. 250-15-7
Seat Lockout Rod Check ........... 250-05-6 Transaxle Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 250-15-16
Operator Complaint Not Identified ..... 250-05-6 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD)
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 250-15-17
Group 10-Power Train Tests and Adjustments
About This Group ................ 250-10-1
Hydraulic Oil Warm-Up Procedure ..... 250-10-1
Adjust Transmission Neutral ......... 250-10-2
Adjust Transmission Neutral Return
Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 250-10-3
Power Train Drive Test. . . . . . . . . . . .. 250-10-3
Movement In One Direction Only . . . . .. 250-10-3
No Movement In Either Direction. . . . .. 250-10-4
Low Power/Wheels Stall Too Easily. . .. 250-10-4
Tractor Will Not Reach Full Speed . . . .. 250-10-4
Transmission Operating Hot ......... 250-10-5
Transmission Charge Pump Pressure
Test ........................ 250-10-5
Charge Relief Valve Check. . . . . . . . .. 250-10-6
Adjust Charge Relief Valve . . . . . . . . .. 250-10-6
Transmission Charge Pump Flow Test .. 250-10-6

250-1 191091
Contents

250-2 191091
 Group 05
Power Train System Checkout

BEFORE YOU START

Always begin with this group to identify a failure in This procedure is designed as a quick-check of the
the power train. The step-by step procedures in this system. While performing the check, concentrate only
group provide you a quick-check of the system. No on the check you are performing and disregard
tools are required to perform these checks. If a Signals from unrelated components.
failure is detected, you will be referred to a more
detailed check, adjustment, and/or test.

Always start with the first step and follow the

sequence from left to right. Read each step
completely before performing the check.

o TRANSMISSION
AND TRANSAXLE
Inspect for external
hydraulic oil leakage
OK: GO TO e

OIL LEAK CHECK from transmission filter, NOT OK: REPAIR OR

drain plug, lines, REPLACE, THEN ....
Check hydraulic oil fittings, and final drive GOTOe
level, condition and gaskets.
viscosity.

MX,25005HU,2 19-160CT91

Inspect hydraulic oil OK: GO TO.

OIL COOLER
CHECK cooler for debris,
plugged condition, oil NOT OK: CLEAN OR
leakage, or bent REPLACE, THEN ....
Remove grille.
cooling fins. GOTO.

MX,25005HU,3 -19-160CT91

e TRANSMISSION
NEUTRAL CHECK
Control pedals in
NEUTRAL position.
LOOK: Machine MUST
NOT creep in
OK: GO TO . ,

NEUTRAL. NOT OK: GO TO e,

Run engine at HALF GROUP 10
throttle.

M4394? -UN-31AUG88 MX,25005HU,4 -19-160CT91

250-05-1 191091
 Power Train System Checkout/PTO Linkage Check

Run engine at HALF FEEL: Machine MUST OK: GO TO

TRANSMISSION
throttle. come to a SMOOTH
NEUTRAL RETURN
CHECK STOP in approximately NOT OK: GO TO e,
Depress forward 3 seconds or less. GROUP 10.
Move two-speed axle control pedal FULLY;
lever to FAST position. while machine is NOTE: Stopping time
moving, release pedal. may vary with different
attachments and
Repeat for reverse. operator preference.

TRANSMISSION
Depress control pedal
from SLOW forward to
OK: GO TO e
DRIVE CHECK
FAST forward. Repeat NOT OK: GO TO . '
Run engine at FULL for reverse. GROUP 10.
throttle.
LOOK: Machine MUST
move and increase
speed, slow down,
M43932 -UN-31AUG88
change direction and
increase speed when
moved from FULL
forward to FULL
reverse.

FEEL: Speed increase

MUST BE SMOOTH.
Transmission suction
line MUST NOT be too
hot to touch.

Turn steering wheel to LOOK: Machine MUST OK: GO TO.

TRANSAXLE the right. try to go straight
DIFFERENTIAL
LOCK CHECK
forward when steering NOT OK: GO TO . '
Depress differential wheel is turned or GROUP 10.
Run engine at SLOW lock and turn right. inside front tire MUST
idle. MFWD show scuffing or
DISENGAGED. skidding on the ground.

Move control pedal to M43942 -UN-31AUG88

SLOW forward
position.

MX.25005HU.7 19160CT91

250-05-2 191091
 Power Train System Checkout/Seat Switch PTO By-Pass (Override) Check

PTO LINKAGE
Operator ON seat. Move PTO selector lever (A) to each of the
CHECK three positions, then ENGAGE PTO lever (8).
Run engine at SLOW
Remove mid PTO shaft idle. FEEL: PTa selector for lever MUST have three
cover, if equipped. detent positions.

M45003 UN31AUGBB

If there are no
implements on tractor,
Move PTO selector
lever to mid and rear
OK: GO TO e
have another person PTO position. NOT OK: GO TO . ,
observe mid (A) and GROUP 10.
rear (8) PTO shafts. LOOK' Lever MUST
BE between tabs on
LOOK: PTa shafts PTa quadrant.
MUST rotate when
selector lever is moved
to appropriate position.

M45005 UN31 AUGBB

MX.25005HU.9 -19-160CT91

SEAT SWITCH
Move PTO selector lever (A) to REAR PTO. OK: GO TO f)
PTO BY-PASS
(OVERRIDE)
Pull seat switch (8) OUTWARD into PTO PTO DISENGAGES:
CHECK
OVERRIDE position. GO TO SECTION 240.

Tilt seat forward. Engage PTO lever.

Run engine at SLOW LOOK- PTa MUST stay engaged and PTa lamp
idle. MUST BEaN.

Move PTO selector lever (A) to MID/REAR PTO

pOSition.

LOOK/LISTEN: PTa magnet will make a loud

click sound as it DISENGAGES the PTa lever.
PTa lamp MUST GO OFF.

M43931 -UN-31AUGBB

MX.25005HU.10 -19-160CT91

250-05-3 191091
 Power Train System Checkout/Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD) Linkage Check

., PTO BRAKE Run engine at FAST Move PTO lever to OK: GO TO.
CHECK idle. OFF position.
NOT OK: GO TO
Engage PTO lever to Note the time needed SECTION 240
NOTE: Tractor must
drive attachment. to STOP attachment AND/OR GROUP 10,
have a PTO driven
attachment installed for drive shaft rotation. THIS SECTION.
this check.
LOOK/USTEN:
M45006 -UN-31 AUG88
Attachment MUST
STOP in 4 seconds or
less.

11 19160CT91

ct TWO-SPEED AXLE LINKAGE CHECK

Depress forward control pedal to FULL speed
position.
Run engine at HALF throttle.
LOOK' Observe ground speed.
Move two-speed axle lever to SLOW speed
Repeat check with axle lever in FAST speed
position.
position.

M43943 -UN-31AUG88

LOOK: Ground speed MUST BE approximately OK:GO TO.

twice as fast.
NOT OK: GO TO
Move axle lever to NEUTRAL position. . ' GROUP 10.
LOOK: Axle lever MUST BE between tabs on
two-speed axle quadrant.

MX.25005HU,12 -19-160CT91

CD MECHANICAL
Move control pedal to
SLOW forward
LOOK' Inside front tire
MUST spin or show
OK: GO TO.
FRONT WHEEL
DRIVE (MFWD) position. scuffing on the ground. NOT OK: INSPECT
FOR DAMAGED
LINKAGE CHECK
Move MFWD lever MFWD LINKAGE OR
forward to ENGAGED DRIVE SHAFT.
Run engine at SLOW
position and turn right. DAMAGED FRONT
idle.
AXLE IF DRIVE
SHAFT IS TURNING.
Turn steering wheel to M43941 -UN-31AUG88
DAMAGED
the right.
TRANSAXLE MFWD
ASSEMBLY. (SEE
SECTION 50.)

MX,25005HU.13 -19-160CT91

250-05-4 191091
 Power Train System Checkout/Cruise Control Adjustment Check

CRUISE
Depress forward
CONTROL
control pedal
LOCK/RELEASE
SLIGHTLY.
CHECK
Engage cruise control
Engine OFF. lever and release your
foot first then your
hand.

LOOK/FEEL: Forward control pedal Repeat procedure through FULL OK: GO TO.
and cruise control lever MUST stay RANGE of forward pedal travel.
in set position. NOT OK: GO TO
GROUP 10.
Push DOWN on cruise control lever.

LOOK/FEEL: Forward control pedal

and cruise control lever MUST
return to NEUTRAL.
14 -19-160CT91

CRUISE
Depress forward LOOK/FEEL: Cruise OK: GO TO.
CONTROL
control pedal. control MUST
RELEASE CHECK
DISENGAGE and NOT OK: GO TO
(FORWARD)
Engage cruise control. forward control pedal GROUP 10.
MUST return to
Engine OFF. Press forward pedal NEUTRAL.
SLIGHTLY and
release.
MX.2S00SHU.1S -19-160CT91

e CRUISE
CONTROL
Depress forward
control pedal.
LOOK/FEEL: Cruise
control MUST
OK: GO TO.

RELEASE CHECK
DISENGAGE and NOT OK: GO TO
(MASTER/PARK
Engage cruise control. forward control pedal . GROUP 10.
BRAKE)
MUST return to
Press master/park NEUTRAL.
Engine OFF. brake pedal.

MX.2S00SHU.16 -19-160CT91

e CRUISE CONTROL
ADJUSTMENT
Depress reverse
control pedal.
LOOK/FEEL: Cruise
control MUST NOT
OK: GO TO CD
ENGAGE. Reverse NOT OK: GO TO
CHECK
Pull UPWARD on control pedal MUST GROUP 10.
cruise control lever. travel to FULL speed
Engine OFF.
position.
Master/park brake
pedal DISENGAGED.
M45008 -UN-31AUG88

Cruise control
DISENGAGED.

MX.2S00SHU.17 -19-160CT91

250-05-5 191091
 Power Train System Checkout/Operator Complaint Not Identified

FORWARD
Depress forward LOOK: Bottom of OK: GO TO.
CONTROL PEDAL control pedal to FULL forward control pedal
speed position. should be 10 mm (3/8 NOT OK: GO TO
CHECK
in.) above top of e. GROUP 10.
Engine OFF . footrest.

REVERSE
Pull UPWARD on
cruise control lever
LOOK/FEEL: Cruise
control MUST NOT
OK: GO TO e
CONTROL PEDAL
and HOLD. ENGAGE. Reverse NOT OK: GO TO
CHECK
pedal MUST return to e. GROUP 10.
Engine OFF. Depress reverse NEUTRAL.
control pedal then
release.

CD SEAT LOCKOUT
Operator OFF seat. Operator ON seat. OK: SYSTEM NORMAL
ROD CHECK
Depress forward and Depress control NOT OK: GO TO
Engine OFF. reverse control pedals. pedals. e. GROUP 10.
Master/park brake LOOK/FEEL: Control LOOK/FEEL: Control
pedal DISENGAGED. pedals MUST NOT pedals MUST MOVE
MOVE. FREEL Y through their
M43947 UN31AUG88
FULL RANGE of travel.
MX,25005HU,20 19160CT91

CD OPERATOR
If you completed the checkout procedure and
DID NOT isolate a malfunction. the problem may
REPEAT SYSTEM CHECKOUT IN THIS GROUP.
COMPLAINT NOT
IDENTIFIED be INTERMITTENT. IF MALFUNCTION IS NOT IDENTIFIED AFTER
REPEATING SYSTEM CHECKOUT
Try to duplicate the conditions of the malfunction PROCEDURE; FACTORY ASSISTANCE IS
identified by the operator. AVAILABLE THROUGH THE DEALER
TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE CENTER (DTAG).

MX,25005HU,21 19160CT91

250-05-6 191091
 Group 10
Power Train Tests and Adjustments

ABOUT THIS GROUP

Always perform the system checkout procedure in Engine rpm and oil temperature are critical in most
Group 05 BEFORE making any tests or adjustments hydraulic tests. Be sure to follow test specifications
in this group. The step-by-step procedures in this carefully.
group provide you with the detailed diagnostic
information you will need to correct a malfunction. Always start with the first step and follow the
Basic diagnostic equipment is used. sequence from left to right. Read each step
completely before performing the test.
It is assumed that you are familiar with the machine
and its power train components. Upon completing a test or adjustment, check to see
whether the problem is corrected by performing the
Complete the following visual checks before doing checkout procedure in Group 05.
any tests or adjustments:

-Oil level and condition. -External leaks from lines

and fittings. -Loose linkage.

o HYDRAULIC OIL
WARM-UP
Install JDG282
Temperature Gauge
Put cardboard or paper
around oil cooler to
PROCEDURE
(A) on transmission oil restrict air flow.
filter.

M43859 -UN-31 AUG88 M43860 -UN-31 AUG88

Lock master/park Turn stop valve (A) to Heat oil to temperature

brake pedal into PARK CLOSED position. specified in test.
position.
Move rockshaft control After oil is heated, turn
Run engine at FAST lever REARWARD to stop valve to OPEN
idle. raise lift arms. position.

Move rockshaft control Periodically cycle all After test is completed

M43861 -UN-31AUG88
lever FORWARD to M43862 -UN-31AUG88
hydraulic functions to and before tractor is
lower lift arms. distribute heated oil. returned to customer,
make sure you remove
cardboard or paper
from around oil cooler.

MX,25010HU,2 -19-160CT91

250-10-1 191091
 Power Train Tests and Adjustments/Adjust Transmission Neutral Return Spring

ADJUST
SAFELY raise rear
TRANSMISSION wheels are off the
NEUTRAL
ground.

Mechanical front wheel SAFELY support

drive DISENGAGED. tractor with jackstands
under axle housings.
Master/park brake MAKE SURE there is
OFF. M45009 UN31 AUG88
proper CLEARANCE
from all moving parts.
Two-speed axle lever
in SLOW speed
position.

A CAUTION: Use EXTREME OFF the jackstands.

CAUTION when doing this
adjustment because drive wheels Foot control pedals in NEUTRAL
WILL ROTATE in forward or position.
reverse direction as soon as the
engine is STARTED. Make sure Run engine at HALF throttle.
MFWD is disengaged BEFORE
you START the engine;
otherwise, it may pull the tractor

IMPORTANT: Drive wheels will stop turning AFTER ADJUSTMENT:

with eccentric in two different positions (180 GO TO e.
GROUP
degrees apart). You MUST BEGIN the 05.
adjustment with NARROW SIDE (A) of
eccentric towards REAR of tractor and the
WIDE SIDE (C) towards the FRONT.

Loosen cap screw (8) inside right frame. Turn

M45010 -UN-31AUG88
eccentric until drive wheels STOP TURNING.
Continue turning eccentric until you find the
midpoint between the start of forward and
reverse wheel rotation. Hold eccentric at that
point and tighten cap screw. Cycle foot controls
forward to reverse to neutral several times to
check adjustment.

MX,25010HU,3 -19-160CT91

250-10-2 191091
 Power Train Tests and Adjustments/No Movement In Either Direction

Turn nut (A) until AFTER ADJUSTMENT:

., ADJUST
TRANSMISSION
return spring length is GO TO e,
GROUP
NEUTRAL RETURN
approximately 133 mm 05.
SPRING
(5.2 in.).

NOTE: The return

spring length is only an
initial setting. Length
may val}' with different M45011 -UN-31AUG88

attachments and
operator preference.

After selecting the MOVEMENT IN ONE DIRECTION TRACTOR WILL NOT REACH
POWER TRAIN
appropriate symptom, ONLY: GO TO CD FULL SPEED: GO TO G
DRIVE TEST
go to that step and
perform the following NO MOVEMENT IN EITHER TRANSMISSION OPERATING
If unit DOES NOT
operate properly, checks, tests, or DIRECTION: GO TO G HOT: GO TO.
select the appropriate adjustments in the
symptom from list at order shown to isolate LOW POWER/WHEELS STALL
right. and repair TOO EASILY: GO TO G
malfunctions.
MX,25010HU.5 -19160CT91

Inspect transmission control linkage for wear or

MOVEMENT IN
ONE DIRECTION
damage. (See Section 50.)
ONLY
Inspect main relief inlet check for damaged valve
seat, valve, or broken spring. (See Section 50.)

Inspect transmission main relief cartridge for

damaged valve seat, valve, or broken spring.
(See Section 50.)

Test transmission main relief valve opening

pressure: GO TO e
Disassemble transmission and inspect for
internal leakage or damage. (See Section 50.)

MX,25010HU,6 19-160CT91

250-10-3 191091
 Power Train Tests and Adjustments/Tractor Will Not Reach Full Speed

G NO MOVEMENT
Inspect transmission control linkage for wear or
damage. (See Section 50.)
IN EITHER
DIRECTION
Test charge pump pressure: GO TO

Inspect transaxle suction screen for plugged

condition. (See Section 50.)

Check charge relief valve: GO TO e

Adjust charge relief valve: GO TO

Test charge pump flow: GO TO e

Inspect main relief inlet checks for damaged
valve seat, valve, or broken spring. (See Section
50.)

Disassemble transmission and inspect for

internal leakage or damage. (See Section 50.)

e LOW
POWER/WHEELS
Test charge pump pressure: GO TO

STALL TOO
Inspect transaxle suction screen for plugged
EASILY
condition. (See Section 50.)

Check charge relief valve: GO TO e

Adjust charge relief valve: GO TO

Test charge pump flow: GO TO e

Inspect main relief inlet check for damaged valve
seat, valve, or broken spring. (See Section 50.)

Disassemble transmission and inspect for

internal leakage or damage. (See Section 50.)

MX.25010HU,8 -19-160CT91

e TRACTOR WILL
NOT REACH FULL
Inspect transmission control linkage for wear or
damage. (See Section 50.)
SPEED
Inspect throttle linkage for wear or damage. (See
Section 220.)

Check engine fast idle. (See Section 220.)

Inspect main relief inlet check for damaged valve

seat, valve, or broken spring. (See Section 50.)

Inspect transmission main relief cartridge for

damaged valve seat, valve, or broken spring.
(See Section 50.)

Test transmission main relief valve opening

pressure: GO TO

Disassemble transmission and inspect for

internal leakage or damage. (See Section 50.)
MX,25010HU,9 -19-160CT91

250-10-4 191091
 Power Train Tests and Adjustments/Charge Relief Valve Check

_ TRANSMISSION Inspect oil cooler for debris.

~ OPERATING HOT
Inspect oil cooler inlet and return lines for restrictions.

Inspect oil cooler by-pass valve for damaged spring, valve, valve seat, or stuck valve.
(See Section 50.)

Test charge pump pressure: GO TO 0

Inspect transaxle suction screen for plugged condition.
(See Section 50.)

Check charge relief valve: GO TO 0

Adjust charge relief valve: GO TO.

Test charge pump flow: GO TO 0

Inspect main relief inlet check for damaged valve seat, valve or broken spring.
(See Section 50.)

Inspect transmission main relief cartridge for damaged valve seat, valve or broken
spring. (See Section 50.)

Test transmission main relief valve opening pressure: GO TO 0

Disassemble transmission and inspect for internal leakage or damage.
(See Section 50.)

. , TRANSMISSION ESSENTIAL TOOLS

CHARGE PUMP
PRESSURE TEST A-JT05488 Connector
B-JT03017 Hose
Heat hydraulic oil to
43C (110F). See 0 C-JT03344 Gauge 2000 kPa (300 psi)
in this group.
SPECIFICATIONS
ACAUTION: To
avoid injury from Oil temperature-43C (11 oaF)
escaping hydraulic
oil under pressure, Engine speed-fast idle (3450 pump rpm)
relieve the pressure
in the system by Charge pressure-827-1241 kPa
stopping the (120-180 psi)
engine and
Make test connections from JT01765 and
operating all
JT05738 Consumer Products Hydraulic Fitting
hydraulic control
kits.
valves in all
directions several M45012
Run engine at TEST SPECIFICATIONS.
times.
LOOK: Record pressure reading.
Remove platform
shield and seat panel. CHARGE PRESSURE LOW: GO TO 0

250-10-5
 Power Train Tests and Adjustments/Transmission Charge Pump Flow Test

., CHARGE RELIEF Remove charge relief CHARGE RELIEF

VALVE CHECK
valve plug (A) and VALVE OK: GO TO.
check for a broken
spring or a stuck or CHARGE RELIEF
damaged valve. VALVE DAMAGED:
REPLACE AND
CHECK CHARGE
PRESSURE. THEN ....
GO TO GROUP
05.

M45014 UN31AUG88

ADJUST CHARGE
If charge relief valve is NOTE: One 0.03 mm CHARGE PRESSURE
NOT damaged. ADD (0.001 in.) shim will OK: GO TO
RELIEF VALVE
shims (A) in spring change charge relief GROUP 05.
retainer to INCREASE valve opening pressure
charge pressure. by approximately 7 kPa CHARGE PRESSURE
(1 psi). LOW: GO TO e
Check charge
M45015 UN31AUG88
pressure.
MX,25010HU,13 19160CT91

ESSENTIAL TOOLS
TRANSMISSION
CHARGE PUMP
A-JT03367 Connector C-JT05531 Hose
FLOW TEST
B-JT03369 Coupler D-STD12 Flowmete
Heat hydraulic oil to
SPECIFICATIONS
43C (110F). See 0
in this group.
Oil temperature ................. 43C (110F)
Engine speed ................ 3425 25 rpm
A CAUTION: To
Minimum pump flow ... " .. , , , , 15 L/min. (4 gpm)
avoid injury from
escaping hydraulic oil
under pressure,
relieve the pressure
in the system by
stopping the engine
and operating all
hydraulic control
valves.

NOTE: Line (E) is oil

M45016 UN31 AUG88
cooler inlet. .

Continued on next a e
250-10-6 191091
 Power Train Tests and Adjustments/Transmission Relief Valve High Pressure Test

Make test connections from JT05738 Consumer CHARGE PUMP FLOW BELOW SPEC, INSPECT
Products Hydraulic Fitting kit and JT05469 FOR:
Flowmeter Kit.
DAMAGED OR WORN CHARGE PUMP.
Run engine at TEST SPECIFICATIONS.
INTERNAL TRANSMISSION LEAKAGE, WEAR,
LOOK' Record pressure reading. OR DAMAGE.

,14 -19-160CT91

from escaping hydraulic oil under

., TRANSMISSION RELIEF VALVE pressure, relieve the pressure in
HIGH PRESSURE TEST the system by stopping the
engine and operating a/l hydraulic
control valves.
Heat hydraulic oil to 43'C (11 O'F),
See 0 in this group. NOTE: If reverse test port is used,
remove MFWD drive shaft.
A CAUTION: To avoid injury

ESSENTIAL TOOLS Move two-speed axle

lever to FAST speed
A-JT05488 Connector C-JT03362 Gauge position.
B-JT03364 Hose 70,000 kPa (100,000 psi)
Depress brake pedals.

SPECIFICATIONS A CAUTION: Tractor

may move slightly
Oil temperature ................. 43'C (11 O'F) during test.
Engine speed ...................... fast idle
System pressure ............ 41370-44817 kPa
(6000-6500 psi)

Make test connections from JT05738 Consumer

Products Hydraulic Fitting kit.

Install fittings into forward (D) or reverse (E)

pressure test ports.

M45017 -UN-31 AUG88

Run engine at TEST IF SYSTEM PRESSURE IS LOW, INSPECT

SPECIFICATIONS. FOR:

Move control pedal to DAMAGED HIGH PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE;

SLOW forward or REPLACE IF NECESSARY.
reverse position.
INTERNAL TRANSMISSION LEAKAGE, WEAR,
LOOK: Record OR DAMAGE.
M43932 -UN-31 AUG88
pressure reading.
MX,2501 OHU, 15 -19-160CT91

250107 191091
 Power Train Tests and Adjustments/Adjust PTO Lever and PTO Selector Lever

~ ADJUST Run engine at SLOW HOLD differential lock AFTER ADJUST-

W TRANSAXLE
DIFFERENTIAL
idle. pedal in ENGAGED MENT GO TO e,
position. GROUP 05
LOCK PEDAL Depress control pedal
to SLOW froward posi- The bottom of pedal IF DIFFERENTIAL
tion and ENGAGE dif- must be approximately LOCK STILL WILL
ferential lock pedal. 15 mm (0.6 in.) from NOT ENGAGE:
STOP the engine. footrest. If necessary,
adjust yoke (A) until REPAIR TRANSAXLE
dimension is correct. DIFFERENTIAL
LOCK ASSEMBLY.
(SEE SECTION 50.)

CD ADJUSTPTO
LEVER AND PTO
Move PTO lever to
OFF position.
Disconnect PTO valve
linkage.
SELECTOR Pull PTO valve arm
LEVER (A) and PTO rod (B)
REARWARD. Turn
Remove left wheel yoke (C) until hold-in
and fender. yoke aligns with hole-in
arm.
M45021 Connect PTO valve
M45006
linkage.

Move PTO selector AFTER ADJUSTMENT: GO TO 0, GROUP 05.

lever to MID and
IF PTO STILL DOES NOT ENGAGE/DISENGAGE:
REAR PTO positions.
Disconnect adjustable link from arm on side of transmission and shift by
LOOK: Lever MUST hand.
BE between tabs (AJ
If PTO can be engaged/disengaged properly, external linkage is binding or is
of PTO quadrant.
out of adjustment.
If necessary, loosen If arm moves but does not engage/disengage PTO(S), PTO linkage is not
screws (B). Move PTO shifting PTO selector valve (hydraulic valving problem).
quadrant until lever is
between tabs. Tighten IF SELECTOR SHAFT IN SIDE OF TRANSMISSION CASE IS STUCKI
screws. BINDING: Try to free up by operating arm with vise grips or large pliers.
IF STILL BINDING OR ROTATES HARD, IT MAY NEED TO BE DRIVEN
FROM CASE TO CLEAN/SERVICE.
USE THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE:
Drive spring pin out and remove arm from shaft.
Remove PTO cover from rear of transmission.
If needed, rotate shaft so that inner arm on shaft clears PTO reduction shaft.
Drive shaft to inside of case and remove. Clean/service and reinstall.
IF PTO STILL DOES NOT ENGAGE,
DISASSEMBLE TRANSAXLE (SEE SECTION 50)
AND INSPECT FOR:
Damaged PTO valve or selector lever linkage.
Damaged PTO valve.
Damaged PTO clutch pack.
Damaged PTO brake pack.
Damaged PTO gears or shift collar.

250-10-8
 Power Train Tests and Adjustments/Adjust Forward Control Pedal

Move two-speed axle AFTER ADJUSTMENT:

ADJUST
TRANSAXLE lever to "N" GO TO e,
GROUP
TWO-SPEED AXLE
(NEUTRAL) position. 05.
LEVER
LOOK: Lever MUST IF TWO-SPEED AXLE
BE between tabs (A) DOES NOT ENGAGE:
on two-speed axle
quadrant. REPAIR TRANSAXLE
M45023 UN31AUG88
TWO-SPEED AXLE
If necessary, loosen ASSEMBLY. (SEE
screws (B). Move SECTION 50.)
quadrant until lever is
between tabs. Tighten
screws.

,18 19160CT91

Remove platform
48 ADJUST CRUISE CONTROL LOCK
shield.
NOTE: Before adjusting cruise control linkage,
inspect linkage for wear or damage. Repair or Master/park brake
replace as necessary. (See Section 50.) DISENGAGED.

Cruise control lever

DISENGAGED.

Depress REVERSE
control pedal.

Pawl (A) MUST BE

1-3 mm (0.04-0.12
in.) ABOVE ratchet (B).

M45024 -UN-31AUG88

If adjustment IS necessary, loosen cap screw AFTER ADJUSTMENT:

(A). GO TO e,
GROUP
05.
IMPORTANT: NARROW SIDE (8) of eccentric
MUST face towards FRONT of tractor.

Turn eccentric (C) until pawl is 1-3 mm

(0.04-0.12 in.) ABOVE ratchet. Hold eccentric
M45025 UN31AUGBB
and tighten cap screw.
MX,25010HU,19 19160CT91

CD FORWARD
ADJUST
Depress control pedal
to FULL speed
CONTROL PEDAL
position.

Bottom of control
Master/park brake
DISENGAGED. pedal MUST BE 7-10
mm (0.3-0.4 in.)
ABOVE footrest.
M45026 UN31 AUGBB Continued on next a e
250-10-9 191091
 Power Train Tests and Adjustments/Adjust Seat/Control Pedals Lockout Rod

Loosen nuts (A). AFTER ADJUSTMENT:

GO TO e.
GROUP
Turn rod (8) until specification is obtained. 05.

IMPORTANT: Ball joints (C) MUST BE

PARALLEL after nuts are tighten.

Hold ball joints and tighten nuts.

ADJUST REVERSE CONTROL PEDAL Speed control pedals

in NEUTRAL position.
Master/park brake DISENGAGED.
Pull UPWARD on
Remove platform shield. cruise control lever.

LOOK' Ratchet (A) Loosen nuts (A).

MUST contact pawl (8)
at the FIRST notch. Turn rod (8) until
ratchet contacts pawl
at the FIRST notch.

IMPORTANT: Ball
joints (C) MUST BE
M45028 -UN-S1AUG88 M45029 -UN-S1 AUG88
PARALLEL after nuts
are tightened.

Hold ball joints and

tighten nuts.

AFTER ADJUSTMENT:
GO TO e.
GROUP
05.

MX,25010HU,21 19-160CT91

CD ADJUST
Remove platform
shield and seat panel.
Pull lock arm (A)
REARWARD until lock
SEAT/CONTROL
PEDALS LOCKOUT
arm is tight against
ROD
Loosen nut (A). cam (8).

Tighten nut.

M450S0 -UN-S1AUG88 M450S1 -UN-S1AUG88 Continued on next a e

250-10-10 191091
 Power Train Tests and Adjustments/Adjust Seat/Control Pedals Lockout Rod

Move seat to the Loosen lock nut (A). AFTER ADJUSTMENT:

MOST REARWARD GO TO GROUP
position. Turn plastic cap (8) until cap is 1-2 mm 05.
(0.04-0.08 in.) away from bottom of seat plate.
Operator OFF seat.
Hold cap and tighten lock nut.

250-10-11 191091
Power Train Tests and Adjustments/Adjust Seat/Control Pedals Lockout Rod

250-10-12 191091
 Group 15
Theory of Operation

POWER TRAIN OPERATION

This group divides the power train into the following This group will provide the necessary information
functional systems: needed to understand how these systems work
individually and together as an entire system. It is
Hydrostatic Transmission Operation. assumed that you have an adequate understanding of
Foot Control Linkage Operation. how the diesel engine operates; so, that will not be
Transaxle Operation. explained.
MFWD Operation.

250-15-1 191091
 Theory of Operation/Hydrostatic Transmission General Operation

HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION GENERAL OPERATION

CHARGE
INLET
CHECK

" " ' - - - . . , TRANSAXLE

PUMP
GCC
7CC
7CC
9CC

M48574
-...
COOLER
TRANSAXLE
RESERVOIR I 250
MESH

---.......:~--
I
......

Whenever the engine is running, the transmission and From the filter, oil flows through the two inlet check
hydraulic systems are filled with charge oil generated valves of the center section into the transmission
from their shaft driven pumps. Oil is drawn through the variable-displacement, axial-piston pump and to the
250 mesh screen from the transaxle reservoir by the fixed-displacement. axial-piston motor. The charge relief
hydraulic pump at the rear of the transaxle and by the valve provides sufficient back-pressure to keep the
charge pump at the front of the hydrostatic hydro lubricated. It is set between 120-180 psi and is
transmission, a shared reservoir system. The shim adjustable. There are two, non-adjustable, clo:seCI-I
hydrostatic transmission has a fixed, gerotor-type loop main system relief valves (one for each direction)
charge pump that forces the oil out through the oil located in the center section, which are set at 6000-
cooler and external filter. Both the oil cooler and filter 6500 psi.
have a bypass valve, located in the center section, to
ensure oil will always be supplied to the hydro should
the cooler and/or filter become plugged.

250-15-2
 Theory of Operation/Cross-Section View-Hydro Center Section

CROSS-SECTION VIEW-HYDRO CENTER SECTION

OIL COOLER
BYPASS
f .

OIL
FILTER ""
BYPASS

CHARGE
INLET
CHECK INLET CHECK
& MAIN
RELIEF

I \
CHARGE INLET CHECK
RELIEF & MAIN
VALVE RELIEF

1C -19-160CT91

250-15-3 191091
 Theory of Operation/Hydrostatic Transmission Neutral Operation

NEUTRAL OPERATION

- CHARGE
PRESSURE
OIL

M42288

When the foot control pedals are in neutral, only the neutral vertical-plane, the displacement of the piston
charge pump and the variable-displacement pump are cylinders of the pump are equalled and non
rotating. They are connected to the engine drive shaft high-pressure generating. Charge pressure alone is
(which turns in a counterclockwise direction) via their not great enough to turn the motor.
shared splined shaft. When the swashplate is in the

10 19160CT91

250-15-4 191091
 Theory of Operation/Hydrostatic Transmission Forward Operation

FORWARD OPERATION

CHARGE
PRESSURE
OIL

- HIGH
PRESSURE
OIL

M42280

As the operator depresses the forward foot control pressure against the incline of the fixed-displacement
pedal, the swash plate of the variable-displacement swashplate, forcing the cylinder block and drive shaft
pump rotates, via mechanical linkages, away from the of the motor to rotate. Whenever the
vertical plane of the neutral position. A change in variable-swash plate of the pump is in the opposite
displacement inside the piston cylinder bores results. plane as the motor fixed-swash plate, the motor drive
This change in displacement generates high-pressure shaft will turn in the same direction as the pump drive
oil in the closed-loop from the variable-displacement shaft. Bolted to the end of the motor drive shaft is
pump to the fixed-displacement motor. This the transaxle input gear, which drives the transaxle
high-pressure oil enters the motor inlet port and and the MFWD.
pushes against the pistons, which transfer the

19160CT91

250-15-5 191091
 Theory of Operation/Hydrostatic Transmission Reverse Operation

REVERSE OPERATION

_ CHARGE
PRESSURE
OIL

_HIGH
PRESSURE
OIL

IMUU

As the operator depresses the reverse foot control pressure against the incline of the fixed-displacement
pedal, the swashplate of the variable-displacement swashplate, forcing the cylinder block and drive shaft
pump rotates, via mechanical linkages, away from the of the motor to rotate. Whenever the
vertical plane of the neutral position. A change in variable-swashplate of the pump is in the same plane
displacement inside the piston cylinder bores results. as the motor fixed-swash plate, the motor drive shaft
This change in displacement generates high-pressure will turn in the opposite direction as the pump drive
oil in the closed-loop from the variable-displacement shaft. Bolted to the end of the motor drive shaft is
pump to the fixed-displacement motor. This the transaxle input gear, which drives the transaxle
high-pressure oil enters the motor inlet port and and the MFWD.
pushes against the pistons, which transfer the

250-15-6 191091
 Theory of Operation/Foot Control Linkage Operation

FOOT CONTROL LINKAGE OPERATION

I
CRUISE CONTROL LEVER

SEAT
TURN BRAKE
I
LOCKOUT
PEDALS
D
1

SEAT
LOCKOUT
LATCH

NEUTRAL
ECCENTRIC

REVERSE SPEED
M42282
LIMITING LINKAGE

The right side foot pedals help control ground speed NOTE: In the following drawings, only the primary
and direction through linkages to the hydro pump components associated with the function
swashplate. This drawing shows and keys out the being explained will be highlighted.
major components. Familiarize yourself with these
terms and component locations as they will be
repeated often in these theory stories.

250-15-7 191091
 Theory of Operation/Foot Control Linkage Operation

SEAT LOCKOUT OPERATION

DIRECTIONAL FOOT
CONTROL PEDALS

NEUTRAL
RETURN
' - - - - - - - - - - - BRACKET

M42283

When the operator is out of the seat, the seat directional foot control pedal linkages. If the operator
lockout rod is relaxed enough to allow the lockout is getting on or off the tractor and accidentally
latch to move down and engage the top of the depresses one of the right-side foot control pedals,
neutral return bracket. This prevents the neutral while he is off the seat, the seat lockout linkage will
return bracket from pivoting forward. Consequently, prevent the tractor from moving.
this locks-out the hydro swashplate bracket and both

250-15-8 191091
 Theory of Operation/Foot Control Linkage Operation

FORWARD OPERATION

FORWARD
PEDAL

HYDRO
SWASH PLATE
BRACKET

FORWARD CONTROL
ROD

M42284

When the operator is sitting on the seat, the seat bracket is forced up the swashplate bracket ramp
lockout rod is depressed which moves the lockout causing the top portion of the neutral return bracket
latch up to unlock the neutral return bracket. This in to move forward while the bottom portion moves
turn frees-up the neutral return bracket, swashplate rearward. The rearward movement of the bottom part
bracket, and the forward/reverse control pedal of the neutral return bracket stretches the neutral
linkages. When the forward foot control pedal is return spring. The tension generated in the neutral
depressed, the control rod moves towards the rear return spring will pull the linkage back into neutral
and causes the hydro pump swash plate bracket to when the operator removes his foot from the forward
pivot downward and propel the tractor forward. control pedal.
Consequently, the cam roller of the neutral return

250-15-9 191091
 Theory of Operation/Foot Control Linkage Operation

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATION

CRUISE CONTROL
STOP KIT
(OPTIONAL)

1;; .....'1;;1.1 TO

MASTER-BRAKE
ROD

M42285

The cruise control lever allows the operator to lock a The operator does not have to continually hold is foot
desired ground speed into position and permit him to on the pedal, which becomes uncomfortable and
remove his foot from the control pedal without the lends itself to inconsistent ground speeds.
linkage automatically returning to neutral. When the
forward pedal is depressed and the cruise lever is An optional Cruise Control Stop Kit pre-sets a desired
moved up, the cruise speed pawl becomes engaged operating ground speed that the operator can return
in one of the notches of the cruise ratchet bracket. to time-after-time.
This holds the hydro swashplate bracket at one
ground speed position for extended periods of time. (Continued on the next page)

19160CT91

250-15-10 191091
 Theory of Operation/Foot Control Linkage Operation

CRUISE CONTROL
STOP KIT
(OPTIONAL)

HYDRO
SWASH PLATE
BRACKET _

WELDED TO
MASTER-BRAKE
ROD

M42285

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATION (Continued) linkage to move down in the eccentric bracket slot to
pull the cruise ratchet bracket down and away from
The cruise control linkage can be disengaged in three the cruise speed pawl, which immediately causes the
quick ways: cruise control lever linkage to drop down into the
disengaged position,
depress the forward pedal further-this causes the
cruise speed pawl to move out of the cruise ratchet depress the cruise control lever-this causes the
bracket, which immediately causes the cruise control cruise ratchet bracket to move down and away from
lever linkage to drop down into the disengaged the cruise speed pawl, which immediately causes the
position, cruise control lever linkage to drop down into the
disengaged position.
depress the master/park brake pedal-this causes
the cruise release rod of the master/park brake

250-15-11 191091
 Theory of Operation/Foot Control Linkage Operation

REVERSE OPERATION

HYDRO
SWASHPLATE
BRACKET

REVERSE
SPEED
LIMITING
BRACKET

TO TWO-SPEED
SELECTOR

~
RETURN BRACKET

REVERSE SPEED LIMITING ROD

M42286 TWO-SPEED EXTERNAL SHIFTER ARM

When the operator is sitting on the seat, the seat down the swash plate bracket ramp causing the top
lockout rod is depressed which moves the lockout portion of the neutral return bracket to move forward
latch up to unlock the neutral return bracket. This in while the bottom portion moves rearward. The
turn frees-up the neutral return bracket, swash plate rearward movement of the bottom part of the neutral
bracket, and the forward/reverse control pedal return bracket stretches the neutral return spring. The
linkages. When the reverse foot control pedal is tension generated in the neutral return spring will pull
depressed, the control rod moves forward and causes the linkage back into neutral when the operator
the hydro pump swashplate bracket to pivot upward removes his foot from the reverse control pedal.
and propel the tractor forward. Consequently, the
cam roller of the neutral return bracket is forced (Continued on the next page)

250-15-12 191091
 Theory of Operation/Foot Control Linkage Operation

REVERSE
SPEED
LIMITING
BRACKET

TO TWO-SPEED
SELECTOR

~
REVERSE SPEED LIMITING ROD
M42286 TWO-SPEED EXTERNAL SHIFTER ARM

REVERSE OPERATION (Continued) rod moves down which also rotates the limiting
bracket up to prevent the forward/reverse connecting
On early tractors, reverse travel was limited by the rod from moving fully forward in the frame slot. So
length of the slot in the frame. This meant in actually, the HI-range reverse speed is being limited
LO-range, reverse speed would be half of the to gain increased reverse speed in LO-range. When
HI-range. On later units the slot was lengthened and the two-speed selector is moved up into LO-range,
linkage was added to allow the reverse speed to be the limiting rod moves up and rotates the limiting
the same in HI- or LO-range. This was done to bracket down and away from the forward/reverse
benefit back and forth operation when using a loader. connecting rod to permit full slot travel.

When the two-speed range selector is moved down

into the HI-range position, the reverse speed limiting

250-15-13 191091
 Theory of Operation/Foot Control Linkage Operation

MASTER BRAKE AND TURN BRAKE OPERATION

RIGHT TURN
BRAKE .... O:;L.._L

TO LEFT BRAKE
LINKAGE (SAME AS RIGHT
SIDE)

BRAKE
NEUTRAL
RETURN
SPRING

CONTROL ROD

NEUTRAL RETURN
BRACKET

CONNECTING ROD
-------TRANSAXLEBRAKE
LEVER
M42287

When the operator depresses the master brake and provide the necessary tension to return the
pedal, the brake linkage on both sides of the frame system linkage to neutral when the operator removes
are actuated at the same time because of the his foot.
internal through-rod that connects both sets of
linkages. The control rods cause the break system Conversely, the left-side turn brakes operate
neutral return brackets to move reward at the bottom separately. When the operator depresses the inside
and forward at the top. The forward, top rotation of turn brake pedal, the internal through-rod actuates
the neutral return brackets pull forward on the only the right-side brake linkage (independent of the
transaxle brake connecting rods and external brake master brake pedal assembly). Likewise, the outside
levers, engaging the transaxle brakes. The brake turn brake pedal actuates only the left-side brake
systems neutral return springs stretch in the process linkage (independent of other linkages).

250-15-14 191091
 Theory of Operation/Foot Control Linkage Operation

MASTER/PARK BRAKE OPERATION

BRAKE
NEUTRAL
RETURN
BRACKET
BRAKE
LEVER
M42288

To engage the master/park brake, the operator must operator. At the same time, the ratchet connecting
first depress the master/park brake pedal so the park rod moves forward proportionately to gradually
brake pawl moves down to gain clearance for the engage the park brake lockout latch with the hydro
park brake ratchet bracket. Next, the operator raises neutral return bracket. Consequently, this locks-out
the park brake lever to rotate the park brake ratchet the hydro neutral return bracket, hydro swashplate
bracket rearward to engage the park brake pawl as bracket, and the forward/reverse foot control pedals.
the master/park brake pedal is released by the

19160CT91

250-15-15 191091
 Theory of OperationlTransaxle Operation

TRANSAXLE OPERATION

SPLINED

I ENGINE:
COUPLER
I HYDRAULIC
HYDROSTATIC
PUMP I PTO
SELECTOR
I PTO
CLUTCH
I PUMP

MID I REAR
PTO PTO
-----
TRANSAXLE
FILTER HYDROSTATIC
, MOTOR
OUTPUT
GEAR II HI/La
SELECTOR I DIFFERENTIAL ~ FINAL ~ DRI VE
--=:J
LOCK DRIVE r-- WHE EL

I MFWD
DRIVE
~ BEVEL PINION
G~R
I I
.
0'-=J.
.
DIFFERENTIAL
H FINAL
DRIVE
~
f--
DRI VE
WHEEL

M48577 , 0
The transaxle consists of the following mechanical Power flow is transmitted from the engine through the
flows: hydrostatic transmission pump into the hydrostatic
motor and drive shaft output gear. This hydro output
hydraulic pump drive. mid/both/rear PTa HilLa gear transmits power through the HI/La selector
range differential lock final drive MFWD (if quadrant into the spiral-beveled pinion shaft and ring
equipped) gear of the differential assembly. The left side
differential assembly bevel pinion gear transfers the
Transaxle serial number is imbedded in a flat surface power to the axle gears of the left differential
located just below the left rockshaft lift arm. planetary final drive and out the drive axle to the left
drive wheel.
The hydraulic pump is driven off the rear of the main
PTa input drive shaft. This drive shaft is connected The differential lock uses a sliding collar with pins to
by a splined coupler to the hydrostatic pump drive engage the right side differential beveled pinion gear
shaft. The hydrostatic pump drive shaft is connected to lock the left and right axles together. Thus power
directly to the engine flywheel drive shaft. is transfer equally to the axle gears of the right
differential planetary final drive and out the drive axle
The main PTa input drive shaft also has the main to the right drive wheel.
input gear that drives the PTa clutch. The mid and/or
rear PTa drive is selected by the operator by moving The optional MFWD (standard equipment on 955) is
the shift collar via the shift linkage. engaged by a sliding shift collar.

250-15-16 191091
 Theory of Operation/Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD) Operation

MECHANICAL FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (MFWD) OPERATION

FINAL
DRIVE
GEAR

The MFWD drive shaft is bearing supported at both drive pinion, to the MFWD differential gears and out
ends. The MFWD drive shaft transmits the torque to the final drive assemblies.
through the input shaft, to the drive gear, to the bevel

250-15-17 191091
Theory of Operation/Mechanical Front Wheel Drive (MFWD) Operation

250-15-18 191091
 Section 260
Steering and Brake Operation and Tests
Contents
Page

Group 05-Steering and Brakes System

Checkout
About This Group ................ 260-05-1
Steering System Check ............ 260-05-1
Master/Park Brake Pedal Travel Check . 260-05-1
Turn Brake Pedals Travel Check . . . . .. 260-05-2
Tractor Drive Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 260-05-2
Operator Complaint Not Identified ..... 260-05-2

Group 10-Steering and Brakes System Test

and Adjustments
About This Group ............... . 260-10-1
Hydraulic Oil Warm-Up Procedure .... . 260-10-1
Steering Relief Valve Pressure Test ... . 260-10-2
Steering System Leakage Test ...... . 260-10-2
Steering Valve Leakage Test ........ . 260-10-3
Adjust Turn Brake Pedals Freeplay 260-10-8

Group 15-Theory of Operation

Brakes Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 260-15-1
Steering Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 260-15-2

260-1 191091
Contents

260-2 191091
 Group 05
Steering and Brakes System Checkout

ABOUT THIS GROUP

Always begin with this group to identify a failure in This procedure is designed as a quick check of the
the steering and brakes systems. The step-by-step systems. While performing a check, concentrate only
procedures will provide you with a quick check of the on the check you are performing and disregard
systems. No tools are required to perform these signals from unrelated components.
checks. If a failure is indicated you will be referred to
a more detailed check, adjustment, or test.

Always start with the first step and follow the

sequence from left to right. Read each step
completely before performing the check.

1 -1

o STEERING
Turn steering wheel
FULL left, then FULL
LOOK: Front wheels
MUST turn FULL left
OK: GO TO e
SYSTEM CHECK
right. then FULL right. NOT OK: GO TO e
Run engine at FULL OR e, IN GROUP 10.
throttle. FEEL: Smooth,
constant effort should
be felt.

M43855 -UN-31AUG88
FEEL: A solid stop
should be felt at the
end of a full turn.

MX,HU,26005,2 -19-160CT91

MASTER/PARK
LOOK" Master/park OK: GO TO e
brake locking pawl (A)
BRAKE PEDAL
TRAVEL CHECK
MUST ENGAGE NOT OK: GO TO e, IN
ratchet bracket (8) in GROUP 10.
any of the first six
Engage park brake.
notches.

M43856 -UN-31AUG88 MX,HU,26005,3 -19-160CT91

260-05-1 191091
 Steering and Brakes System Checkout/Operator Complaint Not Identified

., TURN BRAKE PULL both turn brake OK: GO TO .

pedals (A) at the same
PEDALS TRAVEL
CHECK time BY HAND. NO OK: GO TO e, IN
GROUP 10.
LOOK: Pedals should
be EVEN with each
other at the end of
travel.
M43857 UN-31AUG88 MX.HU.26005.4 -19-160CT91

TRACTOR DRIVE
CHECK

Run engine at FAST

idle. Operate unit
Operate machine in FORWARD and REVERSE.
Make FULL left and FULL right turns. Use TURN
BRAKES to assist in some turns.

LOOK: Front wheels MUST turn FULL left and

NOT OK: CHECK
TRANSMISSION OIL
LEVEL.

OIL LEVEL OK: GO

under NO LOAD and FULL right. When TURN BRAKES are used the TOe
then under LOAD appropriate rear tire will SLOW DOWN or STOP.
conditions.
M43858 -UN-31AUG88
FEEL: Smooth constant effort should be felt
Perform this check in through steering wheel. Brakes should feel solid.
an open area.

-19-160CT91

If you completed the checkout procedure and REPEAT SYSTEM CHECK-OUT IN THIS
Cit COMPLAINT
OPERATOR
NOT DID NOT isolate a malfunction, the problem may GROUP.
IDENTIFIED be intermittent.
IF MALFUNCTION IS NOT IDENTIFIED AFTER
Try to duplicate the conditions of the malfunction REPEATING SYSTEM CHECK-OUT
identified by the operator. PROCEDURE; FACTORY ASSISTANCE IS
AVAILABLE THROUGH THE DEALER
TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE CENTER (DTAG).
MX,HU,26005,6 19-160CT91

260-05-2 191091
 Group 10
Steering and Brakes System Test and Adjustments

ABOUT THIS GROUP

The step-by-step procedures in this group provide you Engine rpm and oil temperature are critical in most
with the detailed diagnostic information you will need hydraulic tests. Be sure to follow test specifications
to perform a test. Basic tools and diagnostic carefully.
equipment are used.
Always start with the first step and follow the
It is assumed that you are familiar with the machine sequence from left to right. Read each step
and its steering and brakes systems components. completely before performing the test.

Complete the following visual checks before doing Upon completing a test or adjustment, repeat check
any tests or adjustments: to see whether the problem has been corrected.

Oil level and condition. External leaks from lines

and fittings. Loose linkages.

o HYDRAULIC OIL
WARM-UP
Install JDG282
Temperature Gauge
Put cardboard or paper
around oil cooler to
PROCEDURE
(A) on transmission oil restrict air flow.
filter.
IMPORTANT: Don't
forget to remove
cardboard or paper
from around oil
M43859 -UN-31 AUG88 M43860 -UN-31AUG88
cooler after tests and
adjustments are
completed or damage
to vital components
may occur.

MX,HU,26010,2 -19-160CT91

Engage master/park Turn "STOP" valve (A) Heat oil to temperature

brake. to CLOSED position. specified in test.
Move rockshaft control
Run engine at FAST lever REARWARD to After oil is heated, turn
idle. raise lift arms. "STOP" valve to
OPEN position and
Move rockshaft control Periodically cycle all REMOVE cardboard or
lever FORWARD_ hydraulic functions to paper from around oil
M43B61 -UN-31AUG88 M43862 -UN-31 AUG88
distribute heated oil. cooler.
MX.HU,26010,3 -19-160CT91

260-10-1 191091
 Steering and Brakes System Test and Adjustments/Steering Valve Leakage Test

ESSENTIAL TOOLS
STEERING
RELIEF VALVE
PRESSURE TEST A-Connector C-JT03345 Gauge
B-JT03017 Hose 20,000 kPa (3,000 psi)
D-ORFS Cap
Heat hydraulic oil to
43C (11 OF), See 0 TEST SPECIFICATIONS
in this group.
Oil Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 43C (11 OF)
A CAUTION: To Engine Speed .................. FULL throttle
avoid injury from Relief Valve Pressure ....... 10687 kPa (1550 psi)
escaping hydraulic oil
under pressure,
relieve the pressure
in the system by
stopping the engine
and operating all
hydraulic control
valves.

Make test port connections from JT01765 and OK: GO TO e.

JT05738 Consumer Products Hydraulic Fitting
kits. NOT OK: REPLACE
RELIEF VALVE
START engine and run at TEST CARTRIDGE.
SPECIFICATIONS. CARTRIDGE IS NOT
ADJUSTABLE. SEE
Move steering wheel to FULL right turn. HOLD in SECTION 60, GROUP
this position. Read pressure. 05.
MX.HU.26010,4 -19-160CT91

e STEERING SYSTEM LEAKAGE TEST With wheels turned in

a FULL right position,
Heat hydraulic oil to 43C (110F), See 0 in this turn steering wheel
group. with a constant torque
of 6.8 N'm (60 Ib-in.).
Run engine at SLOW idle.
Count the rpm.

M43864 -UN-31AUG88

With wheels turned in SPECIFICATIONS 5 RPM OR LESS:

a FULL left position, STEERING SYSTEM
turn steering wheel Oil Temperature ................. 43C (110F) OK - GO TO O.
with a constant torque Engine Speed .................... SLOW idle
of 6.8 N'm (60 Ib-in.). Maximum Right Turn rpm ............... 5 rpm MORE THAN 5 RPM:
Maximum Left Turn rpm ................ 5 rpm GO TO .
Count the rpm.

M43865 -UN-31AUG88 MX.HU.26010.5 -19-160CT91

260-10-2 191091
 Steering and Brakes System Test and Adjustments/Steering Valve Leakage Test

ED STEERING VALVE
LEAKAGE TEST
IMPORTANT: O-Ring Face Seal (ORFS) plugs
MUST BE USED to plug pressurized hydraulic
hoses.
STOP engine.
A CAUTION: To avoid injury from escaping
hydraulic oil under pressure, relieve the
pressure in the system by stopping the
engine and operating all hydraulic control
M43B66 UN31AUGBB
valves.

Disconnect hydraulic hoses (A and B) from

steering cylinder.

Install ORFS caps on cylinder fittings and ORFS

plugs in ends of hoses.

Run engine at SLOW idle.

With wheels turned in With wheels turned in

a FULL right position, a FULL left position,
turn steering wheel turn steering wheel
with a constant torque with a constant torque
of 6.8 N'm (60 Ib-in.). of 6.8 N'm (60 Ib-in.).

Count the rpm. Count the rpm.

M43B64 UN31AUGBB M43B65 UN31 AUGBB

SPECIFICATIONS 5 RPM OR LESS: STEERING VALVE OK-

REMOVE AND REPLACE STEERING
Oil Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 43'C (11 Q'F) CYLINDER.
Engine Speed .................... SLOW idle
Maximum Right Turn rpm ............... 5 rpm MORE THAN 5 RPM: REMOVE AND REPAIR
Maximum Left Turn rpm ................ 5 rpm STEERING VALVE. SEE SECTION 60.

MX,HU,26010,6 19160CT91

260-10-3 191091
Steering and Brakes System Test and Adjustments/Steering Valve Leakage Test

260-10-4 191091
 Steering and Brakes System Test and Adjustments/Steering Valve Leakage Test

First, lock the master/park brake linkages: AFTER ADJUSTMENT:

ADJUST
MASTER/PARK
pedal (A) in the FIRST NOTCH of TEST DRIVE
the park brake ratchet bracket. Turn alignment bolt (I) rearward until TRACTOR. THEN
BRAKE PEDAL
end of bolt seats against adjuster RECHECK
FREEPLAY
DO NOT REMOVE return springs block's left tab. Adjust bolt further MASTER/PARK
(B, C, and Q). until adjuster block is perpendicular BRAKE PEDAL
NOTE: Reference both or square to pedal arms (D and H),
the photograph and FREEPLA Y AND
Loosen rear jam nuts (F) first, then as shown in the line drawing. TURN BRAKE
the line art on the
following pages at the front jam nuts (K) on both sets of PEDALS
adjuster linkages. Left and right turn brakes (S and T) ALIGNMENT-THEY
same time to better MUST BE equal when depressed. If
understand this MUST BE EQUAL.
Loosen front jam nuts (J) so you not, adjust left side alignment bolt RE-ADJUST IF
adjustment procedure. until both pedals are equal when
can back-off alignment bolts (I) until NECESSARY.
the ends of the bolts are flush with pulled forward by hand into
the rear edge of jam nuts (L) on engaged position.
both sets of adjuster linkages.
NOTE' Freeplay (U) is the distance
Adjust the master/park brake of pedal travel from initital contact
linkage first (right side). the foot to the point of engagement
of the brake plates and disks
Put a large screwdriver behind the (resistance beyond return spring
pivot point of the pivot bracket (M) tension being felt).
and push against the front edge of
the adjustment rod (G) mounting pin The amount of freeplay (U) of the
with just enough force to overcome master/park brake pedal (A)
spring pressure and hold linkage in generated by the above adjustment
the engaged position. procedure allows ample brake
engagement in the first park setting
Turn rear jam nut (F) forward and also allows for easy
against spacer and adjuster block disengagement of both the park
(E) until adjuster block's right tab is brake and cruise control linkage.
seated against the front end of the
master/park brake pedal arm slot
(D). Turn the front jam nut (K)
rearward until it is snug against
adjuster block (E). Tighten rear jam
nut (F). Remove the screwdriver.

Repeat the above procedure for the

left side linkage.

Release the park brake and

complete the following step for both

260-10-5 191091
 Steering and Brakes System Test and Adjustments/Steering Valve Leakage Test

ADJUST MASTER/PARK BRAKE PEDAL FREEPLAY

A-Master/Park Brake Pedal F-Rear Jam Nut K-Front Adjuster Rod Jam P-Return Spring
B-Right Turn Brake Pedal G-Adjuster Rod Nut Q-Left Turn Brake Pedal
Return Spring H-Rlght Turn Brake Pedal L-Rear Alignment Bolt Jam Return Spring
C-Master/Park Brake Pedal Arm Nut R-Cross Shafts
Return Spring I-Alignment Bolt M-Pivot Bracket 5-Left Turn Brake Pedal
D-Master/Park Brake Pedal J-Front Alignment Bolt Jam N-Connecting Rod T-Right Turn Brake Pedal
Arm Nut O-External Brake Lever Arm U-Freeplay
E-Adjuster Block

260-10-6 191091
Steering and Brakes System Test and Adjustments/Steering Valve Leakage Test

-19-160CT91

260-10-7 191091
 Steering and Brakes System Test and AdjustmentslAdjust Turn Brake Pedals Freeplay

ADJUST TURN
BRAKE PEDALS
FREEPLAY

IMPORTANT: Both
Pull DOWN on both turn brake pedals at the
same time BY HAND.

LOOK' Position of turn brake pedals MUST BE

EQUAL. If unequal, see steps in previous
OK: PROCEDURES
COMPLETE.

NOT OK: GO TO
THIS GROUP.
left and right brake module.
linkages MUST BE
ADJUSTED EQUALLY.
MX,HU,26010,9 19160CT91

260-10-8 191091
 Group 15
Theory of Operation

BRAKES OPERATION

CAM

BRAKE METAL
LEVER -...., I~~ PLATES (2)

FIBER
DISCS (2)

CAM PLATE

M48578

Left Side, Rear View

The controls include a left and right turn brake pedal. cam in this drawing) which forces the cam plate's
Both are located on the left side. A master/park cavity ramps to roll up on three balls. This moves the
brake pedal is located on the right side. metal plates and rotating fiber discs (splined to the
axle shaft) together and stop the axle from turning.
The brakes work on a cam and a roller ball and When the brake lever is released, the three return
cavity plate arrangement to sandwich two brake fiber springs pull the cam plate and cam back into neutral
disks between two metal plates to stop or help turn position to release the metal plates from the fiber
the tractor. discs and allow them and the axle shaft to turn
freely.
When a brake lever is actuated, the brake cam
rotates against the cam plate finger (hidden by the

260-15-1 191091
 Theory of Operation/Steering Operation

STEERING OPERATION

_ _..._ _ _. ; . : : ; . - - - - TO PTO
CLUTCH
p T

STEERING

L R STEERING LINK

CYLINDER ....- .....__...

STEERING ........-......- .....

The steering system consists of a cylinder, a In a right turn, the control valve is positioned to the
self-centering control valve and a gerotor-type pump. opposite side allowing pressure oil to enter the
These are hydraulically and mechanically gerotor from the opposite direction, back through the
interconnected. control valve and into the rod end of the cylinder.
Return oil from the piston end of the cylinder is
When in neutral (steering wheel not being turned), oil directed back through the control valve and out to
entering the power steering valve goes directly to the the PTO clutch.
control valve and looped back out to the PTO clutch.
The oil in the steering cylinder is trapped. Anytime the rotation of the steering wheel stops, oil
flow from the gerotor stops and the control valve is
When the steering wheel is turned to the left, the returned to neutral position by the centering springs.
control valve is positioned to allow pressure oil to go
to the gerotor, back through the control valve and The relief valve and check valve protect the steering
into the piston end of the cylinder. Return oil from system from shock loads.
the rod end is directed back through the control valve
and out to the PTO clutch.

19160CT91

260-15-2 191091
 Section 270
Hydraulic Operation and Tests
Contents
Page Page

Group OS-Hydraulic System Checkout Group 1S-Theory of Operation

Before You Start ..................... 270-05-1 Hydraulic Pump and Flow Control
Hydraulic Troubleshooting Chart ........ 270-05-1 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-15-1
Hydraulic Troubleshooting Problem or Symptom Rockshaft Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-15-2
Hydraulic Pump Noise ................ 270-05-1 Steering Valve Operation ............. 270-15-4
No Hydraulic Functions/No Power Selective Control Valve Operation ...... 270-15-5
Steering .......................... 270-05-2 PTO System Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-15-6
Hydraulic Functions Are Slow .......... 270-05-2 655,755/756,855/856, and 955
Hydraulic Oil Overheats ............... 270-05-2 Hydraulic Schematic ................ 270-15-8
No Hydraulic Functions/Power Steering Hydraulic Schematic with Location
Works or Is Slow ................... 270-05-3 Drawings ....................... 270-15-12
Rockshaft Hitch Will Not Lift. ........... 270-05-3
Selective Control Valves Failor
Function Erratically ................. 270-05-3
Auxiliary Hydraulics Failor Operate
Slowly ........................... 270-05-4
Hydraulic Pump Leaks ................ 270-05-4
,No Hydraulic System Pressure ......... 270-05-4
Selective Control Valve Check .......... 270-05-5
Rockshaft Check .................... 270-05-5
Rockshaft Free Play Check ............ 270-05-5
Rockshaft Stop Valve Check ........... 270-05-6
Power Steering Priority Check .......... 270-05-6
Operator Complaint Not Identified ....... 270-05-6

Group 10-Hydraulic System Tests and

Adjustments
Hydraulic Pump Flow Test ............. 270-10-1
System Relief Valve Pressure Test
Without SCV ...................... 270-10-1
System Relief Valve Pressure Test
With SCV ......................... 270-10-2
Transaxle Lube Pressure Test .......... 270-10-3
PTO Clutch Engagement Pressure Test .. 270-10-3
Adjust Rockshaft Valve ............... 270-10-4
Rockshaft Leakage Test ............... 270-10-4

270-1
I Contents

270-2 191091
 Group 05
Hydraulic System Checkout

BEFORE YOU START

Always begin with this Group to identify a failure in the Always start with the first step and follow the sequence
hydraulic system. The step-by-step procedures in this from left to right. Read each step completely before
Group provide you a quick check of the system. No tools performing the check.
are required to perform these checks. If a failure is
indicated, you will be referred to a more detailed check,
adjustment, or test.

HYDRAULIC TROUBLESHOOTING CHART

PROBLEM OR SYMPTOM . ......................................................... SOLUTION

Hydraulic pump noise. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GO TO "

No hydraulic functions/no power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. GO TO Q
Hydraulic functions are slow ......................................................... GO TOe
Hydraulic oil overheats .............................................................. GO TOe
No hydraulic functions/power steering works or is slow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GO TO G
Rockshaft hitch will not lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GO TO G
Selective control valves fail or function erratically. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. GO TO 0
Auxiliary hydraulics fail or operate slowly................................................ GO TOm
Hydraulic pump leaks .......................................................... GO TO 0
No hydraulic system pressure ........................................................ GO TOe

o HYDRAULIC PUMP NOISE

PUMP CAVITATION

1. Check hydraulic oil level.

2. Check for correct hydraulic oil type and viscosity.
3. Check suction pipe fittings for air leaks.
4. Check reservoir screen (filter) and vent for plugging.
5. Hydraulic pump seal leak.
6. Hydraulic pump bolts loose or housing distorted.
7. Hydraulic pump scored or worn.
8. Pump drive coupler worn or damaged.
9. Hydraulic lines not clamped properly.
10. Hydraulic pump running to fast or direction of rotation wrong.
11. Hydraulic pump inlet line restricted.
12. Hydraulic pump has worn or broken parts.
13. Hydraulic pump is not priming. Fill filter 1/2 full of oil before installing.

270-05-1
 Hydraulic System Checkout/Hydraulic Troubleshooting Problem Or Symptom

4) NO HYDRAULIC FUNCTIONS/NO POWER STEERING

1. Check hydraulic oil level, type and viscosity.
2. Check suction line for air leaks (includes suction line and fittings to hydrostatic transmission charge pump).
3. Hydraulic pump seals leaking including pump shaft seal.
4. Check for plugged reservoir screen and vent. (Includes checking brake linings, if brakes are used excessively
on an incline, instead of diff-Iock, abnormal wear occurs. Brake lining material plugs screen and filter.)
5. Check for damaged or missing hydraulic pump coupler.
6. Hydraulic pump damaged (scored or worn).
7. System relief valve stuck open.
8. Cracked flow divider housing.

G HYDRAULIC FUNCTIONS ARE SLOW

1. See) -No Hydraulic Functions.
2. Rate-of-drop/stop valve turned in.
3. Hydraulic pump scored or worn.
4. System relief valve setting too low.
5. Proportional flow divider valve installed incorrectly-755/756/855/856.
6. 100 mesh screen between rockshaft control valve and rocks haft housing plugged.
7. Unload valve or flow control valve leaking or malfunction.
8. Rockshaft spool valve scored.

G) HYDRAULIC OIL OVERHEATS

1. Hydraulic system operated extensively in relief.

2. Operating with stop valve closed and rockshaft control lever rearward.
3. Stop valve stuck closed or pump pressure set too high.
4. Improperly adjusted feedback linkage (system in relief, control valve not neutralized).
5. Selective control valves not neutralizing.
6. System relief valve set too low or pump flow is dumping through a relief valve.
7. Leak in rockshaft cylinder, implement relief valve or system leakage is excessive.
8. Implement relief valve set too low or leaking.
9. Transmission cooler plugged or inadequate cooling system.
10. Transmission operating extensively in relief.
11. Cooler bypass valve stuck open.
12. Transmission closed loop relief valve set too low.
13. Tractor overloaded.
14. Pinched or restricted hydraulic line or low oil level in reservoir.
15. Improperly matched hydraulic component or implement.
16. Auxiliary hydraulic jumber hose not installed after implement was removed.

270-05-2
 Hydraulic System Checkout/Hydraulic Troubleshooting Problem Or Symptom

G NO HYDRAULIC FUNCTIONS/POWER STEERING WORKS OR IS SLOW

1. Check hydraulic oil level, type and viscosity.
2. Check suction line for air leak.
3. Check for plugged reservoir screen and vent. (Includes checking brake linings, if brakes are used excessively
on an incline, instead of diff-Iock, abnormal wear occurs. Brake lining material plugs screen and filter.)
4. Scored hydraulic pump.
5. Rockshaft piston cover cracked.
6. Tractors without SCV: hydraulic oil diverter plug installed (plug use for SCV kits and auxiliary hydraulic kits).
7. Auxiliary hydraulic jumper hose not installed.
8. 100 mesh screen between rockshaft control valve and rockshaft housing plugged.
9. O-ring blown between rockshaft control valve and rockshaft housing.
10. Unloading valve stuck open.
11. Check for damaged or missing hydraulic pump coupler.
12. Hydraulic pump damaged (scored or worn).
13. Flow control valve or relief valve stuck open.
14. Protective rubber cover left on SCV when installed blocking passages.

o ROCKSHAFT HITCH WILL NOT LIFT

1. See e -No Hydraulic Functions.
2. Auxiliary hydraulic jumber hose not installed or plug not removed.
3. Stop valve closed.
4. System relief valve setting too low.
5. Load to great.
6. Implement relief valve setting too low or valve leaking.
7. Rockshaft piston scored or seals leaking.
8. 100 mesh screen between rocks haft control valve and rockshaft housing plugged.
9. Unloading valve stuck open.
10. Rockshaft spool valve scored or seals failed.
11. Flow control valve stuck open.
12. Lower valve stuck open.
13. Lever linkage bent.

CD SELECTIVE CONTROL VALVES FAIL OR FUNCTION ERRATICALLY

1. See e -No Hydraulic Functions.

2. Relief valve stuck open.
3. Selective control valve rubber protector not removed when SCV's were installed.
4. Coupler tips battered causing hydraulic lock.
5. Diverter plug not installed.

270-05-3
 Hydraulic System Checkout/Hydraulic Troubleshooting Problem Or Symptom

., AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS FAIL OR OPERATE SLOWLY

1. See G) -No Hydraulic Functions.
2. Diverted plug not installed.
3. 100 mesh screen between rockshaft control valve and rockshaft housing plugged.
4. Selective control valves are not neutralized.
5. Rockshaft control valve is in raised position.

o HYDRAULIC PUMP LEAKS

1. Seal installed incorrectly or damaged on installation.
2. Pressure in pump case due to drain line restriction.
3. Misalignment of drive coupling.
4. Damaged shaft.
5. Incorrect valve (closed center) or line blocked on pressure side.

NO HYDRAULIC SYSTEM PRESSURE

1. System relief valve not set high enough.
2. Oil bypassing to reservoir due to misadjusted or stuck valves.
3. Pump running too slowly.
4. Cold oil or fluid or incorrect fluid.
5. Air leak or restriction at inlet line.
6. Internal wear of pump parts.
7. Low fluid level.
8. Broken internal pump parts.

270-05-4
 Hydraulic System CheckoutlRockshaft Free Play Check

o SELECTIVE
CONTROL VALVE
Pull SCV lever
REARWARD and
Push lever FORWARD
to first stop and
Push lever FULLY
FORWARD to FLOAT
(SCV) CHECK
release. release. position.

LOOK' Lever MUST LOOK" Lever MUST LOOK' Lever MUST

return to NEUTRAL. return to NEUTRAL. stay in FLOA T position.

M43973 UN-31AUG88 MX.HU.27005.2 -19-160CT91

Pull SCV lever to the Push lever to the Push lever FULLY OK: GO TO"
LEFT (toward seat) RIGHT to first stop RIGHT slowly and
and release. and release. release. NOT OK: GO TO
SECTION 70, GROUP
LOOK: Lever MUST LOOK: Lever MUST FEEL: There MUST BE 10 FOR REPAIR.
return to NUETRAL. return to NEUTRAL. two separate positions
(farthest position is
REGENERA TlVE
M43974 -UN-31AUG88
function). Lever MUST
return to NEUTRAL.

-19-160CT91

ROCKS HAFT
Turn stop valve (A) is Run engine at FAST
CHECK
FULLY OPEN. idle.

M43862 -UN-31AUG88 MX.HU.27005,4 -19160CT91

Push rockshaft lever NOTE: It may be Pull rockshaft lever OK: GO TO e

FULLY FORWARD to necessary to push FULLY REARWARD
LOWER rockshaft. rockshaft arms down into stop quadrant. NOT OK: GO TO e
to get rockshaft arms GROUP 10, THEN
fully lowered. LOOK" Rockshaft REFER TO SECTION
MUST raise FULL Y. 70, GROUP 15 AS
NEEDED.

M43946 -UN-31 AUG88 MX.HU.27005.5 -19-160CT91

., ROCKSHAFT
FREE PLAY CHECK
Raise rockshaft
FULLY.
Move lift arms (A) UP
and DOWN by hand to
check for free play in
.,
FREE PLAY: GO TO

FULL RAISE position. NO FREE PLAY: GO

TO e,
GROUP.
FEEL: There MUST BE
some FREE PLA Y.

M43912 -UN-31AUG88 MX.HU.27005.6 -19-160CT91

270-05-5 191091
 Hydraulic System Checkout/Operator Complaint Not Identified

ROCKSHAFT
Turn stop valve (A) Push rockshaft lever OK: GOTOe
STOP VALVE
FULLY CLOSED FORWARD to LOWER
CHECK
(clockwise). position. NOT OK:
DISASSEMBLE AND
Raise rockshaft. LOOK: Rockshaft arms REPAIR STOP VALVE
MUST NOT MOVE (SEE SECTION 70,
GROUP 10).
OPEN stop valve after
M43862 UN31AUG88
check is complete.
MX,HU,27005,7 19160CT91

LOWER mower (or Turn steering wheel OK: GOTOe

POWER
STEERING
attachment) to ground. and RAISE attachment
PRIORITY CHECK
AT THE SAME TIME. NOT OK:
Turn steering wheel DISASSEMBLE AND
and note effort FEEL: Steering effort REPAIR FLOW
needed. MUST BE THE SAME DIVIDER (SEE
SECTION 70, GROUP
10).
M43855 UN31AUG88 MX,HU,27005,8 19160CT91

., OPERATOR COMPLAINT NOT IDENTIFIED Try to duplicate the If malfunction IS NOT

conditions of the identified after
If you completed the checkout procedure and malfunction as repeating the hydraulic
DID NOT isolate a malfunction, the problem may identified by the system checkout
be intermittent. operator. procedure, factory
assistance is available
Repeat the system through the Dealer
checkout procedure. Technical Assistance

270-05-6 191091
 Group 10
Hydraulic System Tests and Adjustments

NOTE: Use the torque specifications charts in Section

10, Group 15, anytime you are fastening hydraulic
hoses, lines, and fittings-unless otherwise stated
in a particular module.

MX,HU,27010,1 -19-160CT91

HYDRAULIC
ESSENTIAL TOOLS
PUMP FLOW TEST
JT05738 and JT01765 C/P Fitting Kit
Remove pump outlet JT05469 - Flowrater
line. (2)JT03368 45 Connectors

SPECIFICATIONS
Install C/P flowrater
and hose where line
Engine " " . ' " " " _ , , , , , _ , , , , , _ . 3450 rpm
was removed.
Pump flow .... , , , ..... 655-16 L/min. (4.2 gpm)
755/756/855/856-22.5 Llmin. (6 gpm)
955-26.5 L/min. 7 gpm)

M43905 -UN-31AUG88

IMPORTANT: OPEN Oil MUST BE at NORMAL operating FLOW LOW: GO TO SECTION 70,
the flowrater control temperature. GROUP 05.
valve FULL V BEFORE
STARTING ENGINE. Run engine at TEST
Closing control valve SPECI FICATIONS.
completely may
damage hydraulic LOOK- Record flow reading.
pump.
FLOW OK: GO TO e. MX,HU,27010,1A -19-160CT91

e SYSTEM RELIEF VALVE PRESSURE TEST

WITHOUT SCV

Install 3000 PSI gauge in test port on top of

rockshaft inlet block.

Oil MUST BE normal operating temperature.

Continued on next page

270-10-1 191091
 Hydraulic System Tests and Adjustments/System Relief Valve Pressure Test With SCV

ESSENTIAL TOOLS CLOSE rockshaft stop

valve FULLY.
JT05738 and JT01765 C/P Fitting Kit
JT03366 90 Elbow Connector
JT03017 Hose
JT03345 3000 PSI Gauge

SPECIFICATIONS
M43906 UN31AUG88
Engine speed ................... Half throttle
Relief valve pressure
655,755/756,855/856 ....... 13652-14617 kPa
(1980 psi-2120 psi)
955 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 16665-17650 kPa
(2417-2560 psi)

MOMENTARILY move PRESSURE LOW:

rocks haft control lever ADD SHIME AND
to FULL RAISE RETEST.
position.

LOOK: Record test

pressure.

., SYSTEM RELIEF ESSENTIAL TOOLS

VALVE PRESSURE
TEST WITH SCV
JT05738 and JT01765 C/P Fitting Kit
JT03340-Quick Coupler
Install 3000 psi gauge JT03343-Fitting
at quick coupler. JT03002-Fitting
JT03017-Hose
Oil MUST BE at JT03345-3000 PSI Gauge
normal operating
SPECIFICATIONS
temperature.
Engine speed .............. Half speed throttle
Relief valve pressure
655,7551756,855/856 ...... 13,652-14,617 kPa
(1980-2120 psi)
955 .................... 16,665-17,650 kPa
(2417-2560 psi)

Pressure quick coupler with SCV lever.

M43908 UN31 AUG88 LOOK Record test pressure.

Continued on next a e
270-10-2 191091
 Hydraulic System Tests and Adjustments/PTO Clutch Engagement Pressure Test

PRESSURE LOW:
ADD SHIMS AND
RETEST.

MX,HU,27010,3 19-160CT91

TRANSAXLE
ESSENTIAL TOOLS
LUBE PRESSURE
TEST
JTO 5738 and JTO 1765 C/P Fitting Kit
JT05486-Connector
Install gauge test port JT03017-Hose
at right rear of JT03363-30 PSI Gauge
transaxle (1/4 in. pipe
SPECIFICATIONS
plug).
Engine speed ...................,. 3450 rpm
Oil MUST BE at
Lube pressure
normal operating
655, 755/756, 855/856 . . . . . . . . . . .. 21-41 kPa
temperature.
(3-6 psi)
955 .......................... 41-76 kPa
(6-11 psi)

Run engine at TEST PRESSURE LOW:

SPECIFICATIONS. CHECK LUBE RELIEF
MAY BE STUCK
LOOK: Record test OPEN OR EXCESSIVE
pressure. WEAR OF PARTS IN
THE PTO LUBE
CIRCUIT.

MX,HU,27010,4 19160CT91

ESSENTIAL TOOLS
PTO CLUTCH
ENGAGEMENT
JT05738 and JT01765 Fitting Kit
PRESSURE TEST
JT03365-45 Connector
JT03017-Hose
Install gauge in test
JT03344-300 PSI Gauge
port at left rear of
transaxle (1/4 in. pipe
SPECIFICATIONS
plug).
Engine speed ..................... 3450 rpm
Oil MUST BE normal
Clutch pressure ............ ,. 827 kPa (120 psi)
operating temperature.
Run engine at test specifications.

LOOK- Record test pressure.

M48557 UN11DECB9 Continued on next a e

270-10-3 191091
 Hydraulic System Tests and AdjustmentslRockshaft Leakage Test

PRESSURE LOW:
ADD SHIMS TO
DELAY RELIEF VALVE
(B) AND RETEST.

MX,HU,27010,5 19160CT91

ADJUST
Place rockshaft lever in Loosen turnbuckle
ROCKSHAFT
FULL RAISE position. jam nut (A).
VALVE
Engine at HIGH idle.

Turn turnbuckle (B)

until engine LOADS
DOWN.
M43988 UN07SEP88

Lengthen turnbuckle 4 Cycle lift arms several times.

to 6 flats.
LOOK: Lift arms should have a small amount of
play at FULL RAISE.

ROCKSHAFT
Rockshaft valve Place rockshaft lever in FULL RAISE position.
LEAKAGE TEST
adjustment MUST BE
CORRECT. STOP engine.
Oil MUST BE at
normal operating Install implement or Measure amount of DROP at END of draft arms.
temperature 50C weight box weighing
(120F). 350 kg (770 Ibs.). SPECIFICATION

2 mm (0.079 in.) in one minute

IN SPEC: SYSTEM CLOSE stop valve (A). Repeat test.

NORMAL.
LEAKAGE SPECIFICATION
OUT OF SPEC:
CONTINUE 2 mm (0.079 in.) in one minute

OPEN stop valve (A) after test is complete.

M43862 UN31 AUG88

IN SPEC: With stop valve CLOSED, OUT OF SPEC: With stop valve
check and repair the following: CLOSED, check and repair the
Leaking or misadjusted lowering following:
valve. Implement relief valve
O-rings between rockshaft control Rockshaft piston O-rings
valve and rockshaft housing. Scored rockshaft cylinder
Scored rockshaft valve spool or Cracked piston cover
housing.
Stop valve damaged or leaking.
MX,HU,27010,7 19160CT91

270-10-4 191091
 Group 15
Theory of Operation

HYDRAULIC PUMP AND FLOW CONTROL OPERATION

CCWFROMRE~
rr=,==E==NG==IN==E===;-]1 ) U PRIORITY P
FLOW ~ 40% C
DIVIDER ... ~ I,...;"........:E-~.;....;..;.-----__

r - - - +-~..;;::;.-.~
--
,-4-1,
I ~
PROPORTIONAL
FLOW DIVIDER

W '----
I ..,.-...&....-...,
60%

755~855
ONLY L.-L....---J
-J
-
~ - --'
RELIEF
VALVE
~~ 250 MESH
~~ SCREEN

l!ru
M48500

MODEL PUMP GPM SYSTEM RELIEF PRIORITY FLOW VALVE PROPORTIONAL FLOW DIVIDER

655 6cc(0.31 in) 4.0 GPM 205071 PSI NOT USED 40% / 60%

755/756 700(0.43;n) 5.6 GPM 205071 PSI 4.25 GPM 40% / 60%
855/856 7cc(0.43in) 5.6 GPM 205071 PSI 4.25 GPM 40% / 60%

955 900(0.55;n) 7.2 GPM 248871 PSI NOT USED 30% / 70%

Oil is drawn from the transaxle through a 250 mesh The 755/756 and 855/856 also have a flow-sensitive
screen by the gerotor-type gear pump. The pump is priority valve to allow enough flow to the rockshaft
driven by the engine through the hydro pump shaft and SCV's, if equipped.
and the transaxle main PTO shaft. Oil is pumped to
the flow control housing "P" port. The relief valve protects the hydraulic system from
excessive pressure build up. The relief valve is shim
The flow control housing for all models contains a adjustable.
proportional flow divider and system relief valve. The
proportional flow divider supplies adequate flow to the
power steering system first.

1 19160CT91

270-15-1 191091
 Theory of OperationlRockshaft Operation

ROCKSHAFT OPERATION

The rockshaft control valve is located on the right remain seated and trap the oil in the rockshaft
side of the rockshaft. The slow return stop valve cylinder.
(rate-of-drop valve) is located on the left side of the
rocks haft, it controls rate of flow to and from the With the rockshaft lever moved to the rear into raise
rockshaft cylinder. position, the main spool is moved to allow fluid to
flow into the back of the unloading valve to close it.
The rocks haft cylinder controls the 3-point hitch and Oil pressure builds and oil flows through the main
mid-mower lift system, unless the tractor has an spool and the flow control restrictor. This closes the
optional mid-lift cylinder. flow control valve and unseats the load check valve.
Fluid is directed to the rockshaft cylinder to raise the
The high pressure relief valve protects the rocks haft rockshaft arms. The arms will raise until the spool is
system from high pressure shock loads. The check shifted by the rockshaft feed back linkage.
valve prevents high pressure shock loads from gOing
back into the rockshaft control valve circuit. When the rocks haft lever is moved forward to lower
the lift arms, the unloading valve is open to sump,
When the rockshaft control lever is in the neutral just as in neutral. Mechanically the lowering valve is
position, the unloading valve is open to sump. Pump unseated and the rockshaft cylinder oil is directed to
output unseats the unloading valve and oil returns to sump.
sump. The load check valve and lowering valve

270-15-2 191091
 Theory of OperationlRockshaft Operation

t----------. INSTALL PLUG TO USE AUX. PORTS

<1>'00 MESH I
UNLOAD

LJ
I
I I VALVE
7 PSI
MAIN SPOOL I -s: I
.--._ _--/ '\ J.. ,J.. J.. ~ :
~ ~ ~ " I
~ I
l:
~ ~I-
W
PIVOT
... LIFT I

L------E---.J
'-.-/
- - - - - -
,---, I
G-
O LOWERING ~ 'Iv t--.J
VALVE
LOAD FLOW CONTROL
CHECK VALVE

<~100 MESH
ROCKSHAFT '--------_._-,--+------------------ - - -
CYLINDER

---I''II,t-----I~~~lI1H---4
V'\I
.....
-,
J
'--_ _ ~/f'
~_r_....I SLOW RETURN
STOP VALVE
RELIEF I
I
'--.,........1
VALVE~65~5~----------'

L.J 755
855
955
2560+/-142 PSI

2986+/-142 PSI
M48502
Neutral Position Shown

270153 191091
 Theory of Operation/Steering Valve Operation

STEERING VALVE OPERATION

_ _ _ _ _. ; ; ; - ; . - - - - TO PTa
CLUTCH
p T

STEERING

L R STEERING LINK

STEERING ,............- .....

CYLINDER

Neutral Position Shown

The steering valve consists of a self-centering control In a right turn, the control valve is positioned to the
valve with a gerotor-type pump. They are hydraulically opposite side. Pressure oil goes to the gerotor as in
and mechanically interconnected inside the valve. a left turn but is directed to the rod end of the
cylinder, reversing the cylinder operation and sending
When in neutral (steering wheel not being turned), oil the oil in the piston end back through the control
entering the valve goes to the control valve and is valve to sump.
directed back out of the steering valve to the PTa
clutch. The oil in the steering cylinder is trapped. When the rotation of the steering wheel stops, oil
flow from the gerotor stops and the control valve is
When the steering wheel is turned to the left, the returned to neutral position by the centering springs.
control valve is positioned to allow pressure oil to go
to the gerotor, back to the control valve and to the The relief valve and check valve protect the steering
piston end of the cylinder. Return oil from the rod system from shock loads.
end is directed to the control valve and out of the
power steering valve.

270-15-4 191091
 Theory of Operation/Selective Control Valve Operation

SELECTIVE CONTROL VALVE OPERATION

..
I
"-'" .040"
~t--~--
.......--.. w.J. T
.L.L
'T"
IJ. 'I I.L J.
ITA ITn ~
l-b& A1
R1 : -x.".. ~l.I REGEN.
81
R2 """"" ...---------....- -- --------.&. - - ---....- ...
FLOAT

MOWER UP

R3.J-.a A2. LU
R4~:.a
82

The selective control valve is a dual valve with one When the float spool is pushed all-the-way in (full
control lever. Both valves have a neutral, a forward position by the control lever), high pressure
pressure/return and a return/pressure position. The oil is blocked and both ports are connected allowing
front valve also has a regenerative position and the oil to flow in either direction. A detent holds the
rear valve has a float position. When the regenerative control lever in the float position until the operator
spool is pushed all-the-way in (full outward position pulls it out of float.
by the control lever), high pressure oil is directed out
the pressure port and the return oil is directed back When the optional mid-mower lift cylinder is installed
into the pressure port. This speeds up the function. to the regenerative valve, a 1 mm (0.040 in.) orifice in
The operator must hold the control lever in the the cylinder is used to slow down the oil flow, so the
regenerative position-there is no detent provided. mower does not raise or lower too fast.

-19-160CT91

270-15-5 191091
 Theory of Operation/PTO System Operation

PTO SYSTEM OPERATION

MODEL DELAY RELIEF VALVE LUBRICATION RELIEF

----
655
755 30-120 PSI 1.6 SECONDS 36 PSI

r--"
I i
855
955 33-158 PSI 1.6 SECONDS 6-11 PSI

1 - PTO CLUTCH
LUBRICATION
DELAY

~
RELIEF
I
L!.J ~--,

?= ""I...J. M
)(
r--
VALVE

LUBRICATION -
i

ON OFF
RELIEF
T VALVE ~ L!....J
PTO
CLUTCH
Alii
III I W: I
I
TAP FOR
PISTON PTO BRAKE
1/ PTO PRESSURE
"
"
Off Position Shown

The PTa system includes a PTa clutch, PTa brake, When the PTa is ON, hydraulic fluid is channeled to
delay relief valve, clutch control valve, lubrication the back side of the delay relief. Fluid is not directed
relief valve and lubrication circuit. to the clutch/brake circuit until pressure builds up to
specified reading and shifts the delay relief valve to
The PTa clutch control valve is a two position control close off inlet pressure. This pressure is channeled to
valve that directs fluid to the clutch/brake circuit the clutch/brake circuit to apply the clutch and
when it is moved to the ON position. In the OFF release the brake.
position, it dumps fluid from the clutch/brake circuit
back to sump. The clutch brake lubrication system relief valve
provides specified pressured lubrication oil to the
When the PTa is OFF, hydraulic pressure shifts the clutch and brake.
delay relief to direct inlet pressure to the lubrication
circuit. At the same time fluid in the clutch/brake
circuit is channeled to the sump to release the clutch
and apply the brake.

270-15-6 191091
Theory of Operation/PTa System Operation

270157 191091
 Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Hydraulic Schematic

655, 755/756, 855/856, AND 955 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM SCHEMATIC

1-Transaxle Reservoir 14-lnlet Check 25-Plug (Install to use 40-Meterlng Valve

2-250 Mesh Screen (55 15-Hydrostatic Motor auxiliary ports. Located 41-Steering Cylinder
Micron) 16-Flow Divider Housing in piston cove 42-PTO Clutch
3-Hydraulic Pump 17-Priority Flow Divider 26-Auxiliary Hydraulic Inlet 43-PTO Clutch Control
655 = 5 cc Valve (7551756/855/856 27-100 Mesh Screen Valve Spool
755/756/855/856 = 7 cc only) 28-Unloading Valve 44-PTO Clutch Piston
955=9cc 18-Flow Divider Valve Start closing at 48 kPa 45-PTO Brake
4-Hydrostatic Transmission 40%/60% for (7 psi) 46-PTO Pressure Test Port
5-Charge Pump 5.8 cc (.35 655/755/756/855/856 29-Rockshaft Spool Valve 47-Delay Relief Valve
In.3) 30%170% for 955 30-Rockshaft Control Valve Delay-1.6 seconds
6-Hydrostatic Pump 19-5ystem Relief Valve Housing 655/755/756/855/856 =
(variable output) 655/755/756/855/856 = 31-Lowering Valve 207-827 kPa (30-120
7-0il Cooler Bypass Valve 13652-14617 kPa (mechanically opened) psi)
552-896 kPa (80-130 psi) (1980-2120 psi) 32-Load Check Valve 955 = 228-1089 kPa
8-Transmission Oil Cooler 955 = 16665-17650 kPa 33-Flow Control Valve (33-158 psi)
9-011 Filter (2417-2560 psi) 34-Lowering Check (located 48-PTO Clutch/Brake
10-Make-up Check Valves 20-SCV Housing With in piston cover) Lubrication
11-Filter Bypass Valve Regenerative Spool 35-Slow ReturnlStop Valve 49-Lube Relief Valve
138-207 kPa (20-30 psi) 21-Mid-Mount Cylinder 36-Rockshaft Cylinder 655/755/756/855/856 =
12-Closed Loop Relief 22-Hydraulic Couplers 37-lmplement Relief Valve 21-41 kPa (3-6 psi)
Valve 23-SCV Housing With Float 38-Steering Valve 955 = 41-76 kPa (6-11
41370-44818 kPa Spool 39-Steering Relief Valve psi)
(6000-6500 psi) 24-Auxiliary Hydraulic Cartridge
13-charge Relief Valve Outlet (located in piston 10494-10998 kPa
965-1379 kPa (140-200 psi) cover) (1522-1595 psi)

270158 191091
 Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Hydraulic Schematic

/(DHYDRAULIC PUMP HYDROSTATIC

I ENGINE INLET CHECK 14 MOTOR

~
? ____--.:::::--- PRIORITY
FLOW DIVIDER FLOW DIVIDER
@
11 P ~~~~1~~5==~955~~
- 40% 30%
C ____________________~~~~~~~
HOUSING 7/855 r----..::::~;;;....--.--~ FLOW DIVIDER
ONLY I
~--
- 60%

5
CHARGE
PUMP
SCV HOUSING / W 12 CLOSED LOOP
REGEN. SPOOL RELIEF VALVES
----'
~
8

MID-MOUNT
COOLER MAKE-UP CHECK VALVES
CYLINDER T
@- HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION
.. STEERING --
STEERING
RELIEF
CARTRIDGE VALVE

@
METERING
VALVE

~~------------

L R LINK
UNLOAD
VALVE ,.....-L--.-~--L.-, STEERING CYLINDER

,,, PTO CLUTCH
I FLOW , @ PTO CLUTCH /
..... CONTROL
VALVE
!" CLUTCH
PTO
r---
I
I
BRAKE LUBRICATION
CLUTCH
,CONtROL~-'-------+~ SHAFT
DELAY
ROCKSHAFT __ J SPOOL I 43 RELIEF
CYLINDER
@ @ ----,I

~
--
ON
@
PTO _______ T"ITI""""" PTO @LU
CLUTCH PRESSURE LUBE RELIEF
PISTON PORT

ROCKSHAFT CONTROL VALVE HOUSING 30

M48697 55 SERIES HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC

MX HU 270202 -19-160CT91

270-15-9 191091
Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Hydraulic Schematic

270-15-10 191091
Theory of Operation/655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 Hydraulic Schematic

270-15-11 191091
 Theory of Operation/Hydraulic Schematic With Location Drawings

HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC WITH LOCATION DRAWINGS

1-System Relief Valve 10-Flow Divider Inlet 16-Auxillary External 1/4-ln. 22-Rockshaft Relief Valve
2-Priorlty Flow Divider 11-Proportlonal Flow Plug Outlet
3-Priority Flow Divider Divider Outlet To Power 17-Rockshaft Relief Valve 23-PTO Clutch Pressure
4-Proportlonal Flow Divider Steering Inlet 1S-Auxlliary Outlet Port Port
5-Proportional Flow Divider 12-8low Return Stop Valve 19-Auxiliary Inlet Port 24-PTO Clutch Lubrication
6-Regeneratlve Spool" Inlet 20-8low Return Stop Valve Port
Check Valve 13-Slow Return Stop Valve Inlet 25-PTO Clutch Inlet
7-Float Spool Check Valve 14-Rockshaft Control Valve 21-Slow Return Stop Valve 26-Rockshaft Control Valve
8-Drain Plug Outlet Outlet 27-100 Mesh Screens
9-Pump Inlet 15-Auxiliary InternalllS-in.
Plug

270-15-12 191091
 Theory of Operation/Hydraulic Schematic With Location Drawings

I ENGINE
P 5 6/7/855 955 ENGINE I
~ r~~4~OO~Yo==~3~Oo~~~C~~~___________________
r---~"""'~--'----U_ ~ PROPORTIONAL
(2)L_- "'4 60% FLOW DIVIDER
PRIORITY \.V
FLOW
DIVIDER
7/855 ONLY ----' HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION
--------- ~---......"",------

MID LIFT CYLINDER

T

EXTERNAL:1&
114" PLUG
POWER STEERING VALVE

@XF.~;;:===;:;':'=~
r-----
I R20 d@XI-----......:::..L.-:&
I 0 OR4 L R
I / R1 R3"-l
)REMOTES FRONT I
R3 I
@
LEFT
_ _---l~
RIGHT)
I ,
/
R1 R21 I
,, PTO CLUTCH
) TOP REAR I
L _______
VIEW R4 ~I I,
I
r----
I
I
I
I
I

LEFT RIGHT
---t ----,
I
I
~
-
I

I ON OFF
I
I

REAR
I
55 SERIES HYDRAULIC SCHEMATIC
MX HU 27020 4 -19-160CT91

270-15-13 191091
Theory of Operation/Hydraulic Schematic With Location Drawings

270-15-14 191091
 Index
Page Page
A B
Adjust
Battery
Charge Relief Valve ................ 250-10-6
Charge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10-3
Cruise Control Lock ................ 250-10-9
Load Test ........................ 240-10-4
Forward Control Pedal .............. 250-10-9
Test ............................ 240-10-3
Fuel Shutoff Solenoid-655/7551756 .. 240-10-17
Voltage Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10-3
Fuel Shutoff Solenoid-855/856/955 .. 240-10-17
Bleed
MFWD Front Axle End-Play .......... 50-20-32
Fuel Injection System .............. 220-10-6
MFWD Front Axle Toe-In ............ 50-20-32
Bleed Procedure
Operator's Height-European ........ 80-15-18
Hydraulic System ........... 50-05-28, 70-05-8
Operator's Seat-European .......... 80-15-10
Brake Disks
Operator's Weight-European Seat .... 80-15-12
Repair .......................... 60-15-11
PTO Lever/PTO Selector Lever ....... 250-10-8
Brake Linkage
Reverse Control Pedal ............. 250-1 0-1 0
Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-15-6
Rockshaft Control Valve ............. 70-15-23
Remove. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-15-1
Rockshaft Valve ................... 270-10-4
Service Equipment and Tools ......... 60-15-1
SeaVControl Pedals Lockout Rod ..... 250-10-10
Specifications ...................... 60-15-1
Slow/Fast Idle ..................... 220-10-7
Brakes Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260-15-1
Standard Front Axle End-Play ......... 60-05-4
Standard Front Axle Toe-In ............ 60-05-9
Throttle Cable ..................... 220-10-4 c
Transaxle Diff. Assembly Backlash ..... 50-10-56
Transaxle Differential Lock Pedal ...... 250-10-8 Charge Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10-3
Transaxle Two-Speed Axle Lever ...... 250-10-9 Charge Pump-Hydrostatic Transmission
Transmission Neutral ............... 250-10-1 Remove/Install. .................... 50-05-5
Transmission Neutral Return Spring .... 250-10-2 Charge Relief Valve
Turn Brake Pedals Freeplay .......... 260-10-8 Adjust. .......................... 250-10-6
Air Cleaner Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-10-5
Remove and Install .................. 30-20-2 Check
Air Cleaner Specifications ............. 30-20-1 Air Restriction Indicator ............. 220-05-1
Air Restriction Indicator Charge Relief Valve ................ 250-10-5
Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20-6, 220-05-2 Coolant Lamp/Neutral Start .. 210-05-1, 240-05-1
Remove and Install .................. 30-20-4 Coolant Temperature Lamp .......... 240-10-9
Alternator Cruise Control Adjustment. .......... 250-05-5
Installation ......................... 40-10-1 Cruise Control Lock ................ 210-05-8
Ground Test ...................... 240-10-6 Cruise Control Lock/Release ......... 210-05-5
Regulated Current Output Test ........ 240-10-6 Cruise Control Release (Forward) ..... 250-05-5
Unreg'd Current Output Test-35 Amp .. 240-10-7 Cruise Control Release (M/P Brake) ... 250-05-5
Unreg'd Current Output Test-40 Amp .. 240-10-8 Differential Lock ................... 210-05-9
Alternator Specifications ............. .40-05-1 Engine Coolant ................... 220-05-1
Assemble Engine Idle Speed ................. 220-05-4
Final Drives Axle Housing Assembly ... 50-15-13 Engine Lubrication ................. 220-05-1
Hydraulic Pump .................... 70-05-5 Engine Oil Pressure ................ 220-05-4
MFWD Axle Housing ................ 50-20-30 Engine Operating .................. 220-10-1
M FWD Differential. ................. 50-20-26 Engine Performance ....... 210-05-3, 220-05-4
MFWD Final Drive Case .............. 50-20-6 Engine Preheat Circuit. ............. 240-10-8
MFWD Spindle Gear Case ........... 50-20-18 Engine Start ...................... 220-05-4
Rockshaft Control Valve ............. 70-15-19 Fan and Belt ............. 220-05-2, 220-10-9
Rockshaft Housing ................. 70-15-12 Foot Control Pedal Lockout. . . . . . . . . . 210-05-1
Steering Valve .................... 60-10-13 Forward Control Pedal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-05-6
Steering Valve Control Valve Sect. ..... 60-10-19 Fuel Gauge .............. 210-05-2, 240-05-1
Steering Valve Metering Section ....... 60-10-14 Fuel System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220-05-3
Transaxle PTO Clutch ............... 50-10-47

Index-1
 Index

Page Page

Check-Continued Cooling System Test ............... 220-10-9

Instrument Panel Lamps .... 210-05-1, 240-05-1 Cross-Section Views
Left and Right Turn Brakes .......... 210-05-7 Steering Valve .................... 60-10-12
Light Switch ...................... 210-05-2 Hydro Center Section ....... 50-05-18, 250-15-3
Lighting Circuit. ................... 240-05-2 Hydrostatic Transmission ............ 50-05-10
Master/Park Brake Lock ............ 210-05-6 MFWD .......................... 50-20-16
Master/Park Brake Pedal Travel. . . . . . 260-05-1 PTO Clutch ....................... 50-10-47
Mechanical Front Wheel Drive-MFWD 210-05-9 Transaxle ........................ 50-10-12
MFWD Linkage ................... 250-05-4 Cruise Control
Oil Cooler ....................... 250-05-1 Adjustment Check ................. 250-05-5
Power Steering ................... 210-05-6 Lock Adjust. ...................... 250-10-9
Power Steering Priority. . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-05-6 Lock/Release Check ............... 250-05-5
PTO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-05-3 Release (Master/Park Brake) Check ... 250-05-5
PTO Brake ............... 210-05-5,250-05-4 Release Forward Pedal Check ....... 250-05-5
PTO Linkage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-05-2 Cruise Control Lock Check .......... 210-05-8
PTO Operation ................... 210-05-4 Cruise Control Release Check ........ 210-05-8
PTO Safety Start .......... 210-05-2, 240-05-3 Cutaway View
PTO/ Seat Safety Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . 210-05-3 MFWD Spindle Gear Case ............ 50-20-9
PTO/ Seat Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-05-3 Cylinder Compression Pressure
PTO/ Seat Switch Bypass ... 210-05-4, 240-05-4 Test. ............................ 220-10-7
Radiator Screen .................. 220-05-2
Reverse Control Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-05-6
Rockshaft .............. 210-05-10,270-05-5 D
Rockshaft Free Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-05-5
Rockshaft Stop Valve ..... 210-05-11, 270-05-6 Diagnosis
Seat Lockout Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-05-6 Electrical System .................. 240-10-1
Seat Switch PTO By-Pass (Override) .. 250-05-3 Diesel Engine
Selective Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-05-5 Remove and Install ................. 20-20-1
Selective Control Valve-SCV ...... 210-05-10 Repair. ........................... 20-05-1
Starting Circuit ............ 210-05-3, 240-05-3 Diesel Fuel North American ........... 10-20-1
Steering System .................. 260-05-1 Diesel Fuel Europe .................. 10-20-2
System Grounds .................. 240-10-2 Diesel Fuel Storage .......... 10-20-1, 10-20-2
Tachometer and Idle Speed ......... 210-05-3 Differential Lock Check ............. 210-05-9
Throttle Lever .................... 220-05-2 Disassemble
Tractor Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260-05-2 Final Drives ....................... 50-15-5
Transaxle Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . 250-05-2 Hydraulic Pump .................... 70-05-4
Transmission Drive ........ 210-05-7,250-05-2 MFWD Differential ................. 50-20-24
Transmission Neutral. ...... 210-05-7, 250-05-1 MFWD Differential Input Housing ...... 50-20-23
Transmission Neutral Return. 210-05-7,250-05-1 MFWD Final Drive Case ............. 50-20-4
TransmissionlTransaxle Oil Leak ..... 250-05-1 MFWD Spindle Gear Case ........... 50-20-10
Turn Brake Pedals Travel ........... 260-05-1 Rockshaft Housing ................. 70-15-10
Two-Speed Axle .................. 210-05-9 Rockshaft Control Valve ............. 70-15-17
Two-Speed Axle Linkage ............ 250-05-4 Steering Valve ..................... 60-10-4
Control Pedal Steering Valve Metering Section ....... 60-10-7
Forward Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-10-9 Steering Valve Steering Tube Sect. .... 60-10-10
Forward Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-05-6 Discharge Lamp
Reverse Adjust .................. 250-10-10 Short Circuit Test .................. 240-10-6
Reverse Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-05-6 Disconnect
Coolant Transaxle Linkage .................. 50-10-6
Temp. Lamp Short Circuit Test ...... 240-10-10 Drive Shaft-Hydrostatic Transmission
Temperature Lamp Check ........... 240-10-9 Install ............................ 50-05-4
Coolant Lamp/Neutral Remove .......................... 50-05-3
Start Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210-05-1, 240-05-1
Coolant, engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 10-20-4

Index-2
 Index

Page Page

E Engine Performance
Check .................. 210-05-3,220-05-4
Electric Fuel Pump Flow/Pressure Engine Start
Test ............................. 220-10-5 Check ........................... 220-05-4
Electrical Circuit Operation Essential Tools
Charging Circuit .................. 240-15-14 Standard Front Axle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-05-1
Coolant Temperature Circuit ......... 240-15-16 European Roll-Gard
Engine Preheat Circuit ............. 240-15-11 Exploded View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-20-2
Fuel Gauge Circuit ................ 240-15-17 Exploded View
Fuel Shutoff Circuit ................ 240-15-12 European Roll-Gard ................ 80-20-2
Fuel Transfer Pump Circuit. ......... 240-15-10 German Rear Hitch ................. 80-25-2
Lighting Circuit ................... 240-15-18 Operator's Seat-European .......... 80-15-4
Oil Pressure Circuit. ............... 240-15-15 Power Train Gears and Shafts ........ 50-25-2
PTO Circuit ....................... 240-15-8
Starting Circuit ................... 240-15-13
Electrical Component Location F
Fuel Gauge Sender ................ 240-15-5
Fuel Shutoff Solenoid ............... 240-15-3 Fabricated Tools
Fuel Transfer Pump ................ 240-15-3 Steering Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-10-1
Oil Pressure Sender ................ 240-15-5 Transaxle ......................... 50-10-1
PTO Lamp Switch .................. 240-15-1 Fan and Belt
PTO Magnet ...................... 240-15-4 Check ................... 220-05-2, 220-10-9
PTO Safety Seat Switch ............. 240-15-1 Final Drives
PTO Selector Switch ................ 240-15-4 Assemble Axle Housing Assembly .... 50-15-13
Thermo-Start Components ........... 240-15-2 Disassemble ...................... 50-15-5
Thermo-Start Control Module ......... 240-15-2 Install ........................... 50-15-16
Time Delay Control (TDG) Module ..... 240-15-4 Install Brake Camshaft Assembly ..... 50-15-14
Transmission Neutral Start Switch ..... 240-15-1 Install Planetary Gear Assembly ...... 50-15-14
Warning Light Flasher Element. ....... 240-15-6 Other Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-15-1
Water Temperature Sender. .......... 240-15-5 Remove .......................... 50-15-2
Electrical Schematics Diagrams Remove Axle Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-15-10
655,755/756,855/856, and 955 ...... 240-15-19 Remove Brake Camshaft Assembly ... 50-15-10
Electrical System Remove Oil Seal Wear Sleeve/Cover .. 50-15-11
Diagnosis ........................ 240-10-1 Repair Axle Housing Assembly ....... 50-15-11
Electrical System Operation Checkout .. 240-05-1 Repair Planetary Gear Assembly ...... 50-15-6
Engine Service Equipment and Tools ......... 50-15-1
Oil, Diesel, North American ............ 10-20-3 Specifications ...................... 50-15-2
Oil, Diesel, Europe .................. 10-20-4 Flow Divider and SCV's
Preheat Contrl. Test-655/755/756 ..... 240-10-9 Install ............................ 70-10-9
Preheat Contrl. Test-855/856/955 ..... 240-10-9 Other Material ..................... 70-10-1
Preheat Lamp Short Circuit Test. ...... 240-10-8 Remove. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-10-1
Engine Coolant. . . . . . . . . .. 10-20-15, 10-20-16 Repair Float Section ................ 70-10-5
Engine Coolant Repair Priority Flow Divider ........... 70-10-3
Check ........................... 220-05-1 Repair Proportional Flow DiVider ....... 70-10-4
Engine Idle Speed Repair Regenerative Section .......... 70-10-5
Check ........................... 220-05-4 Repair System Relief Valve ........... 70-10-3
Engine Lubrication Foot Control
Check ........................... 220-05-1 Linkage Operation ................. 250-15-7
Engine Oil Pressure Foot Control Pedal Lockout Check .... 210-05-1
Check ........................... 220-05-4 Fuel Gauge
Test ............................. 220-10-8 Check................... 210-05-2, 240-05-2
Engine Operating Empty Test. ..................... 240-10-11
Check ........................... 220-10-1 Full Test ........................ 240-10-10

Index-3
 Index

Page Page

Fuel Gauge Sender Hydraulic Pump Continued

Bench test ....................... 240-10-11 Remove .......................... 70-05-2
In-Tank Test ...................... 240-10-11 Repair Suction Screen ............... 70-05-7
Fuel Injection Pump Timing Service Equipment and Tools .......... 70-05-1
655 and 755/756 Tractors. . . . . . . . . . . 220-10-6 Specifications ...................... 70-05-1
855/856 and 955 Tractors. . . . . . . . . . . 220-10-6 Hydraulic Schematic
Fuel Injection System With Location Drawings ............ 270-15-12
Bleed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220-10-8 655, 755/756, 855/856, and 955 ...... 270-15-8
Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Hydraulic System
Ground Circuit Test ............... 240-10-16 Bleed Procedure ........... 50-05-28,70-05-8
Hold-In Test ..................... 240-10-16 Fill Reservoir ..................... 50-10-69
Pull-In Test. ..................... 240-10-16 Hydraulic Troubleshooting
Test ........................... 240-10-15 Aux. Hydraulics Fail/Operate Slowly ... 270-05-4
Voltage Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10-16 Hydraulic Functions are Slow ......... 270-05-2
655 and 755/756 Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10-17 Hydraulic Oil Overheats ............. 270-05-2
855/856 and 955 Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10-17 Hydraulic Pump Noise .............. 270-05-1
Fuel Specifications .......... 10-20-1, 10-20-2 Hydraulic Pump Leaks .............. 270-05-4
Fuel System No Hydraulic Func.lPower St. Works ... 270-05-3
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220-05-3 No Hydraulic Functions/No Power St. .. 270-05-2
Fuel Tank Rockshaft Hitch Will Not Lift. ......... 270-05-3
Remove and Install ................. 30-10-1 SCV's Fail/Function Erratically ........ 270-05-3
Fuel Tank Tube and Sender No Hydraulic System Pressure ....... 270-05-4
Remove and Install ................. 30-15-1 Hydraulic Troubleshooting Chart ...... 270-05-1
Fuel Transfer Pump HydrauliclTransmission Oil
Remove and Install ................. 30-05-1 North American .................... 10-20-7
HydrauliclTransmission Oil
Europe ........................... 10-20-8
G Hydrostatic Transmission
Assemble ........................ 50-05-20
Gear Case Bleed Procedure ........... 50-05-28,70-05-8
Grease -North American ............ 10-20-11 Cross-Section View ................ 50-05-10
Grease -Europe ................. 10-20-12 Cross-Section View-Center Section .. 50-05-18
Oil -North American ............... 10-20-7 Disassemble ...................... 50-05-11
Oil- Europe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 10-20-8 Forward Operation ................. 250-15-5
Oil MFWD -North American ......... 10-20-9 Flush Procedure ................... 50-05-28
Oil MFWD- Europe ............... 10-20-10 General Operation ................. 250-15-2
German Rear Hitch Install ................... 50-05-25, 50-10-65
Exploded View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-25-2 Install Drive Shaft ................... 50-05-4
Neutral Operation .................. 250-15-4
Oil-North American ................ 10-20-7
H
Oil-Europe ....................... 10-20-8
Hydraulic Remove .......................... 50-05-6
Pump Flow Test ................... 270-10-1 Remove Drive Shaft ................. 50-05-3
Pump/ Flow Control Operation ....... 270-15-1 Remove/Install Charge Pump ......... 50-05-5
Hydraulic Hoses Remove/Install Sheet Metal Panels ..... 50-05-2
Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-20-1 Reverse Operation ................. 250-15-6
Hydraulic Oil Service Procedure ................. 50-05-28
Warm-Up Procedure ............... 250-10-1
Warm-Up Procedure ............... 260-10-1
Hydraulic Pump
Assemble ......................... 70-05-5
Disassemble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-05-4
Install ............................ 70-05-7

Index-4
 Index

Page Page

M
Inch Torque Values .................... 10-15-2 Master/Park Brake Lock
Install Check........................... 210-05-6
Brake linkage ...................... 60-15-6 Master/Park Brake Pedal
Final Drives ....................... 50-15-16 Travel Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260-05-1
Final Drives Brake Camshaft Assm'y ... 50-15-14 Mechanical Front Wheel Drive-MFWD
Final Drives Planetary Gear Assm'y .... 50-15-14 Check........................... 210-05-9
Flow Divider and SCV's .............. 70-10-9 Mechanical Fuel Pump Flow/Pressure
Hydraulic Pump .................... 70-05-7 Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220-10-5
Hydrostatic Transmission ............ 50-10-65 Metric torque values .................. 10-15-1
Operators Seat-Early European ....... 80-15-8 MFWD
Operators Seat-North American ....... 80-15-2 Adjust Front Axle End-Play .......... 50-20-32
Rear Wheels ...................... 50-10-69 Adjust Front Axle Toe-In ............ 50-20-32
Rockshaft Housing ................. 70-15-14 Assemble Axle Housings ........... 50-20-30
Rockshaft Piston .................... 70-15-7 Assemble Differential. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-20-26
Rockshaft Piston Cover .............. 70-15-5 Assemble Final Drive Case. . . . . . . . . . . 50-20-6
ROPS ........................... 50-10-68 Assemble Spindle Gear Case ........ 50-20-18
Speed Control linkage ............... 50-30-7 Cross-Section View ................ 50-20-16
Standard Front Axle ................. 60-05-3 Cutaway View-Spindle Gear Case .... 50-20-9
Std. Fr. Axle Spindle Shaft/Hub ........ 60-05-6 Disassemble Diff. Input Housing ...... 50-20-23
Std. Fr. Axle Wheel Bearings .......... 60-05-8 Disassemble Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-20-24
Steering Valve ..................... 60-10-22 Disassemble Final Drive Case ......... 50-20-4
Trans. Diff. Drive Shaft Assembly ...... 50-10-51 Disassemble Spindle Gear Case ...... 50-20-10
Trans. Hi/Lo Reduction Shaft Assembly .50-10-52 linkage Check .................... 250-05-4
Trans. Mid PTO Transf. Gear Assembly .50-10-51 Operation ....................... 250-15-17
Transaxle ........................ 50-10-67 Other Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-20-1
Transaxle Final Drive Axle Assm'y ..... 50-10-63 MFWDAxle
Transaxle Front Case Cover Assm'y ... 50-10-53 Remove. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-20-2
Transaxle linkage .................. 50-10-67 MFWD Drive Shaft
Transaxle MFWD Gear Case Assembly .50-10-55 Remove/Install. .................... 50-05-4
Transaxle Mid PTO Shaft Assembly .... 50-10-52
Transaxle Oil Supply System ......... 50-10-62
Transaxle PTO Clutch Assemblies ..... 50-10-50 o
Transaxle PTO Inertia Brake Assembly .50-10-61
Transaxle PTO Valve Assemblies ...... 50-10-60 Oil
Transaxle Rear Case Cover Assembly .. 50-10-59 Engine, Diesel, Break In
Transaxle Rear PTO Shaft Assembly ... 50-10-59 North American . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20-5
Instrument Panel Lamps Engine, Diesel, Break In
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210-05-1, 240~05-1 Europe ........................... 10-20-6
Engine, Diesel, North American ........ 10-20-3
Engine, Diesel, Europe .............. 10-20-4
L Gear Case, MFWD, North American .... 10-20-9
Gear Case, MFWD, Europe .......... 10-20-10
Left and Right Turn Brakes HydrauliclTransmission-
Check ........................... 210-05-7 North American . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20-7
lift Rod Europe ........................... 10-20-8
Adjustment ........................ 80-30-1 Lubricants-North American ......... 10-20-13
light Switch Lubricants-Europe ................ 10-20-14
Check ........................... 210-05-2 Oil Cooler
Test ............................ 240-10-12 Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-05-1
lighting Circuit Remove and Install ................. 20-10-1
Check ........................... 240-05-2
No-lights-Work Test ............... 240-10-12

Index-5
 Index

Page Page

Oil Pressure Lamp PTa Safety Start

Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10-5 Check ................... 210-05-2, 240-05-3
Operator's Seat PTO/ Seat Safety Switch
Adjust Operator's Height- Check ........................... 210-05-3
European ........................ 80-15-18 PTO/ Seat Switch
Adjust Operator's Weight- Check ........................... 240-05-3
European ....................... 80-15-12 PTO/ Seat Switch Bypass
Adjust -European . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80-15-18 Check ................... 210-05-4, 240-05-4
Exploded View-European ........... 80-15-4
Install-Early European .............. 80-15-8 R
Remove-Early European ............ 80-15-6
Install-North American ............. 80-15-2 Radiator
Remove-North American .. . . . . . . . . . 80-15-1 Radiator Cap Test ................. 220-10-6
Other Material Remove and Install ................. 20-15-2
Final Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-15-1 Radiator Screen
Flow Divider and SCV's. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-10-1 Check ........................... 220-05-2
MFWD ........................... 50-20-1 Radiator Specifications .............. 20-15-1
Steering Valve ..................... 60-10-1 Rear Hitch-German
Transaxle ......................... 50-10-2 Exploded View ..................... 80-25-2
Rear Wheels
p Install ........................... 50-10-69
Removal Preparations
Power Steering Transaxle ......................... 50-10-5
Check .......................... 210-05-6 Remove
Priority Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-05-6 Brake Linkage ..................... 60-15-1
Power Train Drive Test F. D.'s Oil Seal Wear Sleeve/Cover .... 50-15-11
Low PowerlWheels Stall Too Easily ... 250-10-4 Final Drives ....................... 50-15-2
Movement In One Direction Only ..... 250-10-3 Final Drives Axle Shafts ............. 50-15-10
No Movement In Either Direction . . . . . 250-10-3 Final Drives Brake Camshaft Assm'y ... 50-15-10
Tractor Will Not Reach Full Speed . . . . 250-10-4 Flow Divider and SCV's .............. 70-10-1
Transmission Operating Hot . . . . . . . . . 250-10-5 Hydraulic Pump .................... 70-05-2
Power Train Gears and Shafts Hydrostatic Transmission ............. 50-10-6
Exploded View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-25-2 MFWD Axle ....................... 50-20-2
Priority Power Steering Operators Seat-Early European ...... 80-15-6
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210-05-6 Operators Seat-North American ...... 80-15-1
PTa Rockshaft Control Valve ............. 70-15-16
Brake Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-10-61 Rockshaft Housing .................. 70-15-7
Brake Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-05-4 Rockshaft Piston ................... 70-15-6
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-05-3 Rockshaft Piston Cover .............. 70-15-3
Indicator Lamp Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-10-14 Speed Control Linkage ............... 50-30-1
Linkage Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-05-2 Standard Front Axle ................. 60-05-2
Magnet Voltage Test .............. 240-10-14 Std. Fr. Axle Spindle Shaft/Hub ........ 60-05-4
Safety Start Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10-12 Std. Fr. Axle Wheel Bearings .......... 60-05-7
Selector Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10-15 Steering Valve ..................... 60-10-3
System Operation ................. 270-15-6 Transaxle ......................... 50-10-8
PTa Brake Transaxle Final Drive Axles ........... 50-10-9
Check .......................... 210-05-5 Transaxle Front Gear Case Cover .... 50-10-26
PTa Clutch Transaxle Gear Shaft Assembles ...... 50-10-27
Cross-Section View ................ 50-10-47 Repair
Engagement Pressure Test .......... 270-10-3 Brake Disks ...................... 60-15-11
PTa Lever/PTa Selector Lever Final Drives Axle Housing Assembly ... 50-15-11
Adjust .......................... 250-10-8 Final Drives Planetary Gear Assm'y .... 50-15-6
PTa Operation Flow Divider/SCV's Float Section ...... 70-10-5
Check .......................... 210-05-4 Flow Divider/SCV's Priority Flow Div..... 70-10-3

Index-6
 Index

Page Page

Repair Continued Service Equipment and Tools ......... 70-15-1

Flow Divider/SCV's Prop. Flow Div. . .... 70-10-4 Specifications ...................... 70-15-2
Flow Divider/SCV's Regenerative Sect. .. 70-10-5 Stop Valve Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-05-6
Flow Divider/SCV's Sys. Relief Valve. . .. 70-10-3 Valve Adjust ...................... 270-10-4
Hydraulic Hoses .................... 70-20-1 Rockshaft Stop Valve
Hydraulic Pump Suction Screen ........ 70-05-7 Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 0-05-11
Rockshaft Housing and Components ... 70-15-11 ROPS
Rockshaft Implement Relief Valve ...... 70-15-5 Install ........................... 50-10-68
Rockshaft Lowering Check Valve ....... 70-15-3
Rockshaft Stop Valve ................ 70-15-4
Spindle Shaft Bushing ............... 60-05-5 s
Std. Fr. Axle Spindle Bearing/Race ...... 60-05-6
Trans. Diff. Drive Shaft Assembly ...... 50-10-50 Seat
Trans. Mid PTO Transf. Gear Assembly .50-10-35 Lockout Rod Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250-05-6
Trans. Range Shifter Shaft O-ring ..... 50-10-38 Seat Switch
Transaxle Diff. Lock Lever Assm'y ..... 50-10-36 PTO By-Pass (Override) Check ....... 250-05-3
Transaxle Differential Assm'y ......... 50-10-20 Test ........................... 240-10-13
Transaxle Main PTO Shaft Assembly ... 50-10-33 SeaVControl Pedals Lockout Rod
Transaxle MFWD Gear Case Assembly .50-10-23 Adjust. ......................... 250-10-10
Transaxle Mid PTO Shaft Assembly .... 50-10-34 Selective Control Valve
Transaxle Oil Supply System ......... 50-10-14 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-05-5
Transaxle PTO Clutch Assembly ...... 50-10-43 Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-15-5
Transaxle PTO Inertia Brake ......... 50-10-15 Selective Control Valve-SCV
Transaxle PTO Reduct. Shaft Assm'y ... 50-10-32 Check .......................... 210-05-10
Transaxle PTO Shift Fork Assembly .... 50-10-29 Serial Number Locations ............. 10-25-1
Transaxle PTO Valves ............... 50-10-17 Service Equipment and Tools
Transaxle Range Shift Fork Assm'y .... 50-10-42 Alternator ......................... 40-05-1
Transaxle Rear PTO Shaft Assm'y ..... 50-10-19 Brake Linkage ..................... 60-15-1
Transaxle Reduction Shaft Assm'y ..... 50-10-35 Final Drives ....................... 50-15-1
3-Point Hitch Adjustable Lift Link ....... 80-30-1 Hydraulic Pump .................... 70-05-1
3-Point Hitch Center Lift Link .......... 80-30-1 Hydrostatic Transmission ............ 50-05-1
Replace MFWD ........................... 50-20-2
Transaxle Seals .................... 50-10-5 Radiator ......................... 20-15-1
Rockshaft Rockshaft. ........................ 70-15-1
Adjust Control Valve ................ 70-15-23 Standard Front Axle ................ 60-05-1
Assemble Control Valve ............. 70-15-19 Steering Valve ..................... 60-10-1
Assemble Housing ................. 70-15-12 Transaxle ......................... 50-10-1
Check ................. 210-05-10,270-05-5 Service Parts Kits
Disassemble Control Valve ........... 70-15-17 Air Cleaner ........................ 30-20-1
Disassemble Housing ............... 70-15-10 Hydrostatic Transmission ............ 50-05-1
Free Play Check ................... 270-05-5 Radiator ......................... 20-15-1
Install Housing .................... 70-15-14 Speed Control Linkage .............. 50-30-1
Install Piston ....................... 70-15-7 Steering Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-10-2
Install Piston Cover .................. 70-15-5 Transaxle ......................... 50-10-2
Leakage Test. ..................... 270-10-4 Service Procedure-Hydrostatic
Operation ........................ 270-15-2 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-05-28
Remove Control Valve .............. 70-15-16 Sheet Metal-Hydrostatic
Remove Housing ................... 70-15-7 Transmission ...................... 50-05-2
Remove Piston ..................... 70-15-6 Slow/Fast Idle
Remove Piston Cover ................ 70-15-3 Adjust. .......................... 220-10-7
Repair Housing and Components ...... 70-15-11 Specifications
Repair Implement Relief Valve ......... 70-15-5 Air Cleaner. ....................... 30-20-1
Repair Lowering Check Valve .......... 70-15-3 Alternator ......................... 40-05-1
Repair Stop Valve ................... 70-15-4 Brake Disk Thickness .............. 60-15-11

Index-7
 Index

Page Page

Specifications Continued Speed Control Linkage

Brake Linkage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-15-1 Install ............................ 50-30-7
Brake Separator ................... 60-15-11 Remove .............. , ........... 50-30-1
Electrical Wire Soldering ............. 40-10-1 Specifications ...................... 50-30-1
Final Drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-15-2 3-Dimensional View ................. 50-30-6
Fuel, North American ............... 10-20-1 Standard Front Axle
Fuel, Europe ...................... 10-20-2 Adjust Axle End-Play ................ 60-05-4
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 10-10-1 Adjust Toe-In ...................... 60-05-9
Hydraulic Pump .................... 70-05-1 Essential Tools ..................... 60-05-1
Hydro Bronze Bushing ..... . . . . . . . . . 50-05-9 Install ............................ 60-05-3
Hydro Needle Bearing Seating . . . . . . . 50-05-23 Install Spindle Shaft/Hub ............. 60-05-6
Hydrostatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-05-2 Install Wheel Bearings ............... 60-05-8
Implement Relief Valve Spring ........ 70-15-5 Remove .......................... 60-05-2
Lowering Check Valve Spring. . . . . . . . . 70-15-4 Remove Spindle Shaft and Hub ........ 60-05-4
Maximum Brush Length-35 Amp Alt. .. 40-05-1 Remove Wheel Bearings ............. 60-05-7
Maximum Brush Length-40 Amp Alt. . . 40-05-1 Repair Spindle Bearing and Race ...... 60-05-6
MFWD .......................... 50-20-1 Repair Spindle Shaft Bushing ......... 60-05-5
MFWD Differential Backlash ......... 50-20-28 Service Equipment and Tools .......... 60-05-1
MFWD Front Axle End-Play ......... 50-20-32 Specifications ...................... 60-05-2
MFWD Front Axle Toe-In ............ 50-20-32 Starter
Minimum Brush Length-35 Amp Alt. ... 40-05-1 AMP Draw Test .................. 240-10-17
Minimum Brush Length-40 Amp Alt. . . . 40-05-1 Circuit Test ...................... 240-10-12
Neutral Return Spring Length. 50-05-27, 50-30-9 No Load Test-AMP Draw .......... 240-10-19
Planetary Carrier End Play . . . . . . . . . . . 50-15-4 No Load Test-RPM .............. 240-10-18
Planetary Gear Clearance-955. . . . . . . 50-15-9 No Load Test-Running ............ 240-10-18
Primary Air Cleaner Element Vacuum ... 30-20-2 Starting Circuit
Priority Flow Divider Spring ........... 70-10-4 Check ................... 210-05-3, 240-05-3
PTO Clutch Cylinder/Bottom Plate . . . . 50-10-45 Steering
PTO Clutch Disk/Plate Thickness ..... 50-10-46 Operation ............ , ........... 260-15-2
PTO Clutch Piston Return Spring ..... 50-10-46 Relief Valve Pressure Test ........... 260-10-1
PTO Clutch Top Plate Thickness ...... 50-10-45 System Check .................... 260-05-1
Radiator ................ . . . . . . . .. 20-15-2 System Leakage Test ............... 260-10-2
Radiator-To-Fan Blade Valve Leakage Test ................ 260-10-2
Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-15-1, 220-10-9 Valve Operation ................... 270-15-4
Rockshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-15-2 Steering Valve
Rockshaft Bushings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-15-12 Assemble ........................ 60-10-13
Rockshaft Piston and Cylinder . . . . . . . . 70-15-6 Assemble Control Valve Section ...... 60-10-19
Rockshaft Splined Sleeves ........... 70-15-11 Assemble Metering Section .......... 60-10-14
Secondary Air Cleaner Vacuum 30-20-2, 30-20-4 Cross-Section View ................ 60-10-12
Speed Control Bronze Bushing. . . . . . . . 50-30-4 Disassemble ....................... 60-10-4
Speed Control Bushing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-30-7 Disassemble Steering Tube Section ... 60-10-10
Speed Control Linkage .............. 50-30-1 Fabricated Tools .................... 60-10-1
Standard Front Axle . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 60-05-2 Install ........................... 60-10-22
Standard Front Axle End-Play. . . . . . . . . 60-05-4 Metering Section, Disassemble ........ 60-10-7
Steering Tube Bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60-10-13 Other Material ..................... 60-1 0-1
Steering Valve ..................... 60-10-2 Remove .......................... 60-10-3
Steering Valve Drive Plate Shim ...... 60-10-16 Service Equipment and Tools .......... 60-10~1
Steering Valve Rotor-To-Stator ........ 60-10-9 Storage
Stop Valve Spring .................. 70-15-4 Diesel Fuel, North American .......... 10-20-1
System Relief Valve Spring ........... 70-10-3 Diesel Fuel, Europe ................. 10-20-2
T ransaxle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-1 0-3
Transaxle Diff. Ring Gear Backlash ... 50-10-58
Transaxle PTO Inertia Brake Spring ... 50-10-16

Index-8
 Index

Page Page

Symptoms Coolant Temp. Lamp Short Circuit. .... 240-10-9

Abnormal Engine Noise ............. 220-10-3 Cooling System ................... 220-10-6
Diesel Fuel In Crankcase ............ 220-10-4 Cylinder Compression Pressure ...... 220-10-7
Engine Does Not Develop Full Power... 220-10-2 Discharge Lamp Short Circuit ........ 240-10-6
Engine Misses .................... 220-10-2 Electric Fuel Pump Flow/Pressure ..... 220-10-5
Engine Noise, Loud Knock or Vibration .220-10-3 Engine Oil Pressure ................ 220-10-8
Engine Overheats .................. 220-10-3 Engine Preheat Contrl.-655/755/756 .. 240-10-9
Engine Rpm Will Not Lower .......... 220-10-4 Engine Preheat Contrl.-855/856/955 .. 240-10-9
Engine Runs Cold .................. 220-10-3 Engine Preheat Lamp Short Circuit. ... 240-10-8
Engine Runs Fine For An Hour, Fuel Gauge Empty ................ 240-10-11
Loses Power Then Stops ............ 220-10-4 Fuel Gauge Full .................. 240-10-10
Engine Starts But Then Stops Fuel Gauge Sender-Bench ........ 240-10-11
When Key Is Released .............. 220-10-3 Fuel Gauge Sender-In-Tank ....... 240-10-11
Engine Surges/Stalls Frequently ....... 220-10-2 Fuel Shutoff Solenoid ............. 240-10-15
Engine Will Not Accelerate ........... 220-10-3 Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Grd. Cir....... 240-10-16
Engine Will Not Start/Starts Hard ...... 220-10-2 Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Hold-In ....... 240-10-16
Excessive Black/G ray Exhaust Smoke .. 220-10-3 Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Pull-In ........ 240-10-16
Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Releases Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Voltage. . . . . . . 240-10-16
When Engine Warms Up ............ 220-10-4 Hydraulic Pump Flow .............. 270-10-1
High Oil Pressure .................. 220-10-3 Light Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10-12
Idle Erratic, Can't Keep Air Bled Lighting Circuit-No-Lights-Work .... 240-10-12
From Injection Lines ............... 220-10-4 Mechanical Fuel Pump Flow/Pressure. 220-10-5
Low Oil Pressure .................. 220-10-3 Oil Pressure Lamp ................. 240-10-5
No Fast Idle Speed ................. 220-10-3 PTO Clutch Engagement. . . . . . . . . . . . 270-10-3
Oil In Coolant or Coolant In Oil ........ 220-10-3 PTO Indicator Lamp ............... 240-10-15
Slow Acceleration .................. 220-10-3 PTO Magnet Voltage .............. 240-10-14
Blue Exhaust Smoke ............... 220-10-4 PTO Safety Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240-10-13
White Exhaust Smoke .............. 220-10-3 PTO Selector Switch .............. 240-10-15
White Smoke Coming From Radiator Cap ..................... 220-10-6
Crankcase Breather ................ 220-10-4 Rockshaft Leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270-10-4
System Grounds Seat Switch ..................... 240-10-13
Check ........................... 240-10-2 Starter AMP Draw ................ 240-10-17
System Relief Valve W/SCV Starter Circuit ................... 240-10-12
Pressure Test ..................... 270-10-2 Starter No Load -AMP Draw ....... 240-10-19
System Relief Valve WO/SCV Starter No Load-RPM ............ 240-10-18
Pressure Test ..................... 270-10-1 Starter No Load-Running ......... 240-10-18
Steering Relief Valve Pressure ....... 260-10-1
Steering System Leakage ........... 260-10-2
T Steering Valve Leakage ............ 260-10-2
System Relief Valve
Tachometer and Idle Speed WO/SCV Pressure ................. 270-10-1
Check ........................... 210-05-3 System Relief Valve
TDC W/SCV Pressure .................. 270-10-2
Input Voltage Test ................. 240-10-14 TDC Input Voltage ................ 240-10-14
TDC Module TDC Module Delay Function ........ 240-10-13
Delay Function Test ............... 240-10-13 TDC Module PTO ................ 240-10-14
PTO Test. ... .' ................... 240-10-14 Trans. Relief Valve High Pressure ..... 270-10-7
Test Transaxle Lube Pressure ............ 270-10-3
Alt. Ground Test ................... 240-10-6 Transmission Charge Pump Flow ..... 250-10-6
Alt. Regulated Current Output ........ 240-10-6 Transmission Charge Pump Pressure .. 250-10-5
Battery .......................... 240-10-2 Transmission Neutral Start ......... 240-10-10
Battery Load ...................... 240-10-4 Unreg'd Current Output-35 Amp Alt. .. 240-10-7
Battery Voltage .................... 240-10-3 Unreg'd Current Output-40 Amp Alt. .. 240-10-8

Index-9
 Index

Page Page

Three-Point Hitch Torque Specifications

Repair Adjustable Lift Link ............ 80-30-1 Ring Gear-Final Drives . ........... 50-15-15
Repair Center Lift Link ............... 80-30-1 Rockshaft Control Valve ..... 70-15-13, 7.0-15-21
Throttle Cable Rockshaft Control Valve Cover ....... 70-15-13
Adjust .......................... 220-10-4 Rockshaft Control Valve Plate ........ 70-15-20
Throttle Lever Rockshaft Fender Bracket ........... 70-15-22
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220-05-2 Rockshaft Flow DividerISCV's ........ 70-15-13
Tie Rod Length, Speed Control ......... 50-30-8 Rockshaft Housing ................. 70-15-14
Torque Specifications Rockshaft Lift Arms ................ 70-15-13
Suction Tube Adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-05-7 Rockshaft Piston Cover . ..... 70-15-6, 70-15-13
Castle Nuts ............... 50-05-25,60-05-7 ROPS Cap Screw ......... 50-10-68, 50-15-18
Diff. Carrier Bearing ................ 50-10-57 Speed Control Lever ................ 50-30-9
Differential Retaining Plate .......... 50-10-51 Standard Front Axle ................. 60-05-3
European Roll-Gard ................ 80-20-2 Steering Valve Metering Assembly ..... 60-10-17
Filter Housing-Transaxle. . . . . . . . . . . 50-10-62 Steering Valve Port Cover ........... 60-10-22
Final Drive Axle Assembly ........... 50-10-64 Steering Wheel Nut ................ 60-10-22
Final Drive Seal Cover . ............ 50-15-13 System Relief Valve Plug ............. 70-10-3
Final Drives ..................... 50-15-17 System Relief Valve Retainer .......... 70-10-3
Flow Divider and SCV's ............. 70-10-10 Tie Rod Nuts ...................... 60-05-9
Front Wheels ...................... 60-05-7 Transaxle Differential Ring Gear ...... 50-10-23
German Rear Hitch ................. 80-25-2 Transaxle Front Case Cover ......... 50-10-54
Hydraulic Line Connectors .......... 70-10-10 Transaxle Mounting Cap Screw ....... 50-10-65
Hydraulic Line Fittings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-10-67 Torque Values
Hydraulic Pump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-05-7 Hydraulic O-Ring Boss Seal (ORBS) .... 10-15-4
Hydrostatic Center Section . . . . . . . . . . 50-05-24 Hydraulic O-Ring Face Seal (ORFS) .... 10-15-3
Hydrostatic Charge Inlet Fitting ....... 50-05-27 Inch ............................. 10-15-2
Hydrostatic Charge Pump Cap Screw ... 50-05-6 Metric ............................ 10-15-1
Hydrostatic End Cap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-05-20 Tractor
Hydrostatic Mounting Drive Check ...................... 260-05-2
Cap Screw ............... 50-05-26, 50-10-66 Transaxle
Hydrostatic Output Drive Gear ....... 50-05-25 Adjust Backlash-Ditt. Assembly ...... 50-10-56
Hydrostatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 50-05-25 Assemble PTO Clutch .............. 50-10-47
Implement Relief Valve .............. 70-15-5 Cross-Section View ................ 50-10-12
Lowering Check Valve Plug. . . . . . . . . . . 70-15-4 Differential Lock Check ............. 250-05-2
Main Hydraulic Pump .............. 50-10-62 Differential Lock Pedal Adjust ........ 250-10-8
MFWD Axle Pivot Pin .............. 50-20-32 Disconnect Linkage ................. 50-10-6
MFWD Bearing Retainer ............ 50-20-28 Fabricated Tools .................... 50-10-1
MFWD Differential Axle ............ 50-20-30 HilLo Reduction Shaft Assembly ...... 50-10-52
MFWD Differential Input Cover . ...... 50-20-29 Install ........................... 50-10-65
MFWD Final Drive Cover ............ 50-20-8 Install Diff. Drive Shaft Assembly ...... 50-10-51
MFWD Front Wheels ............... 50-20-31 Install Final Drive Axle Assm'y ........ 50-10-63
MFWD Gear Case Cover-Transaxle .. 50-10-55 Install Front Case Cover Assm'y ...... 50-10-53
MFWD Power Steering Cylinder Nuts .. 50-20-31 Install Linkage .................... 50-10-67
MFWD Tie Rod Castle Nut .......... 50-20-30 Install MFWD Gear Case Assembly .... 50-10-55
MFWD Tie Rod Nut. ............... 50-20-33 Install Mid PTO Shaft Assembly ....... 50-10-52
Priority Flow Divider Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-10-4 Install Oil Supply System ............ 50-10-62
Proportional Flow Divider Plug ........ 70-10-5 Install PTO Clutch Assemblies ........ 50-10-50
PTO Inertia Brake Cover . ........... 50-10-61 Install PTO Inertia Brake Assembly .... 50-10-61
PTO Shield-Transaxle. . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-10-63 Install PTO Valve Assemblies ........ 50-10-60
PTO Valves Cover-Transaxle . . . . . . . 50-10-60 Install Rear Case Cover Assembly .... 50-10-59
PTO Valves Line Fitting. . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-10-65 Install Rear PTO Shaft Assembly ...... 50-10-59
Rear Case Cover-Transaxle ........ 50-10-60 Lube Pressure Test ................ 270-10-3
Rear PTO Shield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70-10-7 Mid PTO Transfer Gear Assembly ..... 50-10-52
Rear Wheel Lug Nut ....... 50-10-69,50-15-18

Index-10
 Index

Page Page

Transaxle Continued
Operation ....................... 250-15-16
w
Other Materials ..................... 50-10-2 Warm-Up Procedure
Removal Preparations ............... 50-10-5 Hydraulic Oil ..................... 260-10-1
Remove .......................... 50-10-8
Remove Final Drive Axles ............ 50-10-9
Remove Front Gear Case Cover ...... 50-10-26
Remove Gear Shaft Assembles ....... 50-10-27
Diff. Drive Shaft Assembly ........... 50-10-50
Diff. Lock Lever Assembly ........... 50-10-36
Differential Assembly ............... 50-10-20
Repair Main PTO Shaft Assembly ..... 50-10-33
MFWD Gear Case Assembly ......... 50-10-23
Repair Mid PTO Shaft Assembly ...... 50-10-34
Repair Mid PTO Transf. Gear Assm'y ... 50-10-35
Repair Oil Supply System ............ 50-10-14
Repair PTO Clutch Assembly ......... 50-10-43
Repair PTO Inertia Brake ............ 50-10-15
Repair PTO Reduct. Shaft Assembly ... 50-10-32
Repair PTO Shift Fork Assembly ...... 50-10-29
Repair PTO Valves ................. 50-10-17
Repair Range Shift Fork Assembly ..... 50-10-42
Repair Range Shifter Shaft O-Ring ..... 50-10-38
Repair Rear PTO Shaft Assembly ..... 50-10-19
Repair Reduction Shaft Assembly ..... 50-10-35
Replace Seals ...................... 50-10-5
Service Equipment and Tools .......... 50-10-1
Specifications ...................... 50-10-3
Two-Speed Axle Lever Adjust. ........ 250-10-9
Transmission
Charge Pump Flow ................. 250-10-6
Charge Pump Pressure ............. 250-10-5
Drive Check ...................... 250-05-2
Neutral Adjust ..................... 250-10-1
Neutral Check ..................... 250-05-1
Neutral Return Check ............... 250-05-1
Neutral Return Spring Adjust ......... 250-10-2
Neutral Start Test .... , ............ 240-10-10
Relief Valve High Pressure Test ....... 250-10-7
Transmission Drive
Check ........................... 210-05-7
Transmission Neutral
Check ........................... 210-05-7
Transmission Neutral Return
Check ........................... 210-05-7
TransmissionlTransaxle
Oil Leak Check .................... 250-05-1
Turn Brake Pedals
Adjust Freeplay .................... 260-10-8
Travel Check ...................... 260-05-1
Two-Speed Axle
Check ........................... 210-05-9
Linkage Check .................... 250-05-4

Index-11
 Index

NOTES

Index-12